This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned

by Google as part of a project

to make the worlds books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge thats often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this books long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Googles system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google watermark you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we cant offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a books appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Googles mission is to organize the worlds information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the worlds books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http://books.google.com/

||

||

A.

|-

==

__

||

||
|| || ||

. .
-

->

"

|
-

|
-

--

University of California
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY

405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388

Return this material to the library
from which it was borrowed.

|** * * * * *
>

#99

't | W: * * * ...'
| Lu - U O'<

l':

THE PETTY OFFICER'S

DRILL BOOK
UNITED STATES NAVY

Prepared under the Direction of the Bureau of Navigation

BY

IEUT.-COMDR. WILLIAM F. FULLAM, U.S.N.

PRICE, $1.25

NAVAL INSTITUTE, ANNAPOLIS, MD.

I902

CoPYRIGHT, 1902, BY

LIEUT. E. L. BEACH, U. S. N.
Sec. and Treas. U. S. Naval Institute

&#e Boro Q3aftimore (press

THE FRIEDENWALID CoMPANY

BALTIMORE, MD., U. S. A.

V
|23

f*

NAVY DEPARTMENT, Washington, September 16, 1902.

The Petty Officer's Drill Book, compiled by Lieutenant
Commander William F. Fullam, U. S. Navy, under the direc
tion of the Bureau of Navigation, and published by the Naval
lnstitute, is issued to the service.
It is directed that all petty officers shall familiarize them
selves with these regulations without delay.
It is desirable that petty officers be utilized as instructors,
and the Department therefore directs that all commissioned
officers shall encourage the petty officers to qualify themselves,
and shall require them to assume a greater degree of respon
sibility and authority over the men under their charge, and to
actively exercise such authority in the instruction and drilling
of enlisted men afloat and ashore.

WILLIAM H. MOODY,
Secretary.

1-2S245

PREFACE
This Drill Book is designed specially for the use and informa
tion of petty officers and enlisted men. It is a compilation,
the different parts of which are taken from authorized Drill
Regulations and text-books.

Part I.

Landing Force and Drill Regulations for Infantry.

From the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy.

Part II. Drill Regulations for Artillery; School of Section.
From the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy.

Part III. Gun and Torpedo Drills and Instructions for Care
and Handling; Small Arms.

From Gun and Torpedo Drills,

U. S. Navy, originally prepared by Lieutenant E. W. Eberle,

U. S. Navy. The chapter on torpedoes has been revised and
corrected to date by Lieutenant George W. Williams, U. S.

Navy, Torpedo Station, Newport.

Part IV. Firing Regulations and Target Practice for Small
Arms; prepared by Lieutenant-Commander Albert P. Niblack,

U.S. Navy, and taken partly from the Firing Regulations, U. S.

Army. Also Gunnery Instructions, U. S. Navy.
Part W. Arm and Away Boats; from Hand Book of In
fantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy.

Oars and Sail and in a Surf.

Handling Boats under

Lowering and Hoisting; from

knight's Seamanship, by permission of D. Van Nostrand Co.,

Dublishers, New York City.
Part VI. I. Bayonet Exercise; from Hand Book of In

antry and Artillery, U. S. Navy. 2. Sword Exercise; from

Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy. 3. Phys

cal Drills with and without Arms; from Chaplain W. 9.

Holways Manual of Physical Drill.
5

PREFACE.

Owing to the scope of this book, it was necessary to confine

it to matters bearing more or less directly upon drills and
exercises.

For convenience of reference to the Hand Book, and to

Gun and Torpedo Drills, all paragraphs, plates, and pages

(at the top) in Parts I, II, and III, and in the Bayonet Exercise
and Sword Exercise, Part VI, are numbered as in the books
from which they are taken.
Other parts are paged and paragraphed independently, and
the pages of this book are renumbered throughout at the
bottom for reference to the Tables of Contents.

There is a brief table of contents at the beginning of each

part, and a more complete table at the back of the book.
The attention of petty officers of the Navy is specially called
to the following subjects in Part I:
I. Regulations for Equipping the Landing Force and Land

ing it.

Part I, pages 9-17, and Plate II.

2. Formations for Street Riots. Part I, pages 76-83.

3. Extended Order for the Squad, and the three plates IIo,
III, and II2, which give the important details for the exten

sion of a company and a battalion.

Part I, pages 89-106.

4. Advance and Rear Guard; Plate 115 and note.

pages I07-108.
5. Camping. Part I, pages 109-III.

Part I,

6. Outposts; Plate 117 and note. Part I, pages 112-113.

7. Guard Duty. Part I, pages 114-137.

These subjects are of vital importance. If petty officers are

properly informed on these points they will not be found
wanting when a naval force is landed for active service.
Ignorance regarding such matters may result disastrously.

ABBREVIATIONS.
bg. C. . . . . . . . . Brigade Commander.
bt. C. . . . . . . . . Battalion Commander.
C. C. . . . . . . . .

Company Commander.

bt. sf... . . . . Battalion Staff.

adj. . . . . . . . . . Adjutant.
bg. adj. . . . . . Brigade Adjutant.
by C. . . . . . . . . Battery Commander.
C. . . . . . . . . . Commanders.
cs. 0.s.. . . . . Chiefs of Section.
pt. C. . . . . . . . Platoon Commander.
c. 0.s.. . . . . . Chief of Section.

C. p. 0. . . . . . . . Chief Petty Officer.

sf. p. o. . . . . . . Staff Petty Officer.
bg. sf. p. 0.... Brigade Staff Petty Officer.
p. 0. . . . . . . . . . Petty Officer.
p.os.. . . . . . . . Petty Officers.
1 p. 0. . . . . . . . First Petty Officer.
2 p. 0. . . . . . . Second Petty Officer.
3 p. o. . . . . . Third Petty Officer.
4 p. o. . . . . . Fourth Petty Officer.
5 p. 0
... Fifth Petty Officer.
6 p. o. . . . . . . Sixth Petty Officer.
pm. . . . . . . . . . . Pioneers.

sig. . . . . . . . . . Signalmen.
all. . . . . . . . . Ammunition Party.
InS. . . . . . . . . . Messmen.
amb. . . . . . . . . Ambulance Party.
-

PART I

LANDING FORCE
AND

>

DRILL REGULATIONS FOR INFANTRY

l

From Hand Book Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy.

.*

[.

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

... e.

o:

Landing Force, Organization, Equipment and Landing. .

School of the Squad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual of Arms and Firings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
School of the Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30-52
53-69

Color Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

70-72

20-2)

Posts of Special Details and p. os. in Line and Column. .

7t

Manual of the Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73-75

Formations for Street Riots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7683

Wall Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8488

Extended Order, Squad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89-103

Front Attack by a Company, Plate IIo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IO4

Front Attack by a Battalion, Plates III and II2. . . . . . . . . Io5-IO6

Advance and Rear Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Io7-IoS
Camping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOQ-III
Outposts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II2-II3
Manual of Guard Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II413 I
Guard Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IS2-137
NoTE.In Part I the pages at the top, all plates, and para

graphs are numbered as in the Hand Book of Infantry and

Artillery, U. S. Navy. The pages are numbered consecutively
at the bottom and are so referred to in the Table of Contents.
8

LANDING

FORCE

Special Details.

11. The pioneers, consisting ordinarily of one man for every

section landed, are under the direction of the brigade quarter
master, and will be selected from the mechanics. When the
landing force is not stronger than a single battalion, the pioneers

will be under the direction of the adj., a p. o. acting as leader.

12. The ammunition party, consisting ordinarily of one man
or every section landed, is under the direction of the brigade

rdnance officer. In the case of a battalion acting singly, a

1. 0. will have general charge, one man acting as leader.

13. (I.) The commissariat will be organized by the commis

ary under the direction of the commanding officer.
(2.) One messman will be detailed as cook for every section
anded.

(3.) The quantity and kind of provisions will depend upon the
the base, and upon

nature and length of service, distance from

he probable supplies obtainable upon the field.

2.

(4.) The greatest care should be taken in selecting drinking

water, and, if there be any doubt as to its purity, it should be
6 boiled for at least one-half hour.
; (5) The following table of rations is suggested as suitable for
... brief tours of duty on shore:

Article.

Per IOO Rations.

lbs.

Bread (hard or soft). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Corn beef (canned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Baked beans (canned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Coffee (roasted and ground). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sugar (granulated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tomatoes (canned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ioo
Salt (table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Pepper (black) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

*
1.
10.

1.
-

-10

lbs.
lbs.
lbs.

lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
OZ.

14. An emergency ration for two days' service may be issued

# to each man, and carried in the haversack, consisting of hard

rt bread, twenty ounces; corned or roast beef, one 2-pound can;

# sugar, eight ounces; coffee, four ounces. The

last two items in

small bags.

R"

15. The ambulance party, consisting ordinarily of one man for

* every two sections landed, is under the direction of the medical

# officer. The men composing this detail will wear

* Cross on the left arm, and shall not carry weap".
*

the Geneva

LANDING FoRCE.

16. The necessary number of signalmen will be detailed, one

of whom will act as leader.

17. Boat-keepers will be detailed as follows: Whaleboat or

gig, one; cutter, two; launch, four. An officer will be detailed
as beach-master, in charge of the boats and their keepers.
Equipment.

*=
Plate 1. Art. 18 (1.)
Fully equipped.

Plate 2. Art. 18 (1.)

Fully equipped.

Overcoat inside rubber blanket.

Without overcoat.

18. (I.) The equipment will depend upon the circumstances

of service. When fully equipped, each man will carry packed
knapsack and haversack, rubber blanket, and overcoat, cartridge
belt, filled canteen, and leggings. The knife laniard will be hauled
down straight in front, and tucked inside of the cartridge belt.
IO
:

LANDING FORCE.

10

(2.) When lightly equipped, filled caneen,

cartridge belt, and leggings.
(3.) Pioneers will carry intrenching tools.
(4.) One stretcher will be carried by every
two men of the ambulance party.

(5.) Signal apparatus will be carried by the

signal party.
19. The haversack is worn in rear of the
left hip, the canteen in rear of the right hip,
with cartridge belt over both haversack slings
and over the rear sling of the canteen.

20. (I.) The knapsack will contain the fol

---

lowing articles: One single blanket; one

suit of blue or white, one suit of underclothes,
two pairs of socks, one pair of shoes, one
watch cap, and two cap covers, all of which

"...,

shall be packed in the following order:

Blanket in flat folds, exact size of knapsack,
next to the back; undershirt and drawers, folded separately, flat
folds, side by side, forming second layer; extra suit, similarly
folded, forming third and outer layer; each layer to fit knap

##

sack snugly; shoes tucked down, one on each side, soles out

ward, heels up, and flush with top of clothing; cap, cap covers,
and socks on top of all, then make fast the tie-ties.

(2.) The knapsack pocket will contain towel, soap, comb,

tooth-brush, sewing kit, pipe, and tobacco.

(3.) When knapsacks are not provided, the above described

articles will be carried in the blanket, neatly rolled lengthwise

and stopped, the roll placed over the left shoulder, with both
ends of the roll secured together under the right arm.

(4.) The rubber blanket will be rolled tightly on its width,

then middle it across top of knapsack and secure by the two

traps, the ends of the latter to be tightly coiled on top. The

ends of the roll to be secured down the sides of the knapsack

by(5)
buttoning
over them
the beckets
thatrolled
securelengthwise
the flap. inside
. .
The overcoat,
if carried,
to be
the rubber blanket.
(6.) Rain clothes, if carried in place of rubber

ill
be rolled and secured in the same manner as the rubber' :
(7.) The cup will be secured by the loop on the bottom
the knapsack.
II

blanket,

LANDING FORCE.

21. The haversack will contain rations, knife, fork, spoo

plate, and tobacco.

22. Any of the above mentioned articles, when not requir. .

by the special nature of service, may be omitted by directio
of the commander-in-chief or senior officer present.

Arms.

(Hand Book, page 12.)

24. Infantry sections will be armed with the service rifle.

25. The pioneers, ammunition party, signalmen, and messm.
will ordinarily be armed with revolvers. The commander
chief may direct the substitution of rifles for revolvers whe

ever the special details are lightly equipped, or when the circu:
stances of service may require the change. Boat-keepers sh
be armed with the rifle.

26. C. p. os. and sf. p. os. shall be armed with cutlass a

revolver; color-bearers, and buglers, with the revolver only.
27. In the artillery sections, the 1. p. 0. and numbers I to
inclusive shall be armed with the revolver only, the remaind

of the section with the service rifle. On parades, when a lo

march may be expected, artillery sections may be armed wi
the revolver only.

Duties of the Brigade Staff.

(Hand Book, page 12.)

28. (I.) The bg. adj., signal officer, and aids, will perfor
such duties as may be assigned them by the bg. C.
(2.) The quartermaster will have general charge of the oper
tions of the pioneers; will supervise the details of transport

tion, and will provide quarters and camp equipage when neede
I2

LANDING FORCE.

13

(3.) The adj. of a battalion, acting alone, will perform the

duties of quartermaster.

(4.) The ordnance officer will provide the reserve ammuni

tion, and supervise its distribution, and will be charged with
the care and preservation of the ordnance outfit.

(5.) The C. p. o. of a battalion, acting alone, will perform the

duties of ordnance officer.

(6.) The brigade commissary will organize the commissariat

under the direction of the bg. C., and will perform the duties
of purchasing and disbursing officer.
(7.) The brigade medical officer will organize the ambulance
party, with the assistance of the battalion medical officers, and

will prepare for the bg. C., hygienic and hospital regulations, and
will make such recommendations as he may deem necessary for
the preservation of the health of the command.

29. (I.) The special details, pioneers, ammunition parties, ambu

lance parties, messmen, and signalmen, of the several battalions,

will be massed under the general direction of the bg. adj.

(2.) In the event of a battalion being detailed for detached
service from the brigade, and at other times when circumstances

may require it, such battalion may take its quota of the special
details.

The Landing.
30. When a landing is contemplated, the commander-in-chief
indicates the character of the landing party from each ship, the
number of sections, and the number and kind of pieces of artillery.
31. (I.) When the brigade is to
be landed, the boats of each ship's
A.
landing force will form in col24.
umn on the starboard (or port)

beam, in the following order: ***)" 2.." <!" eff"

Steam launch, sailing launch, cut
ters, whaleboats, gig. The bt. C.
in the steam launch, will take the
boats in tow, oars being used to
assist, if necessary.
(2.) The commander-in-chief
not having prescribed a special

formation for landing, the bg. c.

()

y will embark and direct one bat-

Plate 10. Art. 31 (2.)

talion of boats to take a specified

Line of columns.

I3

14

LANDING FoRCE.

position, and the other battalions of boats will then form in

parallel columns at intervals of four boats' lengths. The line of

columns will be the habitual formation of the brigade for land

ing.

The interval between columns may be increased or dimin

ished on the center or right-center battalion of boats by signal.

(3.) If the brigade is to be landed for parade or drill, the bg.
C. will direct the battalions where and when to land.

(4.) The brigade of boats should never be formed in line or

lines, except preliminary to landing when likely to be opposed,

in which case the formation will be governed by the plan of

attack.

32. The infantry boats, and those containing light machine

guns, will form on the general line of battle. The boats carry
ing artillery and powerful machine guns, take station in rear
of the general line. If necessary, they may be assembled at the
extremities, and in the center of the line, to cross their fire in
front of the flotilla, and to protect the flanks.

33. Fast pulling boats, containing the medical officers with

assistants, and proper outfits, will be stationed in rear of the
main line. They will be designated by the hospital flag, and the

ambulance party will form their crews.

34. Steam launches will carry artillery not intended for land
ing, and will patrol the beach for the purpose of covering the

landing or re-embarkation. They may be used for towing and

for floating boats that have grounded, but they must not be

beached, and any portion of the landing force that may have
taken passage in them will be ferried to and from the shore in
pulling boats.

35. (I.) Being in tow, and preliminary to disembarking, the

following whistle signals will be used:

Three blasts.Oars get ready, and prepare to cast off.

Two blasts.Up or out oars.
One blast.Cast off and let fall.

(2.) After embarking, boats will promptly pull clear of the

ship or landing, and make fast their painters in the assigned
order. The steam launch having straightened out the tow, three
blasts will be the signal to stand by, and two blasts to boat the
O31S.

36. (1.) Artillery to be landed, shall be carried in sailing

launches or large cutters. Cutters and large whaleboats will be:
used for the transportation of the infantry, one section, com
I4

LANDING FoRCE.

15

plete, in each boat, the men being seated by squads from bow
to stern, ready to deploy the instant the boats strike the beach.

(2.) Signalmen will land with the bt. Cs. and bg. cs.
(3.) The marines, in complete squads or sections, will be as
signed to the several boats conveying the infantry and artillery.
(4.) The special details will be concentrated in one boat, if
practicable; if not, then they will be distributed among the
larger boats.

37. The beach having been sufficiently cleared by artillery, a

portion of the infantry is landed, and at once deployed. It is
followed by the main body. A part of the artillery is held back
until it is apparent that the force is well established.

38. The landing effected, measures will be taken to render

the position secure, and outposts and guards established at once.

39. If a march into the interior be necessary, the column will

be formed with advance and rear guards.
minutes will be made every hour.

Halts of about ten

40. For actual service on shore, beyond the limits of com

munication by water, the best possible means for the transpor
tation of extra ammunition must be provided.
-

The Advance.

41. A front attack will not be made when a movement on

a flank is practicable, and men must not be exposed in masses

to the fire of the enemy.

Positions when carried will imme

diately be made secure.

42. (I.) Artillery fire will generally be concentrated upon the

position to be attacked, sweeping it, if possible, with a cross
fire, up to the last moment.
(2.) Artillery will not be moved oftener than necessary, as
change of position entails loss of range and interruption of fire.
As a general rule, guns will not be disturbed as long as they
are doing good service; they will not, however, remain in a

position where their fire is ineffective. Protection will be

sought in undulations of the ground, breastworks, logs, etc.;
advantages of position and ability to move quickly will not,

however, be sacrificed to security. Riflemen of the artillery

sections will be deployed upon the flanks to keep off the
enemys sharp-shooters.

43. As soon as the landing force has left the boats, the latter

will be hauled off to their anchors, with stern lines to the beach.
Each artillery boat will be made ready to mount its gun.
I5

comh
eac

*,

lin
ng
firi
the
sup
to
nceport
-

\",\ \
\

\
\

,
att
forack
mede
for
gad
Bri
9.
32-3
s,
Art
1.
te1
Pla

--

ils.
Deta
speesat

"
--- - -

erv
res
in
dnge,
hel
bei
mpa
00 ny
One
6,

4.4 \

seats
arcAms:

A
*

*A

N-t
1U
No,
-R
f*

N>*<>val
0()

:*s|

\~
1\, -':T*&
*~*
#\.
s
>

\ \
\ \
\

\1 \\

1-

3.

: #

ali'
ba
C.tt
hm ies
eac
fro
an
|*p

boa
oin
pafor

neme
the
insoo
ush
as
rand
c
es nt
la
mak
mov
p
the
#
low
fol

bu
am
ning
tai
con
ts
boa
ks,
the
flan
es
ancyion
hller
adv
bot
ts
or
boa
one
of
on
tal
bat
arti
hmpan
in
ge,
eac
the
ced
ran
pla
fro
are
of
ts
ch,
out
boa
bea
,yyle.
com
ack
one
ller
att
the
arti
ch.
ing
The
e
or
bea
fac
mor
rm
line
cab
fo
in
the
One
cti
nal
pra
med
ep
sig
for
swe
is
the
es e
to
At
r.
gad
ter
*'''
rea
bri
cen
as
far
The
pro
the
in
in
ail
ch,
in
and
det
bea
anc
ls ;
ces
adv
cia
pie
dts
spe
fiel
the
and
ng
ht
gs,
ari
lig
g.
boa
tie
lin
ire
cle
se
din
par
gat
or
ssf
in
the
lan
cro
lan
vic
ser
hure
,ce
at
the
wit
ato
line
gre
of
,e ed
cov
be
ngble
sec
ler
ch,
ded
to
firi
wil
bea
lan
the
ila
line
m
ava
for
be
the
not
anc
to
to
ike
are
adv
str
the
s,
e
of
ter
dro
and
lin
nks
cut
qua
ng
sagun
fla
firi
s
the
am
the
on
ndn d
of
ste
the
elo
ts
n
fast
the
ech
boa
in
by
whe
the
ary
nte
ate
as
ess
nces
ign
mou
nec
des
soo
rn.
nch
be
As
ste
bee
e"ion
may

hav
to
vis
#
uld
two
pro
bea
sho
bow
his
t;pie
mch,
whi
fro
the
ads
ch
squ
pos
rea
by
yiti
or
ts
t on
the

|
---

*-- ---.'
- - - - -a
" " - - - - -

staf
staff

- * *** - - - \
1
|
Y.
o
B
N
AJ
rtn

..T
00

*
|||

*::

\\

''

LANDING FORCE.

17

44. The beach-master will examine the beach with a view of

selecting the best position for covering the re-embarkation, and

will employ such means as lie in his power to render the posi
tion defensible in case of necessity.
45. In re-embarking, the artillery is first embarked, and is
then used to cover the embarkation of the infantry.

17

INFANTRY AND ARTILLERY.

GENERAL RULES.

46. All details, detachments, and other bodies of troops, will

habitually be formed in double rank.
details may be formed in single rank.

When desirable, small

47. Movements which may be executed toward either flank,

are explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to sub
stitute the word left for right, or the reverse, to have the com
mand and explanation of the corresponding movement toward
the other flank.

48. In movements where the guide may be either right or

left, it is indicated in the command thus:

Guide right (or left).

49. All movements, not specially excepted, may be executed

either from a halt or when marching. The statement, at the
beginning of a paragraph, of the formation from which a move
ment is executed, excepts all others, and the movement pre

scribed is executed from the specified formation only.

50. All movements, not specially excepted, may be executed
in double time. If from a halt, or if marching in quick time, the
command, double time, precedes the command, march; if march
ing in double time, the command, double time, is omitted.
51. (I.) Preparatory commands, such as forward, are those
which indicate the movement to be executed.

(2.) Commands of execution, such as MARCH, HALT, or ARMs,

are those which cause the execution of the movement.

(3.) Preparatory commands are distinguished by italics; com

mands of execution by SMALL CAPITALs.
(4.) A command of execution should be given in a more
energetic and elevated tone than the preparatory command
which precedes it.
(5.) The commands, HALT, ATTENTION, LoAD, READY; also

1. About 2. FACE, shall always be preceded by the preparatory

command, Squad, Section, Company, or Battalion.

(6.) When giving commands, an officer should face his men.

52. The signals and bugle calls must be frequently used in
the instruction, in order that officers and men may readily recog
nize them.

53. In the text, the posts of the officers and p. 0s. are speci
fied; but, as instructors, they go wherever their presence is
necessary.

18

DRILL REGULATIONS
FOR

INFANTRY.

I9

"

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.

54. The object of this school is the instruction of the indi
vidual recruit, and afterward that of the squad.
55. The instructor explains each movement in as few words
as possible, at the same time executing it himself. He avoids
keeping recruits too long at the same movement, although each
must be understood before passing to another, and he should
exact by degrees the desired precision and uniformity.

56. As the instruction progresses, the recruits will be grouped

according to proficiency, in order that all may advance as rap
idly as their abilities permit. Those who lack aptitude and
quickness will be separated from the others, and placed under
experienced drill-masters.
57. If the instructor wishes to begin a movement anew for

the purpose of correcting it, he commands: As you were, at

which the former position is resumed.
Instruction without Arms.

58. (I.) For this instruction, a few recruits, usually not ex

ceeding four, are placed in a single rank, facing to the front,
and according to height from right to left, the tallest man on
the right.

(2.) When the recruits have learned how to take their places,
they are required to do so without assistance from the instructor,
at the command, fall in.
Position of Attention.

59. Heels on the same line, and as near each other as the
conformation of the man permits; feet turned out equally, and

forming with each other an angle of about sixty degress; knees

straight, without stiffness; body erect on the hips, inclining a
little forward, shoulders falling equally; arms and hands hang

ing naturally, backs of the hands outward, little finger opposite

the seams of the trousers, elbows near the body; head erect and

square to the front; chin slightly drawn in, without constraint;

eyes straight to the front.
-

20

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.

21

The Rests.

60. Being at a halt, to rest the men, the instructor commands:

1. FALL OUT, or REST, or AT EASE.
(I.) At the command, fall out, the men may leave the ranks,
but will remain in the immediate vicinity. At the command,
fall in, they resume their former places.
(2.) At the command, rest, the men keep one heel in place,
but are not required to preserve silence or immobility.
(3.) At the command, at ease, the men keep the left heel in
place, and preserve silence, but not immobility.
(4.) To resume the attention: I. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.

61. To give the men rest, imposing both steadiness of posi

tion and silence: 1. Parade, 2. REST.

- (1.) Carry the right foot six inches straight to the rear, the
left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands in front of the center
of the body, the left hand uppermost, the left thumb clasped by
the thumb and fingers of the right hand.

(2.) To resume the attention:

I. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.

To Dismiss the Squad.

62. Being in line at a halt:

DISMISSED.

Facings.

63. To the right or left: 1. Right (or Left), 2. FACE.

(I.) Raise the right heel and left toe and face to the right,
turning on the left heel, at the same time place the right foot
by the side of the left.
(2.) The facings to the left are also executed upon the left
heel.

64. To the rear: I. About, 2. FACE.

At the first command, carry the toe of the right foot four

inches to the rear, and three inches to the left of the left heel,
without changing the position of the left foot. At the second
command, turn upon the left heel and right toe, face to the rear

and replace the right heel by the side of the left.

Salute with the Hand.

65. Being at attention or in march: 1. Right (or Left)

2. SALUTE.

hand,

(1.) Raise, the hand quickly until the forefinger touches :

lower part of the head-dress above the right or left eye; thum
2I

SCHOOL of THE SQUAD.

and fingers extended and joined, palm to the
left or right, forearm inclined at about forty
five degrees; hand and wrist straight; glance
toward the person saluted.

(2.) The salute being returned, or the officer

passed and the salute being unobserved, drop
the hand quickly by the side.
(3) Salute with the hand furthest from the

officer. Should this hand be engaged, salute

with the disengaged hand.
(4.) The salute should be rendered at six

paces before passing, or being passed by, an

officer, unless the nearest point reached be
greater than six paces, and not more than

thirty paces, in which case salute at the point

-

P'".

nearest the officer.

The Steps.

66. The length of the full step in quick time is thirty inches,
measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of
one hundred and twenty steps per minute.

67. (I.) The instructor places himself eight or ten paces in

front of the recruits, and facing toward them executes the step
slowly, at the same time explaining its principles; he then
commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.

(2.) At the first command, throw the weight of the body upon
the right leg, without bending the left knee. At the second
command, carry the left foot straight forward thirty inches from
the right, measuring from heel to heel, the sole near the ground,
the knee straight and slightly turned out; at the same time
throw the weight of the body forward, and plant the foot with
out shock, the weight of the body resting upon it; then advance

and plant the right foot, and, in like manner, continue the
march. The instructor indicates the cadence of the step from
time to time, by calling, one, two, three, four, or left, right, the

instant the left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.

(3.) The cadence is at first slow, and is gradually increased to
quick time.
68. To arrest the march: 1. Squad, 2. HALT.
At the second command, given the instant either foot is
brought to the ground, the foot in rear is brought up and
planted without shock by the side of the other.
22

ScHool of THE SQUAD.

23

Double Time.

69. The length of the full step in double time is thirty-six

inches; the cadence is at the rate of one hundred and eighty
steps per minute.
70. To march in double time: I. Forward, 2. Double time,
3. MARCH.
(I.) At the first command, throw the weight of the body on
the right leg; at the second command, raise the hands until the
forearms are horizontal, fingers closed, nails toward the body,
elbows to the rear; at the third command, carry forward the
left foot, and plant it thirty-six inches from the right; then
advance and plant the right foot, and, in like manner, continue
the march, throwing the weight of the body forward and allow
ing a natural swinging motion to the arms.
(2.) Recruits should also be exercised at running, the prin
ciples being the same as for double time.
(3.) In marching in double time, and in running, the men

breathe as much as possible through the nose, keeping the

mouth closed.

Short Step.

71. Being in march: 1. Short step, 2. MARCH.

(1.) The step is shortened to fifteen inches. The full step is
resumed at the command: I. Forward, 2. MARCH.
(2.) The length of the short step in double time is eighteen
inches.

Side Step.
72. Being at a halt:

I. Right (or Left) step, 2. MARCH.

(I.) Carry the right foot twelve inches to the right; as soon
as the right foot is planted, bring the left foot beside it; con

tinue the movement, observing the cadence as explained for the

direct step.

(2.) The side step is executed in quick time only.

w

73. Being at a halt:

Back Step.

1. Backward, 2. MARCH.

(1.) Step back with the left foot fifteen inches to the rear,
measuring from heel to heel, then with the right, and so on.
(2.) At the command, halt, bring back the foot in front to the
side of the one in rear.

(3) The back step is used for short distances,

time only.
23

ick

and in quic

24

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.

74. The short step, side step, and back step, may be executed
from mark time, and conversely.
T0 Mark Time.

75. Being in march:

I. Mark time, 2. MARCH.

(I.) At the second command, given the instant either foot is

coming to the ground, mark the cadence without gaining

ground, by alternately advancing each foot about half its length,

and bringing it back on a line with the other.
(2.) To resume the full step: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
(3.) Being at a halt, to mark time, the movement is executed
in the same manner as when on the march.

(4.) To halt when marking time: I. Squad, 2. HALT.

At the second command, given as either foot is coming to
the ground, halt and resume the position of attention.
To Change Step.
76. Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. MARCH.
(I.) At the second command, given as the right foot comes to
the ground, advance and plant the left foot; bring the right foot
near the heel of the left, and step off again with the left.
(2.) The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the
second command being given as the left foot strikes the ground.
CLOSE ORDER.

77. In this instruction, the movements are first executed in

single rank, and without arms. Afterward, the recruits will be
formed in squads of eight men each, in double rank, and with
arms. The explanations are given for the squad in the latter
formation.

78. In the calculation of distances and intervals, the depth of

a man is assumed to be twelve inches, and his front in ranks
twenty-four inches.
79. In line, at a halt, facing distance, or the distance between

ranks from back to breast, is twelve inches; on taking up the

march, this distance is increased to thirty-six inches, the rear
rank shortening the first few steps. At the command, halt, both
ranks halt simultaneously, and the rear rank then closes to
facing distance.
80. When the guide is announced in a command, the man

on the flank designated, conducts the march. In their prelimi

nary drills, the places of the recruits will frequently be changed.

24

ScHool of THE SQUAD.

25

81. When faced to the rear in line, vacancies in the new front
rank will be temporarily filled by the men in the rear, and the
guides will step into the new front rank.
To Form the Squad.

82. (I.) The p. 0 places himself in front of where the center

of the squad is to be when formed, and commands: FALL IN,
or makes the signal for the assembly.
(2.) The men form in double rank, from right to left, facing
to the front, with arms at the order; a very light touch between
elbows, in order to manipulate the piece with freedom.
To Align the Squad.
83. The instructor establishes one or more files as a base,
and commands: I. Right (or Left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.
At the second command, the men turn the head and eyes
slightly to the right, and simultaneously move forward or back
ward, halting a little in rear of the line; each man then moves
up in rapid succession, taking steps of two or three inches,

places his elbow lightly against that of the man on his right,
and brings his shoulders and eyes in line with those of the men

on his right. The rear-rank man conforms to the movement

of his file-leader.

At the third command, the men stand fast

and look to the front.

84. When the squad has learned to dress quickly and well,

the guide alone is first established; the two or three files on the
flank are accurately aligned as promptly as possible to afford
a base for the remainder of the squad.
To Form Single Rank.

85. Being in double rank: I. Single rank, 2. MARCH, 3.

FRONT.

<-

|
f

% [ _S_

Plate 3. Art. 85.

Form single rank.

At the second command, the file-leader of the right file stands

fast, the remainder of the squad takes the left step, each file
leader coming to a halt, in succession, as the interval to. his
right is filled by the rear-rank man; the rear-rank men continue

the left step until each is opposite the interval to

25

the left of his

26

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.

file-leader, when he steps forward to the line of the front rank,

halts, and dresses to the right. At the third command, look to
the front.
To Form Double Rank.

86. Being in single rank, and having counted fours:

Double rank, 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT.

I.

->

J D J D . [T]

G G

[S DSDS
2

Plate 14.

Art. 86.

2.

Form double rank.

At the second command, the even numbers take two steps to

the rear to form the rear rank; the men then close in quickly to
the right by side step, and form in two ranks, the original odd
numbers being in front, all dressing to the right. At the third
command, look to the front.
MARCHINGS.
T0 March in Line.

87. Being in line at a halt:

1. Forward, 2. Guide right (or

left), 3. MARCH.
(1.) The squad steps off, the guide marching straight to the
front; the rear-rank men cover their file-leaders, and follow
them as described in art. 79.
(2.) The instructor will see that the men yield to pressure
from the side of the guide, and resist pressure from the oppo
site direction; that they gradually recover the alignment, if lost,
by slightly shortening or lengthening the step; and that while

habitually keeping the head direct to the front, they occasionally

glance toward the side of the guide to assure themselves of the
alignment.

(3.) To change the guide: Guide left (or right).

(4.) If the men should lose step, the instructor commands:
STEP; the men glance toward the side of the guide, retake the
step, and then look to the front.

(5.) To halt a squad: 1. Squad, 2. HALT.

To March Backward.

88. Being at a halt: I. Backward, 2. Guide right (or left), 3.

MARCH.

26

SCHOOL of THE SQUAD.

27

T0 March to the Rear.

89. Being in march, in quick time:

1. To the rear, 2. MARCH,

3. Guide right (or left).

(I.) At the first command, the rear rank opens out to forty
eight inches. At the second command, given as the right foot
strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot; turn on the
balls of both feet, face to the right about, and immediately step off
with the left foot; the new rear rank closes up to standard distance.
(2) If marching in double time, turn to the right about, tak
ing four short steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step
off with the left foot.

To March by the Flank.

90 (1.) Being in line, at a halt: 1. Right (or Left), 2. FACE,
3. Forward, 4. MARCH.

(2.) Being in line, marching:

2. MARCH.

1. By the right (or left) flank,

At the second command, given as the right foot strikes the

ground, advance and plant the left foot, face to the right in
marching, and step off with the right foot. In each file the

'ront-rank man is the guide; the men cover in file and keep
slosed to facing distance.

91. Marching in column of files, to march in line: 1. By the

ight (or left) flank, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left).

To Change Direction in Column of Files.

92. Being in march: 1. Column right (or left); or, I. Column
|alf right (or half left), 2. MARCH.
(I.) At the second command, the leading file wheels to the
ight, or half right, the pivot man shortening two or three steps,

nd moving over a quarter or an eighth of a circle, whose radius

, about twenty-four inches; the other files follow the first and
wheel on the same ground.

(2) If at a halt:

1. Forward, 2. Column right (or left); or,

Column half right (or half left), 3. MARCH.

(3) To make a slight change of direction: 1. Incline to the

ght (or left), 2. MARCH.
The leading file takes the direction indicated, and the other
les follow and incline on the same ground.
The Oblique March.

93. Being in line, at a halt or in march: I. Right (or

lique, 2. MARCH.
27

Left)

28

SCHOOL of THE SQUAD.

(1.) At the second command, each man half faces to the right
and at the same time steps off in the new direction. He pre
serves his relative position, keeping his shoulders parallel t
those of the man next on his right, and so regulates his ste
as to make the head of this man conceal the heads of the othe

men in the rank; the ranks remain parallel to their origina

front. Each rear-rank man marches so as to cover his file
leader upon resuming the original direction.

(2.) At the command, halt, the men halt, faced to the front.
(3.) To resume the original direction: I. Forward, 2. MARCI
The men half face to the left in marching, and continue to th
front. If marking time while obliquing, the oblique march

resumed by the command:

1. Oblique, 2. MARCH.

(4.) The short step will not be used in the oblique march, an
the guide is always, without indication, on the side towar
which the oblique is made.
(5.) On resuming the direct march, the guide is, without in
dication, on the side it was previous to the oblique.
(6.) If the oblique be executed from a halt, the guide is an
nounced on taking the direct march in line.
(7.) The column of files obliques by the same commands.
-

To March in Double Time.

94. Being in line, at a halt:

1. Forward, 2. Guide right

left), 3. Double time, 4. MARCH.

To Pass from Quick to Double Time, and the Reverse.
95. Marching in quick time: I. Double time, 2. MARCH.

(1.) At the second command, given as the left foot strikes th

ground, advance the right foot in quick time, and step off wit
the left foot in double time.

(2.) To resume the quick time: I. Quick time, 2. MARCH.

At the second command, given as either foot is coming t
the ground, the squad resumes the quick time.
TURNINGS.
T0 Turn and Halt.

96. Being in line:

1. Squad right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3

FRONT.

(1.) At the second command, the right guide (if there be one

and the right file halt, if marching, and the front-rank or piv
man faces to the right; the other files half face to the right i
marching, and without changing the length or cadence of the ste
28

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.

29

place themselves successively upon the

alignment established by the right file;
all dress to the right without command.
The instructor verifies the alignment
from the pivot flank and commands:
FRONT, at which the guide takes his
post. The rear-rank men conform to
the movements of their file-leaders.

(2) Squad half right (or half left) is

executed in the same manner, except
that the pivot makes a half face to the
right.
To Turn and Advance.

Plate 15.

Art. 96.

Squad right.

97. Being in line: I. Right (or Left) turn, 2. MARCH, 3. For

ward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guide right (or left).

(I.) At the second command, the man or guide on the right

marches by the right flank, and takes the short step without

Pl:
W'lh,

changing the cadence; the

W:

other men half face to the

''.

right in marching, and,

moving by the shortest

line,

successively

themselves

on

the

W. [..]"

place

>

new

||.

line, when they take the

short step. The rear-rank
men conform to the move
ments of their file-leaders.
Plate 16. Art. 97.
Right turn.
As soon as the last man
las arrived on the new line, the fourth command is given, when

ill resume the full step.

(2) Right (or Left) half turn is executed in similar manner, ex
'ept that the guide makes a half face to the right.

(3) Should the command, halt, be given during the execution

if the movement, the men already on the line halt; the others
halt on arriving on the line; all dress to the right without com
mand.

The instructor verifies the alignment from the pivot

lank, and commands: FRONT.

-

To Incline in Line.

98. In order to change slightly the direction of the march:

Incline to the right (or left), 2. MARCH.
Executed in the same manner as the turn, the guide march
ig in the direction indicated.
29

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

108. (I.) When fair progress has been made in the individua
instruction of recruits, they will be taught the manual of arms
instruction with and without arms alternating. A part of each
drill with arms will be devoted to marching.
(2.) The manual of arms is explained for double rank, but fo
instruction, recruits are first placed in single rank.
(3.) The instructor will, at first, cause the men to execute th
movements by themselves, without command, until they under
stand the details; after this he will require them to execute thi
movements together, at command.
(4.) The cadence of the motions is the same as that of quic
time. The movements relating to loading, the fixing and un
fixing of the bayonet, the adjusting of sights, and the breakin
and forming of stacks, are executed with promptness and regu
larity, but not in cadence.
(5.) Being at a halt, the movements may, for the purpose 0
instruction, be divided into motions and executed in detail; it
this case, the command of execution determines the prompt per
formance of the first motion, and the command, two, three, tha
of the other motions.

(6.) To execute movements in detail, the instructor first cau

tions: By the numbers; all movements divided into motions ar
then executed as above explained until he cautions: Withol
the numbers.

(7.) The piece is habitually carried with the chamber empt

and firing-pin down.

109. (I.) The recruit being in the position of attention, the in

structor first causes him to place his piece carefully in the
Position of Order Arms.

(2) The butt rests evenly on the ground, arms hanging

na

urally, elbows near the body, the right hand holding the piec

between the thumb and fingers, first two fingers in front, th

others in rear; the barrel to the rear, the toe of the piece toucl
ing and on a line with toe of the right shoe.
|
30

THE MANUAL of ARMs.

31

(3.) When falling in, recruits habitually take their places in

nks with pieces at the order.

110. The balance of the piece is the center of gravity, bayonet

fixed.

111. Being at the order:

1. Present, 2. ARMs.

Carry the piece in front of the center of the body with the

;ht hand, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the
t hand at the balance, thumb extended along the barrel, the
rearm horizontal and resting against the body.
e small of the stock with the right hand.

Plate 17. Art. 109.

Order arms.

Present arms.

(Two) grasp
-

Plate 19. Art. 113.

Port arms.

112. Being at the present: 1. Order, 2. ARMs.

Let go with the right hand and regrasp the piece just above
e lower band, back of the hand to the right; let go with the

thand, carry the piece with the right to the right side, barrel
the rear, hand near the thigh, butt about three inches from
t ground, left hand steadying the piece above the right, fingers

tended and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclined

wnward. (Two) lower the piece gently to the ground with

tright hand, drop the left quickly by the side, and take the
sition of order arms.

113.
Beingand
at the
order;
1. Port,diagonally
2. ARMs. across the
(1) Raise
throw
the piece
2 1

body,

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

32

grasp it smartly with both hands, the right, palm down, at th

small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance, thum
clasping the piece, barrel sloping to the left and crossing oppd
site the junction of the neck with the left shoulder; right for

arm horizontal; left forearm resting against the body; piece nea
the body.
(2.) In the instruction of the recruit, to prevent interferent
with, or apprehension by, the man on his left, especially whe

bayonets are fixed, care should be taken in coming to the pos

tion of port arms, and like positions of the piece, that the muzz
be not swung to the rear nor dropped farther to the left tha
necessary for taking the designated position.
114. Being at the port: I. Order, 2. ARMs.
Let go with the right hand, lower and carry the piece to t
right with the left hand, regrasp it with the right just above th
lower band, back of hand to the front, let go with the left han
lower and turn the piece with the right, bringing the barrel !
the rear, butt about three inches from the ground, and hat
near the thigh; steady the piece in this position with the l
hand above the right, fingers extended and joined, forearm a
wrist straight and inclined downward. (Two) lower the pie
gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left by t
side, and take the position of order arms.

115. Being at the present: I. Port, 2. ARM

Carry the piece diagonally across the body a
take the position of port arms.

116. Being at the port: 1. Present, 2. ARM

Carry the piece to a vertical position in fro
of the center of the body, barrel to the rear, a
take the position of present arms.

117. Being at the order: I. Shoulder, 2. ARM

(I.) Take the position of port arms. (Tw
Carry and place the piece on the right should
and at the same time change the right hand
the butt, barrel up, trigger and guard just bel
the hollow of the shoulder, heel of the butt.'
tween the first and second fingers of the ri
-

hand, thumb and fingers closed on the stock;

bow near the body, hand directly in front of

Plate:20. Art. In elbow, left hand at the small of the stock. (Th
shoulder arms.

Drop the left hand by the side.

(2) Care should be taken in the instruction of recruits that in

32

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

33

position of shoulder arms, the right hand is kept directly in front

of the elbow, which insures steadiness of the piece on the shoul

der, sufficient elevation of the muzzle to prevent interference with
the men in the rear rank, and uniformity of appearance in the
position of the piece.

118. Being at the shoulder: I. Order, 2. ARMs.

Press the butt down quickly with the right hand
the piece diagonally across the body, and take the
port arms. (Two) Same as the first motion from the
order. (Three) Same as the second motion from the

and throw
position of
port to the
port to the

order.

119. Being at the order:

I. Slope, 2. ARMs.

Take the position of port arms. (Two) Carry

and place the piece on the left shoulder, and at
the same time change the left hand to the butt,
barrel up, trigger and guard just below the hol
ow of the shoulder, heel of the butt between the
first and second fingers of the left hand, thumb
and fingers closed on the stock, elbow near the
body, hand directly in front of the elbow, right
hand remaining at the small of the stock.
(Three) Drop the right hand by the side.
120. Being at the slope: I. Order, 2. ARMs.
Press the butt down quickly with the left
hand, grasp the piece at the small of the stock
with the right hand and take the position of
bort arms. (Two) Same as the first motion from
the port to the order. (Three) Same as the sec
ond motion from the port to the order.

121. Being at the shoulder:

ARMS.

1. Slope, 2. Plate 21. Art. 119.

Slope arms.

Press the butt down quickly with the right hand and bring
the piece to the position of port arms. The second and third
motions are the same as from the order to the slope.
122. Being at the slope: I. Shoulder, 2. ARMs.
Press the butt down quickly with the left hand, and bring the
piece to the position of port arms. The second and third mo
tions are the same as from the order to the shoulder.
123. Being at the shoulder: I. Present, 2. ARMs.

Press the butt down quickly with the right hand and throw

he piece diagonally across the body, taking the position of

port arms. (Two) Carry the piece to a vertical position in
33

34

THE MANUAL of ARMs.

front of the center of the body, barrel to the rear, and take the
position of present arms.
124. Being at the present: I. Shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Take the position of port arms. The second and third motions
are the same as from the order to the shoulder.

125. Being at the shoulder: I. Port, 2. ARMs.

Press the butt down quickly with the right hand and throw
the piece diagonally across the body, grasp it with the lef
hand at the balance, and change the right hand to the small o
the stock, and take the position of port arms.

126. Being at the port:

I. Shoulder, 2. ARMs.

Same as from the present to the shoulder; two motions.

127. Being at the slope:

I. Present, 2. ARMs.

Press the butt down quickly with the left hand, grasp the
small of the stock with the right hand, change the left hand to
the balance and take the position of port arms. (Two) Carr,
the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of thi
body, barrel to the rear, and take the position of present arms

128. Being at the present:

1. Slope, 2. ARMs.

Take the position of port arms. Second and third motions

the same as from the order to the slope.

129. Being at the slope: 1. Port, 2. ARMs.

Press the butt down quickly with the left hand, grasp the
small of the stock with the right hand, chang
the left hand to the balance and take the posi.
tion of port arms.

130. Being at the port: 1. Slope, 2. ARMs.

Same as from the present to the slope; two
motions.

131. Being at the order: I. Parade, 2. REST

Carry the right foot six inches straight to
the rear, left knee slightly bent, carry the muz

zle in front of the center of the body, barre

to the left, grasp the piece with the left han
just below the sight, and place the right han
below and against the left.

132. Being at parade rest: 1. Squad, 2. AT

TENTION.

Resume the order, dropping the left hand b.

Plate 22., Art, 121.
Parade rest.

the Side.

133. Being at the order: I. Fiv, 2. BAYONE

Transfer the piece to the left side, and take a position simila
34

THE MANUAL of ARMs.

35

so the order; grasp the handle of the bayonet with the right
mand, back of the hand out, and at the same time press the left
forearm against the scabbard in order to steady it; draw the
bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing at
the muzzle; resume the order, and drop the left hand by the
side.

134. Being at the order: I. Unfix, 2. BAYONET.

Transfer the piece to the left side, and take a po
sition similar to the order; press the spring
with the thumb of the left hand, then raise the

bayonet with the right hand until the handle is

well clear of the muzzle, slipping the left hand
down; drop the point to the left and rear, back of
the hand out, and, glancing at the scabbard, re
turn the bayonet, the blade passing between the
left arm and body; resume the order, and drop the
left hand by the side.
135. Being at the order, bayonet fixed: I.
Charge, 2. BAYONET.
Half face to the right, carrying the right heel
six inches to the rear and three inches to the right
of the left heel, at the same time raise the piece
#
with the right hand, inclining the barrel to the Plate 23. Art. 134.
-

front, grasp it with the left at the balance, back "****

of hand down, thumb clasping piece, elbow against the body,

grasp the small of the stock with the right hand and bring the
point of the bayonet to the height of the chin, right hand sup
porting the stock firmly against the front of right hip, the body
inclining slightly forward.
136. Being at charge bayonet: I. Order, 2. ARMS.
Face to the front, at the same time let go the piece with the

right hand and lower it to the right side with left hand, re
grasp it with the right just above the lower band, back of hand
to the right, and lower the piece, bringing the butt about three
inches from the ground and hand near the thigh; steady the

piece in this position with the left hand above the right, fingers
extended and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclined

downward.

(Two) Lower the piece gently to the ground with

the right hand, drop the left by the side, and take the position
of the order.

137. Being at the port, bayonet fixed: 1. Charge, 2. BAY

ONET.

35

THE MANUAL of ARMs.

36

(I.) Half face to the right, carry

ing the right heel six inches to the

* >" rear and three inches to the right

2

of the left heel, and at the same

time bring the piece to the posi

tion of charge bayonet.

(2.) The charge bayonet is simi

larly taken from the present.
138. Being at charge bayonet:
I. Port, 2. ARMs.
(I.) Face to the front, and at the

same time take the position of port

(11771.S.

(2.) The present is similarly taken

from the charge bayonet.
-

Plate 24. Art. 135.

139. Being at the shoulder:

1.

Charge bayonet. Charge, 2. BAYoNET.

(1.) Press the butt down quickly with the right hand and
throw the piece diagonally across the body, grasp it with the
left hand as in port arms, and change the right hand to the small
of the stock. (Two) Half face to the right, carrying the right
heel six inches to the rear and three inches to the right of the
left heel, and at the same time bring the piece down to the

right side and take the position of charge bayonet.

(2.) The charge bayonet is similarly taken from the slope.
140. Being at charge bayonet: I. Shoulder, 2. ARMS.
(I.) Face to the front, and at the same time take the position
of port arms. Second and third motions the same as the first
and second motions from the port to the shoulder.

(2.) The slope is similarly taken from the charge bayonet.

141. Being at the shoulder: I. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.
(1.) Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, fore
arm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers ex
tended and joined, forefinger against the piece.
the left hand by the side.

(Two) Drop

(2.) The first motion of the salute is made six paces before
passing the officer, holding the hand at the small of the stock
until the salute is acknowledged or the officer passed.

142. Being at the order: I. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.

Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, forearm hori
zontal, or nearly so, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers
36

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

37

extended and joined, forefinger against muzzle of piece. (Two)

Drop the left hand by the side.

143. Being at the order: 1. Stack, 2. ARMs.

-

(I.) At the first command, each

even

number of the front

rank

raises his piece with the right

hand, grasps it with the left at the
upper band, and rests the butt be
tween his feet, barrel to the front,

muzzle inclining slightly to the

<--

front and opposite the center of

the interval on his right, the
thumb and forefinger raising the
stacking swivel; each even number
of the rear rank then passes his
piece, barrel to the rear, to his file
leader, who grasps it between the
bands with his right hand and

Plate 25. Art. 141. throws the butt about twenty-eight Plate:26. Art. 142.

"'" inches in advance of his own and

""

opposite the middle of the interval, the right hand slipping to the
upper band, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking
swivel, which he engages with that of his own piece; each odd
number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand,
carries it well forward, barrel to the front, the left hand guiding
the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel of his

own piece with the free hook of that of the even number of the
rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle

formed by the other two pieces and holds the butt about four
inches above the ground and six inches in front of the line of
, the toes.

(2.) At the second command, each odd number of the front

rank lowers the butt of his piece to the ground.

(3.) The stacks being formed, the pieces of the odd numbers
in the rear rank are passed to the even members in front rank,

who lay them on the stacks. The pieces of the guides and the
file-closers are laid on the stacks at the same time.

(4.) Three pieces only are used in making a stack; pieces not
(5) Each man, on finishing handling pieces, takes the posi

so used are, in this connection, termed loose pieces.

tion of attention.
37

38

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

(6.) The instructor may then rest or dismiss the squad, leav
ing the arms stacked.
(7.) On assembling, the men take their places in rear of the
stacks.

144. Arms being stacked: 1. Take, 2. ARMs.

(I.) At the first command, the loose pieces are returned by
the even numbers; each even number of the front rank then
grasps his own piece with the left hand, the piece of his rear
rank man with his right hand, grasping both between the bands;
each odd number of the front rank grasps his piece in the same
way with the right hand.
(2.) At the second command, each odd number of the front
rank disengages his own piece by raising the butt from the

ground and then turning the piece to the right, detaching the
piece from the stack; each even number of the front rank dis
engages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and
then passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all re
sume the order.

(3.) Unless care is taken by the odd number to hold and place
the butt of his piece in front of the line of the toes, there is

danger that the front sight will be caught and bent by the piece
of the even number on turning the piece to make or break the
stack.

(4.) Should any four have numbers two and three blank files,
number one rear rank will take the place of number two rear

rank in making and breaking the stack; the stacks made or

broken, he resumes his post.
145. (I.) Being in single rank, arms are stacked and taken on
the same principles as in the double rank. At the preparatory
command, number three steps back and covers number two;
numbers two and three execute what has been explained for the
even numbers of the front and rear ranks, respectively; number
three then resumes his place; number one uses his piece as ex

plained for the odd numbers of the front rank. The piece of
number four is passed as explained for the odd numbers of the
rear rank.

(2.) Like precaution as in double rank should be used in making and breaking stacks to avoid injury to the sights.

146. The following positions of the piece are intended mainly

for use in extended order and route marches.

Whenever the

commands for any of these are given, the piece will be shifted
in the most convenient manner.

38

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

39

147. Being in any position: 1. Trail, 2. ARMs.

(I.) The piece is grasped by the right hand just above the
balance, right arm slightly bent, barrel up, muzzle inclined
slightly to the front.
(2.) When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to

others, as on the firing-line, the piece may be grasped at the

balance and the muzzle lowered until the piece is horizontal; a
similar position in the left hand may be used in like cases.

*~~
Plate 27. Art. 147.
Trail arms.

Plate 28. Art. 149.

Sling arms.

Plate 29. Art. 150.

Secure arms.

148. Previous to slinging arms, which will habitually be done

at a halt, the strap will be released from the stacking swivel and
also from the catch at the upper end of the guard, and shifted
to the swivel at the lower band and to the catch on the butt, by
resting the butt of the piece upon the left leg above the knee,
knee slightly bent, toe of the left foot resting on the ground,
heel raised, barrel turned slightly to the left, grasping the piece
with the left hand at the balance; with the right hand loosen

the strap and release it from the stacking swivel, then press the

spring of the catch with the forefinger or thumb as the catch

happens to be on the right or left, releasing the lower end of

the strap and shift it to the catch on the butt. The strap is now
in condition for slinging arms.

149. Being in any position: 1. Sling, 2. ARMs.

..

icle

(1) Adjust the strap as explained in the preceding *

39

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

40

then pass the right arm between the rifle and strap, the latter
resting upon the shoulder, piece in rear of the shoulder, muzzle
down, and barrel to the rear; right hand steadying the piece, and
resume attention.

(2.) On route marches, the piece may be slung on either

shoulder.

(3.) The strap should never be so tightly drawn as to prevent

its being readily adjusted or shifted.
(4.) The piece being slung, any position in the manual of
arms may be taken by command. At the second command, re

move the right arm from the sling and bring the piece to the
front as before explained, butt resting on the left leg above the

knee, and reverse the movements for lowering the strap, bringing
it back to its normal place; then take the position designated.
150. Being in any position: I. Secure, 2. ARMs.
(I.) The piece is held in the right hand at the balance, barrel
down, sloping downward and to the front; right hand supported
against the front of the right hip, upper arm against the stock
with the port well under the arm.
(2.) A corresponding position in the left hand may be used.

151. Being at the trail, secure, or arms being slung, the piece
may be brought to any position by command.
Positions Kneeling and Lying Down.
152. The movements of kneeling, lying down, and rising are
first taught without arms; they are executed as with arms, ex
cept that in the position kneeling the right hand rests on the
right thigh, and in moving to and from the ly
ing position the right hand is placed on the
ground; in the position lying down, the fore
arms are against each other on the ground,
left arm in front.

153. Being at the order: KNEEL.

(1.) Each front-rank man half faces to the

right, carrying the right foot so that the toe
shall be about ten inches to the rear and ten
inches to the left of the left heel; kneel on

right knee, bending the left, left toe slightly

inclined to the right, right leg pointing di
rectly to the right; place left forearm across
left thigh, hand hanging naturally; the piece

Plate 30. Art. 153,

Order kneeling.

remains in the position of the order, right

hand grasping it above the balance.
40

THE MANUAL of ARMS.

41

(2.) Each rear-rank man takes a side step to the right, and
then kneels as prescribed for the front rank.
154. Being at the order, kneeling: RISE.
Rise and take the position of the order; the rear-rank men
covering their file-leaders.
155. Being at the order, kneeling: LIE Down.
(I.) Each front
rank man places the
right knee against
the left heel. (Two)
Draw back the left

foot and place the

knee on the ground;
place the left hand
well forward on the ground and lie flat on the belly, thus inclin
ing the body about thirty-five degrees to the right; the piece is
lowered at the same time with the right hand, toe resting on the
ground, barrel up, muzzle off the ground, left hand at the bal
ance, left elbow on the ground, right hand at the small of the
stock, opposite the neck.
(2.) The rear-rank men move back thirty-six inches in the
most convenient manner without rising, and lie down as pre
scribed for the front rank.

156. Being in the position lying down: RISE.

Place the left hand on the ground and raise the body on the
knees; draw up and place the left foot by the side of the right
knee; raise and place the piece in the position of the order
kneeling. (Two) Rise and take the position of the order; the
rear-rank men close to facing distance on their file-leaders.
157. Being at the order: LIE Down.

(I.) Each front-rank man takes the position of the order

kneeling, except that the right knee is placed against the left heel.
(Tzvo) Draw back the left foot and place the knee on the
ground; place the left hand well forward on the ground and lie

flat on the belly, thus inclining the body about thirty-five de

grees to the right; the piece is lowered at the same time with
the right hand, toe resting on the ground, barrel up, muzzle
off the ground, left hand at the balance, left elbow on the
ground, right hand at the small of the stock, opposite the neck.
(2.) The rear-rank men step back thirty-six inches and lig
down as prescribed for the front rank.
|

158. Being in the position lying down: KNEEL.

4I

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

42

Place the left hand on the ground and raise the body on th
knees; draw up and place the left foot by the side of the righ
knee, raise and place the piece in the position of the order kneel
ing; the rear-rank men take the position of the order kneelin,
and
thenwithout
move forward
manner
rising. thirty-six inches in the most convenien

To Load.

159. The recruits are at first taught to load and fire without
using cartridges; after a few lessons they should use dummy
cartridges, and when well instructed, the drill may close with a
few rounds of blank cartridges.

160. No cartridges will be used, except when indicated by

the words with dummy (blank or ball) cartridge, preceding the

command LOAD.

This rule is general.

161. Being in line, standing at the order: I. Squad, 2. LOAD.

(I.) At the command LOAD, each rear-rank man steps off
obliquely to the right with the left foot, planting the toe

opposite the middle of the interval to his right and in line with
the left heel of his front-rank man; the front-rank men half face
to the right; both ranks then carry the right heel six inches to
the rear and three inches to the right of the left heel, feet nearly
at right angles, and at the same time raise the piece with the

right hand and drop it into the left at the balance, muzzle at the
height of the chin, left elbow against
the body, small of the stock at the
waist, right hand grasping the small
of the stock. (Two) Look toward
the chamber, grasp the handle of the
bolt with the thumb and fingers of
the right hand, turn it upward and
draw the bolt back, thus opening the
chamber (slip the cartridge box, if
worn, to the right hip and open),
take a cartridge between the thumb
and first two fingers and place it in
the receiver, regrasp the handle of

bolt with right hand, push the bolt

forward and turn the handle down,

thus closing the chamber; cast the

eyes to the front, carry the right

=~

Plate 32.

Art. 161.

ReadW.

hand to the small of the stock.

42

This

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

43

position is designated for reference as that of load; the piece is at the

ready, being loaded and the safety lock turned to the left.
(2.) If kneeling the position of the piece is similarthe left
forearm rests on the left thigh, the left hand grasping the piece
at the balance and the muzzle is at the height of the chin.
(3.) If lying down the left hand steadies the piece at the
balance, the toe of the butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off
the ground.
(4.) When lying down in double rank the rear-rank men do
not load.

(5.) The piece being in the position of load and locked, that
is with the safety lock turned to the right, is brought to the
ready by the commands: I. Squad, 2. READY.
At the second command turn the safety lock to the left with
she thumb and forefinger of the right hand, and return the
hand to the small of the stock.

162. Being in any position, pieces loaded: I. Draw, 2.

CARTRIDGE.

Take the position of load, turn the cut-off fully down, if not

already there, open the chamber gently to avoid complete ejec

ion of the cartridge from the receiver, take and return cartridge

to box or belt, close chamber, pull trigger, and carry the right
hand to small of stock.

163. Pieces, loaded, and be

ing in the position of load or at
the ready, to order arms: I. Lock,
2. PIECES; 3. Order, 4. ARMS.

(1.) At the command pieces,

surn the safety lock fully to the
right; at the command arms,
ake the position of order arms,
the front-rank men similarly as
rom charge bayonet; the rear
rank

men

raise

the

muzzles

if their pieces (to clear the

ront-rank men), step back and
'over their file leaders, at the
ame time bringing the piece to
he position of order arms.
(2.) If kneeling, both ranks
ake the order kneeling.
43

Plate 88. Art. 164.

Aim.

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

44

(3.) If sights are raised (par. 170) they should be laid down
at the first command.

th

(4.) Cartridge boxes, if used, are closed after executing

order, order kneeling, position lying down, or cease firing (par.
177).

164. Being at the ready: AIM.

(I.) Raise the piece with both hands and support the but

firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb

extended across the stock inclined forward and diagonally to
the left, barrel horizontal; slip the left hand back to the guard
fingers closed on the magazine, left elbow resting against th:
body, and as far to the right as it can be placed with ease, righ
elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forwar
and a little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed
right eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as
perceive the top of the front sight; second joint of forefinge:
resting lightly against the front of the trigger, but not
(2.) Each rear-rank man aims through the interval at t
right of his file leader, and inclines slightly forward, to advance
the muzzle of his piece beyond the front rank.
(3.) When lying down in double rank, the rear-rank men di

not aim nor fire.

165. (I.) In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the le:
knee, point of elbow in front of kneecap.
(2.) In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hand
and slip it through the left to the trigger guard; rest on bo
elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.
166. FIRE.

Press the finger against the trigger; fire without deranging

the aim, and without lowering or turning the piece.
167. LOAD.

Lower the piece to the position of load, and load.

168. (I.) The exercise is continued by the commands: 1
Squad, 2. AlM, 3. FIRE, 4. LOAD.
(2.) If the instructor does not wish the pieces to be reloaded
after firing, in place of the command LOAD he commands
I. Order, 2. ARMs.
(3.) At the command Order, bring the piece to the position o
load, turn the cut-off down if not already there, eject the empt]

shell by drawing the bolt back smartly, close the chamber, pul
the trigger, lower the sight leaf, if raised, and carry the righ
44

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

45

hand to the small of the stock; at the command Arms take the
position of order arms, the front-rank men similarly as from
charge bayonet; the rear-rank men raise the muzzle of their
pieces (to clear the front-rank men) step back and cover their

file leaders, at the same time bringing the piece to the position
of order arms.

(4.) If kneeling, both ranks take the order kneeling.

169. (I.) To accustom the recruits in the position of aim, to
await the command FIRE: I. Recover, 2. ARMS.
(2.) At the command recover, withdraw the finger from the
trigger; at the command ARMS, take the position of load, the
piece being retained at the ready.

(3.) In recovering arms when kneeling or lying down, the

piece is brought to the position for loading kneeling, or lying
down, respectively.
170. (I.) When the

recruits

are

thoroughly instructed in the adjust

ments of the sight and the principles

of aiming, they will be required to aim,

using the graduations of the rear sight
corresponding to the distance indi
cated. For this purpose the instructor
commands: I. At (so many) yards,
2. Squad, 3. AIM.
(2.) At the first command, both
ranks take the position of load and
idjust the sight with the right hand.
(3.) The instructor assures himself
y careful inspection that each man
ets his sight at the range indicated;
when satisfied that the subject is fully
!omprehended, he will exercise the
men in aiming at a designated object.

'or this purpose he commands: 1.

At that tree (or At. . . . . . . . ), 2. At (so
many) yards, 3. Squad, 4. AIM.
(4.) At the first command, both
anks take the position of load and
x the eyes on the object indicated;
t the second command adjust the

ight and immediately fix the eyes

45

Plate 84. Art. 170 (2.)

Adjusting the sight.

Note.Steady the piece with

pressure of the right arm against
the stock. Raise the sight at an

angle of about 45, and with the

mb of the ieft hand, and the
thumb and forefinger of the right

hand, place the sliding leaf at the

proper mark. Then, raise #
sight to a vertical position or y
it down, according to the range.

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

46

upon the object again. The distance announced in the com

mand should be, as nearly as possible, the true distance of the
object indicated.
(5.) The men should be practiced in aiming at objects above
and below them.

To Fill the Magazine.

171. FILL MAGAZINE.

(I.) Take the position of load, if not already there, open the
gate of the magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges
from the box or belt, and place them, with the bullets to the
front, in the magazine, turning the barrel slightly to the left to
facilitate the insertion of the cartridges; close the gate, and carry
the right hand to the small of the stock.
(2.) To load from the magazine the command From maga
cine will be given preceding that of LOAD ''; the cut-off will
be turned up on coming to the position of load.
(3.) To resume loading from the belt the command From

Belt will be given preceding the command LOAD ''; the cut-off
will be turned down on coming to the position of load.
(4.) The commands from magazine and from belt, indicating
the change in the manner of loading will not be repeated in

subsequent commands. The words from belt apply to cartridg:

box as well as belt.

(5.) In loading from the magazine care should be taken to

push the bolt fully forward and turn the handle down before
drawing the bolt back, as otherwise the extractor will not catch
the cartridge in the chamber, and jamming will occur with the
cartridge following.
To Empty the Magazine.
172. I. Empty, 2. MAGAZINE.
(I.) Take the position of load, turn the cut-off fully up if no
already there, and alternately open gently and close the chambe
until all the cartridges are removed; then return cartridges t
box or belt, pull the trigger, and turn the cut-off down.
(2.) Being at order arms: I. Open, 2. BoxES.
Steady the piece by grasping it with the left hand just below
the stacking swivel, forearm against the body; open the bo
with the right hand and resume the order.
In a similar manner each man, as his box is inspected, close
it and resumes the order.

46

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

47

173. Being at order arms: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMs.

(1) At the command ARMs, bayonets are fixed and

cartridge

boxes opened.

(2.) Each man, as the inspector approaches him, executes port

arms, open chamber and magazine, and then embraces the butt
with the right hand, heel between the first two fingers, thumb
and finger closed on the stock.
(3.) The inspector takes the piece with the right hand, grasp
ing it just below the lower band, back of hand down (the man
dropping the hands by the side), inspects it, and hands it back
in the position in which received. The man receives it with the
left hand at the balance, closes chamber and gate of magazine
if open, pulls the trigger, resumes port arms, comes to order
arms, and unfixes bayonet.
(4.) As the inspector returns the piece the next man executes
inspection arms, and so on through the squad. Should the piece
De inspected without handling, the man closes chamber and
gate of magazine, pulls the trigger, grasps the piece with the
right hand at the small of the stock, comes to order arms, and
1nfixes bayonet, when the inspector passes to the next man,
who immediately executes inspection arms.
(5.) The inspection of the arms begins on the right, after
which the inspector may pass in rear and inspect boxes from
eft to right.
Boxes are closed as soon as inspected.
FIRINGS.

174. (I.) The post of the instructor is three paces in rear of

he squad, but in actual firing he places himself where he can
rest make himself heard and at the same time observe the effect

if the fire; the objective should be in plain view and so desig

lated as to be easily distinguished by all.
(2.) After exercises in firing, before dismissing the squad or

assing to other instruction, inspection will be made to insure

hat no cartridge is left in chamber or magazine.

(3.) The commands for firing are the same whether the squad
e standing, kneeling, or lying down. The commands for kneel
1g or lying down precede the commands for firing.

(4.) At the first preparatory command for firing, the squad

eing in line standing, both ranks take the position of load as

-escribed
in paragraph
161, andatthe
if #'
ipped to the
hip and opened;
thecartridge
commandbox,
indicating the
...i.

47

48

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

distance, the sights are adjusted; the cartridge box is closed

and replaced after executing cease firing (par. 177).

Wolley Firing.
175. (I.) The squad being in line fronting the object to be
fired upon, pieces loaded (and locked): 1. Fire by squad, 2. At
(such an object), 3. At (so many) yards, 4. Squad, 5. READY,
6. AIM, 7. FIRE, 8. LOAD.
(2.) To fire another volley at the same object, but with a new
line of sight: I. At (so many) yards, 2. Squad, 3. AIM, 4. FIRE,
5. LOAD.
-

(3.) To fire another volley at a new object: 1. At (such an

object), 2. At (so many) yards, 3. Squad, 4 AIM, 5. FIRE, 6. LoAD

176. (1.) The object and range will be indicated in the pre
paratory commands for all kinds of fire, as illustrated in th
preceding examples.
(2.) If the object be at a considerable angle to the front o

the squad, the instructor will change the front of the squad sq
as to face the object.
(3.) The commands are given at sufficient intervals to allow
them to be executed as Drescribed. The command fire is given
when the pieces appear to be steady.
These rules are general.

To Cease Firing.
177. CEASE FIRING.

(I.) Take the position of load, turn the cut-off down, if no

already there, draw the cartridge, or eject the empty shell by
drawing the bolt back smartly, close the chamber, pull the
trigger, lower the sight leaf, if raised, and take the order, orde
kneeling, or the position lying down, as the case may be. I
standing, the rear-rank men then step back and cover their fil

leaders, taking the order as prescribed in paragraph 163.

178. The command (or signal) cease firing is always used t
stop the firing of whatever kind, and may be given at any tim
after the first preparatory command for firing, whether the firin
has actually commenced or not.
This rule is general.
T0 Fire at Will.

179. 1. Fire at Will, 2. At (such an object), 3. At (so man;

yards, 4 Squad, 5. READY, 6. CoMMENCE FIRING.
48

THE MANUAL OF ARMS.

49

At the command commence firing each man independently of

the others takes careful aim at the object, fires, loads, and
continues the fire as rapidly as is consistent with taking careful
aim at each shot. The men should be taught to load rapidly
and to aim deliberately.
180. I. CEASE FIRING, 2. LOAD.
(I.) The firing will stop; at the second command pieces not
already there will be brought to the position of load, and those
not loaded will be loaded.

(2.) This is intended to interrupt the firing, for the purpose of

steadying the men, to change to another method of firing, or to

retain the pieces loaded for the time being, in which latter case
the instructor should direct the pieces to be locked.
(3.) For this purpose, when the loading is finished he com
mands: I. Lock, 2. PIECES.

Rapid Fire.
181. (I.) This fire is employed under usual conditions for
ranges within which the trajectory is comparatively flat, and
she firing should be very effective. I. Rapid fire, 2, At (such an
Dbject), 3. At (so many) yards, 4. Squad, 5. READY, 6. CoM
MENCE FIRING.

(2.) At the command indicating the distance, if 600 yards or

ess, the sights will be laid; the firing is executed as the firing
it will, but with as great rapidity as will admit of effective aiming
at the object.
(3.) If firing at will, to begin rapid fire: I. Rapid fire, 2. CoM
TENCE FIRING, when rapid fire is taken up.
(4.) Instruction in the rapid fire should not be given until after
he fire at will is well executed.

(5.) When the greatest rapidity of fire is desirable, as imme

liately before making or when resisting an assault, magazine
ire is used, and usually in continuation of the rapid fire.

182. (I.) To change from the fire at will, or the rapid fire to
magazine fire: I. Magazine fire, 2. CoMMENCE FIRING. The cut-off
s turned fully up at the first command and the firing continued

without interruption, the loading being from the magazine, which

will not be refilled unless direction has been given therefor.

(2.) In first exercises in magazine fire, loading will be

done

om the position of load and after facility is attained in hand

ng from the position of aim. Men found unable after practice
5 retain the piece in the position of aim for successive loadings
49

49a

THE MANUAL OF ARMs.

and firings with the steadiness necessary will be directed to

load from the position of load.
(3.) Whenever magazine fire is used, except in volley firing,
after the cartridges in the magazine are exhausted, rapid fire
(loading from the belt) will be taken up without command,
unless direction otherwise has been given. ,
(4.) The cut-off is turned down on coming to the position of
load for loading from the belt.
183. (I.) To use magazine fire directly, instead of in contin
uation of other fire: I. Magazine fire, 2. At (such an object), 3. At

(so many) yards, 4 Squad, 5. READY, 6. CoMMENCE FIRING.

(2.) The cut-off is turned fully up at the first command on
taking the position of load, and the firing is executed as the fire
at will, the loading being from the magazine.
(3.) To use magazine fire in volley firing: I. Magazine fire,

2. Fire by squad, 3. At (such an object), 4. At (so many) yards,

5. Squad, 6. READY, 7. AIM, 8. FIRE, 9. LOAD.
The cut-off is turned up at the first command on taking the
position of load.
(4.) To fire further volleys the commands would be as pre
scribed in paragraph 175.

NoTE:-The cut-off should always be turned down, except

when firing from the magazine.

Whether loaded or not, the piece should always be carried

lockedthat is, with the safety lock turned to the right. In view
of this rule, the safety lock (when turned to the right) will
always be turned to the left to unlock the bolt at the command
ready, at the second motion of load, in drawing cartridge, in
emptying the magazine, and at inspection arms; and it will be
turned again to the right to lock the piece before assuming any
other position.
|

=== "_
THE MANUAL of ARMs.

49b

(From page 49a Hand Book.)

184. Owing to heat caused by continued

firing, the barrel of the piece and metal parts
in front of the chamber soon become too

hot for handling. Care should then be exer

cised to confine handling to the wooden parts
and the metal parts in rear of the chamber.

To Unsling and Sling Knapsacks.

185. Arms being stacked:

1. Unsling, 2.

KNAPSACK.

(I.) At the first command, the front rank

moves back one step to clear the stacks, and
faces about; the rear rank at the same time
moves back four steps; all the men unhook
the right-hand strap.
(2.) At the second command, each man re
moves his knapsack and places it on the

#g
"
nS11ng KnapSacKS.
First position.

ground at his feet, flaps up and outward.

186. To sling knapsacks: I. Sling, 2.
KNAPSACK.

(I.) At the first command, each man takes his knapsack, and,
anding erect, holds it by the straps, the flap next to the knees.
it the second command, the knapsack is placed on the back,
he front rank facing about and stepping up to the stacks, the
'ar rank closing to facing distance.
(2.) The word knapsack will be used in the commands for all
atterns of packs.

To Dismiss the Squad.

187. The instructor commands: 1. Port, 2. ARMs, 3. DIS
ISSED.

When the instruction has progressed to include loading, to

sure that no cartridge is left in the chamber or magazine, the

structor commands: 1. Port, 2. ARMs (sees that the cut-off

turned down), 3. OPEN CHAMBER AND MAGAZINE, 4. CLOSE
HAMBER AND MAGAZINE, 5. DISMISSED.

After closing the chamber and magazine the trigger is pulled.

5I

THE MANUAL of ARMs.

50

GENERAL RULES.

188. Proficiency in marching and in the manual of arms, hav

ing been obtained, the following general rules govern:
I. If at the order, bring the piece to the trail at the instant o'
taking up the march, in the absence of any other command.
2. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without
arinS.

3. If at the shoulder, slope, trail, or port, bring the piece to the

order on halting; the execution of the order to begin immediately
after halting.

4. When the facings, side step, back step, alignments, open

and close ranks, taking intervals or distances, and assembling
from bayonet exercise, are executed from the order, raise the
piece just clear of the ground, barrel vertical, while in motion,
and resume the order on halting.
5. The position of port arms will be used in making the march
ing salute.
6. The rifle salute is prescribed for individual men with arms,
except sentinels who salute by presenting arms. Indoors and on
covered decks, the salute is made from the position of the order,
7. If marching, the bayonet is fixed or unfixed in the most
expeditious and convenient manner, and the piece returned to

the position in which it was when the command to fix or unfix

bayonet was given.
8. After exercises in firing, before dismissing the squad of

passing to other instruction, inspection will be made to insure

that no cartridge is left in the chamber.
9. The commands for firing are the same whether the squad
be standing, kneeling, or lying down. The commands for kneel
ing or lying down precede the commands for firing.
Io. Fall out, Rest, and At ease are executed as without ar.11s,
On resuming attention, take the position of the order.
II. In the battle exercises, or whenever circumstances require,
the regular positions of the manual of arms and the firings may
be commanded without regard to the previous positions of the
piece; such movements as are not in the manual will be executed
without regard to motions or cadence. It is laid down as a
principle, that the effective use of the weapon is not to be im
beded by the formalities of drill.

52

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

Posts of 0fficers, Petty Officers, and Field Music.
220. (I.) The post of the c. c. is two paces in front of the
senter of the company.
(2.) The post of a C. 0. S. is two paces in rear of the center
Df his section.

(3.) The 1 p. 0. is in the front rank on the right of the first

%
section; he is the right
guide of this section and

2.

*::===P" also of the company.

*:

(4.) The 2 p. 0 is in the

9* &o

2 g'd

gg

front rank on the left of

*g

is

>

the second section; he is

the left guide of this sec

Plate 51. Art. 220.

Company in line.

ion and also of the company.

(5.) The 3 p. 0. is two paces in rear of the left of the first sec
iDn; he is the left guide of the first section.
(6.) The 4 p. 0. is two paces in rear of the right of the second
section; he is the right guide of the second section.

(7.) The 5 p. o. is two paces in rear of the middle four of the

irst section.

(8.) The 6 p. 0. is two paces in rear of the middle four of the

second section.

(9.) P. 0s. in excess of six, present for duty with the company,
shall be posted as number four of squads, in the front rank.
(Io.) P. 0s. having occasion to change position when the

company is at the order, will carry their pieces at the trail.

(II) The field music, when not united in the battalion, is in
the line of file-closers, on the right of the chief of the first sec

tion, and will conform to all movements of the file-closers. On

he march, when required to play, the position of the field music
is at the head of the column.

(12.) Absent officers and p. os. will be replaced by those next

in rank or grade.
(13.) Officers and p. os, in moving from one position to
- - -

inother, shall always pass by the shortest line.

53

SCHOOL OF THE CoMPANY.

61

(14.) A p. 0 in command of a company takes post on the

right of the front rank when in line, the right guide falling back
into the rear rank, and takes the post of the c. c. when in col

umn of fours or sections, and in column of companies in bat

talion, except at the ceremony of Inspection when his post will
be on the right of the front rank. When the 1 p. o. is in com
mand of a company, an acting 6 p. 0. will be designated.

(15.) A p. 0 in command of a section retains his specified

post when the company is in line, column of fours, or open
ranks, but when in column of sections he takes the post of
the C. 0. S.

221. Whenever the flanks become the center, the 1 p. o. and

2 p. 0. take posts in the line of file-closers prescribed for the

3 p. 0. and 4 p. 0., each with his own section; the 3 p. o. and

4 p. 0. take the posts prescribed for the 1 p. 0. and 2 p. 0.
To Form the Company.
222. (I.) At the sounding of the assembly, the 1 p. o., in fron:
of and facing the position to be occupied by the center of the
company, commands: FALL IN, at which the men form in two
ranks by sections with arms at the order, the tallest men being
on the right of the first section, and on the left of the second
section. The signal having ceased, the 1 p. 0. brings the com.
pany to the port and calls the roll, each man answering, Here, |
and coming to order arms as his name is called. The 1 p. ( .
then commands: I. Count, 2. Fours.
(2.) Beginning on the right, the men of both ranks count one
two, three, four; one, two, three, four, and so on to the left.
(3.) If the four on the left consists of less than four men, the:
are assigned to other fours and placed in the line of file-closers
each in rear of the center of the four to which assigned. If the
four on the left consists of four, five, or six men, it is filled up
to seven men (number three being a blank file) by taking num
ber three (rear rank) from the necessary number of fours next
to the right of the left four. Should it be expedient to increase
the front of the company, all the numbers three may be blank
files; and, if still further to increase the front of a company,

number two of as many fours as necessary, beginning with the

left four, may also be left blank files.

(4.) If the two sections are not of normal size, owing to ab

sentees or supernumeraries, the 1 p. o., after completing the

left four, will divide the company into sections of equal size if
54

as

------

- - -- -

ScHool of THE COMPANY.

ssible, the division falling between two fours. If there should

an odd number of fours, the right section shall be the stronger.

5.) The company being formed, and at the order, the 1 p. 0.

ses to the front, salutes the C. C. from the order, reports the

sult of the roll call, and then takes his post, the piece being
ried at the trail.

6) Cs. 0. S. take their posts and draw swords, assuming the

sition of the order, as soon as the 1 p. 0. makes his report.

223. In all formations under arms, the men fall in with bay
ets unfixed. Previous to ceremonies, except Guard Mounting,
d Funerals, bayonets are fixed by command of the 1 p. 0.
Alignments.

224 (1.) The alignments are executed as prescribed in the

chool of the Squad.
2.) In all alignments in the School of the Company, the
C. steps back two paces in prolongation of the line before
ing his commands. This rule applies to Cs. 0. S. in column,
company and battalion drill.
3.) Guides marking an alignment, stand at the order; at the
mmand, front, they take their posts in double time, pieces at
trail, if not already there. This rule applies also to guides
sections in company drill, and, in battalion, to guides of
)divisions in column.

To Open Ranks.
225. Being in line at a halt: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH, 3.
'ONT.

I.) At the first command, the right and left guides step
skly three paces to the rear to mark the new position of the
ir rank; the chief of the first section places himself on the
ht of the front rank, the chief of the second section on the
t of the front rank, swords at a carry; the C. C. goes to the

ht flank and sees that the guides are on a line parallel to the
nt rank; he then places himself, facing to the left, three paces
front of the right file, and commands: MARCH; at this com
nd, the cs. 0. S. place themselves opposite to, and three paces
front of, the centers of their sections.
2.) The front-rank men dress to the right; the rear-rank men
n their heads and eyes to the right, step backward, halt a

le in rear of the line established by the guides, and then dress

the right on the line so marked. The file-closers step back
55

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

.d.s.

ward, and, placing them-

*g,

6.
c.09.
o

C.C.

selves three paces from the

3
rear rank, dress to the **o-EEEEEEp"
right.
:
(3.) The C. C. aligns the
s=s====!
officers and the front rank;
*
the right guide aligns the
.8%
* &c.
$o
rear rank; the C. C. verifies
Plate 52. Art. 225.
Open ranks.
the alignment of the rear rank, also of the file-closers; officer
and file-closers look to the front as soon as their alignment i.
verified, and the officers bring their swords to the order.
(4.) The C. C. gives the command, front, from a position thre
paces in front of the position of the right guide when in line,
facing to the left; the guides resume their places in the from
rank, and the C. C. faces to the front and brings his sword to
the order.
To Close Ranks.

226. Being in open ranks: I. Close ranks, 2. MARCH.

At the second command, the Cs. 0. S. bring their swords to
the carry, face about and resume their posts in line; the rear
rank closes to facing distance, the file-closers to two paces from
the rear rank; the C. C. takes his post.

To Dismiss the Company.

227. Being in line at a halt, the c. c. directs the 1 p. 0.: Di.
miss the company. The officers return swords and fall out; the
1 p. 0. salutes from the order, steps two paces to the front, facts
to the left, and commands: I. Port, 2. ARMS, 3. DISMISSED.
General Rules.

228. (I.) The company executes the halt, rests, facings, step,
marchings, turnings, manual of arms, firings, kneels, lies down,
rises, and resumes attention as prescribed in the School of th:
Squad. substituting in the commands the word company for
squad, wherever the latter occurs.

(2.) The oblique is executed in line or column as explained for

the squad.

(3.) The same movements may be executed by other units,

detachments, details, etc., substituting their designation for the
word squad in the commands.

(4.) While marching, the arms swing naturally.

(5.) In executing the turn and halt, the C. C. goes to the pivo
56

Z-.

ScHool of THE COMPANY.

|ank of his company; the guide at the pivot halts or stands

1st, resuming his post at the command, front.
(6.) At the command, load, the C. C. takes post in rear of the
enter of his company, three paces in rear of the line of file
losers.

(7.) After the command, cease firing, the C. C. returns to his

ost in line.

(8) File-closers do not load, nor fire.

(9.) Guides and file-closers execute the manual of arms on
rill, unless otherwise directed; in the latter case, they remain
t the order, and correct mistakes that may be made by the men.
During ceremonies, they execute all movements.
(10.) A p. 0. as guide, or in command of a subdivision or de
achment, carries his piece as the men do.
(II.) In movements where it is prescribed that the leading
Dur, subdivision, or company, moves subdivision or company
istance to the front and then halts, it may be halted at a less
istance when necessary.
(12.) The c. c. is responsible for the theoretical and practical
instruction of his officers and p. 0S., and he shall require them
o study and recite these regulations so that they may be able
o explain thoroughly every movement before it is put into exe
ution.

(t.

To Form Column of Fours and March by the Flank.

229. Being in line: 1. Fours right (or left), 2. MARCH.
(I.) The front rank of each four wheels 90 degrees to the
ight on a fixed pivot; the pivot man turns strictly in his place;
he man on the marching flank maintains the full step, moving
n the arc of a circle with the pivot man as the center; the
len dress on the marching flank, shortening the step according
) their distance from it.

The rear-rank men conform to the

ovements of their file-leaders, shortening the step until they

ave their proper distance. The distance between ranks in col
mn of fours is thirty-six inches.

(2.) Upon the completion of the wheel each four takes the full
ep and distance, and, dressing toward the side of the leading
tide, marches on a line parallel to the former front of the com

ny; the right guide places himself thirty-six inches in front of

e left file of the leading four; the left guide places himself
irty-six
inches
in rearhalt,
of the
fileupon
of thetherear
four. of the
(3.)
If the
command,
be left
given
completion
57

SCHOOL of THE CoMPANY.

wheel, the rear-rank men open out to thirty- ** @ 9:

six inches.

t-n

(4.) The post of the C. C. in column of

fours, twos, or files, is by the side of the
leading guide on the flank opposite the file
closers; he takes his position at the command, march.
(5.) The posts of the leading and rear

ts-1

E.--S=l

os.'

E-, -o at

guides in column of fours, twos, or files, are

in front and rear, respectively, of the lead-

...| s=
:) E

e<*

ing and rear files on the side opposite the

3) s

file-closers.

(6.) The man in rear of the leading guide

follows him at a distance of thirty-six inches.
The file-closers march two paces from the
flank of the column, in line with a rank of

-36 in

Pl:

Art. 229,
Column of fours.

fours, and see that all the fours accurately maintain their

tances.

(7.) All wheels by fours, except in changing direction in

umn, are executed on a fixed pivot.
(8.) In single rank, the distance between fours in

fours, is eighty-four inches; the leading guide precedes the c

umn, and the rear guide follows it at a distance of fifty-f
inches.

To Change Direction in Column of Fours.

230. Being in column of fours: I. Column right (or left);

I. Column half right (or half left); or, I. Incline to the right
left), 2. MARCH.

(I.) The leading four wheels to the right, the pivot taki
steps of ten inches, if in quick time, or twelve inches, if in dou

time, and describing the arc of a circle, whose radius is fort

eight inches; the wheel being completed, the leading four tal

the full step; the other fours move forward and wheel in simil
manner on the same ground. The guides wheel as explain
for flank or pivot man, as the case may be.
(2.) If at a halt, the first command will be forward.

(3.) Column half right (or half left) is similarly executed, eac
rank of four wheeling 45 degrees.
To Form Column of Fours and Change Direction.
231. Being in line: 1. Fours right (or left), 2. Column rig
(or left); or, 2. Column half right (or half left); or, 2. Incline

the right (or left), 3. MARCH.

58

~ a2,

or "r, G Co... . ...,

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

To March to the Front in Column of Fours.

232. Being in line:

1. Right (or Left) forward, 2. Fours right

left), 3. MARCH.
At the third command, the right guide places himself in front
the left file of the right four; the right four moves straight
the front, shortening the first three or four steps, the rear
nk falling back to thirty-six inches; the other fours wheel to
: right; the second four, when its wheel is two-thirds com
ted, wheels to the left on a movable pivot, and follows the
st four; the other fours having wheeled to the right, move for
ird and wheel to the left on a movable pivot on the same
ound as the second.

To Change the File-Closers from One Flank to the 0ther.

233. Being in column of fours: 1. File-closers on left (or
!ht) flank, 2. MARCH.
At the first command, the file-closers move in toward the
nk of the column, and, at the second command, pass through
The C. C. and guides change to their proper posts.
To March to the Rear.

234. Being in line or column: 1. Fours right (or left) about,

MARCH.

(I.) At the first command, the rear rank closes to facing dis
nce; at the second command, the fours wheel to the right 180
'grees and march to the rear; on the completion of the wheel,
le rear rank falls back to thirty-six inches unless the command
ult, be given when in line, in which case the men of the rear
ink remain at facing distance.

(2.) If in column of fours, the file-closers gain the space to

le right or left necessary to preserve their interval from the
ink, without passing through the column.
(3.) If in line, or column of sections, the command for the
Hide is given as the fours unite in line; the file-closers pass
irough the nearest intervals.
To Form Line from Column of Fours.

235. To the right or left: 1. Fours right (or left), 2. MARCH,

Guide right (or left); or, 3. Company, 4. HALT.

(I.) At the first command, the rear rank closes to facing dis

ince; at the second command, the fours wheel to the right, the
ar rank falling back to thirty-six inches if the line advances
pon the completion of the wheel.
ro

SCHOOL of THE COMPANY.

(2.) The guide is announced, or the command, halt, is give

the instant the fours unite in line.

(3.) If the line be formed toward the side of the file-closes

they move in toward the flank of the column at the first com
mand, and at the second pass through the column, between it
rear rank of one four and the front rank of the next succeedin
four.

236. To the front: 1. Right (or Left) front into line, 2. MAR:
3. Company, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT.

(I.) At the second command, the leading four moves straig

to the front, dressing to the left; the leading guide places him
self on its left; the other fours oblique to the right till oppos:
their places in line, when each marches to the front.
(2.) At the command, halt, given when the leading four h
advanced company distance, it halts and dresses to the left;
other fours halt and dress to the left upon arriving in line;
rear rank of each four closes to facing distance upon halti
the guide in rear places himself on the right of the front ra

upon the arrival of the last four in line; the command, fr

is given when the last four completes its dressing.

(3.) If the movement be made toward the side of the fil

closers, they pass through the column as the oblique commenc
(4.) If marching in double time, or in quick time, and the col
mand be, double time, the C. C. commands: Guide left, imm
diately after the command, march; the leading four moves |
the front in quick time, the other
1. *

fours oblique in

double time,

each taking the quick time and

dressing to the left upon arriv
ing in line.
237. On the right or left: I.
On right (or left) into line, 2.

MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT,

5. FRONT.

(I.) At the second command,

the leading four wheels to the
right on a movable pivot and
advances, dressing to the right;
the guide places himself on its
right; each of the other fours
marches a distance equal to its ct:a
front beyond the wheeling s":

"ra.

Plate 54.

Art. 237.

On right into line.

oint of the four next preceding, wheels to the right and ad

ances as explained for the first four; the rear guide places him
elf on the left of the rear four after it halts.

(2.) At the command, halt, given when the leading four has
dvanced company distance in the new direction, it halts and
resses to the right, the rear rank closing to facing distance;
he other fours successively halt and dress upon arriving in line.
(3) The command, front, is given when the last four completes
ts dressing.
(4.) If the movement be executed toward the side opposite the
tle-closers, each file-closer follows the four nearest him, passing
n front of the following four.
0bstacles.

238. Marching in line, to pass obstacles: I. (So many) fours

rom right (or left) to rear, 2. MARCH.
(I.) At the second command, the designated fours execute left
orward fours left on the four that remains in line next on their
eft.

(2) The guide closes on the fours that remain in line.

(3) The fours that have broken to the rear are formed in line

t the command:

1. Rear fours right (or left) front into line, 2.

}}uble time, 3. MARCH.

(4) At the third command, the guide hastens to the point

where the flank of the company will be when the movement is
ompleted.
-

(5.) In passing small obstacles, the necessary number of files

Irop to the rear without command, and regain their places in
ine as soon as possible.
T0. Form Column of Twos from Column of Fours.

239. (I.) This movement is always executed toward the file

losers; it is used for the purpose of reducing the front of the
olumn to enable it to pass a defile or other narrow place.
Being in column of fours: I. Right (or Left) by twos, 2.
MARCH.
2.) At the first command, the rear rank of each four closes

o facing distance; at the second command, the two files on the

ight of each four move forward; the two files on the left mark
me till disengaged, when they oblique to the right and follow
he right files.
-

(3) The distance between ranks in column of twos is facing

61

6.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

distance; the guides take the same distance in front and rea
of the column.
NOTE.The column of twos should never be used on board ship.

It if

better, in fact, to avoid it at all times. Being in column of fours: 1. Four

right, 2. MARCH, 3. Left flank, 4. MARCH, which forms the men two abreast
Marching by the flank in two ranks: 1. Left flank, 2. MARCH, 3. Fours right
4. MARCH.

To Form Column of Fours from Column of Twos.

240. (I.) This movement is always executed away from

t"

file-closers.

Being in column of twos: 1. Form fours, 2. Left (or Right

oblique, 3. MARCH.
|
(2.) At the third command, the leading two of each four tak

the short step; the rear two oblique to the left until they ut
cover the leading two, when they move to the front; the fou
having united, the rear ranks fall back to thirty-six inches, an
all resume the full step.
|

242. (1.) A column of twos, or files, changes direction, ;

halted, and is put in march by the same commands as a colum
of fours.

(2.) Column of twos may be formed from line, and line fro

column of twos, by the command:

I. Twos right (or left),

MARCH, in a similar manner to that of movements by fours.

(3.) The march in column of twos or files is always in qui

time.

243. A column of fours, twos, or files may be faced to th

rear, or to a flank, and marched a short distance, but no oth:

movements should be executed until the column is again facd

to the original front. The officers and p. os. face with the co
umn and retain their positions.
MOVEMENTS BY SECTIONS.

245. (I.) Sections are numbered from right to left when a

line, and from head to rear when in column; these designation
change when, by facing about, the right becomes the left of th:
line, or the head becomes the rear of the column.

(2.) The company having been formed, the right may becom
the left; the flanks the center, and the reverse.
(3.) In movements by sections, each C. 0. S. repeats suc
commands as are to be immediately executed by his section.

(4.) Whenever the company is formed in column of sections

the 3 p. o. and 4 p. o. take their places in the front rank, a
guides of their sections; they return to their posts in the lin
62

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

|0

5f file-closers when the company unites in line or column of

ours, unless they mark an alignment, in which case they re

urn to their posts at the command, front.
(5.) When a subdivision in column is dressed, its chief, after
Terifying the alignment, commands, front, and places himself
wo paces in front of its center; in movements where the sub
livisions are not dressed, he takes this position as soon as the
'olumn is formed.

(6.) The post of the C. c. in column of sections is abreast the

eading section and three paces from the flank of the column on
he side of the guide.

To Form Column of Sections to the Right or Left.

Nu

'w

o:

Az:
-

/ , Z.
//

ZZ

7 HH-

* /*

z///

*-

|-

.#

A.4.
| ||
7
#

z Z.

|-

a'

|-

c. */

|-

|
|-

c. 2 s.
; 2

Z - ?

4.

| | |

7| ||

A z

|-

f:f-TTTTTTI-III f TTTTTTTTTTTT
Z
* > .A
SLIIRSITISLI: ITISLLITSLLIE *,. *.
*

-/

----> -*@

- - - - - -O 3
c.c. :

Plate 55. Art. 246.

Sections right.

Q)

N/

246. Being in line: I. Sections right (or left), 2. MARCH.

(I.) Each section turns to the right and halts, its alignment
eing verified by its chief.
(2.) The column of sections marches, halts, obliques, and re
umes the direct march by the same commands as the company
1 line.

To Form Column of Sections to the Right or Left

without Halting.

247. Being in line: 1. Sections right (or left) turn, 2. MARCH,

Forward, 4. Guide right (or left), 5. MARCH.
63

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

71

Each section turns to the right; the guide of the second set
tion carefully preserves the trace, step, and a distance equal to
the front of his section.
To Form Column of Sections to the Front.

248. Being in line at a halt:

I. Right (or Left) by sections, 2.

MARCH, 3. Guide left (or right).

(I.) At the first command, the CS. 0. S. pass in double time td
their posts in front of the sections, the chief of the right sect
tion commands: Forward; the chief of the left section com:
mands: Right oblique.
t
(2.) At the second command, the right section advances, th:
chief repeating, guide left. The chief of the left section com:
mands: MARCH, the instant his section is disengaged; at which
the section obliques to the right, the chief commanding:
Forward, in time to add: 2. MARCH, 3. Guide left, the
the left guide arrives in the trace of the guide of the leadin

section.

(3.) If marching, the chief of the right section repeats th:

command for the guide; the chief of the left section commands
I. Second section, 2. Mark time, repeats the command, march, add
ing, right oblique, in time to give the command, march, the in
stant his section is disengaged; the movement is completed a
from a halt.
To Form Line to the Front from Column of Sections.

249. Being in column of sections at a halt: I. Form compan;

2. Right (or Left) oblique, 3. MARCH, 4. FRONT.

(1.) At the second command, the chief of the first sectio

commands: 1. Forward, 2. Guide left; the chief of the secon
section commands: Right oblique.
(2.) At the third command, the first section advances sectio
distance, when its chief commands: 1. Section, 2. HALT, 3

Left, 4. DREss, and returns to his post, passing around the let
flank.

The second section obliques to the right, its chief com:

manding: 1. Forward, in time to add: 2. MARCH, 3. Guid

left, the instant the section is opposite its place in line; on arriv
ing near the line, the chief halts the section and commands: 1

Left, 2. DREss, and then returns to his post, passing around

the right flank.

(3) The c.c. superintends the alignment from the left flank
and gives the fourth command upon its completion.
64

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

(4.) If marching in quick time, the chief of the leading section

Dmmands: Guide left, and the movement is completed as just
<plained.
(5.) If marching in quick time, and the command be double
me, the C. C. commands: Guide left (or right) immediately after
le command, march; the chief of the leading section cautions
to advance in quick time; the chief of the second section re
>ats the command, right oblique, double time, and commands:
Forward, in time to add: 2. MARCH, the instant the section
opposite its place in line; when the section is about to arrive
line he commands: I. Quick time, in time to add: 2. MARCH,
Guide left, the instant it is abreast of the leading section; the
ctions having united, the chiefs return to their posts, passing
ound the flanks.

(6.) If marching in double time, the chief of the first section,

the first command by the C. C., commands: Quick time, and
peats the command: MARCH, also the command for the guide.

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of

Sections and Halt.

250. Being in column of sections, the guide on the side to

ard which the movement is to be executed:

I. Sections right

r left), 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT. C.C.

@- ~ O.

2 Potow

AEI

S.|

|| || || ||
| |I |

* |

. ..

...

, *,*%
*

-J -3.

cos,
Po a cos
2 * 4Q'4'
' '-O
Q. "
.

YS | P0.
T]

"..."
JTT

||'' |

-'s

SS

>*
ar

ro

S
Plate 56. Art. 250.

Sections left.

At the second command, each section executes section right;

e right guide of the leading section and the left guide of the
ar section step to the rear before the junction of the sections

d take post in the line of file-closers. The chiefs

65

take their

__ -

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

'

posts in line, passing around the flanks. The C. C. verifies th

alignment and commands: FRONT.
To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of
Sections and Continue the March.

251. Being in column of sections: 1. Sections right (or lef

turn, 2. MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. Guide right (or left), 5. MARCH.
At the second command, each section executes right turn
the right guide of the leading section and the left guide of th
rear section step to the rear before the junction of the section
and take post in the line of file-closers. The chiefs take the

posts in line, passing around the flanks. The fifth command i

given when both sections have completed the turn.

To Form Line on the Right or Left from Column of

Sections.

252. Being in column of sections: I. On right (or left) in

line, 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT.
(I.) At the first command, the
chief of the

mands:

first section

* *

*
3. *

ce

com-

Right turn, and at the

39.

.."------#3

second command the first section

turns to the right. When the

guide has advanced section distance, the section is halted by its
chief, who passes around the
right flank to his post.
(2.) Thetosecond
section its
marches
straight
the front;
chief
commands:
I. Right turn, 2.
MARCH, when his section is op
posite the right of its place in
line; the section turns to the

#4.

til."

ce

#
,'?
---

c.c.

c. 0.5

right, and when the right file has ,?:=?.

d
on the line, the section is Plates. Art.*, on right into in
halted by its chief, who passes No. "In coin.
around the left flank to his post. and 6 p.o. will take post two paces in
of the center of the first and second

(3.) The sections dress to the tions, respectively.

right without command. The C. C. verifies the alignment, a

commands:

FRONT.

To Change Direction in Column of Sections.

258. Marching in column of sections: 1. Column right (

left), 2. MARCH.
66

SCHOOL of THE COMPANY.

4.

(I.) At the first command, the chief of the first section com
mands: Right turn; at the second command, the section turns
o the right, its chief adding: I. Forward, 2. MARCH, on the
'ompletion of the turn.

(2.) The second section marches up to the turning point, and

hen changes direction by the same commands as the first.
(3.) Column half right (or half left) is similarly executed; each
shief gives the preparatory command: Right (or Left) half turn.
(4.) If at a halt: 1. Forward, 2. Guide right (or left), 3. Col
umn right (or left), 4. MARCH.

To Execute a Slight Change of Direction.

254. Marching in column of sections:
(or left), 2. MARCH.

1. Incline to the right

The leading guide takes the direction indicated, and the sec
tions conform to his movements, changing direction on the
same ground, as explained for the squad in line.
T0 March to the Rear.

255. Being in column of sections: 1. Fours right (or left)

about, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left).
T0. Form Column of Fours from Column of Sections.

256. Being in column of sections: 1. Sections, 2. Right (or

Left) forward, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. MARCH.
The chiefs take their posts as the sections are about to unite
1n column of fours.
To Form Column of Sections from Column of Fours.

257. Being in column of fours: 1. Sections, 2. Right (or Left)

front into line, 3. MARCH, 4. Company, 5. HALT.
(I.) At the second command, each chief places himself near
the head of his section; at the third command, each section exe

cutes, right front into line. The command, halt, is given when
the leading four of each section has advanced section distance.

Each c. o. s. commands, front, when his last four completes its

dressing.

(2.) If marching in double time, or in quick time, and the com

mand be double time, the c. c. commands: Guide left (or right)

immediately after the command, march.

To March
by the Flank
from Column
of Sections.
258. Being
in column
of sections:
1. Fours
right (or
2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left).
6-y

left),

SCHOOL of THE COMPANY.

(I.) The right and left guides of each section place themselv
as in art. 229, each C. o. s. on the left of his leading guide; th
leading guide of the section on the flank announced is ti

guide of the company; the leading guide of the other secti

marches abreast of him and preserves the interval necessary
form front into line.

(2.) The position of the C. c. is on the side opposite the file

closers, three paces from the flank and abreast of the cs. 0. S.
(3.) Marching by the flank of sections, the right section is th
first, the left the second.
To March Again in Column of Sections.

259. Marching by the flank in column of sections: I. Four

right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left).
Route Step.
(Hand Book, Page 76.)

266. Being in march:

I. Route step, 2. MARCH.

(I.) At the second command, the men carry their pieces a

will, bayonets unfixed, and are not required to preserve silence
nor keep the step, but will cover and preserve the distance o
thirty-six inches between ranks. The leading guide must b
careful to maintain a steady, uniform gait of about three mile
to the hour; file-closers will require the ranks to maintain thei
distance.

(2.) Being at a halt: I. Forward, 2. Route step, 3. MARCH.

(3.) To resume the cadence step: 1. Company, 2. ATTEN.
TION. At the second command, the pieces are brought to the
shoulder, and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed.
(4.) The column of fours is the usual column of route.

(5.) The company marching in route step changes direction by

the same commands as when in the cadenced step.

(6.) If halted while marching in route step, the men come to

the rest.
To March at Ease.

(Hand Book, Page 77.)

267. Being in march: I. At ease, 2. MARCH.
(1.) At the second command, the company marches as in the
route step, except that silence is preserved.
68

SCHOOL of THE COMPANY.

(2.) The march at ease, may be used during drills.

(3.) Being at a halt: I. Forward, 2. At ease, 3. MARCH. If
line, the guide must be announced before the third command.
(4) To resume the cadenced step. I. Company, 2. ATTEN
ON.

(5.) If halted while marching at ease, the men stand at ease.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

The Color Guard.

270. (I.) The color guard consists of one p. o. and two men
the p. 0. carrying the national color. He is relieved what
necessary by one of the other members of the guard.

(2.) The original right center company is the color company at

the color guard remains with it unless otherwise directed; it
posted as follows:
(3.) In line, the color bearer is between the guides of th
right and left center companies; the other members of
guard are in his rear, in the line of file-closers. The color gua
takes the same position relative to the color company when i

column at full distance or in close column.

(4.) In column of fours, the color bearer

is between the wings, abreast of the guide
of the color company, in front or in rear
of the file next the file-closers; the

*E=
G-SE

ol. c....

other members of the guard retain their

*% SS

o! 3: ...

places in the line of file-closers.

The color

S-

oRo

3 Aases ( app os.)

:

guard retains the same relative position, c. 96"

both in line and in column of fours, when
D
marching with the color company only.
3% s
(5.) In forming line of columns, the color
C-J

Os:}!o

guard remains with the flank of the com- 'u'i'

pany it was with before the movement ***'column

c.
OurS.
commenced.

Note.The
b.
tween
the reardistance
guide of the

(6.) If by movements of the battalion the # #%r'n'

-

original left of the

color company is 't'

changed so as not to be the center of the

battalion,
color the
bearer
and whether
guard will
'''
take post the
between
wings,
on "
ou

the left or right of the color company, or at its head or real

in column of fours.

(7) If a squadron color be paraded, a p. o. is

designated to

carry it. He takes position on the left of the color bearer and

conforms to the movements of the latter,

70

remaining on his left

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

:cept when in column of fours with the file-closers on the left

ink, in which case the squadron color is on the right.

(8.) The colors, kept at the quarters
of the commanding officer, are escorted

*
-

ot

#.
o:

A."
.

C:

s=

* -o

***'.

band

3 * duylers

:-

* 8-- -
e

68.3/.

******

L!'

/*
st?.

.#

EEE. g.: */

"f
||4
o

o
:

#E=

[]}x

ee .

[] *
[] ans

r-

* - - - - 20 -----e
4&

H'

*::===P

#4
8T
e

s-E2. 6-3
c2.

|W

*
6

o:

* ~:

:-

Xo

ox o

#**

232

sf/ o
a *t

*& .

a "n 3.

Plate 60. Arts. 270,272 and 275.

Plate 61. Arts. 274 and 277.

Battalion in line.

Battalion in column.

Dy the color guard, marching in one rank, the color bearer

in

he center, to the color company on its parade ground; it is "

urned in like manner.
71

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

(9.) The color guard, by command of the color bearer, p.

sents arms on receiving and on parting with the colors.
(IO.) The color guard does not execute the loadings, firing

nor fix bayonet. In rendering honors, and on drill, it execute

all other movements in the manual except when specially ex
cused,

72

MANUAL OF THE COLOR.

P0Sition 0f the Pike.

1129. (I.) At a carry,

the heel of the pike rests
in the socket of the sling
at the right hip; the right

hand grasps the pike at

the height of the shoulder.
(2.) At the order, the
heel of the pike rests on
the ground near the right
toe, the right hand hold
ing the pike in a vertical
position.

(3.) At parade rest, the

heel of the pike is on the
ground as at the order;
the pike is held with both
hands in front of the cen

ter of the body, left hand

uppermost.

(4.) The order is resumed

at the command:

ATTEN

TION.

(5.) The left hand assists

the right when necessary.
(6.) The carry is the ha

bitual position when the

men are at the port, shoul
der, slope, or trail.

(7.)

The carry, order,

and parade rest, are exe

cuted with the men.
F-

>

(8.) In double time, the

Plate 160. Art. 1129 (1.) Carry.

pike is removed from the

ket and carried on the right shoulder, inclined to the rear.

73

MANUAL of THE Color.

(9.) During exercise in the manual of arms, the color will
held at the order; at the preparatory command for marching

will be brought to the carry.

Plate 161. Art. 1129 (2.)

Plate 162. Art. 1129 (3.)

Order.

Parade rest.

The Color Salute.

1130. (1.) Being at the carry, slip the right hand up the pi
to the height of the eye, then lower the pike slo y by straig
ening the arm to the front.

(2.) The color salutes when saluting an officer entitled to th

honor, but in no other case.
74

18

MANUAL OF THE COLOR.

(3.) If marching, the salute is executed when at six paces from

he officer entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when six
aces beyond him.
-

|
Plate 163.

Art. 1130.

The color salute.

(4) At a halt, the salute is executed at the second command:

I. Present, 2. ARMs, the color having been brought to the carry

immediately before; the order is resumed with the men.

75

FORMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTS. *

General Rules.

450. (I.) If practicable, each bg. C., bt. C. or C. C., should have
a map showing all the principal streets, squares, parks, and ope
places where a force may be rallied.
(2.) When practicable, it is recommended to utilize the ser
vices of civilian scouts, or men disguised in civilians' clothing
in order to keep the commanding officer informed as to the situ
ation of affairs in the city.
(3.) A few pioneers with picks, crowbars, shovels, and axe.
will accompany the command.

(4.) Squads may advance along the house-tops, or in rear o

the houses, whenever practicable and necessary to secure a flank
ing position against a barricade, or to command the windows
of the houses opposite.
(5.) Pieces will be habitually carried with bayonets fixed.
(6.) It is essential that perfect control of the fire be maintaine
to prevent unnecessary loss of life. A few selected marksme
should be ready at all times, under the direction of the officers
to pick off the leaders of the mob.
T0 Protect the Flanks in Column.

451. Being in column of companies: 1. Twos and fours, rear

rank, as flankers, 2. MARCH.
(I.) The numbers designated place themselves on the flanks;
those of the right section on the right flank, and those of the
left section on the left flank, at equal intervals between their
own company and the one next in rear. The 5 p. 0. of each
company controls its right flankers, and the 6 p. 0. its left flank
ers; the former watches the windows and houses on the left side
of the street, the latter those on the right side. The flankers
of the rear company form a semi-circle in its rear, facing about

whenever necessary to fire. Scouts may be detailed, under the

command of an officer or p. 0 to precede the column.
*Designed by Lieutenant W. F. Fullam, U.S. Navy. The general method
of forming 8treet column was taken from the Army Drill Regulations.
76

FoRMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTS.

120

(2.) At the command: I. Flankers, 2. Posts, the flankers re

t

sume their places in the rear rank, and the

5 p. 0. and 6 p. 0. resume their posts.

e-r-so

*E=== S.S.
s: , ,' '
; , ;"
s' / 46;e

* on

5 *fo.

"o's
s:0. S.
\,

Bt.sf.

,'
s

ss

op-

\ e, '', 's
\ \, ',
Bt.c.N.'s, 's

IO

NS-

AN
1.

2p.o.o

4-

O i.Po

:
:

[S]

G)

[4

D
OC-o

s 5 s, ess ss
s, /~/
*...*.*.*
*

3850

[S-D

Bt.c

TS]

3,

**0\s.

D-l

S.

Adj.

*
w

s.

#. O

S!

3%

[S-l

Ts

7s. E, E, S.S. S. S.S.

ti / , e,
*

, , \, 's
w

s: "o

***

s' , ,

sfro

##, &

sko.'s,

sf.ros.

cro.

DS]
-

's

S.S. s.s., s,s,ss

c: ; 2
'e', 's
.#. |cre.
..?' '...'s
[S]! &
:
& S.

[ST]

DS]

s'

c)

OD

DS_

Plate 88 Art. 451.

Twos and fours as flankers.

IO
I->]

Plate 89. Art. 152.

Street column.

To Form Street Column.

452. Being in column of companies at full distance: I. Street

column, 2. MARCH.
At the second command, the first company halts and stands
fast; the second forms in column of fours, four paces in rear of
the right four of the first company; the third forms similarly in
rear of the left four of the first company; the fourth company

closes upon the second and third; all the officers, the color
guard, sf. p. os., guides, and file-closers take post within the

column, c. cs. opposite the center of their companies, the others

near their posts in line or column.
77

FoRMATIONS FOR STREET RIoTs.

-**

453. Being in column of fours: 1. Street column, 2. Right (C.

Left) front into line, 3. MARCH.
At the third command, the first, third, and fourth companie
execute right front into line in double time; the first compan:
halts; the second company advances to within four paces of th:

left four of the first company and is halted; the third compan;
executes right forward, fours right, and advances to within fou
paces of the right four of the first company and is halted; th:
fourth company closes upon the second and third.

454. (I.) The numerical designation of the companies remain.

unchanged until column of companies or fours is again formed
(2.) If there be but three companies in the battalion, the firs

and second sections of the second company execute what is pre:

scribed for the second and third companies, and the third com.
pany closes upon the second.

(3.) With five companies, the sections of the fourth company

form in rear of the second and third companies, as above pre
scribed for the sections of the second company, and the fifth
company closes upon the fourth.

(4.) With six companies, the fourth company forms column

of fours and follows the second, the fifth follows the third, and
the sixth closes upon the fourth and fifth.
(5.) With only two companies, the street column will be

from column of sections, in the same manner as prescribed it

art. 452 substituting section for company in the explanation.

'air

455. The street column advances, obliques, changes

halts, and marches by the flank and to the rear by the same com:
mands and means as a column at full distance; in marching by
the flank, the flank companies oblique sufficiently to follow it
rear of the flank fours of the leading company, the right or lef
front-rank man of the leading company acts as guide, and in
changing direction the rear company regulates its movement:
on the companies in columns of fours.

To Form Square.
456. Being in street column: 1. Form square, 2. MARCH.
At the second command, the leading company halts or stands

fast; the right and left flank companies wheel by fours to the
right and left, respectively, and halt; the rear company executes
about face.

78

FoRMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTs.

*

457. To form again

I
DS

G)
C.C

in street column:

I.

Stree t

2.

column,

MARCH.
At the second com

mand, the company

that
was
leading
when the square was
formed stands fast;
the rear company ex
->

ecutes about face; the

right and left flank
companies wheel by
fours to the left and

right, and halt; they

regain their
posi

G)
C.O.S.

tions when the col

umn marches.

2 Foo

DSL

>]
IO

T0 Form Column of

Companies.

458. Being in street

Plate 90. Art. 456.

Form Square.

column:

I.

Column

of companies, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left).

At the second command, the first company advances, the flank
companies execute front into line in double time, each when at
full distance from the preceding company, and the rear company
advances when at full distance. Officers, guides, etc., return to
their posts.
459. The street column forms column of fours by the com
mands and means prescribed for close column. The designated

company executes the movement, the other companies take their

proper places in column of fours, with file-closers on the same
flank as in the designated company. Officers, guides, etc., re
sume their posts in column.
To Protect the Flanks at Street Crossings.

460. Being in column of companies with flankers, the flank

ers of the leading company are ordered into ranks; the first
company having reached the fence, or building, line: 1. First
company, 2. Sections right and left turn, 3. Double time, 4. MARCH.
(i.) At the fourth command, the first section turns to the right,
79

--

=-m=-_

FoRMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTs.

->

o'EE"

#####
sessee-'-####ss

ss || bg: scissss

SS

St. --

--

*>

*>

" o

's

>

co

D
D

"%
$o 5
4.8%,
.
&t,Q. []

o? 4%"

[; 25% o 24,
Q4
Aq>

43
D U

-S
D

#"

S | [j
[N

/.

D2
0

oEmso

DI
* Cl
-D
D

D
->

D
e

*\

D
o:

Plate 92.

w J. 2 *

...-

%*e
3 -U
S. ** - R$:
NS-...

22

=o

Arts. 460-461.

To re-form company in column.

l.
C1 v. DDDD conthS$s.
3%g
A32 SE
: */

/*

D
EE

Art. 460.

Plate 91.

Sections right and left turn

#P

C-

* : B | #D
Q L] |

...Ea
on D
*gld
z D.
[Z D.
00
[Z Cl

07.

* S

, ,
&.

"...t.

cc

* \, ',

*
C.5

D
[]

C12-

..

Z.

S *-*

','

*S*,

| D

55.

- -

'N

s
N

... *S

w J " " a 2.3 -

GROSSSSS's 2
25CaCEOGEGEDER
A ' ', "... ...' ! s !" pe
. . . .*.*.*.*

* Po

&#& ...) 2:.

*::::: * *
s

...' '*',
*''''', base.

NS
o
-D
*-C R < x < * * SS
[2]

Plate 93.

CA CAD a
& J & "

Arts. 462-465.

Company square.

Plate 94. Arts. 464, 466 & 467.

Formation for clearing a street

124

FORMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTS.

the second section to the left; the rear ranks oblique to the left
and right, respectively, joining on the flanks of their respective
front ranks to extend the line across the side street. During
this movement, the charge bayonet will be taken, if necessary, to
force back the mob. The rear companies continue the march.
The single ranks may be advanced along the side street, if nec
essary to clear it. Returning, they form as the rear company
of the column.

(2.) If the street does not cross, but ends at the one through
which the column is marching, the whole of the first company
turns to the right or left.

To Reform the Company in Column.

461. The sections being in line across the side street: I.
Form company, 2. MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH.
At the first command, the sections are quickly formed in
double rank facing by the flank in the direction of the march;
at the second command, the first section executes column left, the
second section column right; as the heads of the sections are
about to unite, the third and fourth commands are given, at
which the sections execute right or left flank, and the company
advances as the rear company of the column.

To Form Company Square.

462. Being in column of sections, marching or at a halt: I.
Form company square, 2. MARCH.
(I.) At the second command, the front rank of the first sec
tion continues the march or stands fast; the rear rank faces

about, and turns to the left in double time; the front rank of the
second section turns to the left in double time; the flank men of
the two ranks avoid each other during the turn, and, if march
ing, each flanker moves to the front as soon as he reaches his
position in the square so as not to delay the march; the rear

rank, second section, continues the march or faces about. Offi

cers and p. os. may be inside or outside the square, preferably
inside. The 1 p. 0. and 2 p. o. have charge of the front ranks,
and the 3 p. 0. and 4 p. 0. have charge of the rear ranks of their
respective sections.

(2.) On the march, the men forming the right flank of the
square
may be directed to carry their pieces with the muzzles
pointing to the right, in a position similar to port arms, in order
81

FoRMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTs.

12:

to facilitate the use of the bayonet, provided that the remaindel

of the company is at port arms.
(3.) One or more men may be detailed from each side of the
square to act as scouts or flankers.
(4.) The square may march to the front, to the rear, by the flank.
and execute the turn, and the oblique. When halted, the mer
will face outward. At the command, forward, the C. C. will indi.

cate the direction of the march with his sword, and the p. os.
will then face their respective sides of the square in the desig
nated direction.

(5.) The color guard (if present) will take post inside the
square. The colors shall not be carried on riot duty except
when landed on foreign territory.

463. The company being in line, marching or at a halt:

I.

Form company square, 2. MARCH.

At the second command, the front rank of the first section
continues the march or stands fast; the rear rank faces about,
turns to the left in double time and each man continues the march

in the original direction, or halts, when in position; the second

section faces about, the original rear rank obliques to the left in
double time to its position in the square, faces to the front and
continues the march, or halts; the original front rank, when

cleared by its rear rank, turns to the left in double time, and each

man continues the march, or faces about and halts, when in po

sition.

To Form for Clearing a Street.

464. Being in company square, marching or at a halt: 1.
Flankers right and left front into line, 2. MARCH.
At the second command, intervals are taken from the center,
if necessary, to reach across the street; the rear side of the square
remains in its place to protect the flanks and rear; the flankers
execute front into line in double time, and the men in the front
line advance at charge bayonet.

465. To reform the square: I. Form square, 2. MARCH.

At the second command, the flankers face to the rear, turn to

the right or left into their places in double time, and continue the
march, or halt.
466. The company being in line, marching or at a halt:
Right flankers into line, 2. MARCH.

I.

At the second command, the company continues the march,

or stands fast; the rear rank, first section, faces to the right and
82

26

FoRMATIONS FOR STREET RIOTS.

he men successively place themselves on the line of the front

ank, in double time; the rear rank, second section, faces about,
bliques to its position in rear of the center, in double time, and
hen continues the march to the front, or halts.

To Form Line from Formation for Clearing a Street.

467. Flankers being in line: I. Form company, 2. MARCH.
At the second command, the right flankers face to the left and
successively resume their places in line, in double time; the rear
:ank, second section, obliques to its position in line in double
ime.

T0. Form Column of Sections.

468. The company square being in march, or at a halt, faced

in the proper direction: 1. Form column of sections, 2. MARCH.
At the second command, the flankers face inward and turn
into their places in double time, avoiding each other during the
movement; if marching, each man, when in position, moves to
the front so as not to delay the march.
469. Company squares of a battalion may be used to clear par
allel streets, each of which may be occupied by a company square

during the advance.

T0. Form Line.

470. Being in company square: 1. Form company, 2. MARCH."

At the second command, each rank turns or obliques, in double
time, to its place in line; each man halts, or continues the march,
when in position.
Artillery.

471. Should artillery be detailed with a battalion for service

in city streets, it will be assigned where its presence may be
most needed. If necessary, squads of riflemen may be detailed
from the infantry companies for its support.

82

WALL SCALING."
General Instructions.

472. (I.) This maneuver is designed for use in connection

with the Formations for Street Riots, and consists of a simple
adaptation of pyramids to military purposes.

As a maneuver

the practical limit of height is fifteen feet, but greater height:

may be scaled by extending the principle when circumstance
are favorable. This exercise will be of great practical valu
when men are compelled to advance in the rear of houses where
walls and fences are encountered.

(2.) The unit adopted is the four. The 1 p. 0. mounts wit

the rear rank of the right four, the 2 p. 0. with the front ran.
of the left four, the 3 p. 0. with the rear rank of the right.
center four, the 4 p. 0. with the front rank of the left-center four
the 5 p. 0. with the rear rank of the middle four of the first
section, and the 6 p. 0. with the rear rank of the middle four
of the second section.

The CS. 0. S. will mount with the from

rank of the middle four of their respective sections. The c.

*mounts as circumstances may require.
(3.) The front and rear rank of each four will mount inde
pendently, the rear rank mounting to the right of its own from
rank.

(4.) For heights of ten feet or less, no special equipment is

required; for greater heights a lanyard is provided.
(5.) The lanyard consists of a piece of twelve-thread manila,
six feet long, with an eye large enough for a man's hand at one

end, and a stopper knot at the other. Matthew Walker"

knots of spun yarn are worked on the lanyard at intervals of
eighteen inches. When not in use, the lanyard is bighted up
and hooked to the left sling of the knapsack by means of a
small eye worked on the lanyard.
T0 Mount.

473. Being in any formation:

1. Wall to the front (or, in suc

cession to the front; or, to the right, left, or rear), 2. MoUNT.

* Prenared by Lieutenant W. J. Maxwell, U. S. N.

84

WALL SCALING.

(1.) At the first command, the section, company, or battalion

at is to mount first will be formed in line of squads along the
ill at such intervals that the rear rank of each squad may form
the right of its front rank. At the second command, given
hen the rear ranks are so formed, all the numbers except num
r four of each rank, rest their pieces against the wall. Num
rs one and two then approach the wall, face each other, advance

eir right and left feet, respectively, near the base of the wall,
ace their right and left hands, respectively, against the wall,
ace themselves, and then interlock the fingers of their free

nds, palms up, thumbs pointing to the rear, thus forming a

rrup. Number three then places his left
ot in the stirrup, his hands on the shoul
rs of numbers one and two, and then

Plate 95. Art. 473 (1.)

No. 4 mounting.

Plate 96. Art. 473 (1.)

No. 4 straddling wall.

rings lightly up, placing his right foot on the left shoulder of
mber one, his left foot on the right shoulder of number two,
?s pointing to the right, his left hand against the wall; he

in turns slightly, and with his right hand grasps the left hand
number four. If on the retreat, the p. 0. and number four
the movement, firing if necessary until their turns come
mount. Number four having grasped hands with number

'

ee, places his left foot in the stirrup, springs up, and places
| right foot on the right shoulder of number one; he then
sens the grasp of number three's hand, places his left foot in

! right hand of number three, and, assisted by the latter,

ings
up, throws his right leg over the wall and straddles it.
85

WALL SCALING,

Plate 97. Art. 473 (2.)

No. 4 mounting high wall.

Plate 98.

Art. 473

Petty officer mounting.

MA

T-

:-

T H-I-T-I-T-I-'
NTFE-TI rl
|-T-I-T-I-7
|-

1.

- -

I-.

|--

Sy:

is:

~.' ...' '

N

#-F#-I-T-I-'

*
--- *

**

*
-

E=

No. 2 mounting.
86

==

Plate 100. Art.478 (4.)

Plate 99. Art. 473 (4.)

Petty officer passing over

1.7

I
L

t
-

WALL SCALING.

(2.) In case the wall exceeds ten feet in height, number four
st grasps right hands with number three, places his right foot
the stirrup, then his left foot on the left shoulder of number
o, loosens the grasp of hands, and places his right foot in the
ght hand of number three, who stoops and braces himself;
mber four next places his left foot on the left shoulder and
s right foot on the right shoulder of number three, who then
)wly straightens up; number four then grasps the top of the
all and straddles it as before.

~-

==
~->==

Plate 101. Art. 473 (5.)

No. 1 mounting.

Plate 102. Art. 473 (6.)

Nos.1 and 2 mounting high wall.

(3) Number four having mounted the wall, number three as

sted by number four, then throws his left leg over the wall
d faces number four.

(4) The p. o. covers the retreat, or assists number four to

ount from the ground; he then mounts as described for num
r three, and, assisted by numbers three and four, passes over
e wall and drops to the other side. Number two then grasps
nds with numbers three and four, and, assisted by number one,
sses over the wall.

(5.) Number one passes up the pieces to numbers three

and

ur,
passone
them
the p. grasps
o. and hands
number
twonumbers
on the other
le: who
number
thentojumps,
with
three
87

WALL SCALING.

and four, and passes over the wall; numbers three and four ti
drop to the ground.
(6.) When the height of the wall requires it, numbers three :
four drop their lanyards to numbers two and one, respectiv
who assist the p. 0 to mount, and then pass up the pieces; nt
bers one and two then haul themselves up, and all drop to
other side. Having passed over the wall, the men form as
rected.

To Fire while Mounting.

474. If advancing or in pursuit, number three, standing
the shoulders of numbers one and two, looks over the wall
reconnoitre; the piece of number four may be passed to
and he may fire a few rounds, and then will assist number f

to straddle the wall; the latter takes his piece from number ti
and continues the fire; number three then assists the p. 0.

pass over the wall and hands him his piece; number two t!
passes over, and the remaining pieces are passed to him;
necessary, each man takes cover and continues the fire as S.
as he reaches the other side.

EXTENDED ORDER.
General Principles.
'75. (I.) The designation extended order, as used in these
ulations, applies to men occupying greater extent of front
rank than when in close order in double rank.

2.) The recruits having attained fair execution in the close

ler drill in the School of the Squad, will be taught the
nciples and methods of the extended order, as applied to the
lad. For this purpose, they will be formed in squads, some
l instructed men being mingled with them, if practicable, to
ilitate their instruction by example.
3.) The number of men in a squad may vary according to
lvenience, so long as the number is suitable for the execution
the methods prescribed. The men are numbered in each
k in regular order from right to left, one, two, three, four.
4) Instruction is first given in the mechanism of the move
nts on the drill ground, with close attention to details, the
0, acting as immediate instructor, under the supervision of

officer, and the instruction is then continued on varied

Dund and adapted to the character of the surface and the con

ions of battle. The latter instruction will be supervised by an

5.) It is important that the instruction of the squad shall be
Prough, which is preparatory to that for the company, wherein
ention to particulars cannot be so readily given.

6.) Men in extended order must keep alert, fix their attention
the first word of command, the first note of the bugle, or the
st motion of the signal; the movement commences immediately

on the completion of the command, call, or signal. Undue

ste in the execution of movements should be prevented.
7.) No commands for dressing are given, but a general align
nt is maintained toward the guide, or base man; the men
nd and march at ease.

8) When deployed, the piece is carried at the shoulder, slope

when
danger
or inconvenience
others will
re
t,trail;
the or,
piece
maynobe
carried
in a horizontalto position
in the
asp of the right or left hand at the balance.
89

ExTENDED ORDER.

(9.) Except when firing is to be opened, the usual positio

the p.o., as instructor, is four paces in front of the squad,
he goes wherever necessary to observe the execution of his c
mands. When firing, he takes position in rear, or to one sid

the squad, as will best enable him to observe the firing.

THE SOUAD IN EXTENDED ORDER.

Extension.

476. (1.) Extension or deployment may be made forwa

that is, in any direction to the front; or by the flank. It w
commonly be made forward, this method being the most c
venient of execution, and according with conditions usual in
attack. But deployment by the flank will be practiced on d
sufficiently for instruction in such method.
(2.) Deployment may be made on any front-rank man as
base man; it is made on number three habitually, unless anot
man is specially indicated by the p. 0.
(3.) Deployment from double rank is made to one rank
close order, or with intervals of from one to five paces betwe
men, seldom exceeding five paces. If in close order, the

mation is designated single rank; if with intervals, then as st

mishers.
To Extend from Double Rank.

477. Being at a halt, to deploy by the flank to single ra

I. Single rank, 2. MARCH.
The base, number three, front rank, stands fast; the files

his right move by the flank to the right, number four to the l
in order to make space for the rear-rank men who come up
the line on the left of their respective front-rank men as S0

as there is space; all face to the front, each man when

in

place, on the line.

To Deploy by the Flank as Skirmishers.

478. Being at a halt: 1. As skirmishers, 2. At one (or
many) pace, 3. MARCH.

(1) Executed as prescribed for forming single rank at a h

except that the interval stated in the command is taken betw.
adjacent men to the right and left from the base man. To
ploy forward from a halt in double rank to single rank, or
skirmishers on number three, the instructor gives the comma
90

ExTENDED ORDER.

#4

rward, preceding the other commands, as:

1. Forward, 2.

'ngle rank, 3. MARCH.

(2.) There is no fixed interval between men when deployed as

irmishers; the interval proper in any case depends principally

on the nature of the duty at the time.

(3.) In the instruction of the squad, different intervals will be

ed to accustom the recruits to judge quickly the interval desig

ted; usually from one to five paces.

To Form Single Rank Forward.

479. Being in march: 1. Single rank, 2. MARCH.

The base, number three, front rank, continues the march
aight to the front, or in the direction indicated by the p. 0.;
: files to the right and left of the base gain ground to the
nt, and to the right and left, respectively, by obliquing and
reasing the cadence, making intervals for rear-rank men who
me up on the left of their front-rank men; all form in single

nk, each man resuming the cadence, and taking the direction
en on the alignment.

To Deploy as Skirmishers.
480. Being in march:

*
6.

X
;

..."

, , ; ; ; , , , ,
, , , ; ; , ...

'

'

'

, ,

1.

As skirmishers, 2. At one (or

so many) pace, 3. MARCH.
Executed on number three,
front rank, similarly as when
forming single rank, march
ing, exceptis that
the between
interval
specified
taken
skirmishers.

To Halt the Squad.

s#.

481. If the command, halt,

teFor position of p. o. see arts. 475 (9), be given before all the men
498 (12).
are on the line of the single

k, or of the skirmishers, only those men halt who are on the

!nment, the others continue the movement and halt, faced to

front, when on the line at their proper intervals.

Deployment.

82. (1.) The right or left front-rank man is indicated as the

man for deployment forward, from a halt or marching, by
"I

ExTENDED ORDER.

left in the commands, as fol- ; ; ; ; ; ; ;

#
# 8

lows: 1. Single rank, 2. Guide

giving the guide as right or

*s, *s, *, *, *, *,

right (or left), 3. MARCH; or,

*ss **, *, *, *, *, * :
I. As skirmishers, 2. At one
**, *, *, *, *, *, * :
(or so many) pace, 3. Guide
's, '''''''', '', ', |
right (or left), 4. MARCH.
(2.) The
guide
is
an
nounced, although the squad
,marching may have the guide
as '#nt.
on the same flank as required for the movement.

(3.) The deployment is made, in accordance with the prit

ciples explained, on number one, front rank, if the guide be at
nounced as right; and on number four, front rank, if announce
as left; in the latter case, number four, rear rank, becomes th
guide as soon as he is on the line.

(4.) Whenever the guide is announced in deployments, th

p. 0. indicates the direction to the guide.
(5.) Deployment as skirmishers from single rank by the flan
when at a halt, or to the front whether at a halt or in marc
is made by the same commands and similar means as fro:
double rank, the men individually taking their intervals fro
the base man, number three of the front rank of the doub
rank, or from the right or left man of the single rank, respe
tively, if the guide be announced as right or left.

Deployed as Skirmishers, to Increase or Diminish Intervals.

483. Being at a halt: I. To (so many) paces extend (or close
2. MARCH.

(I.) The skirmishers extend from, or close toward, the bas

moving by the flank.

(2.) If marching, the movement is made from, or toward th

base (number three, front rank), by obliquing and increasing th
cadence; or, from, or toward, the right or left skirmisher, r

spectively, if the command guide right, or guide left be give

preceding the command, march.

To Close Skirmishers to Single Rank.

484. Whether the deployment as skirmishers be made frol
double or single rank, the words, to single rank, are substitute
in commands for closing in place of the words, to (so many

paces; as, being at a halt, to close by the flank:

92

1. To sing

ExTENDED ORDER.

30,

ank close, 2. MARCH. If marching, to close on number three,

ame commands as when at a halt; to close on right or left

kirmisher: I. To single rank close, 2. Guide right (or left), 3.

MARCH.
MARCHINGS.
T0 Advance.

485. Being deployed and halted, to move forward, the p. 0.

ldicates the point of direction and commands: 1. Forward, 2.
IARCH; or, 2. Guide right (or left), 3. MARCH.
The men take the direction and keep their intervals from the
de toward the base (number three, front rank), or the guide
s announced, but no attempt is made to march in cadence. The
ase man or guide is responsible for the direction, unless the
, 0. places himself directly in his front, in which case he fol
)ws in the trace of the p. 0 at four paces distance.
T0 March to the Rear.

486. Being deployed, at a halt or advancing: 1. To the rear,

| MARCH; or, I. To the rear, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left).
The men face about and march to the rear, conforming to the
rinciples of the march to the front. The p. 0. will move quickly
1 front of the squad.
487. To march again to the front: I. Forward, 2. MARCH;
r, 3. Guide right (or left).

To March by the Flank.

488. Being deployed, at a halt or advancing: 1. By the right
r left) flank, 2.
At the second
ws the man in
ading man on

MARCH.
command, each man faces to the right and fol
his front. The p. 0. moves quickly beside the
his left (or right) and conducts him, or indi

tes the direction.

489. To march again in line:

I. By the left (or right) flank,

MARCH; or, 3. Guide right (or left).

The squad being in march to the rear, or by the flank, if the

mmand, halt, be given, the men face to the front.
To Change Front or Direction.

490. The squad being deployed in single rank or as skirmish

s, to change front or direction, the p. 0 indicates the direc
in and commands: 1. Squad right (or left), 2. MARC", or *
93

ExTENDED ORDER.

Right (or Left) turn, 2. MARCH, according as the squad is

halt or advance, the intervals being maintained.
To Rally.

491. (I.) The rally is used for immediate and concentra

action when there is not time to form in the normal order
resist an attack by cavalry. It should
&
3 2 & 2 .

usually be made on the line or in advance of it, but if there be a better

position a little to the rear, especially
if a better fire may be brought to bear
from it on the advancing cavalry, and
time admits, the rally should be made

there.

It should be explained to the

*.* # ** *

+ . . ."
& A **
+, +

K- K-T-7-----* \
3d

a single trooper on open ground if

we - - - -

. . ..

t 8 +

'',

recruit that he is more than equal to

he remains cool, that it should not be
possible when he has the use of his
rifle with its magazine, and is him
self uninjured, for the mounted man
to reach him; that firm infantry is su

.*.*

''):

o
A*

v" . . "
><

-V-7-? -- ~~

* < *s *

_*

xxx x * x X x
O

A-e
Plate 105,
491 and 530
RallyArts.
by Squad.

perior to a larger body of cavalry, that the rally is not made

cause infantry should fear cavalry, but usually to be ready
defense against attack from the flanks or rear as well as from
front.

(2.) The p. 0. signals or commands: RALLY. The men

toward the p. 0. and group themselves in single rank, fac

the enemy and without regard to relative order if time pres:

in line, in semi-circle, circle, or in such other formation as he r
direct, fix bayonet and bring the piece to the order unless

command for firing, or to charge bayonet, be given. If the p

continues to advance, the men form in rear of him in sin
rank and follow him, fixing bayonet.
(3.) The squad being rallied, may advance, or deploy as s]
mishers. In deploying, the skirmishers return to their forI

places, bayonets unfixed.

If not deployed as skirmishers, the p

directs the men to re-take their proper places in single rank

soon as the occasion admits, if not already in proper relat
order.
T0 Assemble.

492. Being deployed or rallied, the p. o. signals or co

mands:

1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.
94

ExTENDED ORDER.

(I.) The men move toward the p. 0. and form in their proper
aces in double rank; pieces at the order.
(2.) If the p. 0. continues to advance, the men move in double
te, form in double rank, and follow him.

(3.) If deployed as skirmishers and the p. 0. desires the as

mbly to be in single rank, he commands: 1. Assemble in single
nk, 2. MARCH.

The men take their proper places in single

nk.

(4.) Assembling when faced or marching to the rear will not

: executed.

Movements by Signals.
493. (I.) The squad having been instructed sufficiently for in
lligent execution of the foregoing movements, by word of
mmand, will be taught to execute them by signals, as far as
acticable. The signals are supplemented by commands when
:cessary.

(2.) The movements are executed in the most direct manner,

st in quick time, then in double time, and finally at a run; they
hould not succeed each other so rapidly as to produce con
|S1011.

(3.) The p. 0 posts himself four paces in front of the squad,

hich conforms to his signals and movements.
(4.) The squad is exercised in turning, marching to the front,
'ar, and by the flank, obliquing, halting, assembling, etc.
(5.) The man in front of whom the p. 0 posts himself is the

uide of the squad, and follows in the trace of the p. 0. at a

istance of four paces.
(6.) When the p. 0. does not wish the squad to follow him,
e commands: Guide right (or left), and indicates the direction;
marching by the flank he indicates the direction to the lead
1g man.

Signals.

494. (I.) The bugle signals applicable to the squad are in

luded in the drill signals.
(2.) The signals enumerated in paragraph 3 are used alone or
1 conjunction with verbal commands or bugle signals. The
histle call, to fix the attention, may precede a signal, but as

he long whistle sound is used as a signal to cease firing, the

histle call to attract attention will not be used when firing is
1 progress.

(3) In making the signals, the sword, the rifle, or head-dress

95

ExTENDED ORDER.

may be held in the hand when not interfering with the executio
of the signal as prescribed; if interfering, the piece should fir
be shifted to the other shoulder or hand; when the sword i
so used it is in prolongation of the arm.
I. FoRWARD.Raise the right arm until horizontal, extende
laterally, then carry it to the front; at the same time move t
the front.

2. RIGHT OBLIQUE.Raise the right arm until horizontal, ex.

tended obliquely to the right; at the same time move in thal
direction.

3. LEFT OBLIQUE.Similarly to the left, using the left arm.

4. BY THE RIGHT FLANK.Raise the right arm until horizontal
extended to the right; at the same time move to the right.
5. BY THE LEFT FLANK.Similarly to the left, using the lef
afn1.

6. To THE REAR.Face to the rear, raise the arm until hori.

zontal, extended to the rear; at the same time move to the rear
7. CHANGE DIRECTION TO THE RIGHT (or LEFT).Raise the let
(or right) arm until horizontal, extended toward the marching
flank and make circular movement from rear to front, with arm
extended; at the same time facing and moving in the direction
to be taken.
8. ExTEND ONE PACE INTERVAL.Raise both arms until hor:

zontal, extended laterally; if already extended at one pace o

more, the signal indicates further extension of one pace, in eac
case on the base man, or guide; to extend more than one pace
repeat the signal.
9. HALT.Raise the right arm vertically to its full extent
retain it in this position a short time, then lower it to the side
Io. CLOSE; also, TO ASSEMBLE.Raise the arm vertically to it
full extent and slowly describe small horizontal circles; the

squad closes to single rank on the base man, or guide.

II. RALLY.Raise the right arm vertically to its full extent
and circle it rapidly.

12. DOUBLE TIME.Right hand closed, move quickly up and

down a few times, near the side, and take double time.

13. LIE Down.Right arm extended laterally, palm of hand

down and lowered a few times as low as the knee.

I4. ENEMY IN SIGHT.Right arm bent and raised, elbow a

the height of the shoulder, forearm and hand vertical, palm to
the front.

96

L40

ExTENDED ORDER.

15. CEasE FIRING.A somewhat long, shrill, whistle call. The

short whistle call is used to attract attention, and precedes other
signals or commands.
(4.) Signals are of especial use for comparatively small bodies,
patrols, scouts in advance of a line, etc., and under favorable
Sonditions for communicating commands for larger bodies, but
after the fighting becomes serious, the use of motions for con
veyance of commands would have limited application relative to
bodies engaged, except the whistle call for cease firing.

Firings.
495. The recruits having attained a fair degree of execution
in the methods of extension, marching, the assembly, rally, etc., as
prescribed, will be practiced in the firings in both close and ex
tended order, preparatory to exercises in the advance and at
tack. The firing will at first be simulated, and then practiced
with blank cartridges. In all cases, definite objects must be in
dicated; if practicable, targets, preferably silhouettes, will be
used. The instructor should impress upon the recruits that
effectiveness is not attained by rapidity in firing, but by accu
racy in aiming, to attain which men must preserve calmness.
Fire Discipline.
496. The following rules will be impressed upon the recruits,
and strict observance of them exacted:

I. Not to fill the magazine nor load therefrom, unless ordered.

2. Not to load until the moment for firing, unless ordered.

3. Not to fire unless ordered.

4. Always to adjust the sight at the range designated, and aim
at the lower part of the object indicated.

5. To cease firing the instant the command or signal is given

therefor.
General Instructions.

497. (I.) Firing will be executed when the squad is in double

or single rank, also when deployed as skirmishers, and will
ambrace volley firing and the fire at will. A small interval should
>e allowed between commands indicating distances, and the com

mands following, to allow time for proper adjustment of the

sight. The command fire, should be given in a calm, firm tone.

(2.) The instructor will give the closest attention to the exe
'ution of the firings, and, in particular, require exact compliance
with the rules for aiming.
97

ExTENDED ORDER.

(3.) The firings are always executed at a halt.

14.

If the squad

be in march, it halts at the preparatory command for firing, and

loads. The squad kneels, or lies down, if so specified in th
command.

(4.) Volley firing is executed, the squad being closed or de

ployed, by the same commands and means as in the close order
(5.) Not more than three volleys will be fired without inter.
mission in order to avoid waste of ammunition, and preven
undue excitement on the part of the men.
(6.) To fire at will: 1. Fire at will; or, I. Fire at will kneeling
(or lying down), 2. At (such an object), 3. At (so many) yards
4. CoMMENCE FIRING.
At the fourth command, those men only who can see the ob.
ject aim deliberately, fire, load, and continue the firing until the
command or signal: CEASE FIRING.
(7.) To limit the number of rounds in the fire by skirmishers,
the p. 0. may substitute for the command, fire at will, the com
mand, fire one (two or three) round.
(8.) At the command, commence firing, those skirmishers who
can see the object, open fire. Each man after firing the number
of cartridges indicated, executes cease firing. To continue such
firing, the p. 0. commands: Fire one (two or three) round.
(9.) Some practice in firing having been had by the squad
when deployed, and in connection with movements, instruction
-

will then be given on ground of varied surface, with reference

to the use of cover thereby afforded.
INSTRUCTION ON VARIED GROUND.

498. (1.) This instruction is directed by the company officers

on ground previously selected, affording by diversifications 0.
surface the means for thorough practice in the use of cover
change of position being made from one piece of cover as soon
as the benefit evidently derivable therefrom has been obtained

to another piece presenting other conditions, until the instruc.

tion shall embrace all that is essential in the adaptation 0.
method to ground.
(2.) For the preliminary exercise, the squad is marched to :
starting point, distant six hundred to a thousand yards from the
position of a supposed enemy, which will be indicated by the
officer. He then goes over the intervening ground with th

squad, halting as occasions offer, and points out the objects tha
will afford cover, such as undulations of the ground, trees, rocks
98

42

ExTENDED ORDER.

mbankments, ditches, etc., and also things which, whilst not

ffording cover proper, give concealment, such as hedges,
lumps of bushes, high grass, etc., and teaches the recruits how

5 practically make use of the same for cover or concealment;

equiring first, instructed men, if with the squad, to post them

elves as an example, then the recruits; corrects their errors,

specially the error of so placing themselves that the position
f the enemy is screened from view, or in a manner unfavorable
or firing; then passes on with the squad from place to place as
means for illustration may admit.

(3.) The best kind of cover is that which affords favorable

onditions for firing, and for readily advancing and retiring,
nd which also masks the skirmishers from the sight and fire
f the enemy.

(4.) In order to obtain a rest for the rifle, and at the same
ime expose the least part of the body while aiming, the instruc
or explains the following methods:
(a.) Take post, preferably, behind the right of walls, rocks,
leaps of stones or earth, and in the windows and doorways of
he houses on the left side of a street; behind a tree, rest the rifle

on a limb to the right, or rest the left forearm against the right
ide of the trunk.

(b.) Behind embankments of earth, in ditches and furrows,

&neel or lie down and rise slightly to fire; lie down in rear

f a crest or the edge of a plateau, keeping the slope toward the

'nemy in view.

(c.) At the edge of a wood, where there is no ditch nor bank

yf earth, remain a little back from the edge, under cover of the
learest treeS.

(5.) The men are then practiced in posting themselves indi

idually, without immediate supervision, for which purpose the
3xercise in each case is begun at about a thousand yards from

he position indicated for the enemy. The officer having pointed

ut an object to represent the enemy, a target, or silhouette pre

erably, indicates to individual men of the squad different points,

n advance, to which each man, as designated, shall go and post
limself, and also states the distance of the point from the

wbject; directs that each man as designated shall move in quick

ime to the position assigned him, taking advantage, while mov
ng, of any fold of ground, or other means, as screen from view
f the enemy, and post himself, lying, kneeling, or standing, as
99

ExTENDED ORDER.

14

most suitable, and adjust his sight to the distance given; that
if screen from view of the enemy, whilst advancing, is not
hand, to move over exposed ground in double time. When all
the men have posted themselves, the instructor examines t
position of each to see whether he has taken the best advanta
afforded by the position for cover, and firing in connectic
therewith, and sees whether the sights are properly adjusted t
the distance given. The squad is then assembled, and further
advances are made to indicated positions for individual men.

(6.) After a few such exercises, in which the recruits po

themselves at points indicated, they will be practiced individ:
ally in advancing on positions selected for the position of the

enemy, with instructions to halt at places where cover offers and

execute simulated firing, a few shots at each place, then contine
to further cover, and fire.
(7.) Before the advance is begun, the recruit will be instruck.
that in going from one point of cover to another, he may deviat
somewhat from the direction in order to take advantage 0
chance cover or screen, but must resume the original direction
on advancing. The instructor, at the same time, impresses ".
the recruit that the main purpose in making use of cover is no
concealment from the enemy, but to approach him with as littl

loss as may be, whilst, meantime, inflicting upon him, by firing

as great injury as possible; that cover which does not admit of
effective fire on the enemy must be abandoned and advance made

to cover that does; if none such offers, then to a position with

out reference to cover from which effective fire may be deliv
ered. The officer will correct errors and point out advantageous
cover that may have been neglected.

(8.) When the recruits understand the principles, and apply

intelligently the methods explained for taking advantage of
cover available, the squad will be practiced in advancing as

skirmishers over the different grounds of which the particular

features have before been subjects of explanation and of practi.
cal application by men of the squad, individually, and in the
execution of the firings in connection there with. A few well-in
structed men, supplied with blank cartridges, will be detailed to
represent a supposed enemy, and instructed to take advantage

of cover, to expose themselves to view occasionally, to change

their positions at times, but not to leave the vicinity where
posted, and to fire as the men of the squad under instruction a e

exposed when advancing. These exercises should begin at abo"

IOO

#4

ExTENDED ORDER.

thousand yards from the position supposed to be occupied by

n enemy.

(9.) Before beginning the drill, the men are instructed to keep
n the alert for the signals or commands of the p. 0s.; that when
he signal or command to advance is given, each man shall in
tantly move forward, and that no effort will be made to keep
n accurate alignment, but a general line only; that each man
hall apply what he has been taught respecting cover, without
raiting to observe what is done by men to his right or left; that
When deviating from the general direction in advancing to take
dvantage of screen or cover, they must not cross the paths of
men to the right or left; that the general direction will be re
umed on passing the point of screen or cover; that on halting
hey will not, in the absence of command, take the position lying
lown unless necessary for cover.
(IO.) The officer directs when each advance shall be made, in
licates the places for halting, and gives the distances and the
tind of fire to be used at each halt. The p. 0. gives the com
mands of execution in conformity with the directions given him
y the officer.
(II.) The advances, in general, should be for such distances
ls will best utilize the features of the ground, having reference
0 view of the enemy and cover, about one hundred yards at
irst, and a less distance as the position of the enemy is ap
roached. The advances will be made in quick time, except in
assing places fully exposed to view from the position of the
upposed enemy, in which case they will be made in double time
}r at the run, according to the exposure, and the proximity of
he enemy.

(12.) During the advance, the p. 0. leads his squad by placing

limself in front and conducting it, giving his directions by sig
mals as far as practicable. When giving his commands for

firing, he places himself in rear of the squad or to one side.

This rule for the position of the p.o. during firing applies only
o the squad considered by itself, or when under instruction; in

the company or section, the p. o. is on the right of his squad

and fires with it.

(13.) At every halt, simulated firing, volley firing, or the fire at

will, will be commenced at once. Volley firing will not be used
n the exercises much within five hundred yards; the fire at will

may be used for any distance. The exercises will end at about
wo hundred yards from the position of the enemy.
IOI

ExTENDED ORDER.

14

(14.) The officer follows the movement of the squad, retain

supervision and corrects all errors made, when of consequence
he will give particular attention to the firings.
(15.) In connection with these exercises in skirmishing, th
squad executes all the movements prescribed for advancing, re
tiring, extending and closing intervals, changing direction to mee
a supposed approach of an enemy from a flank, assembling, an
rallying, etc.

(16.) When the squad has become fairly well instructed in th

movements as skirmishers, in taking advantage of cover, and it
the execution of simulated firing in connection there with, prae
tice in the advance and several firings will be continued undel

conditions representing, as nearly as may be practicable, those

of actual combat.

Ground not before used for instruction of the

squad, but which has been examined by the instructor, will, in

preference, be selected. The enemy should be represented b.
a squad of instructed men, placed in position under cover as d.
rected by the officer, without having been exposed to view of th:
squad. The squad is marched to the place for beginning the at
tack, a thousand yards or more distant from the position of th
squad representing an enemy, and, when practicable, not in view
of his position; then deployed, moved forward and halted when :
point is reached from which the position of the enemy may be
in general, pointed out. Blank cartridges will be used for th
firing. The p. 0. in command of the squad representing th
enemy, will be instructed to fire occasionally when men of the
advancing squad are much exposed, one or two men only to fir
at a time, except in the event that the advancing squad may
have to pass over places where it will be fully exposed for a con.
siderable space, when a volley may be fired.
(17.) The officer will indicate the position of the supposed

enemy, the places for halting, and the kind and duration of the
firing, also the rate of advance. The march will usually be in
quick time, except when double time or the run is obviously neces.
sary on account of exposure to fire from the enemy. By toC

rapid a pace, with only short stops for firing, the men will neces
sarily become more or less out of breath and be unsteadiet
thereby for accurate firing; it tends also to excitement, which
it is most important to avoid. It should be strongly impresset
upon the men, as in all firing exercises, to preserve calmness

and aim deliberately; that efficacy in firing depends mainly upol

correct aiming; that hasty, unaimed fire is practically useless,
IO2

aste of ammunition, and not effective on an enemy from chance

1OtS.

(18.) In these exercises, the limits for the different firings will

> about as follows:

Volley firing will not usually be employed

r distances within 500 yards; the fire at will, for distances up

about 350 yards; the rapid fire, from about 350 yards to the
oint for making the final rush.
(19.) Not more than from two to four rounds will be fired at
ach halt. The rapid fire will be used as the termination of the
ring for the exercises, one clip, five cartridges, only to be fired;
ldividual men then to continue firing without command, until
he command or signal, cease firing.
(20.) The leaf of the rear sight is laid down at 600 yards.
(2I.) Bayonets shall be fixed at about 350 yards from the po
ition of the opposing squad. Closer approach than 150 yards
5 such position should not be made.
(22.) The position lying down will not be taken after close

pproach is made to the ground occupied by the opposing squad,

tithin about 450 yards, unless specially directed.
(23.) If the position lying down or kneeling at any distance
oes not afford view of the enemy, the position standing must
e taken for firing if the desired view can be so obtained, the
osition kneeling being taken for loading. From any place of
alting, if the object cannot be seen, the command for firing
hould not be given. Individual men who cannot see an object
will not fire; however, if a distinctly defined and suitable object
or cover in the vicinity of the opposing squad is in view, as
or instance the trunk of a tree, stump, rocks, etc., it will be
aken by individuals for an object, though no man of the squad,
epresenting the enemy, happens to be in sight.
(24.) The officer should follow the line closely, and when at

halt will correct errors, if of consequence.

He will always be

areful to observe that the rules for aiming are not slighted, and
mpress upon the men the great importance of deliberate and
ccurate aiming.

(25.) It should not be inferred that the distances specified as

pproximate limits for the different firings in the instruction of
he squad, are fixed with reference to firing in battle. The rapid
re, which must necessarily be employed on close approach to
he enemy, and preceding an assault, or for repelling the Same,
may be used for any distance within range, on occasions when

uch firing will be deemed to be most effective.

IO3

ExTENDED ORDER.
156

|
|
:

rw

--

o:

0.
o

i#

<

** 14 a swg

|
#o:9"

i:
-

:
''

/
af
o
o

*!#"

->

|[.|
;| ###

**

**.*
oos - - - -

.
.

.
:o

<--

.
*:

s'

.
.
.
.
i

*#*

2
*
o
o

Plate 110. Arts. 531-532. Front attack by the company.

IO4

--~~~~

177

ExTENDED ORDER.

o's-

r.:

>

i[]

oe:

->
t
o
-<

E.
...].
oocw*

oo-6

[]

::::

||

|3

.
.Og. .

oz-:
o

r
o

o
o

<

|
|

i#

-- door

h
o

--

|#>:

[..[]

(Ng
o

[]*.[]

:o*-.Ox

op
o

-"

r
*

|
O

<---oos--->

i#

#.

--- oos' 2"

w
x

<.

Mt.

Plate 111. Arts. 544,561 and 569. Front attack by the battalion in seven phases.
IO5

178

ExTENDED ORDER.

-|

-*

-:

.
:
:
|*

.*
-*

[oto__D,[...]02o

-*

-i
-

-"os

#-3.

-->S.

-ooz-*
-

o
oi

|[2CE

[]

:::

->

&

Plate 112. Arts. 544, 561 and 569. Front attack by the battalion in seven phases-cond

I06

ADVANCE AND REAR GUARD.

577. (I.) An advance guard is a body of men thrown out in
nt of a marching column to cover its movements, to prevent
rprise, and gain information.

(2.) In an advance, it seizes advantageous positions and holds

em until the main body comes up; or holds in check the ad
ncing enemy until the main body can deploy and take up a
sition to meet him.

(3.) In retreat, it prepares the way for the main body, guard
g and repairing roads, bridges, etc., sweeping away any parti
ns or guerrillas. If hostile bodies have outmarched the
lumn and are in front of it, the advance guard performs duties
the same nature as in the advance.

(4.) The advance guard is divided into two nearly equal parts,
e vanguard and the reserve. The vanguard is subdivided into
e advance party, and the support. The advance party furnishes
e leading and flanking groups. The support furnishes its own
'nkers.

578. (1.) An advance guard, consisting of two companies of

fantry, may be disposed as follows: A point, or leading group,
nsisting of three men under a p. 0.; a flanking group of three
en on either hand, one hundred and fifty yards distant and
mewhat retired; the remainder of the advance party, fifteen
len, under a C. 0. S., at one hundred yards in rear of the point.
(2.) The support follows at one hundred and fifty yards in rear
f the advance party, throwing out, if necessary, two flanking
oups of three men each, slightly in advance of the support, and
mewhat farther out than the flankers of the advance party. The
mmander of the vanguard is with the support.

(3.) The company in reserve, one-half of the advance guard, fol

ws at two hundred and fifty yards in rear of the support; the
serve may throw out flanking detachments at from two hun

ed to four hundred yards, on either or both flanks, and some

hat in advance and in rear of its position.

(4.) In a small advance guard, the force is disposed in a similar

anner, the reserve being omitted.
(5.) The commander of the advance guard is with the reserve.

(6.) The main column follows at three hundred yards in rear

the reserve, or eight hundred yards from the point.

(7.) When necessary, the support sends out one or two men to
eserve communication with the advance party; the reser
107

ADVANCE AND REAR GUARD.

192

send out men to preserve communication with the vanguard a

with the main body.
579. (I.) Rear guards are corresponding bodies in rear oft
column. In a forward movement, they protect the rear of t
column from raiding parties or detachments, arrest straggle
prevent pillaging, etc.

(2.) In a retreat, they cover the column, checking the enem

and delaying him so as to insure the safety of the column.
(3.) The example given of the order of march of the advu,

guard serves equally well as a type for a rear guard of the sai
strength, if it be considered as faced to the rear throughout.
580. (I.) The strength of the advance guard in a forwa
movement varies from one-eighth to one-fourth of the who
force; in a very small force, one-eighth; in a very large fo
one-fourth; and, generally, one-sixth. The rear guard is usu
one-half the strength of the advance guard.
(2.) In retreat, the proportions given above for the adv
guard, will also apply to the rear guard, and the former sho
be half the strength of the latter.
(3.) It sho
x.x.x
Pot * F/are K*** be b or n e
-4avance J X x
#6. wro-..x,x
Party
* - - - - ,, ,- - - - *
Grow, mind,
howev
+
that these p
*** {*---s
- - - - - 2%
portions vary a
* -- 4:=-cording to c
:

''

cumstances,

~ - A

:
-- " -- ~~

eye

--

--- xx

~*

"

-- -

-----.

upon

the

jud

ment of the co,

mander.

il

581. rules
The
going
be

#
m

modified
-

| -

Plate 115.

__x> must de per

S.

X X-

suit the var.

Arts. 577-581.

Advance guard.

Jzatzz Coa "re

of a

Vance and retre

Note:It will be seen from the plate that the disposition of the two companies.

ing the advance guard is such that they may be quickly thrown into battle forms
for attack or defense. The advance # with its point and flanking groups, may
ploy at once into a skirmish line while the section in support moves up promptly.t
enforce it; and the company in reserve may deploy and advance at once to jin
firing-line, thus forming the whole force as a screen behind which the main column.
form for attack or defense. Or, each line may, if overpowered, fall back in succes
upon the one in rear until the whole advance guard is in a skirmish line. Every
talion should be exercised in this manner.

IO8

CAMPING.
582. (I.) In the presence of the enemy, the men bivouac in
Dsition; if safety permits, tents may be pitched immediately in
'ar of the line of stacks; the tents of the company officers in
lar of their companies, the tents of the field and staff in rear
the center of the line of company officers.
(2) When not in the presence of the enemy, each battalion
iually camps in column of companies at convenient distances.
he tents of each company are arranged in two lines, facing
ch other, or in one line, all facing in the same direction; the
nts of the company officers are arranged in line parallel to the
ink of the column and at a convenient distance, facing the com
iny street, C. C's tent on the right. The 1 p. 0's. tent is on the
ink of the company toward the officer's tents.

(3.) The tents of the bt. C. and his staff, when practicable, are
line in rear of, and parallel to, those of the company officers;

ebt. C. opposite the center of the column; the adj. is on the

it of the bt. c.; the other staff officers are on the left of the adj.
(4.) The bg. C. is opposite the center of the column in rear
the line of bt. Cs.; the bg. adj. on his left; the other staff

ficers on the left of the adj.

(5.) The tents of the sf. p. 0s., are in rear of the tents of the
|ff; they may be assigned to tents in the companies.

(6.) The kitchens of the men and sf. p. 0s., are in line on the

nk opposite the company officers; they may be placed at the

ad or rear of the column; the sinks for the men and Sf. p. 0s.
: outside of the line of kitchens.

7.) The kitchens of the officers are in rear of their tents; the
|ks for the officers are in rear of the line of tents of the bg.
p. 0S.

8.) The positions of the color line, guard tents, field hospital,
illery, etc., are prescribed by the commanding officer.
9.) The width of the company streets and the streets in front

the company officers, bt. cs. and staffs, and bg. C. and staff,
ries with the nature of the ground and the strength of the
mmand.
I09

194

CAMPING.

(IO.) Ground for camping should be susceptible of good drain

age, and should be near wood and water.
(II.) When time will permit, all the streets are ditched; a shal
low ditch is also made around each tent.

(12.) When straw, leaves, or boughs are at hand, the me!

should be required to raise their beds above the ground; atten
tion to this rule, to cleanliness, and to the proper cooking 0
food will greatly diminish the number and frequency of camp
diseases.

(13.) On arriving in camp, sinks should at once be dug. Th

sinks should be concealed by bushes or tents, and should be coy
ered daily with fresh earth.
(14.) In winter quarters, tents may be pitched on frames malt
of boards or split logs, the bunks of the men being arrange
one above another.
Tents.

583. (1.) Low wall tents of cotton drilling, are recommend:

for naval use. They should be of a size sufficient to accomme
date four men easily, and, in cases of emergency, six men.

(2.) A full company requires fifteen tents, thirteen for men ar.
two for officers, one for the C. C. and one for the two Cs. 0.8.

(3.) Men are tented as they stand in the company, squad lea
ers with their squads.

Details of Laying Out a Camp and Pitching Tents.

584. (I.) Company streets should be about twenty feet wide
The distance between streets should be equal to twice the depth
of a tent plus six feet, the latter for the distance between tent
of adjoining companies.

(2.) The right of a company should be toward the officers

tents with front and rear ranks on opposite sides of the streets
(3.) Lay off lines representing the sides of company streets
On these lines lay off points, opposite which the centers of tent:
are to rest; these points should be a distance apart equal to thi
front of a tent plus eight feet. Place the ridge poles on the
ground opposite these points, at right angles to the streets, Ont

end of each pole touching the point. At the ends of the pole:
dig holes for the uprights, which in depth should be equal to
the difference between the height of the tent and the length 0
the upright.

(4) Place the ridge poles in the tents, rounded side up. In
[10

CAMPING.

195

ert the pins of the uprights in the holes of the ridge poles and
rrange the tents on the ground with the feet of the uprights
ear their holes. Drive the pegs for the corner guys into the
round; they should be located at points intersected by lines
rawn parallel to, and two feet to the front and rear, and three
set from the sides of the tents.
e

e.

e.

*ext Ks.

ado (t/dens.

e? ee? oo: oo:

an an of as

ocio Good oooooo

CJ

coco 600 QGoo oGo

tomy, %cers.

o -/(ife, ens.

##
ee';3

o o co o

O O. O.

O Oo

oooe ---- B7, cs and 3/a/.

o oo - - - - J A P 0.3,

0 w
o - - - - /( : *ch epts,
##
Q @ 9% & B & c. and staff.

o o o - - - & A. A. o.5

o - - - - A * *ezt.

0//teers Jenks.

Plate 116. Arts. 582-585. Camping.

(5.) Raise the tents, both uprights at the same time, place the
>et of the latter in their respective holes and haul out, and
auten the corner guys equally. Drive the remaining pegs on

nes between the corner ones, the wall pegs opposite their loops.
585. The landing force of a ship should be frequently exer
ised on shore at camping for two or three days at a time, in
rder to become familiar with all the details of a well ordered

amp founded on strict military and sanitary rules.

III

OUTPOSTS.
586. (1.) The size of the detachment for outpost duty depend
upon the strength of the main command, the proximity of ti
enemy, the extent of front to be covered, the character of ti
country, etc., it should not, as a rule, exceed one-sixth of ti
whole force.

(2.) The object is to guard all approaches, to obtain the eff

liest information of the enemy's movements, and to obstruct a
delay his advance.
(3.) The outposts should cover the entire front, and extend w:
beyond the flanks and toward the rear.
(4.) Outposts are generally disposed as follows:
(a)A line of sentinels.
(b)A line of small groups, called pickets.
(c)A line of larger groups, called supports.
(d)The reserve.
(5.) The reserve is sometimes omitted when the supports ho
a strong defensive line.
(6.) Posts in the line of sentinels are from one hundred to thr
hundred yards apart, and one or two men are placed on eac
pOSt.

(7.) The sentinels keep themselves concealed and watch

th

ground in their front and between them and the posts on the
right and left; at least one man on each post must always be 0
the alert.

(8.) The picket is posted about four hundred yards in rear 0

the center of the line of sentinels for which it furnishes reles

The picket, when necessary, sends out patrols.

(9.) The support is posted about six hundred yards in rear 0
the center of the line of pickets.

(Io.) The reserve is about one thousand yards in rear of th

line of supports, and about two thousand yards in front of "

main body.

(11.) The distances given above will be modified accordin

to circumstances, by the commander of the outposts.

587. (I.) The line of sentinels and the line of pickets may be r
II2

OUTPOSTs.

197

laced by a single line of posts of four men each. The posts

hould be about one hundred yards apart, and one man at each
ost should be continually on the alert.
(2.) The line of small posts should not be more than three
undred yards in advance of the supports. As a rule, this for
nation should be adopted only when the outpost line is in a
lose country and occupies a strong position.
- 260

* : *
*
*

*\,

Ar
,

5%:...'...
$

4
''

&

4'

s 6,-- e." 2.7%

N. :
*... O

**.

s
I

O*e.

Comp
-

*:::::: *
*...*
#.

1
S.

$
*
t
t

th

JWeserve
Zivo Coenoa wres.
*

|:
JP/at ot

Aody.
Plate 117. Arts. 586587. Outpost.

Note.It will be seen from the plate that the disposition of the four companies as an
it
post in four lines is similar to the preliminary formation of a battalion in extended
der. Two companies are advanced, one section of each company 'n' in line of
uads 600 yards in front of the supporting section of the same company. Each squad
rnishes one or two sentinels.

In oase of an alarm or attack the pickets may deploy

ci advance as a firing-line to aid the sentinels, while the section in support advances
re-inforce the firing-line; and the two reserve companies may come up on the
in extended order, thus throwing the whole battalion into battle

ont
as a may,
resisting
screen behind
the main
bodyinmay
forX'
the #post
is
ch line
in succession,
fall which
back upon
the one
rearprepare
until the
com
'ployed into a firing-line. It may be possible, in either case: to avoid m
(Hie, and thus keep good control. It is an excellent exercise to dispose.
an outpost, and then maneuver as in an attack.
I13

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

ROSTERS.

588. A roster is a list of officers or men for duty, with a

record of the duty performed by each. Generally, details for
duty are made so that the one longest off is the first for detail
Details so made are said to be made by roster.
600. (I.) In the field, when the commanding officer deems it
advisable, a company may be detailed to form the guard, the
C. C. being the officer of the day, and the Cs. 0. S. officers of the
guard. The company is inspected on its own parade by is
commander and is marched to the post of the guard by th:
senior C. 0. S.

(2.) The same principle may be made to apply to the detail c

an organization or subdivision larger or smaller than a com
pany.

604 (1.) The following are the usual rosters relative to guar
duty.
I.Officers of the day.
2.Officers of the guard.
3.First petty officers of the guard.
4.Petty officers of the guard.
5.Musicians of the guard.
6.Men of the guard.

(2.) The first two are kept by the bt. adj. ; the third, fourth,
and fifth by the C. p. 0. under the supervision of the adj., or by
the 1 p. 0s. of companies, as may be directed by the command

ing officer; the sixth is always kept by the 1 p. 0s.

C. c.s. super

vise the keeping of the company rosters by their 1 p. 0s., and

see that all duties performed by members of the company are

duly credited.
605. C. os. serve on the first roster, Cs. 0.8. serve on the sec
ond roster, and may also be placed on the first roster, at the
discretion of the commanding officer.
h

608. Post and camp guards will be relieved every twenty-four

O111S.

609. Except in emergencies, no duty shall be required of the

*I4

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

'd officer of the day, or of the old guard, until four hours after
hey have been relieved.

615. At 1 p. os. call, all the 1 p. os. proceed to headquarters

nd take from the bulletin board all the data necessary for them
o make the required details from their respective companies;
hey make their details accordingly from their rosters.

622. The number and posts of sentinels about a regularly

Drmed camp, are as follows: One over the arms of the guard;
ne at the commanding officer's tent, and as many on the front,
ear, and flanks as may be necessary. No sentinel will be
osted so distant as not to be heard by the guard, either directly
r through other sentinels.
FIRST PETTY OFFICER OF THE GUARD.

(Hand Book, page 203.)

682. The senior p. o. of the guard always acts as 1 p. o. of
he guard, and if there be no officer of the guard, will perform
he duties prescribed for the commander of the guard.

685. Immediately after guard-mounting, he will prepare du

Plicate lists of the names of all p. 0s., musicians, and men of
he guard, showing the relief and post, and the duties of each.
One list will be handed as soon as practicable to the commander
5f the guard; the other will be retained by himself.

686. He will see that reliefs are turned out at the proper
ime, and that the p. os. thoroughly understand, and are prompt
and efficient in the discharge of their duties.

687. During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of

he 1 p. o. of the guard, the next in rank of the p. 0s. present
will perform his duties.

689. After breakfast, he will cause the guardhouse or guard

ent and the space around it to be policed by the prisoners, if
here be any, or by members of the guard if there be no pris
)ners.

690. He will see that the guard-room and cells are thoroughly
Policed twice daily, morning and evening.
691. At 1 p. 0's. call, he will proceed to the adj's. office and
5btain the guard report book.

692. When the colors are taken from the stacks of the color

ine, the color bearer and guard, or the 1 p. o. of the

II5

guard,

204

MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.

unarmed, and two armed men as a guard, will escort the colors
to their destination.

693. Upon the return of men having passes, the passes will
be given to the 1 p. 0. of the guard, who will endorse upon

them the time at which each of the men, included in a pass, re.
turns; at guard-mounting he will turn in the passes to the com:
mander of the guard.

694. He will report to the commander of the guard any sus.

picious or unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will
warn him of the approach of any armed body, and will send t.
him all persons arrested by the guard.
695. When the guard is turned out, its formation will be a
follows: The senior p. 0., if commander of the guard, is on th
right of the front rank, the right guide falling back into the rea
rank; if not commander of the guard, he is the right guide; th
next in rank is the left guide; the others, in the line of file
closers, each in rear of his relief; the field music, three paces t
the right of the right guide. The reliefs form in the same orde
as when the guard was first divided.

696. The 1 p. o. forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if no

in command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard
as prescribed in the School of the Company for a 1 p. 0
forming a company; the guard is not divided into sections, and,

except when the whole guard is formed prior to marching off

fours are not counted.

697. The 1 p. 0. reports as follows: Sir, the guard is pris.

ent; or, Sir, the guard and prisoners are present; or, Sir
the guard is present, and the prisoners are secure: or, Sir ($0
and so) is absent, or, if the roll call has been omitted, Sir, 't
guard is formed. Only men absent without proper authoriy

are reported absent.

He then takes his place, without command

698. At night, the roll may be called by reliefs and numbe's

instead of names; thus, the first relief being on post: Second

relief, p. 0.; No. 1; No. 2; etc. Third relief, p. 0.; No. 1; etc.
699. Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the
guard when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approad
of an armed body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such
cases the roll may be called before dismissing the guard.
700. When directed by the officer of the guard to dismiss the
guard, the 1 p. 0 salutes, steps in front of the guard, and com:

mands:

I. Port, 2. ARMs, 3. Open, 4. CHAMBER, 5. Close, 6

II6

*** **--

MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.

205

|AMBER, 7. DISMISSED; or, 7. Order, 8. ARMs, 9. Stack, Io.

MS, II. DISMISSED.

'01. The 1 p. 0. of the guard has the direct charge of prison

, and is responsible to the commander of the guard for their
urity.
'02. He will carry the keys of the guard-room and cells, and
! not suffer them to be removed from his personal possession
ile he is at the guardhouse, except in the event of his leaving
guardhouse for any purpose, when he will turn the keys over
the p. 0. who takes his place.
'03. He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the pris
:rs with their food, and see that none of these articles remain
their possession. He will see that no prohibited articles of
kind are conveyed to the prisoners.

'04. (I.) Prisoners, when paraded with the guard, are placed
line, in its center. The 1 p. 0., immediately before forming
guard, will turn over the keys to the p. 0. at the guard
use. Having formed the guard, he will divide it into two
irly equal parts. Indicating the point of division with his
ad, he commands: 1. Right (or Left), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4.
ARCH, 5. Guard, 6. HALT, 7. Left (or Right), 8. FACE.
2) If the command be, right face, the right half of the guard
ly will execute the movements; if, left face, the left half only
l execute them. The command, halt, is given when sufficient
erval is obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the
ard-room and cells are then opened by the p. 0. having the

is. The prisoners will file out under the supervision of the
, 0., the p. 0. and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and

1 form in line in the interval between the two parts of the

ird.

05. (I.) To return the prisoners to the guard-room and cells,

1 p. 0. commands: I. Prisoners, 2. Right (or Left), 3. FACE,
"orward, 5. Column right (or left), 6. MARCH.

2.) The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, re

n to their proper rooms or cells.

O6. (I.) To close the guard, the 1 p. o. commands: 1. Left

Right), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 6. HALT,
*ight (or Left), 8. FACE.

2.) The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated,

cutes the movement.

07. If there be but few prisoners, the 1 p. 0. may indicate

117

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

206

the point of division as above, and form the necessary intery

by the commands:

1. Right (or Left) step, 2, MARCH, 3. Guar

4. HALT, and close the intervals by the commands: 1. Left (

Right) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT.
708. The 1 p. o. of the guard will cause the p. o. of each rel
to verify the number of prisoners whenever his relief goes on pe.
709. If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may be posted in i
tachments.

PETTY OFFICER OF THE GUARD.

710. P. os. of the guard are assigned to reliefs by the cq

mander of the guard.

711. A p. 0, of the guard receives and obeys orders from nd

but p. 0s, of the guard senior to himself, the officers of
guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding officer.
712. It is the duty of the p. 0. of the guard to post and reli
sentinels and to instruct the members of his relief in their
ders and duties.

713. Immediately after the division of the guard into relie

the p. 0s. will assign the members of their respective reliefs
posts by number, and a man so assigned to his post will n

be changed to another during the same tour of guard du!

unless by direction of the commander of the guard, or high
authority. Usually, experienced men are placed over the arr
of the guard, and at remote and responsible posts.
714. Each p. 0, will then make a list of the members of h
relief, including himself. This list will contain the number
the relief, the name, the company, and battalion of every men

ber thereof, and the post to which each man is assigned. Th

list will be made in duplicate, one copy to be given to the
p. 0. of the guard as soon as completed, the other to be r
tained by the p. 0.
'715. As soon as the officers of the day have visited their "

spective guards, or as soon as directed by the officer of th

guard, the p. o. of the first relief posts his relief.
716. (1.) The p. o. forms his relief, and then command:
CALL OFF.

Commencing on the right, the men call off all

nately, rear and front rank, one, two, three, four, in

so on; if in single rank, they call off from right to left. Th
p. 0. then commands: I. Right, 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MAR"

(2) In wet weather the relief may be marched at the secure.

(3.) The p. o. marches on the left, and near the rear file,
118

-->======TY.'"
MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.
207

*r to observe the march. The p. 0 of the old guard marches

the right of the leading file, and takes command when the
one of the old sentinels is relieved, changing places with the
of the new guard.

17- When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel, the
D. halts it and commands, according to the number of the
t; No. (). The new sentinel comes to the port, ap
aches the old, and halts at about one pace from him.

18. (1.) The p. os. advance and place themselves, facing each
er, a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old p. 0, on his
it, the new p. 0. on his left, both at the order, and observe
the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions.
2.) The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken:

is the relief; A, the new p. 0.; B, the

:19.
C, (I.)
the new
D, the
old. to
The sentinel;
instructions
relative

c| |
-

post having been communicated, the

B
p. 0. commands: Post, then steps | | |
:k about two paces and commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
2.) The p. 0s. take their places as the relief passes them,
20. The sentinels at the guardhouse are the first relieved;
y are left at the guardhouse.
21. On the return of the old relief, the p.o. of the new guard
ls out when the relief halts; the p. 0. of the old guard forms
relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, and reports to the
t

mmander of his guard: Sir, the relief is present, and takes

place in the guard.

'22. (I.) To post a relief after the sentinels of the old guard
re been relieved, its p. 0 forms it by the commands: 1.
1ch) relief, 2. FALL IN; and if arms are stacked, 3. Take, 4.
MS.

2.) The relief is formed in double or single rank (according

the guard is formed) facing to the front, with arms at the
er; the men place themselves according to the numbers of
ir respective posts, viz.: two, four, six, and so on, in the front
k; one, three, five, and so on, in the rear rank, or in the order

their respective posts from right to left, according as the re

is in double or single rank. The p. o., standing about two
ses in front of the center of his relief, then commands: CALL
F; the men call off as prescribed.

3) The p.o. then commands: 1. Port, 2. ARMs, 3. Open,

II9

208

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

4. CHAMBER, 5. Close, 6. CHAMBER, 7. Order, 8. ARMs; faces t

commander of the guard, executes the rifle salute, reports:

the relief is present, and then takes his place on the right, at t
order.

723. Having inspected the relief, the commander of the gun

directs the p. 0.: Post your relief. The p. o. salutes and pos
his relief as prescribed; the p. Q. of the relief on post does n
go with the new relief, except when necessary to show the w
724. If so directed by the commander of the guard, the p.
before posting his relief, will command: I. With empty ch
ber, 2. LOAD, 3. Order, 4. ARMS.
725. To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to
front at the guardhouse by the p. 0. of the new relief, who t
falls out; the p. 0. of the old relief steps in front of the rel
and commands: I. Port, 2. ARMS, 3. Open, 4. CHAMBER,
Close, 6. CHAMBER, 7. DISMISSED; or, 7. Order, 8. ARMS,
Stack, Io. ARMS, II. DISMISSED.

726. Should the pieces have been loaded before the rel
was posted, the p. o. commands:

1. Empty, 2. MAGAZINE,

Port, 4. ARMs, 5. DISMISSED; or, 3. Order, 4. ARMs, 5. Stal

6. ARMs, 7. DISMISSED.

727. Each p. 0. will thoroughly acquaint himself with all t

special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see that ea
sentinel correctly transmits such orders in detail to his successd
728. He will see that each sentinel, on being posted, clear
understands the limits and extent of his post.

729. There should be at least one p. o. constantly on ti

alert at the guardhouse, usually the p. 0. whose relief is on pos
This p. 0. takes post near the entrance of the guardhouse, an

does not fall in with the guard when it is formed.

He will hav

his rifle constantly with him.

730. He will see that no person enters the guardhouse, 0

guard tent, or crosses the posts of the sentinels there pose

without proper authority.

731. Should any sentinel call for the p.o. of the guard, th
p. 0. will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to sic
sentinel. He will notify the 1 p. o. of the guard, before lea)
ing the guardhouse.

732. He will at once report to the commander of the guar

any violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence reporte
to him by a sentinel, or coming to his notice in any other wa
120

MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.

209

3- Should a sentinel call: The Guard, the p. o. will

1 ptly notify the commander of the guard.
#4. Should a sentinel call: Relief, the p.o. will at once
!eed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man
for duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a

"t time only, the p. 0. will see that he is again posted as soon
he necessity for his relief ceases.

35. Immediately before the hour for challenging to begin,

p. 0. whose relief is on post will communicate the counter
1 to all the sentinels of his relief, excepting those posted at
guardhouse.

36. He will, at the proper time, notify No. 1, of the hour,

entinels are required to call the hours or half hours of the
ht.

37. He will wake the p. o. whose relief is next on post in

le for the latter to form his relief and post it at the proper
11".

'38. Should the guard be turned out, each p. 0. will call his
n relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly.
739. P. 0s. will ascertain the tents or bunks of all members

their reliefs, in order to turn them out when necessary, in the

ortest time, and with the least confusion.

740. When challenged by a sentinel, while posting his relief,

e p. 0. commands: 1. Relief, 2. HALT; to the sentinel's chal
nge he answers: Relief, and at the command of the senti
l, he advances alone to give the countersign, or to be recog
zed. When the sentinel says: Advance relief, the p. 0.
mmands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. If to be relieved, the sen
hel is then relieved as prescribed.

741. Between retreat and reveille, the p. 0. of the guard will

hallenge all suspicious persons or parties he may observe, first
alting his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will ad
ince them in the same manner that sentinels on post advance
ke parties; but if the route of a patrol is on a continuous chain
f sentinels, he should not challenge persons coming near him
nless he has reason to believe that they have eluded the vigi
Ince of sentinels.

742. Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an

fficer entitled to inspect the guard, the p.o. will call: Turn
ut the guard, announcing the title of the officer and then, if

lot otherwise ordered, he will salute, and return to his post.

I2I

210

MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.

743. Between retreat and reveille, on the approach of

armed party other than a returning relief or detachment of t

guard, he will call: Turn out the guard: Armed party, a

remain where he can observe the movements of the party wh
the guard is forming, and then return to his post.

744. As a general rule, he will advance parties approachi

the guard at night in the same manner that sentinels on

advance like parties. Thus: The sentinel at the guardhou

challenges and reports the answer to the p. 0, as prescrib
hereafter; the p.o. advancing at the port, says: Advance {
and so) with the countersign, or to be recognized if there
no countersign used; the countersign being correctly given,

the party being duly recognized, the p. 0, says: Advance

and so); repeating the answer to the challenge of the senti
745. When officers of different rank approach the guardho
from different directions at the same time, the senior will
advanced first, and will not be made to wait for his junior.

746. Out of ranks and under arms, the p.o. salutes with t
rifle salute. He will salute all officers, whether by day or nig
747. The p. 0. will examine parties halted and detained
sentinels, and if he has any reason to believe the parties ha
no authority to cross sentinels' posts, will conduct them to t

commander of the guard.

748. The p. 0. of the guard will arrest all suspicious dia
acters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a di
orderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken i
the act of committing crime against the Government on a
reservation or post. All persons arrested by p. os. of the guar.
-

or by sentinels, will at once be conducted to the commande

of the guard by the p. 0.
MUSICIANS OF THE GUARD.

749. Musicians of the guard are subject to the orders of non

but the commanding officer, the officer of the day, officers in
p. 08. of the guard.

750. Unless otherwise directed by the commanding offite:

they will remain at the guardhouse during their tour, and vil
fall in with the guard when it is formed. They form on a lint
with the front rank of the guard, their left three paces from #
right guide.

751. Musicians of the guard sleep at the guardhouse, unles

otherwise directed by the commanding officer.
I22

FF-E--->==
MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

*H,
211

2. They will sound all calls prescribed by the commanding

er, and such other calls as may be ordered by proper au

ity, at such times and places as may be directed.

53- Should the guard be turned out for the colors, the field
ic of the guard will, when the guard presents arms, sound,

he color, or, if for any person entitled thereto, the prescribed

ch, flourishes, or ruffles.
ORDERLY FOR COMMANDING OFFICER.

54. When so directed, the adj. will select an orderly for the
lmanding officer from the members of the new guard, an
a man being detailed for guard for this purpose; the selec

is usually made during the inspection at guard-mounting.

55. The man who is most correct in the performance of duty
in military bearing, neatness in person and clothing, and
Dse arms and accoutrements are in the best condition, will

chosen. Clothing, arms, and equipments must conform to

regulations prescribing the uniform. The adj. will notify
commander of the guard of his selection.

56. When directed by the commander of the guard to fall

and report, the orderly will give his name, company, and
talion, to the 1 p. 0. of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in
arm rack in his company quarters, will proceed at once to
commanding officer, reporting: Sir (name), company, re
ts as orderly.

'57. In the field, or on the march, the equipment of the or

ly will be as directed by the commanding officer.
MEN OF THE GUARD.

64. Without permission from the commander of the guard,

mbers of the guard, except orderlies, will not remove their

outrements or clothing, nor leave the immediate vicinity of

guardhouse.

'65. During his tour of guard duty, a man is subject to the

lers of the commanding officer, the officer of the day, the
icers and p. 0s of the guard only.
'66. When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty,
member of the guard will salute all officers who pass him.
is rule applies at all hours of the day or night.

'67. Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each mem.

', not at once required for duty, will place his rifle in the arm
I23

212

MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.

racks, if they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom

less he requires it in the performance of some duty.
768. Men are assigned to reliefs by the commander of
guard, and to posts, usually, by the p. 0. of their relief. T
will not change from one relief or post to another, during
same tour of guard duty, unless by proper authority.

769. Should the guard be formed, the men will fall in r:

under arms. At a roll call, the men are brought to the
each man, as his name or number and relief are called, answ
Here, and comes to the order.
ORDERS FOR SENTINELS ON POST.

770. Orders for sentinels on post are divided into two cla
general orders and special orders.

771. Sentinels will be required to memorize the follow

My general orders are:
1. To take charge of this post and all Government prop
in view.

2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping constal

on the alert, observing everything that takes place within si

or hearing.

3. To report every breach of orders or regulations that I

instructed to enforce.

4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the gua
house than my own.
5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.

6. To receive, transmit, and obey all orders from, and all

myself to be relieved by, the commanding officer, officer of

day, an officer or p. 0. of the guard only.
7. To hold conversation with no one except in the proper
charge of my duty.
8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.
9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance in the vicinity of
post.

Io. In any case not covered by instructions, to call the

of the guard.
II. To salute all officers, and colors not cased.
12. At night to exercise the greatest vigilance. Between 1
treat (or o'clock, naming the hour designated by the cof

manding officer) and broad daylight, challenge all persons st

on or near my post, and allow no person to pass without prop
authority.
I24

M: G.E Dr.

21:=

72. In addition to the foregoing, sentinels posted at the

rdhouse or guard tent, will be required to memorize the
)wing:
Between 8 a. m., and sunset, to turn out the guard for all
ions entitled to the compliment, for all colors not cased, and
all armed parties approaching my post, except men at drill,
reliefs or detachments of the guard.
At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance
one, but call the p. 0. of the guard, repeating the answer
he challenge.

73. A sentinel on post is not required to halt and change

position of his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor
2xecute to the rear, precisely as prescribed in the School of
Squad, but faces about while marching in the way most
venient to him, and either to the right about or left about, and
iny part of his post, as may be best suited to the proper per
mance of his duties. He carries his rifle on either shoulder;
night, or in wet or severe weather, when not in the sentry
&, he may carry it at the secure.

74. Sentinels, when in sentry boxes, stand at ease. Sentry

&es will be occupied in wet weather only.

"5. In very hot weather, sentinels may be allowed to stand

Pase on their posts, provided they can, in this position, effect

ly discharge their duties. Sentinels will, however, before tak

advantage of this privilege, obtain the express authority of
commander of the guard or officer of the day.

'76. When calling for any purpose, challenging, or in com

inication with any person, a sentinel will take the position of
"t arms.

'77. A sentinel will not quit his piece, except on an explicit

ler from some person from whom he lawfully receives orders
tile on post; under no circumstances will he yield it to any
1er person.

778. A sentinel will arrest suspicious persons prowling about

e post or camp at any time, all parties to a disorder occur

or near his post, or any one who attempts to enter the

:g0. onofatthe
night, and will turn over all persons arrested to the
guard.

79. He will at once report to the p. o. of the guard every

usual or suspicious event noticed.

780. If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or

I25

---

214

MANUAL of GUARD DUTY.

other cause, the sentinel will call: P. 0. of the Guard,

(): relief, giving the number of his post.
781. To call the p. 0. of the guard for any other purpose
for relief, the sentinel will call: P. 0. of the Guard, No. (
782. Whenever relieved, a sentinel will repeat, in detail to
successor, all special orders relating to his post.
783. If a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt and face
ward the relief with arms at the port, when the relief is fif

paces from him. The old sentinel, under the supervision of

p. 0s., gives in a low tone his instructions to the one ta

post.

Both sentinels then take the order, face toward the

p. 0. and step back so as to allow the relief to pass in fron

them. The old sentinel takes his place in rear of the relief
passes him, his piece in the same position as those of the
lief. The new sentinel remains at the order, until the relief
passed six paces beyond him, when he walks his post, piec
the shoulder or slope.
-

784. Between sunset (or the hour designated by the co

manding officer) and broad daylight, if a sentinel sees any p
son or party on or near his post, he will advance rapidly alo
his post toward such person or party, and when within ab
thirty paces will challenge sharply: Halt. Who is there
He will place himself in the best position to receive or, if nec
sary, arrest the person or party.

785. In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel w

call:

Dismount, after challenging.

786. A sentinel will not divulge the countersign to any 0

except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person from who
he properly receives orders, on such persons verbal order gy
personally.
ORDERS FOR SENTINELS EXCEPT THOSE AT THE
P0ST OF THE GUARD.

789. The sentinel will permit one, only, of any party to ap

proach him for the purpose of giving the countersign; or,

countersign be used, of being duly recognized. When this la
been done, the whole party is advanced, i. e. allowed to pass

790. In all cases, the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond

reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent them
selves to be, and have a right to pass. If he be not satisfied.h

must cause them to stand, and call the p. o. of the guard #

will also call the p. 0, of the guard if he has no authority |
I26

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

215

persons with the countersign, or when the party challenged

not the countersign, or gives an incorrect one.

'1. When two or more persons approach in one party, the

inel, on receiving an answer that indicates that some one
he party has the countersign, will say:

Advance one with

:ountersign, and, if the countersign be given correctly, will

I say: Advance (so and so), repeating the answer to his
lenge. Thus, if the answer be, Friends with the counter
(or patrol, or etc.), the sentinel will say: Advance one
1 the countersign"; then, Advance friends (or patrol, or etc.).

92. If a person having the countersign approach alone, he

dvanced to give the countersign. Thus: If the answer be,
riend with the countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.), the
tinel will say: Advance friend (or officer of the day, or

), with the countersign ; then: Advance friend (or officer

the day, or etc.).

'99. (I.) When not in the presence of the enemy, sentinels

y be required to call the hours and half hour between the
le when challenging begins and reveille.
2.) When this is required, they will call successively in the
merical order of their posts, beginning at the guardhouse,

sh one giving the number of his post, repeating the hour

the night, then adding: All's well. Thus: No. 2, eleven
lock: All's well. This call should be made, and the num

r of the post and the hour announced in a clear and distinct

inner, without unduly prolonging the words.

800. In case any sentinel fails to call off, the one next pre
ding him will repeat the call; if the call is not taken up within
reasonable time, he will call the p. 0. of the guard, and report
e facts.

ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD.

801. (I.) The following examples illustrate the manner in
hich a sentinel at the post of the guard turns out the guard:
Turn out the guard, commanding officer, Turn out the guard,
tional colors, Turn out the guard, armed party, etc.
(2) At the approach of the new guard at guard-mounting, the
ntinel will call, as in the last example: Turn out the guard,
'med party.

802. Should the officer designated by the sentinel not desire

le guard formed, he will salute and say: Never mind the
Ward, whereupon the sentinel calls: Never mind the guard
I27

216

-*

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

803. After having called Turn out the guard, the senti
will not, in any case, call: Never mind the guard, on the
proach of an armed party.
804. Though the guard be already formed, he will not fail
call: Turn out the guard, as required in his general ord
except as provided in the following article.
805. If two or more persons, entitled to the compliment,

proach at the same time, the sentinel will call for the sen
only; if the senior does not desire the guard formed, the s
tinel then calls: Never mind the guard. The guard will
be turned out for an officer while a senior entitled to the c
pliment is at, or coming to, the post of the guard.
806. The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn

commander of the approach of any armed body, and will arr

all suspicious or disorderly persons.

They will not peri

enlisted men to pass without reporting, unless orders to the c

trary have been given by the commanding officer.
807. In case of fire or disorder in the vicinity of the guar

house, the sentinel posted there will call the p. 0. of the gua
and report the facts to him.

COMPLIMENTS FROM SENTINELS.

811. The salute of a sentinel will habitually be rendered at

halt, facing the front of his post.

813. Saluting distance is the limit within which individua

and the insignia of rank can be readily recognized; it is as
sumed to be about thirty paces.

814. (I.) A sentinel will salute an officer approaching whe

he arrives within about six paces; but if, after coming withi
saluting distance, the officer does not approach within six patti
the sentinel salutes when the officer arrives nearest him, or #
before he crosses the sentinel's post.

(2) The same rules apply when a color, not cased, carried'
a color-guard or an armed party, or when the officer comma"
ing a party, whether armed or unarmed, passes; so also wid
the remains of a deceased officer or man are carried past.
COLOR LINE AND SENTINELS.

832. A sufficient number of sentinels, not to exceed three,"

placed on the color line to guard the colors and stacks.

833. In camps of instruction, the proper number of sentin:

for the color line will be selected from the guard by the adj.
128

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

21.

rol-mounting, the required number of extra men being de

d for guard for this purpose. They are designated color
"inels, and are selected in the manner prescribed for the se
ion of the orderly for the commanding officer.

34. Color sentinels so selected are on post only so long as

stacks are formed. If necessary, their places are taken at
ht by the other sentinels posted on the color front or on the
nks.

335. When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be

mitted to return to their respective companies. They are re
ired to report in person to the commander of the guard at
reille and retreat. They will fall in with the guard, under
ms, at guard-mounting.

336. Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor
their post numbered. In calling for the p. 0. of the guard,
ey call: P. o. of the guard: Color line.
837. The time of walking post on the color line is equally
vided among the color sentinels by the commander of the
lard.

838. A color sentinel on post is subject to, and will observe,

the general orders prescribed for sentinels on other posts.
Special Orders for Color Sentinels.

839. (I.) A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit
em to be moved, except in the presence of an armed escort.
(2.) He will allow no one to touch them but the color-bearer,
a p. 0. of the guard when he is accompanied by two armed
en.

(3.) He will not permit any man to take arms from the stacks,
to touch them, except by order of an officer, or a p. 0. of the
hard.

(4) If any person, passing the colors or crossing the color

ne, fails to salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to
b so, and if the caution be not heeded, he will call the p. 0.
f the guard and report the facts.
GUARD PATROLS.

861. A guard patrol is a small detachment of two or more

len detailed to observe and procure information of the enemy,

r for the performance of some special service connected with

uard duty. Patrols are usually detailed from the guard and
eceive instructions from its commander.
I29

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

218

MISCELLANE0US.

873. All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are requi

to observe respect toward sentinels.

884. Unless necessity therefore exists, no person will req

a sentinel to quit his piece, even to allow it to be inspected.

885. Officers or enlisted men passing the colors will give

prescribed salute. With no arms in hand, the hand salute
be made.

If the colors are on the stacks, the salute will

made on crossing the color line, or on passing the colors.

886. On the march, the camp guard, with the prison
marches in rear of the battalion, or in advance with the ca
ing party.
POLICE AND FATIGUE DUTY.

888. Police and fatigue duties may be placed under the sup
vision of an officer detailed for the purpose; otherwise they
under the supervision of the officer of the day. The officer

the day or the officer detailed for the purpose, has general :
pervision, under the orders of the commanding officer, of
police and fatigue duties of the post or camp. Fatigue part
will be furnished him when the number of prisoners is sufficie
for the necessary police purposes.
889. In camp, general police duty is usually done by the d
t

guard, under the direction of the officer of the day. The to

is for twenty-four hours, beginning with fatigue call on ti

morning of the day following that on which the guard march

off. The camp having been policed, the old guard is dismisse
890. General police duty may, at the discretion of the com
manding officer, be performed by fatigue parties, or by pris01

ers, if there be enough of the latter for the purpose.

FLAGS AND COLORS,

894. Each landing force carries two sets of colors, the nation

and the squadron; these are six feet, six inches, on the fly, in
six feet on the pike.

895. It is the duty of the commander of the guard to see #

the proper flag is hoisted. In case of storm, either of wind0
rain, he will see that a storm flag is promptly substituted.
896. The flag shall be hoisted at 8 a. m. and lowered at sin
set. On national holidays, the flag shall be hoisted at sunrist

897. The national flag will always be displayed at the timed

firing salutes.

898. The sentinel at the guardhouse, or the sentinel heart:

130

MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY.

219

flagstaff, will report at once to the p. o. of the guard any

ger to the flag, from loosened halyards, or from entangle
it with either halyards or staff.

99. When practicable, a detail consisting of a p. o. and two

I of the guard will hoist or lower the flag. This detail is
ned in line, with side arms, or if the special equipments do
include side arms, then with belts only, the p. 9. carrying
flag, in the center, and is marched to the staff. The flag
hen securely attached to the halyards and is rapidly hoisted
he sounding of the first note of the bugle. The halyards are
n securely fastened to the cleat on the staff. The detail will
1te the colors as required by the Navy Regulations.
10O. When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are cast off
m the staff and made perfectly free. At sunset the flag is

wly lowered so as to reach the ground at the sounding of

last note of the retreat.

It is then neatly made up and the

lyards fastened. The detail is then re-formed and marched

the guardhouse, where the flag is turned over to the com
inder of the guard.

I31

GUARD MOUNTING.
The Assembly.
901. (1.) At the assembly, the men warned for duty fall in
their company parade grounds, facing to the front, p. 08.
supernumeraries falling in as file-closers; each 1 p. 0. then
fies his detail, opens ranks, inspects the dress and general
pearance, replaces by a supernumerary any man unfit to ma
on guard, and then closes ranks.
(2.) The band takes post on the parade, so that the left
its front rank shall be twelve paces to the right of the fr
rank of the guard when the latter is formed.

Adjutant's Call.
902. (I.) At adj's ca/, the adj. proceeds to the parade grou
and takes post so as to be twelve paces in front of, and faci
the center of the guard when formed; the C. p. 0. reports to t

adj. and takes post facing to the left, twelve paces to the l
of the front rank of the band; the band plays in quick or dou
time; the details are marched to the parade ground by the 1 p.
with arms at the shoulder; the detail that arrives first is

marched to the line that, upon halting, the breast of the rig
front-rank man shall be near to, and opposite, the left arm
the C. p. 0.; the
p. 0 halts his detail, places himself in iro

of, and facing, the C. p. 0., at a distance equal to, or a litt

greater than, the front of his detail; he then commands:
Right, 2. DRESS. The detail dresses up to the line of the C. W.

and 1 p. 0., the right front-rank man placing his breast again
the left arm of the C. p. 0.; the p. 0s. take post two paces, :
the supernumerary nine paces, in rear of the rear rank of
detail. Seeing the detail aligned, the 1 p. 0. commands: FRON
salutes, and then reports: The detail is correct; or (so may
men are absent; the C. p. 0. returns the salute after the report
made; the 1 p. 0. then passes by the right of the guard

takes post three paces in rear of his supernumerary, at the ordt

(2.) Each of the other details is formed in like manner on #

left of the one preceding; the men, p. 0s, supernumerary, all

1 p. o. of each detail dress on those of the preceding details it
the same rank or line; each 1 p. 0. closes the rear rank to th
I22

====

GUARD MoUNTING.

221

ht and fills blank files, as far as practicable, with men from

Wront rank.

3.) The company details alternate in taking the right of the

e.

4.) When the last detail has formed, the C. p. O. draws sword,

rifies the detail, causes the guard to count fours, completing

e left four, if necessary, as in the School of the Company,
d if there be more than three fours, divides the guard into
o

sections, after which he commands:

1. Open ranks, 2.

ARCH. At the second command, the rear rank steps back and
ults three paces in rear of the front rank; the p. os. three paces
rear of the rear rank; all dress to the right. The C. p. 0.
erifies the alignment of the ranks, file-closers, supernumeraries,
nd 1 p. 0s., and then returns to the right of the front rank,
ces to the left, commands: FRONT, passes to a point midway

etween the adj. and the center of the guard, halts, facing the
dj., salutes and reports: Sir, the details are correct; or, Sir
so many) men are absent; the adj. returns the salute, directs the
., p. 0.: Take your post, and then draws sword; the C. p. 0.
aces about and takes post facing to the front, three paces to
he left of the front rank. When the c. p. o. has reported, the
fficer of the guard takes post, facing to the front, three paces
m front of the center of the guard, and draws sword. (See
Plate, 118, Art. 905.)

Assignment of Commander of the Guard and Petty Officers.

903. (I.) The adj. then commands: 1. Officer (or Officers) and
} 08., front and center, 2. MARCH.

The officer advances and

halts three paces from the adj.; the p. os. bring their pieces
to the shoulder, pass by the flanks, and, moving by the shortest
line, form in the order of rank, from right to left, three paces
in rear of the officer; the adj. then assigns the officer and p. 0s.
cording to rank, as follows: Commander of the guard, chief
first section, chief of second section, right guide of first section,

ft guide of second section, left guide of first section, right guide

f second section, and file-closers.

(2.) The adj. then commands: 1. Petty Officers; or, 1. Officer

and petty officers, 2. Posts, 3. MARCH. At the third command,

all, except the officer commanding the guard, face about and
take the posts prescribed in the School of the Company, with

open ranks, and pieces at the order. The adj. then directs: In
spect your guard, sir; at which the officer commanding the guar"
122

GUARD MoUNTING.

222

faces about, commands: I. Inspection, 2. ARMs, returns swo

and inspects the guard.
Inspection.

904 (1.) During the inspection, the band plays, and the at
returns sword, observes the general condition of the guar
and replaces by the supernumerary any man who does n

present a creditable appearance. He, also, when so directe

selects an orderly for the commanding officer, and notifies ti
commander of the guard of his selection.
old do/D 9- 3 (2.) If there be a supernumera
-

***** officer of the guard, he takes po

facing to the front, three paces
front of the center of the first se

tion; in going to the front an

center he closes on the senior an
-J

is assigned as chief of the first sed

tion; he may be directed by th

commander of the guard to

in the inspection of the guard.

JA

af

(3.) If there be no officer of th

guard, the adj makes the inspec
tion. The p. 0. commanding the
guard takes post on the right 0

the front rank, the right guide fall:

ing back in

c - -"o

c.
e.ds

to the rear

Bane rank, when

#:

O 3 *

H- - - - - -

t= the guard is

C. P. o.
.3

sE in line; and

[SIST=TsIII"

ooo takes the

3
[T] # Aide closers.

D }*r"raries.

.3

Cl

Plate 118. Arts, 902 and 905.

manding the
guard, when
in

column

CJ's 1.p. os.

or

passing

Formation of guard.

in review.

3.

[-]

post of the
Officer com

Review.

905. (1.) The inspection ended, the adj. places himself about

thirty paces in front of, and facing, the center of the guard, an
draws sword; the officers of the day take post in front of, and
I3A.

GUARD MoUNTING.

223

ing, the guard, about thirty paces from the adj. ; the old
cer of the day three paces to the right of and one pace to
: rear of the new officer of the day; the officer commanding
: guard takes post three paces in front of its center, and
ws sword; thereafter, he takes the same relative positions as
3. C.

(2.) The adj. then commands: 1. Parade, 2. REST, 3. Sound

F, and comes to parade rest.

(3.) The band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the

ard to the left of the line, and back to its post on the right,
men it ceases playing.

(4.) The adj. then resumes attention, brings his sword to the
rry and commands: 1. Guard, 2. ATTENTION, 3. Close ranks,
MARCH.

(5.) The adj. then commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMs, faces to

ard the new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports: Sir,
e guard is formed. The new officer of the day, after the adj.

as reported, returns the salute with the hand and directs the
lj. : March the guard in review, sir.

(6.) The adj. faces about, brings the guard to the order, and
5mmands: 1. Sections right, 2. MARCH. The sections execute
le movement; the band turns to the right and places itself

welve paces in front of the first section. The adj. places him
elf abreast of the first section and six paces from its left flank;
le C. p. 0. six paces from the left flank of the second section.

(7.) The adj. then brings the guard to the shoulder, and com
lands:

1. Pass in review, 2. Forward, 3. Guide right, 4. MARCH.

he guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, ac

ording to the principles of review, and is brought to the port

t the proper time by the commander of the guard; the adj.,

bmmander of the guard, cs. 0. S., C. p. 0., and drum-major,
alute.

(8.) The band, having passed the officers of the day, turns to

he left out of column, places itself opposite and facing

them,

nd ceases to play when the rear of the column has passed; the
eld music detaches itself from the band when the latter turns
ut of column, and, remaining in front of the guard, commences

o play when the band ceases. In the absence of the band, the

ield music does not turn out of column, but continues in front
if the guard.

(9) The guard having passed the officer of the day, the "l.
I35

224

GUARD MoUNTING.

halts; the c. p. o. halts abreast of the adj. and one pace to

left; they then return swords and retire.
(Io.) The commander of the guard forms it into column
fours, without halting, and marches it to its post.

Exchange of Duty by the Old and New Officer of the Day.

906. (I.) The officers of the day face toward each other
salute, the old officer of the day turning over the orders to
new officer of the day.

(2.) While the band is sounding off, and while the guard
marching in review, the officers of the day stand at parade
with arms folded, and come to attention before the guard is

be presented, and again as the head of the column approach

(3.) The new officer of the day returns only the salute of

commander of the guard and the adj., making one salute w

the hand.
Supernumeraries Dismissed.
907. (I.) The 1 p. 0s. and supernumeraries come to pura
rest and attention with the guard; they remain at the order whi
the guard is being presented and formed into column. Ti
senior 1 p. 0. commands:

1. Parade, 2. REST, at the comman

march, for passing in review, and:

1. Supernumeraries, 2. A

TENTION, when the officers of the day come to attention.

(2.) The 1 p.os. come to parade rest, and to attention with t

supernumeraries. The rear of the column having passed th
officers of the day, each 1 p. 0. marches his supernumerary t
the company parade and dismisses him.
General Instructions.

908. If the guard be not divided into sections, the adj. cum
mands:

I. Guard right, 2. MARCH, and it passes in review a

above; the commander of the guard is two paces in front oft

center; the adj. is six paces from and abreast of its left flak
the C. p. 0. covers the adj. on a line with the file-closers.
909. The officer of the day may direct the adj. : March '
guard to its post, sir. The adj. faces about and commands: 1
Guard to its post, 2. Fours right, 3. MARCH; or, 3. Double time,4

MARCH. The guard wheels by fours to the right; the field mu:
takes post in front; the adj. and C. p. o. return swords and &

tire; the 1 p. os. march off their supernumeraries; the officers:

the day salute each other, and the band retires.

910 (1.) As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, t;

old guard is formed in line, with its field music two paces to i:
_ 136

GUARD MoUNTING.

225

it; and, when the field music at the head of the new guard
ves opposite its left, the commander of the old guard com
nds: I. Present, 2. ARMS; and commands: I. Order, 2. ARMS,
en the new guard has passed.
2.) The new guard marches in quick time past the old guard,
ns at the port, commanders of both guards saluting.

3.) The field music having marched three paces beyond the
d music of the old guard, changes direction to the right, and,
owed by the guard, changes direction to the left, when on a
e with the old guard; the changes of direction are without
mmand. The senior officer of the guard halts on the line of
front rank of the old guard, allows his guard to march past
m, and, when its rear approaches, wheels it by fours to the
t, halts it, establishes the left guide three paces to the right
the field music of the old guard, and on a line with the front
nk, and then dresses his guard to the left; the field music with
* new guard is two paces to the right of its front rank.
4.) The new guard being dressed, the commander of each
ard, in front of, and facing, its center, commands: I. Pre
it, 2. ARMs, resumes his front and salutes.

(5.) The commanders having saluted, face their guards and

mmand:

I. Order, 2. ARMS.

911. Should a guard be commanded by a p. o. he presents

ms with his guard, standing on the right or left of the front
nk, according as he commands the old or new guard.

912. The detachments and sentinels of the old guard are re

ved, and, as they come in, form on its left; both guards are

ought to the shoulder; the commander of the old guard then

arches it, with the guide right, six paces to the front, when
commands: I. Fours right, 2. MARCH. The guard wheels by
urs to the right, the field music begins to play, and the guard
arches in quick time, arms at the port, past the new guard,

hich stands at the present, commanders of both guards saluting.

913. Arriving on the brigade, post, or camp parade, the com
ander of the old guard forms it in line and halts it, opens
lambers, commands successively the company details two paces

the front, and sends each, under charge of a p. 0., to its com
ny.

914. In bad weather, at night, or after long marches, the

lusic may be dispensed with, or the field music may take the
lace of the band and sound off, standing on the right of the
uard, and the review be omitted.
I37

PART II

DRILL REGULATIONS FOR ARTILLERY

Prepared by
LIEUT. W. R. SHOEMAKER, U.S.N.

From the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy.)

CONTENTS
(Pages numbered at bottom.)
PAGE

ineral Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................... I40-I4I

hool of the Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. I42-I54
I42
ing and Unsling Arms .................
n. R. F. G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I46-147
-

- -

... ...... . .. ..... . ... .... .. .. .. ...... .. .. .....

I47

smount 3-in. R. F. G. ..............................

I52

smount Gatling ....................................

I53

tling

rvice of the Piece in Boats ......................... I55-158

Disembark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

157-158

NotE.In Part II the pages at the top and all paragraphs

* numbered as in the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery,

S. Navy. The pages are numbered consecutively at the

ttom and are so referred to in the Table of Contents.
I39

ARTILLERY.
General Rules.

929. (I.) The men of an artillery section will be numb

from I to 24, and will be designated as follows: the crew, I to 8;
support, 9 to 16; the reserve, 17 to 24. The section will be arme
prescribed in art. 27. The duties of the support and the reserve
be to transport extra ammunition, to act as infantry supports
flankers on the march, and to assist at the piece when necess
Number 24 will habitually be the scout for his section.

(2.) The 1 p. 0. will have general charge of the crew,

when acting with the Gatling or Colt automatic gun, will c
a pouch containing tools and spare articles for those guns;
2. p. O. will have general charge of the support, and direct sup
vision over the rear ammunition boxes when in battery; th
p. 0 will have general charge of the reserve.
(3.) In the event of the 2 p. 0. being called away with

support, the piece being in battery, the 1 p. 0. will t

his place in supervising the supply of ammunition fr

the rear boxes.

(4.) In the absence of the C. O. S., the 1 p. O. W

command the section.

(5.) Two drag-ropes and a crossbar, with span, will

* supplied to each piece. The drag-ropes to be made
|s: 234-inch, 4-strand manila, each fitted with five toggi
|v five feet apart, and having a thimble spliced in the ird
end just outside the last toggle, and a thimble with sm:
hook in the rear end for hooking into an eye neare

end of the crossbar, which is to be three feet and

inches long. The span, five feet in length, connects t

...]

ends of the crossbar with the trail of the piece by me

#77

of a thimble and snap-hook in the center of the sp

s"

(6.) In the event of there being one, two, or three

( . cant numbers in the section, an intermediate toggle

Pla. 19, either drag-rope will remain unused; but should ther

four vacancies, then the front toggle on each drag

crossbar. be turned back and seized just outside the middle to

(7.) If it be necessary to use a long, single drag, as in

exceptional case of hauling the piece up and over a steep
bankment, the left drag-rope will be hooked to the thimble
the end of the right, making a continuous drag of ten togg
and the snap-hook of the right drag will be hooked directly
140

ARTILLERY.

243

eye-bolt of the trail of the piece. Number 16 will carry the

'ssbar and span until again required.
8.) Should the independent transportation of ammunition ne
sitate the employment of the reserve, or should it be required
deploy scouts or flankers to protect the piece on the march,
left drag-rope, crossbar, and span will be disconnected and
sketed on top of the ammunition boxes by number 16, and

right drag-rope will be hooked to the eye-bolt of the trail.

9.) In the absence of horses or mules, the left drag may be

'd for the purpose of hauling the cart or other vehicle con
ring the extra ammunition; or, if practicable, the cart may be
*d as a limber and connected to the carriage of the piece, the
ole section being employed on the double drag-rope.

Io.) When the pieces are cast loose for action, they are said
be in battery.
II.) After firing, the pieces are always re-loaded without
mmand, and the firing will continue until the command or
nal, cease firing, is given, when charges will be withdrawn.
12.) To interrupt the firing: I. CEASE FIRING, 2. LOAD. The
ng will cease, the pieces will be loaded, and held in readiness
renew the firing when directed.

13.) The charge must be withdrawn before starting the piece

the march.

14.) In all firings, the objective and range shall be designated

the preparatory commands, thus: 1. Fire by battery, 2. At
Ich an object), 3. At (so many) yards, 4. Ready, 5. FIRE.

15.) The front, when the drag is manned, is toward the leaders;
en in battery, it is the direction in which the guns are pointed.
16.) The right and left are the right and left of the actual front.
17.) The dress, when the drag is manned, is on the leaders;
en in battery, it is on the axles of the pieces.
18.) For service in boats only, with no probability of land
f, the presence of the 3 p. 0. and reserve is not necessary.
19.) The 1 p. 0 is the guide of his section.

20.) The drag being manned, the post of the c. 0. S. is on the

t of the 1 p. 0.
21.) Being in section to the front, the post of the C. 0. S. is two
ces in front of the center of his section.

22.) Being in battery, the c. 0. S. is habitually on the left and

rear of his piece.

23.) In the absence of pioneers, and when deemed necessary,

will carry an axe, 3 a shovel, and 4 a pick.
I4I

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION.

To Sling Arms for Dragmen.
930. (I.) The rifle being in any position,
a halt: I. Sling, 2. ARMS.
At the second command,
prepare the strap as ex

plained in art. 148; then

arms are slung as explained
in art. I49, except that the
odd numbered men sling
arms with the strap resting
on the right shoulder, and
the

even

numbered

men

with the strap resting on

the left shoulder, so that the
rifle will be on the off side

from the drag.

(2.) When the knapsack

Plate 120.

is not worn, the rifle may

be slung diagonally across
the back, muzzle up and
Art. 930 (2.) ointing toward the drag-

*
Plate 121.

Art,'d

#"' "
men wearing the strap on the left shoulder, and the even nul
bered men on the right shoulder. The first command will be:
Diagonal sling, in order to distinguish it from the infantry sin

To Unsling Arms.
931. (1.) Arms being slung, at a halt, any position in
manual of arms may be taken by command, as explained in
last paragraph of art. I49.
(2.) Dragmen may be directed to carry their rifles in the
hand, or at the shoulder or slope, according as they are on

right or left of the drag. Such positions will be found to

more convenient when knapsacks are worn.
To Form the Section.

932. (I.) The 1 p. o. commands:

FALL IN AT THE DRA

Arms are slung; I and 2 man the guide-ropes; 3 and 4 mand

I42

SCHOOL of THE SECTION.

245

short drag or check ropes in rear of the piece; 5

and 6 man the first toggle of the right drag, 7 and
8 the second, and so on to 13 and 14, who man the
end toggle and are designated the right leaders; 15
and 16 man the first toggle of the left drag; 17 and
18 the second, and so on to 23 and 24, who man the
end toggle and are designated the left leaders. The
odd numbered men are on the right, and the even
numbered men on the left of each drag-rope.
(2.) The post of the 1 p. o. is on the left of the

left leaders; that of the 2 p. o. and 3 p. o., two paces

in rear of 3 and 4, respectively, abreast of each
other.

(3.) The muster is now held, and, when concluded,

##

the 1 p. o. reports the result to the c. 0.s., who then

: Mianned, takes command.

.) Should it be desirable to form the section as one of in
ry before the muster, the 1 p. 0. commands:
Fall in, 2. SECTION TO THE FRONT; at which the men fall
the odd numbered men being in the front rank, the even
bered men in the rear rank, I and 2 on the right, 23 and 24
he left, the 2 p. 0. two paces in rear of the center of the sec
, the 3 p. 0. on the left of the front rank.
.) The muster being held and reported, the C. 0. S. com
ds: I. Man the drag, 2. MARCH, at which the men take their
ons as previously prescribed.
<!
To Form Section to the Front.
*Aood'-[4+ %
Solso

33. The drag being manned: 1

ion to the front, 2. MARCH.
.) At the first command, the men
D the toggles; all riflemen un
g arms; I and 2 step to the rear
and 6; 3 and 4 then take posi
ahead of I and 2; all the men
e on the right and left leaders
louble time, pieces at the trail.

ev

as we

-2

o:
2.p. o.

..) At the second command, the

leaders change direction to the
followed by the other numbers
'egular order, and, when 15 and

Jeetsen & the Arear

Plate12. A.'"
section to the front. .

change direction to the left, they are followed by the right

I43

246

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION.

leaders, and so on to 1 and 2, who bring up the rear; the 1

stands fast, and when I arrives abreast of him, commands
HALT, 2. Right, 3. FACE, and takes post in the front rank on
right of I; the 2 p. 0. takes post two paces in rear of the centel
the section, and the 3 p. 0. on the left of 23 in the front rank. T
c. 0. S. dresses the section to the right, and then takes his p

(3.) If in a battery or battalion, each C. 0. S. so places

1 p. 0. that when his section is dressed, it will be in line
the section or sections on his right.

(4.) Being in section to the front, and the command, pre

arms, being given, the men armed with the revolver stand
attention.

To Man the Drag.

934. The section being to the front:

1. Man the drag,

MARCH.

(1.) At the first command, the 1 p. 0. steps two paces to t

front and faces about; the section faces to the right.
(2.) At the second command, I and 2 change direction to t
right, in double time, along the right drag-rope and are follow

by the other numbers up to and including 13 and 14; 15 and

change direction to the right, in double time, along the l
drag-rope and are followed by the remaining numbers; all t
men halt at their stations, face to the front, sling arms, a
pick up their toggles. The p. 0s. take their posts.

To Prepare the Piece for Action.

935. The drag being manned, the piece is first swung with ti

muzzle pointed in the desired direction: 1. In battery, 2. MARC

(1.) At the first command, all drop the drag-ropes except
and 16, who gather them up in two coils, right and left, et

toggle on top, and place them six paces to the rear of trailt

crossbar toward the piece; 2 unhooks the span from the

and unbolts the trail wheel; 5 and 6 prepare the left box

boxes for coming off; 7 and 8 prepare the right box or bot
the support and reserve close in double time on the right and it
leaders, and unsling arms; the 1 p. 0. takes post to the right

rear of the trail, and superintends the working of the p

under the direction of c. 0. S.; the 2 p. 0 proceeds in dol
time to a position twenty paces in rear of the piece to mark!

spot where the ammunition boxes are to be placed by 7 and

the 3 p. O. places himself upon the left of 24.
I44

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION.

247

2.) At the second command, the left leaders, conducted by the

. . o. take up the double time, inclining slightly to the left,
| are followed by the other numbers from the left drag-rope,
then by the right

**
;

# *g

the

R+ "'bers from the

-

right

6.

Q-****, .

drag-rope

down to and in

and

leaders

J.

. , cluding 9, form

ing the reserve

and support in column, and proceed
to the rear, passing to the left of
the 2 p. 0., who, when 15 and 16
have advanced two paces beyond
him, commands: 1. Support, 2. Col
umn right, 3. MARCH, 4. HALT, 5.
Right, 6. FACE, 7. At one pace inter
val, 8. DEPLOY, 9. LIE DOWN; the 3
p. 0. with the reserve, continues to
advance until six paces in rear of
the support, when, in a similar man
ner, he changes direction to the

Plate* Art *. In battery right, halts, faces to the right, de

ys, lies down, and takes post two paces in rear of the center
the reserve, lying down; 5, 6, 7, 8, take off the ammunition
tes, the left box or boxes being placed by 5 and 6 one pace
the left and rear of trail, hinges to the front; the right box
boxes being carried to the rear by 7 and 8 to the position
blished by , the 2 p. 0. who remains in rear of the boxes

| superintends the issue of the ammunition, the boxes being

sed behind cover, if practicable, hinges to the front.

3.) When the piece is prepared for action, the crew take their
ions, all facing to the front, as follows:
rear of trail bar.

right of breech.
left of breech.

one pace to right of trail bar.

in front of boxes, near piece, ready to pass ammunition.

kneels behind the boxes, near piece.

and 8 kneel behind their respective boxes in rear. ready

to pass ammunition to the piece; or they may be

by the 2 p. o. to lie down.
I45

directed

248

ScHool of THE SECTION,

3-INCH. R. F. C.

Special Duties in the Service of the Piece.

936. I commands; takes lanyard from tool box; inspe
chamber and bore, and directs the latter to be sponged, if n
essary.

2 removes pin with right hand, then opens breech and wi

out chamber with oiled rag, if necessary; inspects plug and
sees all clear of dust or dirt, then closes breech; tests elevat
gear, and levels piece.
3 unhooks bucket, and places it two paces to the left of d
riage in line with axle; takes down sponge, uncaps it, pla
sponge-head on bucket with staff to the rear; puts on the

brake.

4 takes down trail bar and inserts it in socket on the tra

puts on the right brake.
5 in front of ammunition boxes, near piece, ready to p
charges to 3.
6 kneels behind boxes, near piece, ready to pass charges to
sees that box lids work freely.

937. Smokeless powder being used in the 3-inch R. F. G.,

sponging is necessary, except in the case of dust or dirt beil
discovered in the bore before firing.

Upon the conclusion

firing, the bore should be thoroughly sponged and cleaned. '

sponge the bore; 3 holds the short sponge while 4 screws on t
trail bar, then wets sponge and passes the staff through the b0
to 4 at the muzzle, who draws the sponge through, 3 assisin
if necessary; the trail bar is then unscrewed, 3 replacing t
sponge on bucket, and 4 replaces trail bar.
938. LOAD. 2 opens breech, and closes it after insertion
charge.

3 receives charge from 5 and inserts it in chamber, h

steps one pace to the left.

5 receives charge from 6 and passes it to 3.

6 takes charge from box, cuts the fuze, and passes it to
then closes lid.

I passes end of lanyard to 2, who hooks it.

939. POINT. The objective and range are designated:
1 steps back to the full length of the lanyard, sees the p?
trained laterally, then kneels on right knee with eyes
ing over sights.

2 adjusts sights, then elevating gear.

I46

ra

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION.

249

3 changes the position of bucket and sponge, if necessary.

4 and 5 attend at trail bar and guide ropes for lateral train.
6 changes the position of boxes, keeping them in position
to the left and rear of piece.
3 and 4 see the brakes on.

After training laterally, the spade should be bedded as deeply

practicable.

940. READY. 2 steps one pace to the right.

4 steps one pace to the right.
5 steps one pace to the left.

941. FIRE. (I.) I cocks the piece and pulls the lanyard.
(2.) The spade and brakes will probably hold the piece in po
ion, but should there be any recoil, the crew will run the
2ce forward to its former position.
After firing, 2 opens breech smartly, leaving the lanyard
oked and loose over the lever; 3 withdraws empty case and
ices it on the ground to his left, and turns to 5 for new charge
lich is passed up at once from box by 6.
(3.) When a box is exhausted, 6 cries SHELL; 7 and 8 then
ing up a full box from the rear, and remove the empty box.
B42. CEASE FIRING. (I.) If the gun be loaded, 2 unhooks

iyard, then carefully opens the breech; 3 removes the charge

d passes it to 5 who passes it to 6 to be replaced in box.
(2.) 5 and 6 collect the empty cases and place them in an

Ipty box, if there be one; if not, then together in the divis

r of a partly filled box.

CATLING.

Special Duties in the Service of the Piece.

943. (I.) I commands; places sight; tests breech mechanism;
sees gear and implements in place for service of the gun.
2 sees crank clear; revolves box rest; adjusts seat.
3 sees gun clear for feed.

4 chocks wheels.
'2.) When the piece is prepared for action, the men take their
tions in battery, all facing to the front;
I sitting on trail seat.
2 on right of breech.

3 on left of breech.
4 at box, ready to pass ammunition to 3.
5 left of trail.
147

250

ScHool of THE SECTION.

6 right of trail.
7 and 8, ammunition passers at the rear box.

944. LOAD. 3 receives feed case from 4, and places it on t

piece.
4 passes feed case to 3.
6 stands by to relieve other numbers.

945. Po1NT. The objective and range are designated:

I adjusts sight, and works elevating gear.
5 tends trail.

946. CoMMENCE FIRING.

I points and commands.

2 turns crank.

3
4
5
7

tends feed.
supplies ammunition to 3.
tends trail.
and 8 supply ammunition from the rear when needed, at
refill feed cases.

947. CEASE FIRING. 2 secures crank, and places firing p

out of action. If the command, load, be not given, 3 r
moves feed case; 2 throws back saddle, turns crank back
ward, and withdraws cartridges.
To Secure the Piece.

948. Being in battery: SECURE.

(I.) Each number returns or secures the articles which

moved or cast loose; 15 and 16 place drag-ropes on top of a

munition boxes.

RA

front, to a position six paces in rear

a.

3.
*ao:

8.8%. ,
Plate 125.

the trail, its center being opposite th

trail; the 3 p. 0., obliquing to the ki
places the reserve on the left of the Sl

":#9"
*

The 2 p. 0. assemble

the support, and proceeds with it to th

*
Art. 948.

Secure.

port; the crew fall in on the right of 'h

support, facing to the front; the p.os. t:

their posts as in section to the front.
(2) The secure is intended simply to *
tain the piece in position, ready to go!

battery again or to man the drag as may be required.

To Man the Drag.

949. Being in battery: 1. Man the drag, 2. MARCH.

(1.) At the first command, the support and reserve rise, asser

ble, and sling arms; 15 and 16 proceed in double time to ho

148

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION,

251

d lead out the drag-ropes; 5-6-7-8 close and secure the lids of
1munition boxes.

(2.) At the second command, I lowers sight, replaces lanyard

tool box, and assists in bolting trail wheel; 2 puts in lever
n, elevates muzzle, and bolts trail wheel; 3 secures bucket and
longe, and takes off left brake; 4 secures trail bar (if not to
kept in place), and takes off right brake; 5-6-7-8 replace am
unition boxes on the carriage; the 2 p. 0. faces the support to
e right and conducts it in double time, column left, to its sta
on at the drag; the 3 p. 0. follows with the reserve in a similar
anner; the crew take their stations for manning the drag; the
0s. take their posts.

950. When marching over rough roads or maneuvering in

ugh country, the trail bar should be kept in its socket, I or 2
iting the trail to clear the wheel from the ground in all changes
f direction. The trail wheel may be easily bent or broken by
le drag-men pulling laterally on the trail when the wheel is
ot clear of the ground, the trail being too high to permit its

ting readily lifted by means of the guide ropes. Under no cir

imstances shall 3 and 4 bear down on the muzzle to assist in
Irning the piece.
To Fire to the Rear, Right, or Left.

951. Being in battery: I. Action rear (right or left), 2. MARCH.

(1.) The piece is turned in the new direction; if to the rear, it
turned to the right-about; the ammunition is taken to the new
r; 5 and 6 carry the box or boxes near the piece; 7 and 8 the
r box or boxes; 15 and 16 shift the drag-ropes; 3 moves the

cket and sponge. The men must not pass in front of the muzzle.
(2.) If the piece is to be moved some distance, the boxes may
B placed on the carriage, and 5-6-7-8 assist on the guide ropes
d short drag in turning the piece; or should the ground be

ery rough or soft, or should the piece form one of a battery or

attalion and a change of front be ordered, then the right drag
may be hooked to the trail and the toggles manned by the support.
(3) The 2 p. 0 assembles the support, and the 3 p. 0. the re

erve, and conduct their respective squads in double time to

the

ew position, relative to the change of front, deploying again.

T0 March to the Front.

952. The drag being manned: 1. Forward, 2.

M',

At the second command, all step off to the front; the 'P' "
I49

ScHool of THE SECTION.

252

on the left of the leaders, guides the march; I and 2 guide ti

trail; 3 and 4 on the short drag, check the piece when necessar
T0 March to the Rear.

953. The drag being manned: I. Right (or Left) about,

MARCH.

At the second command, the leaders, followed by the oth

numbers, turn sharp to the right until they change direction I
degrees, when they move forward. I and 2 raise the trail un
the wheel is clear of the ground, and assist in turning sharp
to the right.
To Move the Piece a Short Distance to the Rear.

954. The drag being manned: I. Rear by hand, 2. MARCH.

At the second command, all the men face to the rear; thos
at the piece pushing and hauling it backward until the :
mand, halt, is given, when all face to the front. 5-6-7-8 may b
directed to assist at the piece.
955. Being in battery: 1. Front (or Rear) by hand, 2. MARCH
At the second command, 1-2-3-4-56 move the piece as dirette

until the command, halt, is given. The short drag may be used
and the support, or a detail from the support, will assist, if netes
sary. 5-6-7-8 move the ammunition boxes to the new position
The 2 p. 0. and 3 p.-0. conduct the support and reserve according
to the change of position.
T0 Halt.

956. Being in march:

I. Section, 2. HALT.

At the second command, all halt; I and 2 checking the piece

"...ith the guide-ropes, and 3 and 4 with the short drag.
The Rests.

957. Being at a halt, to rest the men:

FALL oUT, or REM,

or AT EASE.

The same instructions are followed as are given in the Dr.

Regulations for Infantry, art. 60.

To Change Direction.
958. The drag being manned, marching or at a halt: 1. Rig"
(or Left) turn (or half turn), 2. MARCH.

(I.) At the second command, given when the axle of the pied
is at the turning point, each man at the drag moves to th

right on the arc of a circle, whose radius is equal to hl

I5o

==->~~

SCHOOL of THE SECTION.

listance from the axle; the

eaders move in double time,

he other men at the drag so

egulate their step as to comlete the

253

$9" "I"----$ $,!, , , --, -->

movement at the

*ss \,

ame time as the leaders; I

**-->

nd 2 raise the trail until the

->

wheel is clear of the ground;

and 4 haul the short drag
harply to the left.

*. *. \ \, \
* , , \ \ rose

*s, *, *,
**s, *, *, \,

(2.) If the command, halt,

\, \, \, \, : **p

we not given upon the com-$9 .

letion of the turn, the men; <

''

---|--|-##

>>|->ts

ake up the march in the new * * *

->
S.

** 13

*...

lirection.

To Make a Slight Change of

##.

Direction.

Plate 126. Art. 958. Right turn.

959. Being in march: 1. Incline to the right (or left), 2. MARCH.

At the second command, the guide and leaders take the new
lirection as indicated, and are followed by the other numbers.
To 0blique.
960. The drag being manned marching or at a halt: 1. Right
or Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.
At the second command, the movement will be executed in

he same manner as the incline, except that the new direction is

it an angle of 45 degrees.
To Ascend or Descend a Steep Incline.

961. (1.) Upon reaching the foot of a steep incline, the in

tructions contained in rule 7, art. 929, will be observed.

(2.) Upon reaching the brow of a steep incline, the C. 0. S.

ommands:

1. Right (or Left) about, 2. MARCH, 3. Rear by hand,

... MARCH.

(3.) At the second command, the piece is turned about.

(4.) At the fourth command, the piece is allowed to run down

he incline, held back by the men at the drag-ropes, and guided
y I and 2 at the trail, and 3 and 4 at the short drag.
Disabled Wheel.

962. If a wheel be broken: SHIFT RIGHT (or LEFT) WHEEL.

(I.) 1-2-3-4 raise the axle; 3 and 4 take off the broken wheel;
and 6 bring up the spare wheel.
151

254

ScHool of THE SECTION.

(2.) A spar may be lashed under the axle, one end on th

ground, in place of the removed wheel.
To Dismount the Piece.

963. The drag being manned at a halt, or being in battery

I. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT.
3-INCH. R. F. C.

964. (I.) If in battery: At the first command, 9-10-11-12 o

the support proceed in double time to the piece, and place thei
rifles on the ground, on their respective sides, well clear of th
carriage; I removes sight and places it in the tool box; 2 ele
vates the breech, then passes dismounting strap around the gun
just in rear of recoil cylinder; 3 and 4 throw back the cap
squares; 4 passes the trail bar through bight of strap, and twists
the bar until the strap is tight; 5 and 6 prepare wheels for com
ing off; 1-2-3-4-I I-12 man the trail bar, ready to clear the gun
of the carriage; 7-8-9-IO at the trail, ready to lift the same.
(2.) At the second command, 7-8-9-Io lift the trail until muz
zle of gun takes the ground; 1-2-3-4-I I-12 raise the gun until it is

vertical on its muzzle, and then lower it carefully to the ground,

breech to the rear, trunnions horizontal, sight mass up; when the
gun is clear of carriage, 7-8-9-Io lower the trail and haul the
carriage three paces to the rear; 9 and IO place themselves in
front of the axle, 7 and 8 in rear, and all four lift the carriage to
gether, while 5 and 6 remove the wheels, lowering them to the
ground with inner parts up; 7-8-9-Io lower the carriage, axles
resting on wheels. All the men lie down at their stations.
(3.) The drag being manned: At the first command, all the
men at the drag-ropes drop the toggles; 15 and 16 gather up the
drags and coil them down six paces to left and rear of the trail;

9-10-11-12 place their rifles on the ground as previously pre

scribed; 5-6-7-8 take off the ammunition boxes and place then
on the ground to right and left, well clear of the carriage: th:

remaining numbers of the support, and the reserve, form in two

ranks, as one squad, in line with the leaders, facing the piece
and open ranks.
(4.) At the second command, the piece is dismounted as pre:
scribed in paragraph 2, all the men lying down at their stations

965. (1.) The dismounting strap should be made of 1%-inch

manila, just long enough to go around the gun in rear of recoil

cylinder, and allow one bight to pass through the other bight
I52

ScHool of THE SECTION.

255

if strap and take the trail bar. No attempt should be made

o dismount until the bar is twisted enough to bring the strap
ight at middle of bar, in order to prevent slipping. The 3-inch R.
*. G. cannot be safely mounted or dismounted with less than six

nen, neither can a sufficient number of men get hold of the gun
o mount or dismount without the use of the strap and trail bar.
(2.) For dismounting, a small mat should be used, to be placed

inder the muzzle. The mat prevents slipping, also prevents the
muzzle from penetrating soft earth, or from being injured on
hard ground. The mat and strap will be carried in the tool box.
(3.) Care should be taken not to raise the trail higher than is
necessary to rest the muzzle on the ground; otherwise, the
wheels will be lifted off the ground, causing the weight of the
'arriage and piece to be concentrated on the muzzle. Proceed
sarefully to clear the trunnions from their seats. The piece
should not be lowered until it is perpendicular, and the six men
stationed on the trail bar are ready to lower together; otherwise,
he gun may fall during the last two or three feet of lowering,
:ausing it to slue and injure the breech lever. Too much haste
n competitive drills may result in striking the lever against the
:arriage before it has been run back clear of the piece, rendering
serious damage probable.
GATLING.

966. (1.) At the first command, I and 2 see elevating gear

ind sight clear.
(2.) At the second command, 1-2-3-4 raise the gun clear of
arriage and lower it to the ground, breech to the rear.
(3.) The duties of the other numbers at both commands are
e same as for the 3-inch R. F. G.
To Mount the Piece.

967. The piece being dismounted:

1. Prepare to mount, 2.

VIOUNT.

(1.) At the first command, all the men rise: 1-2-3-4-II-I2 raise
he piece or get it on its muzzle; 7-8-9-10 raise the carriage; 5
und 6 put on the wheels.

(2.) At the second command, the carriage is run up, the gun

mounted, ammunition boxes returned to place, and the original

ormation is resumed.

(3.) In mounting the Gatling, 1-2-3-4 will be sufficient to raise

he gun.
I53

256

SCHOOL OF THE SECTION.

968. In mounting the 3-inch R. F. G., when the gun has te

raised on its muzzle, slue the gun so that the elevating arc i
square to the rear and toward the carriage. The gun, when
lowered to the ground in dismounting, will always slue a little
because the arc projects considerably and takes the ground first
The carriage must be run up squarely, and the trail lifted to th

same height as in dismounting, then lower the gun slowly, mov

ing the carriage slightly forward or back or laterally, as may
be necessary. It is useless to attempt to mount unless the gui
and carriage are faced squarely to each other, as the clearanc
between the recoil cylinder and the carriage is not over #6 inch
so that any forcing of the gun into place may result in marring
either the elevating worm or arc.

969. On the march, the piece may be dismounted in order to

pass an obstacle or narrow defile; I-2-3-4-II-I2 carry the gun;
5 and 6 the wheels; 7-8-9-Io the carriage; 15 and 16 the two
drag-ropes, crossbar and span; 13 and I4, assisted by the reserve,
will carry the ammunition boxes, and render assistance at the
piece or carriage, if required.
To Disable the Piece.

970. (I.) Detach and carry off the lock from the breech-plug
of the 3-inch R. F. G., or bend the barrels of Gatlings; break
one or both wheels.

(2.) To disable the piece temporarily, the C. 0. S. commands:

DISPERSE; the men disperse, carrying off all movable parts, in
cluding wheels and ammunition boxes. The command to dis
perse is usually given after dismounting.
To Assemble.

971. The section being dispersed: AssEMBLE.

The men return to the piece with the articles they carried of
replace them, and take position according as the piece was
mounted or dismounted.
To Dismiss the Section.

972. The piece being parked or housed, the section is

forme!

to the front; the c. o. s. inspects the piece and section, and the
directs the 1 p. 0 to dismiss.

I54

SERVICE OF THE PIECE IN BOATS.

73. (I.) The oars will be manned by the support as follows:
the port stroke oar, 16 the starboard stroke oar, and so on
m aft, the forward oars being manned by the higher numbers
the crew as necessary.
2.) The 1 p. 0. will take his sta
n forward and will have charge of
serivee of the piece.
3.) The 2 p. 0. will act as coxs
|11.

4) The reserve, if present for land

, will act as riflemen in the stern
ets.

3-INCH. R. F. C.

74. Special duties at the com

mands:

MAN THE PIECE.

and 6, if at the oars, trail oars.

in rear of the gun, superintends;
prepares sight for use; receives
lanyard from tool box.
right of breech, opens breech;
inspects bore, chamber and me
chanism; closes the breech; tests
elevating gear; tends training
clamps, if on the right of mount.

/8
O

left of breech, sees sponge and

bucket at hand; tends training
clamp, if on the left of mount.
and 5, ammunition passers.

at

ammunition

box

to

Reserve
4

PoC)

pass

charges to 4 and 5; sees that box

lid works freely.

Plate 127. Arts. 973 and 974.

Service of the piece in boats.

The ammunition boxes will be placed where best adapted to

ready service of the gun.

75. LoAD. 2 opens breech, and closes it after the insertion

of charge; hooks lanyard for the first fire.
I55

SERVICE OF THE PIECE IN BOATs.

258

3 inserts charge after breech is opened by 2.

4 and 5, alternately, pass charges to 3.
6 takes charge from box, cuts the fuze, and passes to 4
5, and when box near gun is nearly empty, cries: SHE
7 and 8 then bring forward a full box from the stern-she
and remove empty box.

976. Po1NT. The objective and range are designated.

2 tends elevating gear, and assists in training by push
breech to port.
3 tends training clamp, and assists in training by push
breech to starboard.

The helm is used if necessary.

977. READY.

I gives the command: 2 (or 3) sets up the tra

ing clamp.

978. FIRE.

I gives the command, cocks and fires, in one n

tion, when sights are on the target.

979. CEASE FIRING. 2 unhooks lanyard; opens breech ca.

fully.
3 withdraws charge and passes it to 4 or 5.
4 or 5 passes charge to 6, who replaces it in box.
If necessary, the gun should be sponged from the breech.

1-POUNDER HOTCHKISS.
980. Special duties at the commands: MAN THE PIECE.
I left of gun, removes cover; places sight; tests bree
mechanism; examines bore; and sees in place impleme
for service of gun.

2 right of breech and facing it, provides a clean swab;

trunnion and pivot clamps in working order.
3 left of breech and facing it, brings ammunition and
it in rear of gun; provides wet swab.

4 in rear of gun, by ammunition; assists in

p:

provi

charges.
The ammunition box may be brought forward and pla
near the piece.

981. LoAD.

I places shoulder to stock; seizes directing

with left hand, and, as soon as unclamped, lays the mu

toward the target; plants feet firmly to resist motion
the boat.

2 unclamps pivot and trunnion clamps as soon as I has

shoulder to the stock; grasps and throws back smartly

breech-block lever, opening breech; after 3 has inser

I56

SERVICE OF THE PIECE IN BOATs.

259

charge, closes breech; performs duty of 3 while the latter

is providing ammunition.
3 takes charge from 4, and when breech is open, enters it
in the gun, pushing it until the head takes against the
extractor.

4 passes charge to 3.

}82. Po1NT. The objective and range are designated:

I steadies the gun with left arm and shoulder; seizes pistol
grip, finger on trigger; eye ranging over sights, brings the
line of sight on the target.
2 adjusts sight; attends trunnion and pivot clamps.
983. CoMMENCE FIRING. I aims and fires, continuing until
the command, cease firing, is given.
2 tends sight and clamps; throws back the lever when gun
is fired, and forward again when charge is inserted.
3 loads after each discharge.
4 supplies ammunition.

984. CEASE FIRING.

I removes his hand from the pistol grip;

steadies the gun until the clamps are tightened by 2.

CATLING.

#85 (1.) This gun is not intended for general use in the boat,
t if it be so employed, the shore drill will be followed, ex
t that an aiming bar will replace the elevating gear.
The ammunition box may be brought forward, near the

C.

To Disembark.
3-INCH R. F. G.

6. (1.) A suitable spar, about twelve feet long, must be pro

ed for transporting the gun from the boat to the shore. Two
ymmets are fitted to the spar with which to toggle it to the

n, one forward of the recoil cylinder, the other abaft. The

immets should be firmly fixed in position on the spar in order

prevent any longitudinal motion. In securing the spar to the

1, the toggles must be twisted tight.

If the surf be heavy, or

landing especially difficult, extra lashings should be passed

und spar and gun.

2.) In the event of a regular transporting spar not being pro

ed, a boat's mast may be used in its place, and the gun lashed
the mast by means of the halliards or sheets, or other gear
hand.
I57

260

SERVICE OF THE PIECE IN BOATS.

(3.) If the gun is to be used on its boat mount, and t

landed, the field carriage should be taken apart on board s]
passed into the boat and stowed conveniently in the stern-she
It will be found impracticable to convey the field carriage int:
in any ordinary ship's boat, on account of its size and weig
and then land it with ease.

Special Duties in Disembarking.

987. On reaching the shore; LAND THE PIECE.
(I.) 1-2-3-4 secure the transporting spar to the gun.
I removes the sight and places it in tool box.
2 sees that the lever-pin is in.
3 and 4 unkey the cap-squares.
The reserve will deposit their rifles in the stern-sheets, th
pass forward, jump over the bows, and man the forward end
the transporting spar. I-2-3-4-II-I2 in the boat, man the af.
end of spar, 3 and 4 raise the cap squares. All the men on t
spar lift the gun clear of mount, passing it forward carefully ov
the bow, then the inner end of spar is rested on the gunwale, a
tended by 7 and 8, while 1-2-3-4-II-12 jump overboard, a
again man the rear end of spar, carrying the gun to the brac
5-6-7-8 carry the wheels on shore. 13-14-15-16 raise the caria
from the stern-sheets, and get it over the gunwale in the no
convenient manner, then carry it to the position of the gu
where the carriage is assembled and the gun mounted. 5-67.

13-14-15-16 return to the boat for ammunition boxes, and dia

ropes, and the support and reserve return for their rifles, it
arms, and the drag-ropes are manned, or the piece placed
battery according to circumstances.
(2.) If there should be much surf, or a lateral current,
chor should be gotten out astern immediately on striking
beach, in order to hold the boat bows on to the shore.
(3.) If the gun is to be landed, with no intention of usin
in the boat, it will be found more convenient to secure the tra
porting spar to the gun on board ship, and whip both toget
into the boat, securing the gun amidships, fore and aft, betw
the oarsmen, spar on top; the carriage, wheels, and boxes be

stowed in the stern-sheets.

988. For the disembarking of the Gatling, the general

structions for the 3-inch R. F. G. will be observed, modified
suit the simpler conditions.
158

PART III

GUN AND TORPEDO DRILLS

From Gun and Torpedo Drills, U. S. Navy

CONTENTS
(Pages numbered at bottom.)
PAGE

'rill of 3-in., 4-in., 5-in., and 6-in. R. F. Guns, 5 or 6 men, 160-163

}rill of 5-in., 6-in., 7-in., and 8-in. Q. F. Guns, 7 or 8
111611
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I64-167
urret Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168-169
irill of Pair of 8-in. B. L. R. in Turret. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170-175
mmunition Crews for 8-in. Turrets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
econdary Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
'rill of I-Poir. R. F. Guns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178-179
Irill of 3-Poir. and 6-Pdr. R. F. Guns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 180-183
Irill of I-Poir. Maxim Automatic Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184-185
1structions of I-Palr. Maxim Automatic Gun. . . . . . . . . . 186-199
|rill of 6-Pdr. Semi-Automatic Gun and Instructions. . . 200-204

rill of Gatling Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................

rill of Colt Automatic

205207

Gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208-209

otes on Colt Automatic Gun.........................

2IO-217

tail Notes on Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218-229

letail Notes on Secondary Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-233

and 6-Pdr. Driggs-Seabury Semi-Automatic Guns. ... 234-237

[anual for Double-Action Navy Revolver. . . . . . . . . . . . . 238-240
otes on Double-Action Navy Revolver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24I-243
otes on Krag-Jorgensen Rifle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244-247
orpedoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248-281
NotE.In Part III the pages at the top, all plates and all

aragraphs are numbered as in Gun and Torpedo Drills, U.

. Navy. The pages are numbered consecutively at the bot
ym and are so referred to in the Table of Contents.
I59

DRILL OF THE RAPID-FIRE GUNS.

14

DRILL OF THE 3-IN., 4-IN, 5-IN., AND 6-IN, RAPI

FIRE GUNS.
GUN
I
No.

TITLE.

Captain,

1
2
3
4.
5

Five or Six Men.

ARMS.

Boarder.
Boarder.
Boarder.
Rifleman.
Rifleman.

Plugman,
Loader,
Shellman,
Shellman,

Revolver.
Revolver.
Revolver.
Rifle.
Rifle.

ADDITIONAL
For 5-in. and 6-in. Guns.

Shellman,

When gun secures

Rifleman.

POSITIONS OF CREW.

fore and aft.

Rifle.

When gun secur

athwartships.

Muster the crew !

(6)
1 2 3 4 5 (6)

4.

3 1. 2
Form for inspection |
|

1 2 3 4 5 (6)
\

5 3 1 2 4.
FOR EXERCISE.
Ammunition
Hatch.

Q) =

3. n

C (TE
* N)

16o

DRILL OF THE RAPID-FIRE GUNS.

15

Commands.

Silence! Cast Loose and Provide! Load! (Designating ob

ct, direction, and range; e. g., At ship on port beam, 2000
irds), Commence Firing! Cease Fir, ng! Unload! Secure!
At the call to Quarters for Muster, the men will
semble at the gun, standing as shown in the diagram, facing
board.

At the call for General Quarters, the men will go

1ickly to their guns and Cast Loose and Provide.
Silence!

At this order perfect silence is maintained.

The men stand

attention at their stations and await orders.

Cast Loose and Provide!

(Guns secured for sea.)

Each crew will cast loose and provide the gun at which it is
ationed.

1 commands; sees gun and mount in working order; provides

ld places sight; at night sees electric connections for night
ght made; reports to the officer of the division when all is
ady; takes his station on the left of the breech at the sight
Id firing key, or lanyard.
2 sees breech mechanism in working order; provides and
aces firing attachment, connects electric firing circuit; at
ght, connects and places battle lantern; takes his station on
ght of the breech at the operating lever.
takes off muzzle bag and out tompion; slacks securing

imps, (at 6" guns using separate ammunition, provides a load

g tray); provides three revolvers with belts, and two (or

ree) rifles with bayonets and belts, and places them in racks,
amidships clear of the gun; provides two pairs of loader's
bves, puts on one pair and gives the other pair to 4; takes
5 station on left of the breech in rear of 1.

1, 2, 3, cast off gun lashings and place them amidships.

4 trains gun abeam; provides a gun bucket containing fresh

iter and a marine sponge, and places it clear of the gun; sees

hand a short bristle sponge for the powder chamber, (and at

guns using separate ammunition, provides a short

rammer);

kes his station on right of the breech in rear of 2; assists

th training when necessary.
I61

16

DRILL OF THE RAPID-FIRE GUNS.

5 (or 6) uncovers ammunition hatch and provides cartridge

The shellmen provide themselves with fuze cutters (if use
and with a piece of waste for wiping off the ammunition.
If there are port shutters, the whole crew will clear the
away before performing their other duties.
The Gunner's Mate of the division issues sights, firing attac
ments, fuze cutters (if used), waste, and tourniquets; sees
hand the division, bristle, and sheep-skin sponges, mari

sponges, division tub filled with drinking water, bag of san

accessories, spare parts, wrenches for gun and mount.
Load!

(Using Fixed Ammunition.)

1 keeps the gun trained on the target.
2 opens the breech; superintends the loading.
4 draws out the empty cartridge case with both gloved hand
stands it on end to the rear and right of the gun, and steadi
it with his hand until it is taken by 5 (or 6); if screw box b.
comes dirty, he cleans it with the marine sponge; uses sho
bristle sponge if powder chamber becomes very dirty.
3 receives cartridge from shellman and places it in the cha
ber, pushing it home smartly with his hand.
5 (or 6) brings cartridge and passes it to 3; removes empt
cartridge cases; goes for another cartridge.
When using shrapnel, the shellman cuts the fuze as directe
by No. 2.
If the crew is called away from a loaded gun, 2 pulls leve
partly back, in order to break the firing circuit.
ams

Modification for a 6" Gun Using Separate Ammunition, th

charge being in a cartridge case:
1 keeps gun trained on target.

2 opens the breech; superintends the loading.

4 draws out the empty cartridge case with both gloved hanj
stands it on end to rear and right of the gun, and steadies
with his hand until it is taken by 5 or 6; picks up rammer:
screw box becomes dirty, he cleans it with the marine spong

uses short bristle sponge if powder chamber becomes very dini

3 picks up loading tray and places it in the gun.
5 or 6 brings up shell and places it on loading tray.
162

DRILL OF THE RAPID-FIRE GUNS.

17

4 rams shell home with short rammer, and then lays rammer
side.

3 removes loading tray; takes cartridge case from 5 or 6,

laces it in the gun, and pushes it well home.
2 closes the breech.

5 and 6 remove empty cartridge cases and provide more am

lunition.

(Designating object, direction, and range.)

Commence Firing!
1 sets sight, points, and fires; the gun is reloaded, he fires
gain, and so on until the command Cease Firing! is given.
f the lock lanyard is not convenient for use by 1, it will be
ulled by 2 at command of 1.
4 assists 1 with the training, when necessary.
Combination of Duties.

When all the riflemen are called away, 3 provides ammuni

on; 2 combines the duties of 2 and 4. If 1 is disabled, 3 takes

is place, and 4 combines the duties of 3 and 4. If 2 is dis
bled, 4 combines the duties of 2 and 4. If 3 is disabled, 4 com
ines the duties of 3 and 4. If 4 is disabled, 2 combines duties
f2 and 4. 5 and 6 assist each other.
Unload!

opens breech.
withdraws cartridge and gives it to a shellman.
Change Stations!
To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the men
h all the duties at the gun.)

t this command, each man goes up one number, except No.

who becomes (6) or 5; No. 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2, and
)

On.

Secure!

The numbers return what they provided and secure what they
1st loose; the Gunner's Mate, assisted by 1, 2, 3, thoroughly
Yonges the gun, wipes the bore dry, and gives it a light coat

f oil supplied for that purpose. This should be done, if prac

cable, while the bore is hot.

The men take the same positions as for Muster; I reports

) the Officer of Division when the gun is secure.
163

DRILL of THE QUICK-FIRE GUNS.

18

DRILL OF THE 5-IN., 6-IN., 7-IN., AND 8-IN. QUIC!

FIRE GUNS. Seven or Eight Men.
GUN
No.
1
2
3
4.
5
6
7

TITLE.

Captain,
Plugman,
Loader,
Trainer,
Shellman,
Shellman,
Shellman,

ARMS.
Boarder.
Boarder.
Boarder.
Boarder.
Rifleman.
Rifleman.
Rifleman.

Revolver.
Revolver.
Revolver.
Revolver.
Rifle.
Rifle.
Rifle.

ADDITIONAL
For 7-in. and 8-in. Guns.

Shellman,

When gun secures

Rifleman.

POSITIONS OF CREw.

fore and aft.

Rifle.

When gun sect

athwartships.
|

Muster the crew !

12 3 4 5 67 (8)

Form for inspection :

/#.

12 3 4 5 67 (8)

7 53 1 2 4 6 (
FOR EXERCISE.

Ammu. -- on
nition
T.S
Hatch. L-J -

":
C (DO
* N)

C)

164

DRILL OF THE QUICK-FIRE GUNS.

19

Commands.

Silence! Cast Loose and Provide! Load! (Designating ob

st, direction, and range; e. g., at ship on port beam, 2000
rols), Commence firing! Cease firing! Unload! Secure!
At the call to Quarters for Muster, the men will as
mble at the gun, standing as shown in the diagram, facing
board. At the call for General Quarters, the men will
D quickly to their guns and Cast loose and provide.
Silence!

At this order perfect silence is maintained.

The men stand

attention at their stations and await orders.

Cast Loose and Provide!

(Guns secured for sea.)

Each crew will cast loose and provide the gun at which it
; stationed.

1 commands; sees gun and mount in working order; provides

nd places sight; at night sees electric connections for night
ight made; reports to the Officer of the Division when all is
eady; puts on belt with primers; takes his station on the left

f breech at the sight and firing key, or lanyard.

|2 sees breech mechanism in working order; provides and
aces firing attachment; connects electric firing circuit; at

ht connects and places the battle lantern; puts on belt with

imers; takes his station on right of the breech at the operat
g lever.

3 takes off muzzle bag and out tompion; slacks securing

amps; provides loading tray; provides four revolvers with

lts, and three (or four) rifles with bayonets and belts, and
aces them in racks, or amidships clear of the gun; puts on
lt with primers; takes his station on left of the breech in
ar of 1.

4 trains gun abeam; provides a short rammer; provides a gun

fucket containing fresh water and two marine sponges, and

Races it clear of the gun; sees at hand a short bristle sponge

or the powder chamber; takes his station on the right of the

#in in rear of 2.

| 1, 2, 3, and 4 cast off lashings and place them amidships.

5 and 6 uncover ammunition hatch and provide shell.

7 (or 8) provides powder charge.
165

DRILL of THE QUICK-FIRE GUNS.

20

The shellmen provide themselves with fuze cutters (if used)

If there are port shutters the whole crew will clear the
away before performing their other duties.
The Gunner's Mate of the division issues sights, firing attac
ments, fuze cutters (if used), and tourniquets; sees at hand th
division, bristle, and sheep-skin sponges, marine sponges, d
vision tub filled with drinking water, bag of sand, accessorie
spare parts, wrenches for gun and mount.
Load!

1 keeps the gun trained on the target.

2 opens breech; extracts the old primer, and puts in a ne

one; superintends the loading; wipes off breech-plug and gas
check pad with a marine sponge when necessary.

3 picks up loading tray and places it in the gun.

5 or 6 (or 5 and 6 in case of 8" guns) places shell on loalin'
tray.

4, assisted by 3 when necessary, rams shell home; withdraw:

rammer and steps clear of breech.

3 receives powder charge from 7 (or 8) and places it in the

gun, with the rear end just clear of loading tray; withdraw:
loading tray.
-

4 wipes off gas check seat if brown powder is being used, and
when necessary, if smokeless powder is being used; then assists
with the training, if necessary.

At an 8" gun, 7 and 8 bring up the charge if it is made up in

two sections; 8 gives his section to 3; 7 places his section in
the gun and pushes it as far as he can reach with his hard:
then 3 places the second section in the gun with the rear end
just clear of the loading tray.
2 closes the breech.

5, 6, 7, (and 8) provide more ammunition.

If the crew is called away from a loaded gun, 2 pulls lev
partly back, in order to break the firing circuit.
(Designating object, direction, and range.)
Commence Firing!

1 sets sight, points, and fires; the gun is reloaded; he fire

aga1n, and so on until the command Cease Firing! is given
4 assists with the training, when necessary.
166

DRILL of THE QUICK-FIRE GUNs.

21

If the lock lanyard is not convenient for use by 1, it will be

illed by 2 at command of 1.
Combination of Duties.

When all the riflemen are called away, 3 and 4 provide am

unition; 2 combines the duties of 2 and 4.
If I is disabled, 3 takes his place, 4 combines the duties of 3
ld 4. If 2 is disabled, 4 combines the duties of 2 and 4. If 3
disabled, 4 combines the duties of 3 and 4. If 4 is disabled,

combines the duties of 2 and 4. The shellmen assist each

her.
Unload!

3 places loading tray in the gun; withdraws powder charge and

rns it over to 7 (or 8); then engages shell-extractor in the

stractor groove at the base of the projectile, and, assisted by

withdraws the projectile, turning it over to 5 or 6.
Change Stations!

(To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the

with all the duties at the gun.)
t this command, each man goes up one number, except 1,
becomes (8) or 7; 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2, and so on.
Secure!

The numbers return what they provided and secure what

sy cast loose ; the Gunner's Mate, assisted by 1, 2, 3, 4, thor
ghly sponges the gun, wipes the bore dry, and then gives it

light coat of oil supplied for that purpose. This should be

ne, if practicable, while the bore is hot.

The men take the same positions as for Muster; 1 reports

the Officer of Division when the gun is secure.

167

22

STATION OF TURRET OFFICER.

STATION OF TURRET OFFICER.

The Turret Officer may act as gun-pointer in either sighti:

hood; but if he has skillful marksmen in the crew, he will ol
tain more efficient results by assigning them as gun-pointer

and stationing himself in rear of the gun where he can dire

the fire, expedite the loading, keep silence in the turret, an
remedy any jamming or accident.

In those 10", 12", or 13" turrets which have both the firin
keys in the center sighting hoodand in those superimpose
turrets which have all the firing keys in the center sightin
hoodthe Turret Officer should take station in

the cinte

sighting hood, unless he has an exceptionally cool and exce

lent gun-pointer in his crew.

Turret Drills.

The following notes apply to all calibers of guns mountel

turrets:

Except in cases of emergency, no commands other than thos:

specified in the following drills will be given by any one in a

turret. If any member of the turret crew discovers anythm:
going wrong, he will immediately call out in a loud voice At

tention! whereupon each man will stop what he is doing until

the Turret Officer ascertains the trouble and directs the remely
At preparatory drills, in order to perfect the crew in all the

details of handling the guns, the command By the Numbers

Load! should be given.
At this command, the men stand at their stations and kep
quiet. The Turret Officer then commands One!, and it.

structs No. 1 to lay the gun to the loading position, and pe.
sonally sees that it is done in the correct way.

He then commands Two! and sees that No. 2 opens t

breech, wipes off the gas check and mushroom face, if brow
powder is used, or if it is necessary; withdraws the ol
primer and inserts a new one.

The other members of th:

crew are required to observe how and in what sequence thes

duties are performed.
I68

STATION OF TURRET OFFICER.

23

"he Turret Officer then commands Three!, whereupon

3 places the loading tray in the gun;and so on, calling
\m number at the gun in the sequence in which the duties are
formed, and not in numerical order.
The use of smokeless powder practically does away with
nging. Sometimes the residue from the ignition charge of
ck powder drops from the face of the mushroom into the
s check slope or into the screw box, and requires to be
ed off; but with that exception no sponging is necessary.
When using brown powder it is best to get the shell into

: bore of the gun as quickly as possible after firing, while

: residue is soft, and this is particularly desirable when me
anical rammers are used. Sponging the powder chamber at
s time is not correct, because the shell jams at the com
assion slope of the rifling where the sponge does not reach,
i during the time the powder chamber is being sponged the
idue is hardening. Even if there are signs of fire in the
wder chamber the shell should be sent home, after which
me water should be thrown in the gun or a marine sponge
the end of a handle be used. Another advantage of getting
! shell home as rapidly as possible after the breech is opened,
that it will prevent the smoke in the bore of the gun com

# into the turret.

The locks should be kept in place on the guns whenever
ire is likelihood of the guns being used.

Steadiness, regularity, and silence in the performance of duty

uld be exacted of every man in a turret crew.

169

DRILL OF A PAIR OF 8-IN. B. L. R.

24

DRILL OF A PAIR OF 8-INCH B. L. R. MOUNTED

TURRET, WITH AN AMMUNITION-LIFT
FOR EACH GUN.
(IO men, 5 to each gun.)
Turret Officer in right sighting hood as gun-pointer. or
rear of guns.
Gun No.

Title.

Station.

2
3

Captain.
Plugman.

In sighting hood as gun-pointer.

At plug-crank or lever.

Loader.

Opposite breech, in rear of 2.

Liftman.

At lift controller.

Shellman.

Inboard and in rear of breech.

Gunners Mate.

Wherever needed.

If the Turret Officer takes station as gun-pointer of ore

the guns, then No. 1 of that gun takes station in rear of th

guns to superintend the loading of the pair.
For muster or inspection the gun crews will be formed in lin
outside of and near the turret, 1 on the right.
At the call for General Quarters the men will g
quickly to their guns and Cast loose and provide.
DETAIL DRILL.

Commands.

(To be given by Turret Officer when necessary.)

Silence!

Cast Loose and Provide!

Load!

(Designating 0b

ject, direction, and range). Commence Firing! Cease Firig

Unload!

Secure!

Silence!

At this command perfect silence is maintained. The m

stand at their stations and await orders.
Cast Loose and Provide!
The Gunner's Mate sees the current turned on all circuits

the turret (or sees pressure turned on training engines), a

sees the locks in place on the guns.
I70

DRILL OF A PAIR OF 8-IN. B. L. R.

25

sees the electric firing circuit connected; tests the elevating

ar; takes off the sight cap and cleans the glasses; removes
Igs from sighting hood; at night turns on the sighting-hood
ctric light; reports to the Turret Officer when the gun is
Idy and the men are at their stations; takes station in sight
; hood.
2 unlocks turret after current is on, and sees turret clear for

ining; if superimposed turrets, assists 2 of the 13" gun to

lock turret; opens breech and inspects gas check; puts on
lt with primers, unless a stationary primer-rack is provided;
es priming wire and boring bit in place; takes station at plug
ank or lever.

3 takes down hand rammer; sees bristle sponge ready for use;
aces loading tray near the breech; sees lock lanyard hanging
at a convenient place ready for use in case the electric cir
it fails; equips himself with belt and primers, unless a sta
nary primer-rack is provided; takes station opposite the
eech in rear of 2.

4 removes muzzle bag and tompion; closes circuit breaker and

Buit switch of lift motor; sees brake for ammunition-lift in
king order; takes station at lift motor and sees it in work
order.

takes down the division tub and fills it with fresh water; pro
es a bucket of drinking water; provides two marine sponges
places them in the division tub; equips himself with fuze

ter (if used); takes station inboard and in rear of breech

the gun.

: the port bucklers

are shipped, the members of the crew

ove them before performing their other duties,2 and 3

brking inside and 4 and 5 outside the turret.

As soon as the turret can be trained, it should be placed in
e most convenient position for removing the port bucklers
d tompions.
If the guns are secured for port the men remove the tom
ons and any obstructions around the turret, and then go to
eir stations inside the turret.

The Turret Officer sees that

erything is clear outside the turret.

The Gunner's Mate will keep always in their racks or lock

s the following articles: one spare lock, four lock lanyards,

urniquets, primers, priming wires, boring bit, wrenches for

reech mechanism, spare gas check pads, vent drill, vent
17I

clean

DRILL of A PAIR OF 8-IN. B. L. R.

26

er, wooden maul, drill brace, hand primer-extractor, shell

tractor, fuze cutters (if used), bristle bore sponge, a revol
with two packs of ammunition for each man, differential p
chase, wrenches for gun mount, spare bolts for different pa
of the mechanism (if provided), screw-drivers, monk
wrenches, medical emergency box.
Load!

1 lays the gun to loading position and keeps trained on t

target.

2 opens the breech; sponges off the mushroom head and g.

check, if necessary; turns lock right side up; extracts the C.

primer, inserts a new one, and closes the lock completely.
3 places loading tray in the gun.
4, as soon as the gun is fired, hoists the ammunition-c:
until the loading-hook catches; then as soon as the breech
opened, the loading tray in place, and the car-catch diseng:

he slacks away on the lift motor and allows the car to swin
over to the loading position.
5 releases the car-catch; removes the sections of
charge and lays them on the turret floor.

powd.

3 pushes the shell with his hand through the car onto th
loading tray in the gun.

5 replaces the securing pins in the car.

4, as soon as the shell and powder are out of the car

everything is clear, swings the car back to the vertical pos

tion, signals the handling-room, and sends the car down it

another round of ammunition.

3 grasps rammer and, assisted by 5, rams the shell hom

smartly; then withdraws the rammer and places it clear of ti

gun.

5 picks up the first section of the charge and pushes it in t

gun as far as he can reach.

3 picks up the second section of the charge and pushes it

the gun until the rear end is just clear of the loading tray;
moves loading tray and lays it on turret floor; wipes out g

check seat and screw box with a marine sponge, if any dirth
accumulated there; returns sponge to the tub; stands clear
the recoil.

2 closes the breech; unships crank if necessary; sees ev

172

MoDIFICATION FoR A PAIR of 8-IN. B. L. R.

27

e clear of the recoil, and taps 1 on the leg with his hand as
ignal that the gun is ready to be fired.
M hoists loaded car, as soon as he receives the signal that it
ready, to a position just below the turret floor, and stands
for the next fire.

In sending down the ammunition-car, 1 of the right gun (or

e Turret Officer, if 1 is in the sighting hood) releases the
ading-hook of each car after the weight has been taken off.
Unload!

1 lays the gun to the loading position.

2 opens breech; then extracts primer.
3 places loading tray in the gun; withdraws the two sections
powder-charge, and turns them over to 5.
4 hoists empty ammunition-car.
5 places the sections of powder-charge in the ammunition-car.
3, assisted by 5, engages shell-extractor in the extractor
oove and withdraws the projectile, landing it on the loading
-

ay; and then, after 4 has placed the car in loading position,
ey pull the projectile into the car.
hoists car to the vertical position, signals the handling
om, and sends the car down.
removes loading tray.
closes the breech.

DIFICATION

FOR A

PAIR

OF 8-INCH

B. L. R.,

MOUNTED IN TURRET. WITH ONE AMMUNI

TION-LIFT FOR THE PAIR OF GUNS.

4, of right gun, takes his station at lift motor; 4, of left gun,

ammunition hatch between the guns, and sees everything

ar for hoisting.
Load!

1 lays gun to loading position and keeps trained on the

Irget.

2 opens the breech; sponges off mushroom head and gas

heck, if necessary; turns lock right side up; extracts old
rimer, inserts a new one, and closes the lock completely.
3 places loading tray in the gun; picks up the rammer.
4, of right gun, hoists ammunition-car to the turret, as soon

she receives signal from handling-room that the car is ready;

eturns car to handling-room as soon as it is empty.
I73

MoDIFICATION FoR A PAIR OF 8-IN. B. L. R.

28

4, of left gun, steadies the car; pushes the shell onto the sh
table, and stands ready to push the powder sections onto t
table.

5 steadies the shell on the table and rolls it into the she
bearer; and then swings shell-bearer to its loading positit

opposite the bore; pushes shell onto the loading tray, at

swings shell-bearer back to its place against the shell-table.
3 and 5 ram shell home smartly.
3 withdraws rammer and lays it clear of the gun.
5, of the other gun of the pair, takes first section of powde
and passes it to his corresponding number, who pushes it :
the gun as far as he can reach.
3 receives second section of powder from 5 of the other gut
and pushes it in the gun until the rear end is just clear of th
-

loading tray; then removes the loading tray and lays to

turret floor; wipes out gas check seat and screw box with

marine sponge, if any dirt has accumulated there; return

sponge to the tub; stands clear of the recoil.

2 closes the breech; unships crank, if necessary; sees eter

one clear of the recoil and taps 1 on the leg with his hand is

signal that the gun is ready to be fired.

4 hoists ammunition for the other gun as soon as he receve

signal from the handling-room that the car is ready.
Unload!

1 lays the gun to the loading position.

2 opens breech; then extracts primer.
4 hoists empty ammunition-car.

3 places loading tray in the gun; withdraws the two sectin

of the powder charge and turns them over to 5.

5 places the sections of powder charge on shell table, and

of the other gun pushes them into the ammunition-car.

3, assisted by 5, engages shell-extractor in the extract:

groove and withdraws the projectile, landing it on the

loadi

tray.

5 swings shell-bearer to loading position, and the projecti

is then landed on it.

3 and 5 then push the shell-bearer to its position against ti

shell table.

5 then rolls the shell onto the table and pushes it into t
ammunition-car.
I74

-*::=

MODIFICATION FOR A PAIR OF 8-IN. B. L. R.

29

4 signals the handling-room and sends the car down to the

indling-room.
2 closes the breech.
taxe-ri

Commence Firing!

The gun-pointer fires as soon as his sights bear, after re

'iving the signal from 2 that the gun is ready; and the load
g and firing continue, without any orders being given, until
te command Cease Firing!
Should it be necessary to fire the primer as percussion, and
le lanyard is not led to the sighting hood, it will be hooked
y 3 and pulled by him when the command Fire! is given
y the gun-pointer.
When exercising without powder, the gun-pointer should
ill out Fire! or use a primer, in order that the exercise
lay be continued.
The gun-pointers should be exercised frequently at picking

| objects quickly with the sighting-telescopes, and in keeping

guns trained on moving vessels.

Change Stations!
To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the men
h all the duties in the turret.)
At this command, each man goes up one number, except

p. 1, who becomes 5.

No. 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2, and so

Secure!

The turret will be placed in securing position for sea or for

rt.

The numbers will return what they provided and secure

at they cast loose. No. 2 will lock the turret before the
irrent (or pressure) is turned off the training motors (or
ngines). The Gunner's Mate, assisted by the crew, thoroughly
Donges the gun, wipes the bore dry, and then gives it a light
5at of oil supplied for that purpose. This should be done, if
racticable, while the bore is hot.

The men leave the turret

nd go to their stations for Muster when ordered by the

'urret Officer.

I2

175

30

AMMUNITION-CREW FOR A PAIR OF 8-IN. B. L. R.

AMMUNITION-CREW FOR A PAIR OF 8-INCH B. L. F

MOUNTED IN TURRET.
(Io men, 5 to each gun.)
No.

Title.

Station.

1
2
8

Captain (Gunner's Mate).

Superintends in handling-roo

Shellman.

Handles shell.

4
5

Powderman.

&4

4&

4 :

Handles powder.

4&

4 :

*{

Cast Loose and Provide, and Battle Stations.

1 unlocks shell-room and magazine; tends voice-tube; supe
intends the handling of shell and powder; makes signal whe
the ammunition-car is ready for hoisting.
1, 2, 3, take the shell from the shell-room and place it inti
ammunition-car,3 provides drinking water for the shell-room
4, inside the magazine, to pass out sections of powder chag
5 connects fire-hose and supplies drinking water for the na;
azine; takes sections of powder charge from 4 and places tie
in the ammunition-car.

For muster or inspection, the ammunition-crew will

formed on the left of the gun-crew, with 1 on the right.
If the magazines and shell-rooms are not located around
near the turret chamber, an ammunition supply-gang from
Powder Division will supply the ammunition and fill the amn
nition-car.

If the magazines and shell-rooms are located around or

the turret chamber, then an ammunition-crew will be taken f
the same division as the turret-crew. This arrangement
the Turret Officer complete control of everything pertaini
to the turret, both in action and at exercise. No one is 1
quired from the Powder Division. It is important that No.

should be a Gunner's Mate. Large and efficient ammunitio

crews are essential for providing an ample supply of ammuniti
for the guns.

They also form the turret-reserve, and should

drilled at the guns in order to be qualified to fill vacanci

The ammunition-crews should be assigned cleaning stations
the handling-room, and the Gunner's Mate in the turret.
176

SECONDARY BATTERY,

SECONDARY BATTERY.

The crews of the secondary battery are not assigned as

arders or riflemen.
The members of the crew should be well trained rifle-shots.

The stations of the crew for muster and inspection are as

lows: For guns mounted on deck or on the railin line near
gun, facing inboard, 1 on the right; for guns mounted aloft
line on deck abreast the mast, facing outboard, 1 on the
t.

t the call for General Quarters, the men will go

ckly to their guns and Cast loose and provide.
Commands.

Silence!

Cast Loose and Provide!

Load!

(Designating ob

tt, direction, and range; e. g., At ship on port beam, 1200

ds!), Commence Firing! Cease Firing! Unload! Secure!
Silence!

t this command perfect silence is maintained. The men

nd at attention at their stations, and await orders.
|

177

DRILL OF I-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

DRILL OF 1-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

(3 men.)

Gun No.

Title.

Station.

1
2

Captain.
Plugman.

At shoulder-piece.
At operating lever.

Arms
Revolve
ReVoivt

Loader.

At ammunition box, near the breech.

Revolve

Cast Loose and Provide!

(Guns secured for sea.)

1 commands; removes gun cover and tompion; casts adri
gun lashings; removes sight covers or places sight, an
sees sliding-leaf amidships; ships shoulder-piece; renovt
drill hook
moves drill
mechanism;
der; adjusts

and hooks up spring in Hotchkiss guns, r.

washer in Driggs-Schroeder guns; tests breet
examines bore; sees gun and mount in making 0.
drill apron, when used; when all is ready reporst

Divisional Officer; takes station at shoulder-piece. If gun

mounted aloft, 1 goes aloft, sends down whip for ammunio
and other articles; receives articles whipped up by 2 and 3.

2 provides and examines the reserve-box containing acts

sories; sees in place the bristle bore sponge; provides three
volvers with belts and ammunition, places revolvers in r:
and belts clear of gun; provides one wet deck swab; ass

3 to bring ammunition; takes station at breech operating level

3 provides bucket containing fresh water and a hand swal
and places it clear of gun; assisted by 2 brings ammunitof
takes station at ammunition box in the rear of gun.
If the gun is mounted aloft, 2 and 3 whip the articles in

ammunition to the top before going aloft, and then secure th

whip and net under the top.
Belts are never put on except by the order Take Arms'
The Gunner's Mate provides spare articles and drinki:
|

Water.

Load!

1 places shoulder to shoulder-piece; seizes the handle wi

his hand, and as soon as gun is unclamped lays it outboard
the direction of the target; plants his feet firmly on deck
resist the motion of the ship.
178

*-*

------

DRILL OF I-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

: unclamps pivot and cradle clamps as soon as 1 has his

Dulder to the shoulder-piece; opens the breech; as soon as
has inserted a cartridge, closes breech; he also loads when 3
away after ammunition; assists 3 in bringing more ammuni
in, when necessary.
3 takes cartridge from box and, as soon as breech is open,
aces cartridge in the bore until the cartridge-rim takes
gainst the extractor. When only a few cartridges remain, 3
lls out Shell! and goes for more ammunition; 2 loads dur
g absence of 3, and a continuous fire is maintained.
Commence Firing!
2 adjusts sight for designated range.
1 aims and fires; the gun is reloaded, he fires again, and so
n until the command Cease Firing! is given.
3 loads after each discharge and keeps empty cases clear of
gun.

Unload!

tightens pivot and cradle clamps; opens breech slowly;

en cartridge has been removed he closes the breech and 1
ls the trigger.
catches the cartridge with his right hand and replaces it in
box.

Change Stations!
(To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the men
th all the duties at the gun.)
At this command each man goes up one number, except No.
who becomes 3; 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2.
Secure!

| The numbers return what they provided and secure what they
ast loose.

1 and 2, clean and oil the breech mechanism.

3 sponges and oils the bore.
Then take the positions for muster.

IZQ

DRILL OF 3-PDR. AND 6-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

DRILL OF 3-PDR. AND 6-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

(4 men.)
Gun No. Title.

1
2

Captain.
Plugman.

Loader.

4. Shellman.

Station.

Arms.

At shoulder-piece.
At operating lever.
In rear of gun.

Revolver.
Revolver.
Revolver.

At ammunition box, near the breech.

Revolver.

Cast Loose and Provide!

(Guns secured for sea.)

1 commands; removes gun cover and tompion; casts airi"

gun-lashings; removes sight cover or places sight, and te:
sliding-leaf amidships; ships shoulder-piece; removes drill h;0.
and hooks up spring in Hotchkiss guns, removes drill wasie!
in Driggs-Schroeder guns; tests breech mechanism; examie
bore; when all is ready reports to Divisional Officer; tat,
station at shoulder-piece. If gun is mounted aloft, goes all
sends down whip for ammunition and other articles; recei
articles whipped up by 3 and 4.
.
2 provides and examines the reserve box containing acci

sories; sees in place the bristle bore sponge; casts adrift gu

lashings; sees mount in working order; adjusts drill-apro
when used; provides four revolvers with belts and amm
tion, places revolvers in rack and belts clear of gun; takes Si
tion at breech operating lever. At a gun mounted aloft, he
ceives articles whipped up by 3 and 4.
3 brings ammunition from hatch assisted by 4; provides o
wet deck swab and places it on deck under breech of the gut
takes station in rear of breech and facing it.
4 brings ammunition from hatch assisted by 3; provides
-

bucket containing fresh water and a hand swab, and places

clear of gun; takes station at ammunition box in the rear |
gun.

If the gun is mounted aloft, 3 and 4 whip the articles a

ammunition to the top before going aloft, and then secure

whip and net under the top.

18O

m-:=

-------

DRILL OF 3-PDR. AND 6-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

3elts are never put on except by the order Take Arms!
'he Gunner's Mate provides spare articles and drinking
!er.

Load!

places shoulder to shoulder-piece, seizes handle with his

ld, and as soon as gun is unclamped lays it outboard in the
ection of the target; plants his feet firmly on deck to resist
: motion of the ship.
unclamps pivot and cradle clamps as soon as 1 has his

Dulder to the shoulder-piece; opens the breech; as soon as

has inserted a cartridge, closes breech; he also loads when
ind 4 are away after ammunition.

3 takes cartridge from 4, and as soon as breech is open,

ices the cartridge in the bore until the cartridge rim takes
ainst the extractor.

passes cartridges to 3.
hen only a few cartridges remain, 4 calls out Shell!,
reupon 3 and 4 go for more ammunition. 2 loads during
ence of 3 and 4, and a continuous fire is maintained.
Commence Firing!
adjusts sight for designated range.
aims and fires; the gun is reloaded, he fires again, and so
until the command Cease Firing! is given.
loads after each discharge.
passes ammunition to 3, and keeps empty cases clear of the
1.
Unload!

tightens pivot and cradle clamps; opens breech slowly;

en cartridge has been removed, he closes breech, and 1 pulls
gger.

} catches the cartridge with his right hand and passes it to 4.

! receives cartridge from 3 and replaces it in the box.
Change Stations!

(To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the

en with all the duties at the gun.)

At this command each man goes up one number, except No.

who becomes 4; 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2; and 4 becomes 3.
181

DRILL OF 3-PDR. AND 6-PDR. R. F. GUNS.

Secure!

The numbers return what they provided and secure w

they cast loose.
1 and 2 clean and oil the breech mechanism.

3 and 4 sponge and oil the bore.

Then take the positions for muster.
Dismount Breech Mechanism.
HOTCHKISS.

3 withdraws the stop bolt.

2 clamps the gun; throws back the crank handle with !

right hand and catches the block with his left; when the cran

stud is free from the groove, lets the crank handle rest at
limit of backward throw; takes the block in both hand, i.
verts it and places it on deck; presses on the sear, snapi
the hammer, or easing it by the cocking toe to the snappelp
sition; removes the extractor.
With blocks having flat springs:

1 takes the dismounting tool from the reserve box, insert t

edge in the breech block at the bend of the mainspin
presses down on the spring and unhooks the outer end f
the stirrup (or drill hook); withdraws the mainspring (coc
if necessary by means of the cocking toe); pulls out the r
ing shaft; withdraws hammer, removes sear, and with the p
of the dismounting tool and a tap of the hand backs out
sear spring; removes the firing point by inserting the edg:
the dismounting tool diagonally between the spring ears
rear of the hammer, and springing them apart; afterwards

ing or tapping on the point till clear and taking care not
cut the hand on the sharp edges of the point.
With blocks having spiral springs:

1 takes the dismounting tool, inserts it in the slot in the b:

of the mainspring, presses down till the square edges of t

base are clear, turns the base through a right angle, and wi
draws the spring; withdraws the mainspring sleeve; withdra

rocking shaft by pressing in its spring catch, tapping the e

of the shaft, and then pulling it out; withdraws the hamm
which is now free; turns the sear forward of the block; remo

it and pulls out the sear spring; places proper arm of the (
mounting tool on the rear end of the firing point, turns
182

DRILL OF 3-PDR. AND 6PDR. R. F. GUNS.

ugh a right angle, and pushes it and then pulls it through
slot in the hammer head.
DRIGGS-SCHROEDER.

clamps the gun; presses down the spring catch on the end
the main bolt, removes the operating handle and then the

ing catch and taps the end of the main bolt to start it out;
ces left hand under the breech block, taking the weight off
main bolt, and when main bolt is withdrawn allows the
ck to turn, and withdraws it to the rear, laying it on deck,
e down.

pulls out the main bolt after 2 has started it.

1 removes

extractors; takes the dismounting tool and cocks the firing

l, if not already cocked; places proper socket of the dis
unting tool on the rear end of the flat sear spring, taps it,
d starts the sear spring through the block; turns the block

ir side down, pulls out the sear spring, slides off the face
e; withdraws the main cam and returns the block to its
ition face down; removes the catch from the rear end of the
g pin, and then, holding the block firmly with the knee,
ks the dismounting tool in the eye in the rear end of the
ng pin; takes the strain off the mainspring, slides the sear
of its slot, eases down the firing pin and allows it and the

inspring to fall out on deck; inserts socket of the dismount

g tool on the square shaft of the firing point, and unscrews
e point from the head of the firing pin.
With Driggs-Schroeder guns having guide grooves closed at

# forward end, 2 unscrews the left guide bolt and 3 the right,
fore proceeding further with dismounting.
Mount Breech Mechanism.

Troceed in the reverse way.

The hammer of the Hotchkiss

ock must be at full cock when the block is inserted in the

un; the firing pin of the Driggs-Schroeder block must be at

ill cock when the face plate is returned, or the firing point will
e broken.
*

183

DRILL OF I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

DRILL OF 1 -PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

(3 men.)
Gun No.
1
2
3

Title.

Captain.
Loader.
Shellman.

Arms.
Revolver.
Revolver.
Revolver.

Cast Loose and Provide!

1 commands; removes gun cover; takes out tompion; cast

adrift gun lashings; clears sights; tests the mechanism, notin
that the spring is under sufficient tension; notes that the reco.
cylinder or buffer is full, that the gun jacket is filled with co,
water, and that the mount generally, including the elevator,
in working order; unclamps the gun, assisted by 2 if necessar.
and points as prescribed or as directed.
2 provides and examines the reserve box; provides the re
volvers and belts for the crew, provides drinking water atist

lated guns; assists 3 to bring ammunition, if necessary; as

sists 1, if necessary, in unclamping and training the gun; the
station at the right side of the gun.

3 brings ammunition from the hatch assisted by 2 if necess:

and places it in rear of the gun amidships; takes station alo
side of ammunition.
Load!

3 delivers box containing filled belt of ammunition to 2; go

to left side of gun; pulls the belt, when it is pointed throug

feeding aperture, till the carrier has placed one cartridge int
bore and seized another.

2 receives the box containing a loaded belt from 3; ship

in place on the right side and opens it; picks up the end oft
belt, enters it fairly in the feeding aperture and passes

through to 3; works twice, smartly through its full

hand-lever on the right side of the gun in order to cause t

carrier to seize and place one cartridge in the barrel and

seize another.

Commence Firing!

1 fires when ready by pulling the trigger.

For continuous fire, 1 retains his pull on the trigger; fil

184

DRILL OF I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

ng safety indicator at automatic position; for single shots

'eleases the trigger after each fire, first setting the safety
Eator at the single-shot position.
assists 1 as necessary in pointing; receives boxes containing
d belts from 3; as the last cartridges of a belt start from

box on the gun, unships the empty box and ships a new
, following the old belt closely with the end of the new one,
proceeds as in Load! After starting a filled belt, assists
necessary in providing ammunition.
passes boxes containing filled belts to 2; starts each new
by pulling it through the loading aperture, working on the
side of the gun. When ammunition is nearly exhausted,

s out Shell!places what remains convenient to the gun,

provides a fresh supply, assisted by 2 if necessary.
Cease Firing!
steadies the gun until clamped, sets safety indicator at
y position. 2 tightens the clamps.
Unload!

works twice, smartly through its whole throw, the lever

the right side, thus placing two loaded cartridges in the
ting tube below the gun; withdraws the partially filled belt
lays it clear for running in its box; receives from 3 the

b cartridges placed in the ejecting tube, wipes them clean,

i places them in the box; closes the box, unships it, and
sses it to 3.

3 removes the loaded cartridges from the ejecting tube below

! gun and passes them to 2; gathers up the empty belts and
jaces them in their boxes; receives the box containing par

lly filled belt from 2; sees that boxes containing filled belts,
rtially filled belts, and empty belts, are grouped apart.
1 pulls the trigger, snapping the lock.
Change Stations!

(To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the

tn with all the duties at the

gun.)
At this command each man goes up one number, except No.
who becomes 3; 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2.
Secure!

The numbers return what they provided and secure what

ley cast loose.
185

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

THE 1-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

(Caliber 37 mm. or 1/.457.)

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.
To Remove the Lock.

Take out the cover pin, open the cover, turn the crank hand
over to the front, and see that the carrier drops; them tak
hold of the top of the lock casing and raise the lock, allowin
the crank handle to come slowly back, then if there are any liv
cartridges in the carrier remove them (while the latter is almos
fully down); now seize the lock in front, give it one-sixth e
a turn either way, and lift it out.

When the lock is out of the gun, and it is necessary to re

lease the lock spring, great care should be taken, before dini
so, to see that the carrier is at the highest point
To Replace the Lock.
See that the connecting rod is upright, then holding the Ot

one-sixth of a turn to either side, place the rear end of the i

lever over the connecting rod as far as it will go, turn the
to the front and lower it into the breech casing while mov
the crank handle forward; see that the lock flanges are en
ing in their guides in the recoil plates, and let go the cr:
handle.
To Remove Feed Block.

Open the cover, and feed block can then be lifted out by pi
ing it vertically upwards.
To Replace Feed Block.

Open the cover, and force the feed block downwards

position, taking care that the feed block slide is well over

the left, so that the stud on the bottom lever engages in t

recess on the barrel block.

To Remove the Clock Spring Box.

By means of the special wrench hold the spring box firm

taking the weight of the spring off the securing screw, then
186

THE 1-PDR. MAxIM AUToMATIC GUN.

the securing screw until the box can be moved and
y turn it in a counter-clock wise direction until the
is completely unwound; the latter can then be detached
the hook at the end of the crankshaft and the box can

noved.

Two men are required for this.

To Replace the Clock Spring Box.

erse the foregoing operations.

To Remove the Barrel.

n the cover, and remove the lock; unwind the clock

so as to take the strain off the crank; remove the buffer

the filling in pieces right and left and the muzzle stuffing
Insert the cleaning rod into the barrel from the breech,
ve the nut at the other end of it, and place the barrel nut
ler over the cleaning rod allowing the end of the latter to
through the hole in front portion of spanner, and push in
panner until the projections on it engage in the corre
ling notches on the barrel nut, then replace the nut on the
ing rod and screw it up against the spanner; then by
ng the spanner, and loosening the cleaning-rod nut, the

:l nut is unscrewed and the barrel spring is gradually re

d; the barrel together with the recoil plates can now be
n out to the rear.

To Replace the Barrel.

verse the foregoing operations.
B.To avoid risk of injury care should be taken not to

d in front of the muzzle when screwing up or releasing the

el spring.
To Remove the Ammunition Box Bracket.

atch hold of the springs at the ends of the arms, pull both
y from the studs and at the same time lift the bracket with

knee until the studs are opposite the large recesses in the
s at the ends of the arms; the bracket can then be pulled

its studs and removed from the gun.

To Replace the Ammunition Box Brackets.

Neverse the foregoing operations.

187

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

To Keep the Gun in Working Order.

Before taking a gun into action the surfaces on which
movable parts work should be thoroughly well oiled, especi
the following:

(a)
(b)
parts
(c)

Bearing parts of barrel and all recoiling portions.

The lock guides on the recoil plates, also the work
of the lock itself, especially the levers and carrier.
Face of feed block and the edges of steel guides inside:

feed block.

(d) Bearings of the crank as far as they can be reach

without stripping the gun.
In order to see that the recoiling portion works freely, to
the crank handle to the front until the pawls on the ins

cams engage the horns of the carrier, thereby holding the lo

back, then pull the crank handle to the rear (using a lever
necessary) and by this means move the recoiling portion bat
wards to see that it works correctly and can take its full tal

Weigh the clock spring with the spring balance as folo

place the loop of spring balance over knob of crank him
and pull the balance vertically upwards; the reading

when the crank handle commences to move will be the weig':

lbs., of the clock spring. This weight should be betwee

lbs. and 36 lbs., and care should be taken when weighing t
that the lock works quite freely, and that the carrier is e
If the spring is over or not up to weight, it can be adjuste
removing the securing screw of the spring box as descr
above, and then turning the box so as to either unwind or
up the spring: as a rule a shift of one hole (i. e. a quarter t
makes a difference of about 4 lbs. Turning the box cloc
increases the weight and counter-clock wise decreases it.
Should the gun leak at the breech, remove the feed bl
then tighten up the breech packing gland, by means of
spanner provided for that purpose; but if the gland is q
home and the leakage continues, it should be unscrewed, s

more packing lubricated with oil inserted, and the gland

placed and screwed up.

Should the gun leak at the muzzle, tighten up the mu

packing gland, but if the leakage still continues when the g
is flush with the front edge of the stuffing box, then the g
should be removed, fresh asbestos packing moistened with

inserted in the muzzle stuffing box and the gland replaced

188

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

htened up. Care should however be taken that the asbestos

sking does not press so tightly against the barrel as to cause
to jam: this should be tested as described already by seeing
he recoiling portion can be moved right back when the gun
horizontal. If the packing is found to press so hard on the
*rel as to prevent this being done, the gland should be re
ved and some of the asbestos packing taken out.
\ spare lock is supplied with each gun so that if any part
sh as a lockspring or firing pin, etc., becomes defective dur
; the firing, the lock can be removed and replaced by the
ire One.

Points to be Attended to Before Firing.

a) Examine the barrel and see that the bore is clear.
b) See that the hydraulic buffer contains the proper amount
liquid (glycerine and water in equal parts); this can be
ted by putting the gun at extreme depression; then on re
ving the filling plug at the rear of the cylinder the liquid
ld be up to the front edge of the filling hole.
) See that the water-jacket is filled with water.
) Work the mechanism several times by means of the
k handle, releasing the firing pin each time, and see that all
ts work smoothly and correctly.
e) Examine the ammunition and see that it is of the proper
scription, that the belts are correctly filled with it, and packed
efully in the ammunition boxes, the shells pointing towards

, muzzle. To fill an ammunition belt by hand, insert the cart

ge in the loop from the thin edge, and pass it through until
| front edge of the driving band is flush with the front or
ck edge of the belt. To pack a belt in the ammunition box,
ce the box so that the lid can be drawn to the right, press
locking spring and draw out the lid, then with the shells to

: front lay the belt in layers in the box, taking care to fit
sm tightly and well up to both ends, then replace the lid.
the sight protector is removed from the sight see that it is
wed on to its stud on the right outside plate.
Points to be Attended to During Firing.
See that a sufficient supply of water is kept in the water
:lzet so that the barrel shall never be uncovered.

k)

(b) To load the gun, insert the ammunition belt

in the feed

ock, turn the crank handle fully to the front, pull the belt
189

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

through the feed block to the left as far as it will go and

go the crank handle, then turn crank handle to the fro
again, pull the belt a second time, and on letting go the cra
handle the gun is loaded and all is ready for firing.
(c) That the right hand is kept clear of the crank handle
avoid risk of injury.
(d) That the indicator lever is always in the safe po:
tion except while the gun is actually being fired.
(e) That the belt is on no account to be pulled while the g|
is firing.
Points to be Attended to After Firing.
|

(a) That the indicator lever is turned to safe, that ti

gun is unloaded and that no cartridges are left in the eject
tube. To unload the gun, turn the crank handle fully to t.
front, let it fly back and again turn it to the front and let
go; this leaves the barrel and carrier empty, and if the lo&
now drawn back till the horns of the carrier are caught by
cam pawls, then any cartridge left in the ejector tube cal
withdrawn by hand.
(b) That the interior of the barrel is oiled immediately
firing to prevent erosion.

(c) That the water is removed from the water jacket,

is quickly done by removing the emptying plug.
(d) That the lock is taken out, cleaned and oiled and

the carrier, firing pin and springs are examined to see

they are not damaged.

(e) That the lockspring is released.

N. B.It will not be necessary to strip the lock for this.
() The gun should be covered to protect it from salt w
ra1n, etc.

FAILURES THAT MAY OCCUR, AND HOW TO REME

THEM.

Accidental stoppage in the automatic action of the gun

generally due to either:
I. Inability of the lock to come back far enough to all
the carrier to drop.
II. Inability of the lock to come right forward after rec

III. Carrier being unable to rise to its highest posit

although the lock is almost home.

IV. Failure to fire the cartridge, or to get sufficient re.

I90

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

it if ignited, although the lock has gone correctly into

rward position.
each of the above cases it is seen therefore that the lock

arrier are arrested in different positions, and as these are

ly indicated by the crank handle, the position of the latter
d be carefully observed directly a stoppage occurs. To
in doing this, diagrammatic sketches are given which
approximately the position of the crank handle in each
e above four cases.

--

rv

he causes of failure are probably:

I.

Too much weight on the clock spring, want of oil or a

t charge.
I.

Obstruction in chamber or defective ammunition.

..I.

(a) Too little weight on the clock spring.

W.

(b)
(c)
(d)
(a)

Want of oil.
Damaged lock.
Fault of feed.
Missfire.

(b) Empty cartridge or one with a loose projectile.

The above may be remedied as follows:
I. There is no need to open the cover; simply bring the
ink handle fully forward and let it go, then all is ready for
ing. If the stoppage is repeated the clock spring should be
htened as previously described, taking care to see that the
licator lever is at safe.

If this stoppage recurs with the spring at minimum weight,

e cover should be opened and the bearings and working parts
all oiled, the indicator lever being turned to the safe posi
Dm.

II. Turn the indicator lever to safe, open the cover, press
bwn the carrier and turn the crank handle over to the front,

irking it up by force if necessary, raise the lock and examine

he chamber to see if there is any obstruction in it, and also
he cartridges in the carrier to see if any are damaged.
I9I

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

III. First remove finger from trigger, then without openi

the cover, strike the crank handle sharply with the right had
to send it home, taking care to remove the hand from the kn

instantly; if this is easily done and then, on again pulling te

trigger the same stoppage recurs after firing a round, it wi
be advisable to turn the indicator lever to the safe" positio
and to increase the weight of the clock spring.
If this stoppage recurs with the spring at maximum weig
the indicator lever should be turned to the safe positio
the cover opened and the bearings and working parts we
oiled.

If the gun again fails similarly, the lock should be remove

for examination and replaced by the spare one.

Should it be found when this stoppage occurs that the tram

handle cannot easily be sent home by a blow from the land
then turn the indicator lever to the safe" position, open th:

cover, and look at the face of the feed block, when it will po
ably be seen that the cartridges have not been properly fedu!
Now feel the belt in the feed block to see whether it is los

or jammed; if the former it can probably be adjusted by pulin,

the belt to the left front; but should it be tightly fixed with #

cartridges fed crossways, withdraw the lock (taking caret

press down the carrier while doing so) raise it, and clear ite
cartridges; next replace the lock and fix it as follows: T
crank handle to the front until the cam pawls engage the ho
of the carrier, then let go the crank handle and the lock
now be found fixed so that on pulling the crank handle to t
rear the recoiling portion is drawn back and the top pawls
the feed block are moved to the right, thereby releasing
pressure on the belt, so that by pulling the latter to the k

front the next cartridge can usually be correctly brought it

position; then close the cover, turn the crank handle fully
the front and let it go; then on turning the crank handle ov
again and pulling the belt to the left all is ready for firing.

A jam in the feed block can usually be readily recogniz

without opening the cover, as in that case the recoiling porti
is prevented from going right forward, and so a space can b
clearly seen between the front of the crank bearing and the en
of the slot in breech casing.
If it is found that the feed is correct but that the crank handl
cannot be sent home, then the fock should be removed for ex
I92

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

ition, and if necessary replaced by the spare one, taking

-hat the indicator lever is in the safe" position.
may be added that the plan of fixing the lock and moving
ecoiling portion by turning the crank handle as described
e, affords a ready method of oiling the bearing parts of the
1 at the most important points, viz.: (a) just in rear of
reech packing gland (which can be got at by removing the
block), and (b) at the muzzle end in front of the packing
i.

Turn the crank handle over fully to the front, pull the
o the left through the feed block and let go the handle.
is action the defective cartridges will be drawn out of the
ber and placed in the ejector tube, and a new cartridge
in from the belt and placed in the chamber.
issfires may occur as follows:

1.
2.

By a weak lock spring.

By a firing pin being broken or worn flat on the point.

3.

Lock mechanism being corroded.

4.

By a defective cartridge.

1 cases 1, 2 and 3, remove the lock and replace by the spare

ase 4 is remedied as described above.
at any time a stoppage occurs during the firing and it is
red to open the cover to examine the cause; first remove
finger from the trigger, turn the indicator lever to safe.
then allow two or three seconds to elapse before the cover
pened. If it is seen that the carrier is not quite up, no at
1pt should be made to raise it. On the contrary the carrier
"uld first be pushed down before the crank handle is turned
*r to the front to draw the lock back, as by this means all
k of firing a cartridge accidentally is avoided.
NSTRUCTIONS FOR STRIPPING AND ASSEMBLING THE

GUN.
To Strip the Gun."
Remove the ammunition box bracket.

Remove the tangent sight and see the protector is on fore

ght.
*In all operations of stripping and assembling, pins are invariably driven
It from the left and inserted from the right.
I93

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

Take out the cover pin.

Drive out the split pin of the cover joint pin, remove colla
and joint pin, and take off cover.
Remove feed block, lock and clock spring box.
Drive out the taper securing pin (from the left) at the rea
end of the breech casing; take hold of the pistol grip and li:
slightly, strike the top edges of the outside plates alternatel
with a wooden mallet and the buffer block will lift out.

Drive out split pin from the roller nut, remove the nut, rolle:
and dead stop.

Pull out the filling-in pieces right and left.

Remove the muzzle stuffing box and packing gland, the
unscrew and take out the barrel nut by means of the special
spanner (as described on page 187), remove barrel spring, draw
out the barrel from the rear, and detach it from the recoi
plates.

Unscrew and remove the steam tube.

Place the water-jacket on a box or bench with the brech

casing clear of the box; drive out the water-jacket securing pit
(from the left), then give the top edges of the outside plae,
a few taps with a mallet (holding the weight at the same tire

and taking care not to strike the gun metal; the breech cas
will slide down the dovetails and become detached from

water-jacket.
To Assemble the Gun.

Reverse the foregoing operations, taking care when replaci

the buffer complete to see that the groove at the end of :

piston rod is engaging properly in the recess which is cut

it in the crossbar at the rear of the recoil plates.
To Strip the Feed Block.

Unscrew top lever fixing screw, drive out the bottom lev
and remove top lever and slide.
Drive out top pawl axis pin and remove the top pawls al
-

the top pawl spring.

Drive out bottom pawl axis pin and remove the bottom paw
and bottom pawl spring.
To Assemble the Feed Block.

Reverse the foregoing operations.

I94

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

To Strip the Hydraulic Buffer.

screw and remove the buffer securing nut at the rear of
block and remove the buffer complete from the buffer
screw and remove the buffer packing gland and take out
acking leather, buffer ring and piston.
screw and remove the buffer cylinder from the outer cas
r cap (if required).
To Assemble the Hydraulic Buffer.
verse the foregoing operations, taking care when replacing
buffer complete in the gun to see that the groove at the
Df the piston rod is engaged properly in the recess which is
or it in the crossbar at the rear of the recoil plates.
B.It is advisable in order to make better joints between
various parts to smear over the threads of the screwed por

s with a very thin layer of tallow before assembling them.

allow is not available vaseline would answer nearly as well.
To Fill the Hydraulic Buffer when in the Gun.
ut the gun at extreme depression, remove the filling plug
he rear of the cylinder and also the little screw which is on

upper surface of the outer casing of the buffer inside the

ech casing, then fill the cylinder at the filling hole until the
lid runs out of the small hole from which the small screw

, removed.

Allow the liquid to overflow for a short time so

t any air which has been poured in with the liquid may
ape, and then replace the filling plug and the small brass
eW.

To Strip the Lock.

See that the lock is cocked and the carrier at its lowest posi
111.

Drive out the pin securing the hand-sear guard.

Remove the hand-sear guard and release the lockspring.

Drive out axis pin for the lifting levers and remove lifting
vers and lockspring.
Drive out axis pins for hand-sear and tumbler, and remove
and-sear and tumbler.

Drive out axis pin for side levers, and remove the side levers
nd firing pin.
I95

THE I-PDR, MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

Drive out the safety-sear axis pin, and remove the safety-se
with spring.
Remove the carrier, push out gib spring shutter, and tal
out gib spring and gib.
To Assemble the Lock.

Reverse the foregoing operations.

ASSEMBLING ELEVATING GEAR.

1.

Block handle is screwed in gudgeon; then place elevatin:

rack block in space in gudgeon I".252 x 1".15 with T-slot facing

block handle; then connect block handle and elevating rad
block together.

2. Place elevating rack in gudgeon at diam. 1".505 with teet

facing elevating rack block, then screw block handle to th:
right; this will engage elevating rack and elevating rack black
3. Screw elevating cross-head on hand wheel at 1".75 dim
4. Place locking ball spring in elevating rack at ".439 diff.
then place locking ball on top of spring and compress b,

clear of diam. I.25; then screw hand wheel on elevating r

at 1" diam. The locking ball acts as a stop.
5. Place gudgeon in cross-head as assembled and tighten
screw in cross-head against gudgeon.

6. Place elevating cross-head in line with holes in elevati

brackets on outside plates; then place elevating pin throu

elevating brackets and elevating cross-head at diam. ".95; th

turn elevating pin handle downward; by doing this the elevati
pin cannot pull out.
DISASSEMBLING THE ELEWATING GEAR.
Reverse the above order.
DESCRIPTION OF MOUNTING.

The mounting consists of the following parts: (1) Cross

Head; (2) Elevating Gear; (3) Pivot; (4) Stand.
Cross-Head.

The cross-head is a single gun-metal casting, shaped lik

the letter Y. The two upper branches are provided with trun
nion bearings and cap squares, the latter being hinged to th
former and held in a locked position by the trunnion pins. Th
196

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

part or stem of the cross-head is bored out to fit over

eel pivot or adaptor, to which it can be clamped by means
lamping screw fixed to the upper part of the stem.
Pivot.

: pivot is of steel, divided into two portions by the central

:; the upper portion fits into the stem of the cross-head as
oned before and the lower portion is adapted to fit the
it of either the deck stand or top mount. In order to
se the gun, either the clamping screw of the mount or
the cross-head may be loosened.
Elevating Arm.
e cross-head is further provided with an arm, projecting
the stem at an angle downwards, the end of this arm is

ld and provides a bearing for the gudgeon.

Gudgeon.
e gudgeon is a short cylinder of gun-metal, carried as be
stated by the forks of the elevating arm. It lies horizontal
is capable of a slight circular movement limited by a stop
w. Through its diameter are two holes, one round and the

r rectangular, with a space cut between the two. Through

round hole slides the elevating rack and in the other is
ted the elevating rack block.
Elevating Rack Block.
his block is of steel; it moves laterally in line with the
of the gudgeon. The side towards the elevating rack has
& teeth; in its opposite side is cut a T-groove, into which fits

flange on the screwed end of the elevating block handle.

Elevating Block Handle.
he threaded portion of this handle screws axially into the
geon on the right hand side and as its flanged end is in
agement with the elevating rack block, the latter can be
ed laterally by turning this handle.
Elevating Rack.

This consists of a strong steel tube into one end of which is

reted the elevating screw; the other end is closed. In a part
its circumference and for nearly its whole length a rack is
I97

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

*
cut, while in the opposite side is cut a square groove. Th:
groove slides over the square end of a screw located axially 5.
the gudgeon, on the left hand side. The threaded end of th:
rack works through the axis of the hand wheel.
Hand Wheel.

The hand wheel is made of gun metal; its hub is prolorge

on either side. The lower part fits over the plain section &
the elevating rack screw and the upper part is threaded on th:
inside for the screw, and on the outside for the elevating ros
head.

Hand Wheel Locking Device.

In order that the hand wheel may not be fully unscrwei
accidentally when sighting the gun, the following device i ap:
plied: The plain section of the elevating screw has a courter
sunk hole at right angle to its axis, a helical spring lie; it
this hole holding at its outer end a steel ball; this ball is on

stantly pressed outward and against the inner wall of the pit
section of the hand wheel.

Should the hand wheel be turt

out to its extreme limit, the steel ball will be pressed half

into a cavity located in the inner wall. This prevents the hi

wheel from being screwed farther out; it can however
turned back, as the cavity is made so as to press the ball b:

into the elevating screw by turning the hand wheel the ot

way. To separate the hand wheel from the elevating rac
hole is located over the cavity in the hand wheel through whi
a point can be inserted and the ball pushed back.
Elevating Cross-Head.

This is of gun metal. The single end has an internal |

handed screw fitting over the external screw of the hand wh
The free ends of this cross-head fit between the elevating ra
on the gun, and the whole is secured thereto by the elevati

pin passing through the brackets and the cross-head.

Ammunition Bracket.

On the right hand side of the gun, just below and on eithe
side of the feed box are two studs.

One is riveted to the out

side plate of the gun and the other is screwed to the wate
jacket. To these studs the ends of the arc of the ammunitio

bracket are attached and kept in that position by means of th

ammunition bracket.

198

THE I-PDR. MAXIM AUTOMATIC GUN.

Ammunition Bracket Springs.

ings, riveted to the ends of the arc. These springs are
sted from being overdrawn by the spring stops. The arc
ther supported and kept from moving laterally by having
le rib of the same shape at the rear of it; this rib slides in
ular groove formed in the arc located on the stem of the
head.

As the radii of both these arcs meet in the axis

e trunnions of the gun, these arcs are in constant sliding

|ct while the gun is elevated or depressed thus forming a

g support to the ammunition bracket. To the downward

f the ammunition bracket is hinged the ammunition box
-

Ammunition Box Holder.

le ammunition box holder lies in a horizontal position

1 in use but can be turned up against the ammunition
ket and kept there by a hook provided for that purpose
a not in use. It is a gun-metal casting in the shape of a
ng arm with a cross-piece forming a tray in the center.
end of the arm is hinged to the ammunition bracket as
tioned before and to the other end is fitted a spring catch.

tray has two of its edges turned up with ribs on the inner
; these ribs fit the grooves in the gun-metal guide strips
$ned to the two longer bottom edges of the ammunition box

ler, and when engaged with the guide ribs is pushed home,
in the spring catch, depressed by the weight of the box,
es and keeps it securely in place.
Ammunition Box.

he ammunition box is made of wood; its two longer bot

1 sides are fitted with the gun-metal guides, the cover slides
gthwise in grooves; to the under side of it is fastened a brass
ing catch to keep it in place. The box is to hold two am
nition belts of 25 rounds each.
Ammunition Belt.

The feeding of the cartridges into the gun is accomplished in

! following manner: the cartridges are placed in the belt

med of two pieces of canvas fastened together by eyelets and
Ass strips.

The belt is made thick at the edge next to the bullet by being

lded over so that the cartridges may lie even in the box.
he canvas is water-proofed to render it insensible to climatic
\nditions.

I99

DRILL OF A 6-PDR. SEMI-AUTOMATIC R. F. GUN.

7.

DRILL OF A 6-PDR. SEMI-AUTOMATIC R. F. G.U.N.

(4 men.)
Gun No.
1

Title.

Captain.

Arms.
Revolver.

Loader.

Revolver.

Sheliman.

Revolver.

Shellman.

Revolver.

Cast Loose and Provide!

1 commands; removes gun cover; takes out tompions; asts

adrift gun lashings; clears or places sights; ships gun stock.

tests breech mechanism; examines the bore, seeing it clar.
sees the gun mount in working order, noting particularly ha.
the recoil cylinder is full; unclamps the gun, assisted by i.
necessary, and, with shoulder to the stock, points as prescried
or as directed.

2 provides and examines the reserve box; sees in place 1:

bristle sponge; provides the revolvers and belts of the cr
provides drinking water at isolated guns; assists 1, if nec
sary, in unclamping and training the gun. Takes station
right and rear of the gun conveniently for acting as loader
plugman.

3 brings ammunition from the hatch, assisted by 4, and plac

it in rear of the gun amidships; provides a wet deck swab at
places it under the breech of the gun. Takes station to

rear and right of the breech in position to pass ammuniti

to 2.

4 assists 3 in bringing ammunition from the hatch; provide

a bucket of fresh water and a clean hand swab; takes station i
rear of gun alongside of ammunition.

Load!

2 opens the breech smartly, if not already open; inserts :

cartridge and Smartly and deftly throws it home until the rin

of the cartridge head takes against the extractor, thus closing

the breech. If the breech does not close when the cartridge is
2OO

DRILL OF A 6-PDR. SEMI-AUTOMATIC R. F. GUN.

ome, 2 pushes the rim of the cartridge head against the

tor, by means of the rammer, or otherwise, and thus

it; performs the duties of 3 and 4 if both are absent.

kes a cartridge from 4 and passes it to 2; performs the
of 4 during his absence.

pens the box and passes a cartridge to 3.

Commence Firing!
res when ready.
nd 3 keep the deck swab under the breech of gun, and
y cases out of the way.

alls out Shell! when ammunition is nearly exhausted;

s what remains near the breech of the gun, and, assisted
if necessary, provides a fresh supply.
Cease Firing!
teadies the gun and clamps in elevation.
tightens the pivot clamp.
Unload!

lowly opens the breech; when the cartridge has been re

Bd, closes the breech by pressing on the extractor nibs
the rammer.

snaps the lock.

batches the cartridge as it comes out, wipes it clean, and
es it to 4.

receives the cartridge from 3 and replaces it in the box,

:h he closes.

Change Stations!
To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the men
1 all the duties at the gun.)

t this command each man goes up one number except No.

'ho becomes 4; 2 becomes 1; 3 becomes 2; and 4 becomes 3.
Secure!

he numbers return what they provided and secure what

y cast loose.
-PDR. SEMI-AUTOMATIC R. F. G.U.N.-MARK II.
To Dismount the Gun:

Remove the sights (rear and front).

Open the breech by the hand lever and turn the lever down
2OI

DRILL of A 6-PDR, SEMI-AUToMATIC R. F. GUN.

W.

further till it assumes a vertical position, pulling bact t

catch, the lever can then be removed.
Unscrew and take out the side box pin and remove the $# st
box cover.

Put on the hand lever and compress the action spring filth". "
then place on the special clip which holds the spring On.
pressed; remove hand lever and spring.
2

Support the breech block and action lever from undern at .

take out the action lever axis pin; the mechanism is the frt:
and can be removed.

Unscrew the extractor axis pin and remove the extractor by *

forcing it downwards.

Unscrew the pawl spring axis pin and remove the pawl
spring.

Unscrew the pawl axis pin and remove the action pawl.
Unscrew the trigger joint pin and remove the trigger pl.
and spring.

Unscrew the trigger axis pin and remove the trigger.

|l
Unscrew and remove the filling plugs and empty the r.
cylinder, then unscrew the forward cap of the recoil cyli
by means of the cap wrench, and with same wrench unscrew
piston and rod so as to disconnect it from the gun.

Unscrew the bolts and remove the rear cross-piece; the

can now be drawn out to the rear clear of the sleeve.
To Mount the Gun:

Insert the gun in the sleeve.

Replace the rear cross-piece, securing it by the two s
bolts.

Insert the piston in the recoil cylinder from the front and,
means of the tool, screw the piston rod into the hole in the
on the breech of the gun, which is threaded to receive it, t
screw on the forward cap of the recoil cylinder, fill the cylin
with glycerine and water, with gun at extreme elevation, a
screw in the filling plugs.

Place the extractor in position and secure it by screwing

its axis pin, taking care that this axis pin is screwed rig
home so that its head is quite clear of the sleeve.

Place the trigger in position and secure it by screwing in

ax1s p1n.
2O2

DRILL OF A 6-PDR. SEMI-AUTOMATIC R. F. GUN.

ce the trigger pull spring in position in the pistol grip.

place the trigger pull and connect it to the trigger by

ing in the joint pin.
ce the pawl in position and secure it by screwing in its
D111.

lace the pawl spring and compress it by means of the

handle or any other suitable tool, till the axis pin can
ewed up against the shoulder of the spring.
ke the breech block, see that the mechanism is cocked and
the extractor arms are back, and replace it from under
h, then pass the action lever axis pin through the slot in
side box, through the action lever, taking care that the

pler is pointing to the rear; now lift up the pawl and the
in lever axis pin can be pushed quite home.
1sh the extractor arms forward and raise the block to the

g position by means of the handle.

ike the main action spring, compress it in a vise, and keep

this state by means of the special clip supplied for the
Jose; then replace the spring in position in the side box.

y means of the hand lever, lower the block and compress

action spring until the clip can be withdrawn.
push the extractor arms to the front and raise the
k by means of the lever.
eplace the side box cover and secure it by the screw pin.
!eplace the hand lever holding it vertically downwards, and
ing pulled out and disengaged the catch, turn the lever
ind till it is home in the horizontal position.
Push the extractor arms forward so that the lugs are clear of

gain

recesses in the breech block; the latter will then rise up

1 close the breech.
To Dismount the Mechanism:

Release the lockspring.

Place the breech block upside down with the action lever on
juitable table or bench.

Drive out the split pin, securing the action lever pin, and
move the action lever and pin.

Pull out the trigger lever and remove the trigger sear with
s spring.

Insert the tool for removing lockspring between the lock

ring and the rear of the block, and push it down till he rear
2O3

DRILL OF A 6-PDR. SEMI-AUTOMATIC R. F. GUN.

--

arm of the spring is under the lugs at the end of the tool, th
pull the tool smartly up and the spring will come out.
Unscrew and take out the safety sear axis pin, then rem
safety sear and spring.
Drive out the cocking lever axis pin and remove the cock :
lever.

Drive out the firing pin slide in the direction of the arts,
then the firing pin can be taken out.
To Assemble the Mechanism:

Place the block on a bench upside down, that is, in the

verse position to that which it occupies in the gun.
Take the firing pin and press it into position, taking tr
that the shortest opening in the slot is uppermost.

Take the firing pin slide and insert it in the block int.
opposite direction to the arrow, the position of the slide bill
such that the word Out on it reads correctly when the by
is standing with its top or hollow side uppermost.
Take the cocking lever and insert it in position, seeing th
is passed through the slot in the firing pin, and replace
cocking lever axis pin.

Push the firing pin to the front by means of the cotl

lever, then take the lockspring and insert it in position, v
the arm having a lug on it bearing against the rear face cf
block, then take the hammer with the brass part of the hal
bearing against the other arm of the spring and compress
spring, at the same time pushing it down with the left ha
until it snaps into position.

Place the safety sear spring on its guide pin and rep
safety sear and axis pin.

Replace the trigger sear with spring and secure it in po:

tion by the trigger lever, which should be inserted with t
arm at the end pointing to the front.

Replace the action lever and pin, and secure the latter wi
its split pin, taking care that the action pin passes between t
safety sear and cocking lever.
If it is required to change the firing pin point, insert ti
arm of any suitable tool or spanner through the slot in the bot

of the firing pin and unscrew the front part of the pin
means of the special spanner supplied for the purpose, then
means of a small pin punch drive out the point from the rea
204

DRILL OF A GATLING GUN ON SHIP oR BoAT.

!ILL OF A GATLING GUN, MOUNTED ON BOARD

SHIP OR IN A BOAT.
|

|
|

(3 men.)
O.

Title.

Station.

Arms.

Crankman.

In rear of gun, on right of breech.

At operating crank.

Revolver.

Loader.

On left of breech, at feed.

Revolver.

Captain.

Revolver.

Cast Loose and Provide!

(Guns secured for sea.)

commands; removes gun cover and lashings; ships pointing

er, if used; places sight; tests mechanism; sees mount in
rking order; sees in place the gear and implements for the

vice of the gun; when all is ready reports to the officer in

arge; takes station in rear of gun at pointing lever. If the
n is mounted aloft, 1 goes aloft, sends down whip for ammu
ion and other articles; receives articles whipped up by 2
3.

sees crank ready for use; provides three revolvers with

s and ammunition, places revolvers in racks and belts clear
gun; provides reserve box; assists 3 to bring ammunition;
es station on right of breech at operating crank.
3 sees gun clear for feeding; brings ammunition from hatch,
sisted by 2; takes station on left of breech at feed.
If the gun is mounted aloft, 2 and 3 whip the articles and
mmunition to the top before going aloft, and then secure the
hip and net under the top.
Belts are never put on except by the order Take Arms!
Load!

1 places himself at the pointing lever, and as soon as gun is

nclamped lays it outboard in the direction of the target;

lants his feet firmly on deck to resist the motion of the ship.
3 takes filled feed case from box and ships it in position on

he piece; gets another feed case ready for shipping. When

205

DRILL of A GATLING GUN on SHIP or BoAt

7
only two feed cases remain, 3 calls out Shell! and goes it
more ammunition.

2 loosens the horizontal and vertical clamps; partially tum

the crank to work down the cartridges to a point short of th:
firing position; performs the duties of 3 during his absence.
Commence Firing!
1 adjusts the sight for the designated range, aims, and Om.
mands Fire!

2 turns the crank at command of 1, working it slowly unti

range is well determined by 1.
3 attends the feed, and supplies fresh feed cases.

If 3 requires assistance in bringing ammunition, it mutlt

rendered by 2.

The firing is continued until the order Cease Firing!" is

given.
Unload!

1 steadies the gun for clamping.

3 removes feed case, catches loaded cartridges as they do

out of the gun, replaces them in the case, and returns cast
the box.

2 throws back hopper, turns crank backward slowly, a

withdraws cartridges; then turns crank to see that no c
ridges remain in the barrels; or by special direction, the c

ridges in the barrels may be fired.

The piece must not be

loaded.

Change Stations!
(To be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize t
men with all the duties at the gun.)
At this command No. 1 becomes 3; 2 becomes 1; 3B
CO1mes 2.

Secure!

The numbers return what they provided and secure whi

they cast loose. The men take the positions for muster.
GATLING GUN.

The Adjustment of the Throw of Firing Pins.

This should be attended to by the officer of the piece, and
accomplished by turning the adjusting nut. The indentatic
of the cap by the firing pin and the feel of the crank w
206

DRILL OF A GATLING GUN ON SHIP OR BOAT.

him in this matter. A normal mark is placed on the

ting nut, but this is not absolute. After prolonged
! the parts become hot, and the nut should then be eased
1e if there is a prospect of continued firing, to compen
for the expansion.
To Cool the Barrels.

y may be readily cooled by pointing head to wind, with

er

thrown open.

Disabled Lock.

lis accident need not interrupt the fire; change the lock if
e is time; if not, withdraw it and there is but the loss of
irom the corresponding barrel.
Jammed Cartridge.
lis often happens owing to wear of parts, and when very
d fire is attempted. If a cartridge jams, reverse the crank
ly, then try ahead slowly, it will sometimes go smoothly,
if it continues to jam raise the hopper, reverse the crank
ily, throw out the jammed cartridge, close the hopper and
the firing. If a cartridge head is pulled off, leaving
artridge shell in the bore, the next cartridge which enters
barrel will jam; if this is the cause of the accident to the
use a shell-extractor and rammer to remove the shell,

emove lock.

2O7

DRILL OF A CoLT AUTOMATIC GUN ON SHIP OR BoAT *

DRILL OF A coLT AUTOMATIC GUN, MOUNTEDO

BOARD SHIP OR IN A BOAT.

(3 men.)
Gun No.
1

Title.

Station.

Captain.

1st Loader.

In rear of gun.
On left of gun.

2d Loader.

In rear of 2.

Arms.
Revolver.
Revolver.
Revolver.

Cast Loose and Provide!

1 commands; removes gun cover and lashings, if gun is ty

mounted; otherwise brings case containing gun, and assitti

by 2, mounts the gun; tests mechanism by throwing htt

gas lever, letting it go, and pulling the trigger; sees the bit
clear; sees mount in working order; when all is ready rept

to the officer in charge; takes station in rear of gun.

If #

gun is mounted aloft, 1 goes aloft, sends down whip for an:
nition and other articles; receives articles whipped up by:
and 3.
2 if gun is not mounted, assists 1 to bring case contain
the gun, and then mounts the gun; provides three revo
with belts and ammunition; places revolvers in rack and b
clear of gun; assists 3 to bring ammunition; takes station
left side of gun.
3 provides ammunition and places it on deck to the left
to the rear of the gun; takes station at the ammunition box
If the gun is mounted aloft, 2 and 3 whip the articles
ammunition to the top before going aloft, and then secure
whip and net under the top.

Belts are never put on except by the order Take Arms

Load!

1 grasps the pistol grip and as soon as the gun is unclamp

lays it outboard in the direction of the target; plants his fe
firmly on deck to resist the motion of the ship.

2 loosens clamps; ships box containing the ammunition be

on left side of the mount, and enters end of the belt in t
208

==

)RILL OF A ColT AUTOMATIC GUN ON SHIP OR BOAT

ng slot; throws back the gas lever smartly to its full ex

and releases it, noting that the belt is held, a cartridge
rawn, and that the gas lever is closed; sees that the belt
fairly; performs the duties of 3 during his absence.
asses box containing ammunition belt to 2; and when nec
y goes for more ammunition.
Commence Firing!
djusts the sight for the designated range; grasps the pistol
firmly with both hands, aims, presses the trigger with fore
r of right hand, and continues the fire until the order
ise Firing! is given.
ships new boxes containing ammunition belts, when nec
y; enters the belt fairly into loading slot, taking care not
uch the hot barrel with his hands.
Unload!

Slamps piece; presses back the knurled button on the right

of gun.

withdraws ammunition belt; throws back gas lever smartly

ejects unfired cartridge; releases the gas lever and re
as cartridge in the belt; unships box and hands it to 3.
takes box from 2 and coils the ammunition belt clear for

ling; places cover on box.

pulls the trigger, snapping the lock.
he piece must not be left loaded.
Change Stations!
'o be used frequently at drill in order to familiarize the
with all the duties at the gun.)

t this command No. 1 becomes 3; 2 becomes 1; 3 be

leS 2.

Secure!

he numbers return what they provided and secure what

| cast loose. The men take the positions for muster.

THE COLT AUTOMATIC GUN.

81

COLT AUTOMATIC GUN.

MOUNT.

The mount includes three parts: The saddle, the yoke, and
the tripod.
The saddle consists of a flat bed into which the gun fits, Ind
an arc swinging about a pivot in the yoke.
Clamp screws are provided for securing the gun in trainand
elevation, while by means of a friction screw any desired deget
of freedom of motion of the arc is permitted.
The tripod consists of three legs of solid drawn nickel-ste
tubing, supporting the pivot socket. The rear leg carries at
adjustable saddle for the operator, and to it is secured a leater
bag containing the following spare parts and accessories:
I mainspring.
2 bolt pins.
I hammer.
2 firing-pin locks.
2 firing pins.
I trigger spring.
2 firing-pin springs.
I sear spring.
2 shell extractors.

2 shell-extractor springs.
2 shell-extractor pins.
I cartridge extractor.
2 handle locks.

I oil can.
2 screw-drivers.

3 drifts.
I jointed wiping rod.
I operating handle.

DISMOUNTING AND ASSEMBLING.

Under ordinary circumstances it will not be found necessa

nor is it advisable, to dismount more of the gun than t
handle and the bolt; to do this the gun must first be cock
by throwing the gas lever back and releasing it; this cocks t
hammer and enables it to be removed with the handle.
To Remove the Handle.
Turn backward to full extent the lever of the handle lock o

the right side of the gun in rear of the safety; then withdra
the lock, leaving the handle free to be drawn out to the rea

The handles are fitted neatly and may, when new, have to b
driven out and in by light blows with a lead or wooden mau
2IO

THE COLT AUTOMATIC GUN.

hammer and mainspring may be removed from the handle

eleasing the sear and trigger.
To Remove Bolts.

row gas lever to its rear position and hold it there while
ever of the handle lock is inserted in the small hole in the

side plate just beneath the safety; by pushing this lever

i far as it will go, the bolt pin is driven through the bolt

projects through the left side plate, thus freeing the bolt
the slide, but locking the latter to the receiver, so that
1 the gas lever is let go it cannot fly forward, being held
he slide.

Withdraw handle lock and remove bolt to rear.

he extractor and firing pin are removed from the bolt by

ling out their pins with the handle lock, or with the drifts
ided.

To Return Bolt and Handle.

sert the bolt and push it forward as far as it will go, then
one hand under gas lever, holding it against bottom
!, and with handle lock push bolt pin entirely in; release
lever and let it go forward. Replace handle and handle
, turning the latter down to the locking position.
To Dismount Mechanism.

will rarely be necessary

to dismount the gun further than

lescribed in the foregoing paragraphs, but in case a jam

1rs which cannot be cleared from the outside, or in case
inaccessible part breaks, the following general instruc
s should be observed:

firing has been in progress, remove belt from gun and

ng gas lever down twice to make sure of chamber being
ity; remove handle as above (it will be found more con
ient to remove bolt later), then lift gun out of mount and
down on a bench, or any available clean surface, on right
if bolt has been removed, as above described, free slide and
lever by taking out bolt pin.) Turn lock screw of front
3-plate screw until its head lies in one of the circular cuts

the head of the latter, then take out side-plate screws and
love left side plate (the lock screw is not removed); turn

1 upright and remove right side plate; lift frame and barrel
bottom plate and lay gun down on right side. The action
2II

THE COLT AUTOMATIC GUN.

8.

of the slide and carrier may now be readily observed by swing

ing the gas lever; take out pin connecting the slide with the
gas-lever connection and remove the retracting spring tub:
by slipping them off the cross-head of the retracting conie
tion. The slide is now free to move, being entirely sq):
rated from the gas lever and the forward mechanism of th
gun; remove trip from left side of frame, then turn gun botom
up, and, unscrewing the belt guide screw, pry the guide t.
The carrier pin and carrier are next removed; there remi
only the bolt and slide to remove (provided the bolt has le.
been taken out first). Push slide to rear position, and with
handle lock push out bolt pin as before directed; then remw
bolt to rear and slide can be drawn out to the front.

Such parts as now remain together can, if they are to be 't

placed by new ones, be readily separated by removing scr"
and pins.
To Reassemble Mechanism.

Proceed in inverse order, returning slide to position fi

pushing it entirely back, then insert bolt and bolt pin, t
carrier and carrier pin; put belt guide in place, noting t
the tenon on its after end fits a corresponding hole in :
receiver, enter and set home screw; reseat retracting tub

connect slide and gas-lever connection, then put bottom pl

in position; setting gun on bottom plate, return right side pl.
to position, being careful to see that feed lever lies between
two lugs on the slide, and that head of connecting pin lies
groove in side plate.

Return trip to seat, then put on left side plate and scr
down.

Return handle and handle lock.

To Replace Trigger or Sear.

Push out pin, using handle lock as drift; in putting in n

sear or trigger or new springs, be careful to see that t

springs are properly seated. The same caution must be 0

served in replacing an extractor, and in this case the pin mu
be entered so as not to project at either end.
CARE AND MANAGEMENT.

The rate of fire of the guns as now (the first 50 guns) issue
to the service is fixed at a minimum of 400 shots per minut
and each gun is required to maintain this rate for one minu
2I2

THE ColT AUTOMATIC GUN.

out stoppage before being accepted from the manufac

1S.

he rate of fire depends on several points in the construc

of the gun. It is obvious, since the energy required for
operation of the gun is derived from the pressure of the

is escaping through the gas vent, that the interval between

Is cannot be less than the time consumed between the ex

sion of a cartridge and the passage of the bullet over the

t; this, of course, depends in the main on the initial velocity

the bullet, and can be regulated by changing the powder

rge. The second condition governing the rate of fire is the
*tion of the vent in the bore in a longitudinal sense; this
cts the rate of fire in two ways: First, by the time con
ned by the bullet traversing the bore to the vent; and, sec
1, by the amount of pressure obtained through the vent.
e third governing condition is the size of the vent, which
ulates the amount of gas taken from the barrel and conse
:ntly the available force for operating the gun. Fourth, the

ight of the moving parts is an element affecting the speed,

gas lever itself being the most important. Small changes
the weight of this part effect considerable alterations in the
e of fire. Fifth, and dependent on the second and fourth,

length of the various levers and connecting rods, and the

equent time consumed in completing one motion, affect
rate of fire.

ixth, the rate of fire may be altered by changing the point

ring. The gun, as has been before explained, is fired when
trip, operated by the slide, releases the sear from the ham
r; the point in the motion of the slide at which this takes
ce can be altered by changing the length or location of the
which operates the trip; as at present made, the gun fires

en the gas lever is about 1% inches open; if it were so ar

ged as to fire with the lever entirely up, it is evident that
re gas pressure would be utilized and the speed would be
respondingly increased; conversely the speed may be re

ced by causing the gun to fire with the lever more open.
he limits of variation due to an adjustment of the firing in
|ant are, of course, narrow, as the bolt must be fully closed
nd locked before firing. Seventh, the point of firing can be

lightly delayed by flattening the lower side of the trip pin

which operates on the sear; this will allow the lever to close
2I3

F
TIE Colt AUTOMATIC GUN.

85

further before the hammer is released, and the rate of fire will
be slightly increased.

It will be noted that the operations of the various part of

the gun are so timed that, if they perform their work proprly
and the ammunition is good, no jams can be caused, the er.
sonal equation of the operator being eliminated by the ato
matic action; the gun cannot be fired until the bolt is filly
closed and locked; no other operations can begin until the
gun has been fired and the bullet has passed the vent; the 1:x:
cartridge cannot be fed up until the fired case has been 'x.
tracted and ejected. Jams can, then, occur only as the rtull
of the failure or breakage of some part.

A jam or breakage of any kind causes an instant stoppagto

the gun, and immediate examination should be made to ascr.

tain and remove, if possible, the cause.

The following accidents have occurred in experimental fing
and may occur again, though the causes, so far as they hat
been discoverable, have been removed:
First. Hangfires.These are due to the slow ignition of he

powder, and may be expected to be eliminated when increast

experience with these powders enables the manufacturers 0
produce primers which will make ignition as sure and as rap
as with black powder. Ordinarily the hangfire is of only j:
perceptible duration and will scarcely attract attention; ly
have been known, however, to last several seconds, and il?
then become dangerous; the automatic gun will, of court
wait for the explosion, and if the operator will do the san'

there is no trouble to be apprehended.

Sccond. Missfires.These will not be frequent in good aw:
munition, but may sometimes occur and, of course, stop t
action of the gun.
Third. Incomplete Action of Gun, Causing Bolt to Close
Empty Case.This results from firing a cartridge with a 1
duced powder charge, and will be a very rare accident. T
effect is to throw the gas lever partly down, and then to allo
it to close again without ejecting the fired case, which m
either be returned to the chamber by the closing bolt or ma

be jammed in the receiver, due to partial ejection, in which cas

the lever will not be entirely closed.
These three accidents have the common feature of stoppin

the gun with the gas lever up, while in others, to be mentione
2I4

THE Colt AUTOMATIC GUN.

lever is left in some intermediate position. Consequently

general rule must be observed:

'henever the gun stops firing in the midst of a belt, keep the
"r on the trigger and look at the gas lever. If this is entirely
maintain the trigger pressure for two or three seconds, in
sh time, if the stoppage was due to a hangfire, the gun will

lischarged and the firing will be resumed. In case the gun

s not fire, the difficulty is probably attributable to the sec
cause, a missfire, and the trigger should be released and
le: operated once by hand. Upon then pulling the trig
the firing will recommence.
cartridge should never be allowed to remain in the cham
longer than six or seven seconds, as, with the gun hot from
id firing, the cartridge may be discharged by the heat.
he method of handling a missfire serves also for the third
ident mentioned above.

a case the gun stops with the lever open, one of the follow
conditions may have arisen:
irst. Following up" of Sear.This is due, in a new gun,
too great thickness of the nib of the sear, so that the bolt
s not push the hammer back sufficiently far for the sear to

age it; this difficulty is usually evidenced by a faint impres

h of the firing pin on the primer. To remedy it, release and
w out the feed belt and empty the chamber of the gun by
rating the lever by hand twice. Then remove the handle
m gun, take out sear and replace it, or, if the same one is
be used, file the inner face of the nib slightly with a flat file.
very slight reduction in thickness of the nib will remedy the
ect.

The same effect, of following up, may be caused by wear

the notch around the head of the hammer; the remedy for
s is, obviously, to turn the hammer and present a new por
n of its circumference to the sear.

Second. Non-extraction or Non-ejection.This will be shown

the presence of an empty case in the receiver, partially
awn out or partially ejected, or by a new cartridge jammed
er the empty case in the chamber.

This accident is generally due to a broken extractor, or it

ly be due to the third of the causes above enumerated, the
ergy of the discharge being insufficient to bring the empty
se into contact with the ejector.
215

THE Colt AUToMATIC GUN.

8.

The remedy is to clear the jam, remove the empty case, ind
to examine the extractor. If it is broken or chipped on the
nib, or if the spring fails to work well, replace it.
Third. Jam of Cartridge in Carrier.This accident has ben

of rare occurrence, and it is not at present possible to say with

certainty what causes it, but it is probably due to faulty acton
of the carrier dog and spring. The cartridge is, in this cse.
engaged by the bolt and pushed forward before it has ben
raised to the correct loading position, and is thus jammed be.
tween the two sides of the carrier. To clear it, do not attent
to push it forward or to cant it, but work the mechanism gently
a few times, without allowing the bolt to touch the cartrie,
this will loosen the cartridge and allow it to be removed.
Fourth. Jam in Feed.This may be due to uneven loadingo
belts, or to a cartridge fitting too tightly into its pocket, so

that the cartridge extractor cannot draw it out.

It can be

cleared through the hole in the right side plate.

In general, when a jam or stoppage occurs, due to any caue
the first thing to do, after waiting long enough to see that iis
not a hangfire, is to release the trigger, then to work the gs
lever gently by hand, observing the mechanism meanwhile O
see what the cause of the stop is. Jammed cases or cartridg's
may be removed through the ejection opening with the bla:
of a knife or the point of a screw-driver.
A wooden operating handle is provided, among the access:
-

ries, which may be slipped over the gas-lever pin, for opera:
ing the lever when the gun is hot.
The only cautions that need be observed are these:
I.. If the gun stops with the lever closed, wait two or thre
seconds to see if a hangfire has occurred.
2. If the gun is very hot, as after continuous firing for thre:
or four minutes, release the belt and draw it out an inch or tw.
to the left, then work the gas lever, emptying the chamber.
3. Always, in operating the lever by hand, do so slowly, ob.
serving the action of the mechanism meanwhile, and do no
attempt to clear any jams by force.
4. In loading belts, see that the cartridges are all pushe.
*

well home in the loops.

216

THE COLT AUTOMATIC GUN.

AIMING AND FIRING.

The gun being very light and easily trained in any direction,
hould always be fired with clamps loose and directed by the
ng hand; it will be found that, with a little practice, it is as
y to handle the gun and direct the stream of bullets on any
ject as to play a stream of water from a hose.
n firing at a fixed target from a fixed platform the gun may
carefully sighted and then clamped. In rapid firing the gun
l throw up slightly and the shots will strike a little higher
in in single shot firing.
SPARE BARRELS.

With each gun is issued a spare barrel, which has been care
ly fitted to the receiver and given the same number as the
n to which it belongs.
To replace a barrel the gun is entirely dismounted and the
rrel placed in a strong vise, when the receiver may be un
ewed by the use of a heavy monkey-wrench (a 24-inch or
inch wrench should be used); the new barrel is then entered
d screwed home until the qualifying mark on its lower

. registers exactly with the corresponding mark on the lower

e of the receiver.

[he life of a barrel has been found to be about 9000 rounds.

217

DETAIL NotES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

80

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

I.As the most difficult part of handling a gunthat which

involves the greatest skill and most careful trainingconcerns
its pointing and the pointing mechanism, there must be, wher
possible, at least four proficient marksmen in each gun's crew
1, 2, 3 and 4. They will succeed to the position of No. 1 in
the Order named.

If a petty officer is not a proficient marksman, he should no

be assigned as gun-pointer of a crew, and in such a case som
man of a lower rating, who is a skillful marksman, should b
No. 1, the petty officer being assigned some other number a
the gun; but the petty officer should command the gun an
superintend the loading.
By proficient marksman is meant a man who has quali
fied under the rules issued by the Bureau of Navigation.
Gun-Pointers.

2.In each turret there should be at least two men, othe

than the regular gun-pointers, who have been practiced in th
use of the training and sighting gear.

The post of gun-pointer of a powerful turret gun is real

one of the most responsible in a ship, and, though enliste
men are stationed for this duty, there is nothing to prevent a
available officer from relieving the man stationed as suc

pointer, if efficiency would thereby be served. At the san

time, it should be remembered that a knowledge of the rang
to be used by the particular gun (it is different for differel
conditions for the same gun), that is, a knowledge of where th
shots are actually hitting with reference to the target, is of th
greatest importance, and it is the duty of a Divisional Office
to make his shots tell.

The gun-pointer must keep himself constantly informed

the direction of the target. His duty is to point and fire th
gun. For this reason he is freed as far as practicable fro
distracting details of the manual.

The distance and bearing of the target or enemy are fr.

218

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

itly reported to the battery, and the gun-pointer must be

rned by this distance in setting the sights.
he crews of all guns should be thoroughly trained rifle shots
ar as may be practicable; and the crews of secondary bat
guns, more especially the first two numbers, should be
ed from the best rifle shots available after the selection of

proficient marksmen mentioned above for the leading

ions at main battery guns,
Prescribed Arc.

To accustom the members of a gun's crew to the idea

their gun is one primarily responsible for protection

is: surprise

or torpedo night attack from certain bearings,

1 gun's crew should be allotted a certain arc to watch over,

the guns of the same caliber combining to cover the entire

iion with arcs as nearly equal as possible.

The prescribed

is

supposed to be marked, and the gun trained at Cast

fe and Provide to its middle point. This indicates, more
ecially for an unengaged gun, a general direction to be
sely watched by the gun's crew.
Sights.
The sight should habitually be set for some fixed range

the neighborhood of 600 yards until another range is or

ed. A coarse sight for ranges above this, and a fine sight
ranges below, when using guns that are medium sighted, as
will probably be sufficient for torpedo

Hotchkiss guns,

les. When the target or enemy is very close, the rear sight
be dropped to zero without difficulty.
D avoid confusion in the meaning of the foregoing terms,
# are here with defined as follows:
fine sight is one in which the tip of the front sight is in
bottom of the rear sight notch; a medium sight has the tip
middle of the top of the notch; a coarse sight has the
above the notch. The distance also of the eye from the
linary rear sight affects the line of sight; increasing the dis
ce renders the sight more coarse.

\t guns fitted with telescopic sights, the target can be

ught entirely below the horizontal cross wire for a coarse
ht and entirely above for a fine sight.
219

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN

BATTERY.

To facilitate quick pointing at night, a white line abot

I inch in width, as long as may be convenient, and preferab'.
going over a sighting hood, should be painted on top of
turret, showing the intersection of a vertical plane parallel t .

the axes of the bores with the turret top. This may be us
as a finder by an officer or one of the crew. A simil
white line, from #4 to 1 inch in width, according to the calibe.

should be placed on each gun other than turret guns, in ord:

that in emergencies other members of the crew may assist t.
gun-pointer in finding the target.
Primers.

5.It is much safer to insert the new primer and close #

lock completely while the breech is open, because the $1.
cannot be fired until the breech is entirely closed, and shi'
there be a short circuit at that time, the recoil would s :
jerk the crank handle out of the hands of No. 2, and no d
to the crew would be entailedbut if the breech is close

fore the primer is inserted and No. 3 then inserts the p

and if there should be a short circuit as soon as he close

wedge, the gun would be discharged and would injure

very seriously, and might kill him.
Missfires.

6.Should a gun, using combination primers, miss fire,

2 opens breech slightly to break the firing circuit, extr
the old primer and inserts a new one, then completely c
the breech again.

As long hangfires with smokeless pov

are possible, great care should be exercised not to open

breech block for several minutes after the missfire has

curred, especially if the primer has been discharged.

If a missfire occurs in guns using vent sealing primers,

to the primer not igniting the charge, wait a few second

be sure that there is not a hangfire, insert a new primer
make another trial.

Should this fail wait a few minutes

see if there is a hangfire before opening the breech to

amine the vent and charge. Pull the charge to the rear, W*
its end just forward of the gas check seat so that it will b.
pushed to its place by the head of the mushroom in closing th.
breech, and remain in contact with the mouth of the ver

Close the breech and proceed as at first.

22O

*---~

DETAIL NoTEs on THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

Do not open the breech until certain that there is no hang

!.

When using fixed ammunition, if a missfire occurs in a

h fitted with a breech mechanism which requires to be

ned in order to cock the firing pin, extract the cartridge
1 immediately try another; if this fails, examine the primer
see if it has been properly struck, and examine the point of
| firing pin to see if it has been broken or upset. If the pin
injured, or the spring of any other part of the firing mechan
n is broken, it must be replaced. If the firing pin can be
sked by hand without opening the breech, a second trial
5uld be made before replacing the cartridge.

[f electric primers are being used, note if the firing point is

nt, short circuiting the current; if not, test the circuit after a
!ond cartridge has missed fire. In action, do not try a
!ond time any cartridge that has once failed, unless it is
solutely necessary. To do so it is an unnecessary experi

nt by which a telling shot may be missed. Such cartridges

fail should be carefully examined after the exercise, and some
them should be fired, if necessary, in order to discover, if
ssible, the cause of failure.
Clearing the Vent.

|''<-It is highly important not to score the vent and primer

t by the unnecessary use of the priming wire. This instru
|nt and the vent drill, should be used only when several
'cessive missfires show that the vent is foul or jammed,
ld then from the forward end of the plug, under the personal

pervision of an Officer or the Gunner's Mate. After the

t is cleared, the primer seat should be cleaned out with the
t cleaner provided for this purpose. The slightest enlarge
t of the primer seat by scoring, wear, or erosion, will
lt in gas leaks to the rear, with possible jamming of the
g lock and injury to the crew.

in practice at the Proving Ground it has never been found

cessary to clear the vent.

The new combination primer

ing much more powerful than the old primers, the vent
seldom choked, and the primers enter and extract easily and
eck satisfactorily. Should they, however, in any case refuse
extract, they can be withdrawn by a special tool provided

r the purpose, or by unscrewing the lock a half turn from

e mushroom stem.
22I

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

"

The vent does not need cleaning, but the primer seat shoul!
be cleaned out whenever a primer has leaked about the mouth
This is not imperative unless the leak is very serious.
.#

Firing Lock.
8.Be sure that the firing lock is screwed all the way 01
the mushroom stem; i. e., until the spring catch takes in
slot. When the lock is screwed home, the end of the m
room stem should be flush with the edge of the wedge slot
the receiver. If the lock is not screwed home tightly,
primer case will burst when the gun is fired, and the gases
fuse the primer case and spike the vent.

Loading.
9.Every precaution must be taken to prevent injury to
gas check seat. To this end, the loading tray must be usi
except with fixed ammunition, both when loading and unlo
ing the gun with service or dummy charges. The lip on fr

end of loading tray must cover the gas check seat.

If the fixed ammunition cartridges are boxed, they will

taken out of the boxes at designated points and brought t

the gun in the shellman's arms. The boxes may be thro
overboard or otherwise stored where not exposed.

With separate ammunition, the projectile is entered upon

loading tray and set home. It is important that this be pr
erly done. As the point of the projectile rises into the bo

riding up the chamber slope, the upper curve of the ogiv

strikes the top of the bore near the origin of the rifling, a
for an instant, jams slightly.

At this point it might be thou

from the feeling that the projectile is home.

Experiment

shown that projectiles may easily be made to jam if push

slowly home, but when driven quickly up the chamber slope hl

such difficulty is experienced. The marks on the rammer stal
will show whether the projectile is home or not.
}
Push the projectile with moderate speed through the powd:
chamber until it is near the chamber slope, and then send
home smartly.

Unless the projectile is set smartly home there is also dangel

that it may slip back from its seat when the gun is elevated ol
the ship rolls.
The powder charge is inserted, tie first, and pushed in unti
222

DETAIL NoTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

st clear of the gas check seat. It is left here in order that

hen the breech is closed the mushroom head may bring up

gainst it and push it forward by whatever further amount may

! necessary. The effect of this is to leave the base of the
large in contact with the mouth of the vent.

When the charge is put up in two sections, the first should

set up against the base of the shell, and the second be left
ainst the mouth of the vent as above described.
The short rammer handle is marked to indicate when the
ell is home. This mark must then be at the face of the
eech.
-

When entering the charge, care must be taken not to strike

e point of the projectile against the rear face of the tube, in

der to avoid the risk of raising a burr.
The shell occasionally starts from its seat in the neck of the
rtridge case. When this is observed, the shellman must set

home again by holding the cartridge vertically and tapping

a base against the deck, being careful not to strike the
mer.

Sponging.

to.Experience at Proving Grounds and in the service has

monstrated that sponging is seldom necessary when using
Dwn powder and never necessary when using smokeless
wder, but it is imperative that the gas check and gas check

t should be kept thoroughly clean. As soon as possible

ir the firing is discontinued, the gun should be thoroughly

ed out, the first washing with salt water and deck hose
pressure, after which fresh water should be used

the bore dried and oiled.

ponging is only resorted to when it will facilitate the load

by washing out any accumulation of brown powder resi

im. As smokeless powder leaves no residuum, sponging is

|ecessary. The gas check seat and screw box should be
ed out after withdrawing the loading tray, as dirt may be
osited during the loading.

i sponging becomes necessary in Io", 12", and 13" guns

ig brown powder, the muzzles are depressed and the wash
out hose thrust into the breech, the residuum in the

mber being loosened by a small bristle sponge. After the

is washed out it is lowered to the loading position. The
223

E-mee-m

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

9:

gas check seat, breech plug and screw box are cleaned with
marine sponges.

When using brown powder, the projectile should be rammed

home as quickly as possible after the gun is fired while the
residuum is soft, and after the shell is home a sponge saturated
with fresh water may be thrust into the powder chamber #
there are any signs of fire.
Gas Checks.

II.With each new gun there are issued to service three gas
check pads, and two sets of gas check rings. These pads and
rings are carefully fitted to the guns, and are not likely to
give any serious trouble. The rings and pads, when this
fitted, are marked for the gun to which they belong, and may
be used in this particular gun without any special adjustment

If it becomes necessary to use them in another gun, they

should be carefully adjusted. The life of a pad is very variable
The gas checks should be, as far as possible, protected from
the weather and from everything which could indent or brist
the pad. The rings should be kept scrupulously clean and vel
oiled, and the pad should be habitually coated with tally
After battery practice, the mushroom and gas check sho:
be removed, cleaned and oiled as soon as possible.
|
As the pad is liable to be injured in spite of all precautical
and may even be burnt across its checking surfaces by a

escape of gas, it becomes important to know how seria

such injuries are. The pad will check in spite of almost
amount of bruising, provided the checking circumference

intact. A pad may be cut at any other point than this,

may even have lost a considerable part of its filling, and
check perfectly. Even the checking circumference may
bruised or broken without serious results, if the injury d
not extend across the checking surface from front to r

An exception may be found to this last statement in c

weather, when, by the hardening of the pad, its plasticity
much reduced.

A pad injured near its checking surface should be replac

however, if time permits.
|
Difficulty may be found in closing the breech, arising fro
too tight a fit of the gas check ring.

The pad and split rings, when properly fitted, should

224

hi

DETAIL NoTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

light bearing upon the gas check slope of the gun, just
fficient to feel at the close of the locking motion that the
d is taking a bearing
With the latest form of gas check, the mushroom nuts
ould be set up moderately tight and left so. There is very
tle chance of the pad or rings sticking.

The inspection of the gas check consists in seeing that the

ld is in place and smooth and is held at the proper tension
the nuts on the mushroom stem.

Providing.

12.Some of the articles mentioned in the drill as being

rovided when casting loose will doubtless be provided in
earing ship for action. The numbers indicated, however,
ill be held responsible for their presence at the gun.
When the ship is cleared for action, the division tubs will
e filled with fresh water.

The number of rounds of ammunition to be brought to each

un as a first supply will be regulated by the commanding
fficer, and will depend upon the requirements at the time.

n the absence of orders, or for exercise at general quarters

without firing, one full round for each main battery gun and
ne full box for each secondary gun will be supplied.
Arms.

13-Portable racks to carry the rifles and revolvers of each

'un's crew should be provided. Each arm required for use at
1uarters or drill will be assigned by its number to a certain
person, who will take it from its rack only when ordered at
inspection, or when called away as rifleman or boarder.
| No wreck clearer is assigned. Under ordinary circum
stances, any serious incumbrance would be cleared away by
he carpenter's gang, together with the riflemen, if needed, or
division specially detailed.

Care must be taken that the fire of no gun is stopped to

perform this duty if it can possibly be avoided. Axes are in
racks near each gun for clearing away a local wreck; they will
be used by men detailed at the time by the Gun Captain. The
boarders will not carry cutlasses.
225

DETAIL NoTEs on THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

9.

Ammunition Supply.
I4.The prompt and regular supply of ammunition is one
of the most important parts of the drill of R. F. and Q, F.
guns. The shellmen must be made to form a chain from the
ammunition hoist to the breech of the gun. The cartridges
are to be taken out of the boxes at points to be previously
designated, at a suitable distance from the hoist, and the fut:
is to be adjusted and the case wiped off at a point near th:
gun. The men with cartridges form in a line or chain, in:

those who are returning with empty cases must move by an

other route, depositing the empty cases in a designated $0.
and returning to the hoist by such a route as not to interferti
the least with the supply chain. These routes are to be most
carefully established by the Divisional Officer, for on the di.
ciency of this part of the exercise the rapidity of fire will mail,
depend.
The hot cases, when withdrawn from the gun after firig
should not be allowed to fall to the deck, but should be
caught with gloved hands. The empty cases should not be
laid on their sides, but should be stood up on end or repla:
in their boxes.

The ammunition passers may carry the ammunition in #

manner most convenient to themselves.

Care of Electric Firing Attachments.

15.While the firing batteries should remain unimpair

for several years, it frequently happens that some of the ce:

deteriorate from internal action, and consequently it is ve

necessary to keep a close watch on each battery in order
replace defective cells. For this purpose battery testers
are supplied, consisting of a fuze bridge in circuit with
resistance coil such that if the firing battery is in proper co:
dition it will illuminate the bridge without burning of
Firing batteries should be tested daily by applying the poin
of the testers to the battery terminals, and if the current fa
to illuminate the bridge, the battery box should be opene

the trouble located, and the defective cell or cells replaced

neW Ones.

, \

If no battery tester is at hand, the firing circuit can

quickly tested by using a key, knife, or any small piece
metal; place the key or the blade of the knife in the sprin
226

DETAIL NoTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

cket and the metal handle to the end of your tongue, then
ace one hand on the gun to complete the circuit and have
me one press the firing-key. If the circuit is all right for
ing, you will feel a slight tingle on your tongue.

Of course, if the battery be allowed to short circuit in any

ay, such as by connecting the terminals, it will run down;
1t beyond this no trouble with the batteries is to be antici
ited save the occasional deterioration of single cells by local

tion.

Above all it must be remembered that a cattery which

in good condition will never give out suddenlythere is no

Dssibility of a battery which tests properly in the morning
iling in the afternoon. A battery will fire thousands of
"imers before it is exhausted, and will fire hundreds more
.pidly than any gun can be fired without showing any material
ss of strength. Consequently, if reasonable care is taken to
atch the batteries, it need never be feared that they are at
ult when a missfire occursthe fault will most certainly be
und somewhere in the circuit. Moreover, there is a practical
ertainty that the primer itself will not fail. Every primer is
sted with a current after manufacture, and such an occurrence
, the failure of an electric primer, with the ordinary current,
unknown at the Naval Proving Ground, where electric
ring has been used exclusively for several years. Besides

atching the batteries, then, the important thing is to see

hat there is no break in the electric connections and no

xcessive resistance due to imperfect or dirty contacts.

On

uns other than those in turrets, the firing key and wire,
nd the earth connections, should be removed after exercise

o as to allow putting the cover over the battery terminals,

his preventing short circuiting the battery by water or other
leans. The terminals of the wires and the contact studs of
he firing key should be kept clean and free from grease, and
hey should be kept in a dry place. The electric firing-pin

id the attachment lugs may also be habitually kept off the

ipid-fire guns, if thought desirable, with the exception that at
achment lugs which are secured by screws should be kept in
lace in order to prevent constant wear making the screws too
Pose. When the lug is kept on the gun, its spring socket can
e protected by keeping a soft wood plug in it.
In turret guns, no connections should be broken. Great

are should be observed that the same poles of all the batteries
227

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

9.

in the turret are connected to the ground, in order to previn'

the possibility of a wrong gun being fired, due to the comm),
ground in the center hood. To this end the terminals both0
the wires and binding posts should be tagged.
The daily test having shown that the firing battery is it

good conditionthe connections between the cells good, at

no cell run downand examination having shown that ill
contact surfaces are clean and free from grease, it is ol;
necessary, in order to prepare for firing, to seat the terminis
of the firing wire and of the earth connection firmly in this
respective sockets.
Sighting Telescope.

16.The axis of a sighting telescope, when properly 3.

justed, must be parallel with the axis of the bore of the gm
when the drum reads zero. The adjustments should be mak
on a distant object in order to reduce the parallax to a mii.
mum. Place the bore sights in the gun and bring the cros.

wires on a distant object, then adjust the sighting telesco:

until its cross-wires cut the same distant object. Then repla:
the set-screws which lock the tangent and thumb screws.
The bronze sight brackets containing socket for telesco:

and auxiliary bar sights, bolted to the elevating bracket

5-inch and 6-inch recoil slides of pedestal mounts, are not t
be removed nor bolts disturbed.

Care should be taken

handling to protect these brackets from any injury, pressur

etc., or from use in hoisting, in order that the adjustment :
the socket may remain correct.
to be removed for cleaning.

The elevating arcs are nd

Corrections for Speed and Wind.

17.The gun on a moving ship must be pointed a shor

distance astern (relative to the moving ship) of a stationary

target. The proper amount is the distance the ship move

in a line perpendicular to the axis of the gun in the time th:
projectile is in flight. If the target is moving and the gut
stationary, the gun should be pointed towards the head of the

target, the distance the target would move in the time of

flight. If the gun and target are moving in the same direction
and with the same speed, these distances correct each other.
If in opposite directions, the distance is doubled. It is neces.
228

00

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF MAIN BATTERY.

ary also to bear in mind to fire to windward in order to cor

ect for wind, the distance varying for the same time, for

irdinary ranges, inversely as the caliber. For long ranges

with light projectiles, the correction for wind is a large one
nd difficult to make except by trial shots. When the axis
if the trunnions of a gun is not level, the gun should be
ointed slightly to the side in the direction of the elevated

runnion.

If listed from wind and in chase, fire at the enemys

reather quarter.
Rule for setting the sliding leaf: Set the sliding leaf against
he ship and wind, and with the moving target;that is,
Dwards the stern of your ship, into the wind, and in the same

irection the target is moving. The sliding leaf is set in the

iteral direction that you wish the shot to go.
Rules for Firing.

i 18.With large caliber guns, fire when on the target at the end
f & rol/,

With rapid-fire guns with shoulder pieces, fire when on the

3rget.

229

DETAIL NoTES ON THE DRILL OF SECONDARY BATTERY. 11:

DETAIL NOTES ON THE DRILL OF SECONDARY HAT

TERY 1-PDR., 3-PDR., AND 6-PDR. R. F. GUN}.

1.To secure to the crew the freedom of movement nes

sary to the efficient serving of the gun, arms and equipmnts

should not be carried until required for use.
2.The number of rounds of ammunition to be brough to
each gun as a first supply will be regulated by the commad.
ing officer, and will depend upon the requirements at the time
In the absence of orders, a full box will be supplied.
3.In the case of the Hotchkiss gun, in inserting the crt.

ridge, be very careful not to drive the point of the sell

against the edge of the chamber. This will not happen i it
is pointed horizontally, but is very liable to do so if the crt.
ridge is pointed downward.
In the case of the Driggs-Schroeder gun, the rear end of he
cartridge should be slightly raised with reference to the port,
so as to avoid driving the point of the shell against the upkr

edge of the chamber. The lower edge and sides are protectd
respectively by the breech block and the extractors.

Neglect to observe the above precaution may result in?

burr about the edge of the chamber.
4.If after firing, the cartridge case sticks after partial &
traction, fully extract, and then feel for a burr about the ed:

of the chamber. If such exists, it must be filed smooth. "

any dirt is found, it must be removed with a sponge.

5If, in loading, a cartridge jams and will not let the breed
block close, never attempt to drive it home by forcing th
block; unload at once, put the cartridge aside and try another
It should not, however, be expected that all cartridge cast
will go completely home without effort, as the least dirt on
case or in the chamber will prevent this. There should be m
hesitation in driving a cartridge home with the force due t
swinging the breech block smartly.
6.-If for any reason the cartridge case will not extrac

catch the head with the extracting tool and pull it out.
this fails, ram it out from the muzzle.
230

- - -:-

L16

------

DETAIL NoTES ON THE DRILL OF SECONDARY BATTERY.

7.In the case of the Hotchkiss gun, if the nib of the ex

:ractor breaks, back the stop bolt clear of the breech block,
lower the block until the extractor slot is clear, pull out the
extractor and insert the spare one.
In the case of the Driggs-Schroeder gun, if one extractor
breaks, the other can be used for a time, but the first oppor
tunity should be taken to put in a new one; back out the guide
bolts, halfcock, draw axial bolt, holding the block by hand;
lower the block far enough to expose the extractor, resting the
upper part on the tray for support; pull out the broken ex
tractor and put in the new one. Do not insert the new ex
tractor with a cartridge already in the gun, as the nib will
Come on the wrong side of the cartridge head.
8.In the case of the Hotchkiss gun, if a cartridge misses
ire, withdraw it at once and see that the drill hook has been
removed and the firing spring hooked up. Insert a second
Sartridge and try again. If the missfire is repeated, remove the
breech block at once and feed the firing pin to see if it is
broken. If it is not, and everything looks right, change the

mainspring before putting the block back.

In the case of the Driggs-Schroeder gun, if the primer misses

fire, put in a new cartridge and try again. If it still misses,

lismount the block, remove the face plate and renew the firing
Din or spring, whichever is found defective. If the cap should
have failed to obturate, at any shot, it is possible that a resi
luum may have been deposited on the front end of the firing
pin or rear face of face plate, which might shorten the throw

of the former and prevent it striking the cap.

9.In action, do not try a second time any cartridge that
has once failed, unless it is absolutely necessary. To do so is
an unnecessary experiment by which a telling shot may be

missed. Such cartridges as fail should be carefully examined

after the exercise, and some of them should be fired, if neces
sary, in order to discover, if possible, the cause of failure.
10.In returning ammunition, great care must be taken that
empty cartridge cases are not put in ammunition boxes con

taining loaded cartridges, and vice versa; 3 is held responsible

for attention to this.

When firing blank cartridges, the empty cartridge cases must

not be returned to a box containing charges; because, if there
23I

DETAIL NoTES ON THE DRILL OF SEconDARY BATTERY.

117

is any loose powder in the bottom of the box it might be

ignited with disastrous results.

II.After ammunition boxes have been sent below, and be.

fore stowing them in the fixed ammunition-rooms, the men
stationed there will

redistribute

the ammunition

so

as to

completely fill all partially filled boxes except one. This hs!
partially filled box should never be sent up on deck in suply
1ng.

12.The drill hook is designed to relieve the mechanism of

the Hotchkiss gun from strain when snapping the gun at dil,
also to prevent the firing pin from delivering too strong a biw
when drill cartridges are used.
At drill, or when the piece is secured, the drill hook shold
remain in place, but when the gun is cast loose for action, he
drill hook should be removed and the lower branch of he

mainspring hooked to the stirrup; otherwise a missfire my

occur.

Spiral mainsprings and sear springs are used in the lats.

types of Hotchkiss guns.
The 1-pdr is not supplied with a drill hook.
With the Driggs-Schroeder gun, drill washers have ben

designed for the same purpose. They should not be kept in

when the piece is secured, as they increase slightly the co:
pression of the spring when uncocked.

13.The drill apron is used only when the exercise is will

drill cartridges.

14.Reserve boxes for the Hotchkiss 6-pdr., 3-pdr., and!

pdr contain the following accessories and spare parts:
Accessories.Sponge brush, cleaning brush, oil can, combi:

tion dismounting tool, dismounting pin, monkey-wrench, ha.

extractor (except for I-pdr.), drill hook (except for I-pdr an
latest types), lanyard hook.
Spare Parts.Stop bolt, hammer, firing pin, mainspring, st!
spring, sear, extractor.

Driggs-Schroeder reserve boxes for 6-pdr., 3-pdr., and I-p:

contain the following accessories and spare parts:
Accessories.Babbitt

mallet, sponge brush, cleaning

brus:

oil can, combination screw-driver, firing-pin wrench, block sup

port, hand extractor, face-plate drift, drill washers.
Spare Parts.Firing spring, firing pin, right and left ex
tractors, Sear, sear spring, set of gun screws.
232

18

DETAIL NotEs on THE DRILL OF SECONDARY BATTERY.

15.In pointing the Hotchkiss gun, be sure to fill the rear

ight-notch with the forward sight-point; that is, take a full
ight, or the shell will fall short.
16.Lard oil should not be used on any part of the mechan
im, as it hardens in cold weather. Mineral or fish oil is better,
ut vaseline is best.

17.With the recoil mount, the pistol grip cannot be held in

he hand when firing without danger of dislocating the wrist,
herefore a trigger lanyard is provided.
18-1-pdr. Maxim Automatic Gun:
Spare Parts.
Safety sear spring.
I Ejection tube spring.
Bottom pawl spring.
I Gib spring.
Side lever spring pin.
I Tumbler spring pin.
Firing pin points.
6 Tail spring rivets.
Split pins for taper pins.
2 Split pins for safety indicator.
Lock mainspring.
I Top pawl spring.
Trigger bar spring.
I Tail spring.
Carrier holding-up spring. I Trigger spring.
Split pin for roller nut.
2 Buffer packing rings.
Cam pawl springs.
2 Split pins for cover hinge pin.
1 Spring balance.
I Safety sear spring pin.
I Barrel spring packing ring. I Side box spring.
Asbestos packing.
I
I
I
2
2
I
1
I
I
2

Accessories.

5 Ammunition boxes.
I
o Ammunition belts, 25 cart- I
ridges each.
I
I Hammer, bronze.
4
I Hammer, lead 5 lbs.
I
4 Combination spanners.
2

I Barrel nut spanner.

I

Oil can.

Pliers.
Extractor for broken shell.

Punches (special).
Cleaning rod. No. 1.
Screw-drivers (I large,
small).

Cleaning brush.

I Copper punch, 34" diam.

I Copper punch 1 in diameter.
And to each vessel carrying one or more of these guns:
-

Cam handle with drawing tool.

Side box spring winding device.

Funnel for filling water-jacket.

Funnel for filling buffer cylinders.
233

Three and Six-Pounder Driggs-Seabu

Semi-Automatic Guns and Mounts

DIRECTIONS
FOR DISMOUNTING AND ASSEMBLING

234

DIRECTIONS FOR DISMOUNTING THE

BREECH MECHANISM
&emove the breech plate by compressing the locking spring
1 giving the lock pin a quarter turn to either the right or left
1 drawing the breech plate to the rear. Pull up the trip plate
er to hand firing position (this lever should always be up for
1d and down for automatic firing). Unhook chain from

= rating lever, by slacking turnbuckle until sufficiently loose

disengage hook from chain; then remove chain from lever.
Snap firing pin and leave it in fired position. Grasp the oper
ng lever handle with the left hand and rotate to the rear. At
> same time, with the right hand, raise the block until it is
out three-quarters of an inch above the breech housing. By
ntly oscillating the lever, remove it from seat and lower block

d lever from breech of gun. The extractors can now be easily

moved.

Unscrew shoulder bar bolt and withdraw shoulder

r, keeping trigger pressed against forward stop until shoulder

r has been withdrawn sufficiently to disengage.

The trigger

ring will then fall out. To remove the sear, first pull the sear
m retaining spring directly down with the assembling pin.
ow pull the sear arm to fired position. Insert the end of as
mbling pin in the recess in the end of the sear and pull the
ar directly outward until the sear toe hits the sear arm. While
this position, turn the sear until the toe comes opposite the
Barance cut and withdraw.

With assembling pin press sear spring end from its seat in the
in, when spring and arm will drop out.

To remove the cocking lever, with assembling pin, compress

e spring end of the lever pin and withdraw it, when the lever
in be taken out.

Unscrew the firing pin bushing and withdraw the firing pin,
Pring and collar, using the cocking lever to unscrew bushing.
To remove or replace the firing pin without removing block
Om gun: Remove breech plate, lower the block to loading
Osition, withdraw cocking lever pin and lever and raise block
) firing position, when firing pin and spring can be removed.

NotE.In replacing the firing pin in the 3-pounder gun, the

'moval of the breech plate is not necessary.
235

DIRECTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING THE

BREECH MECHANISM
Place the collar and spring on firing pin, and place then
position in block. Screw firing pin bushing into position, 1.
cocking lever in position in slot, and insert cocking levery
entering pin from the left side of the block.

Insert opera

lever in position in block and proceed in the reverse order

dismounting.

DIRECTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING THE

MOUNTS
Place the frictionless washer in the pivot yoke seat in
cage stand and see that the clamping pad and screw are in p!

tion. Lower the pivot yoke into its seat and screw pivot
into pivot. Place slide in pivot yoke and bolt down the
squares and clamp slide in slightly depressed position.

gun in slide and force it to forward position. Insert the fil

pieces in the slide, being careful to see that the screws ar.
their proper holes.
-

Assemble the piston rod and spring in the recoil cylin

screw in the cylinder head and glands and fill with liquid.
glands should be screwed up tight enough to thoroughly 1
vent leakage and no more. Place the recoil cylinder in posit
in the sleeves with the end of the piston rod through the
in oscillating slide. Screw up the piston rod nut until re

spring is compressed about o.15" and see that the filling

is in the highest position possible for convenience in fill
When filling cylinder see that air hole plug is out.
Mount the shoulder bar and secure by shoulder bar

Place the operating lever spring in position and adjust

turnbuckle so that the tension is sufficient to raise the bl

to firing position smartly.

Place the trip and spring plate in position and screw in

plate bolt. Screw on the cam plate.
All screws have right hand thread.
To dismount, proceed in reverse order.
236

t
|

NOMENCLATURE FOR BREECH

MECHANISM
Breech block.

Operating lever.

I5
I6

Operating spring.

17
I8

Turnbuckle.

Firing pin bushing.

I9

Turnbuckle hook.

Cocking lever.

2O

Extractors.

Cocking lever pin.

2I

Sear.

22

Firing pin.
Firing pin collar.
Firing spring.

Operating spring chain.

Cam plate.
Cam plate screws.
Sear arm.
23 Trip plate.
24 Trip plate lever.
Sear spring.
Sear arm retaining spring. 25 Trip plate bolt.
26 Trip plate spring.
Breech plate.
Breech plate pin.
Trigger.
28 Trigger spring.
Breech plate pin spring.
2

NOMENCLATURE FOR MOUNT

Cage stand.

II

Filling piece screws.

Frictionless washer.

I2

Shoulder bar.

Pivot yoke.
Pivot yoke clamp.

I3

Shoulder bar bolt.

I4

Recoil sleeve.

Pivot bolt.

I5

Recoil sleeve key.

Recoil cylinder.
Recoil cylinder glands.

Cap squares.
Cap square bolts.
Oscillating slide clamp.
Oscillating slide.
Filling pieces.

I6
17
I8

Piston rod.

I9

Piston rod nut.

2O

Piston rod check nut.

237

MANUAL FOR THE DoUBLE-ACTION NAVY REvolveR.

MANUAL FOR THE DOUBLE-ACTION NAVY

REVOLVER.

Commands.
Draw!
Load!

Pack Load!

(Designating object) Aim! Fire!

(Designating object) ( Shots) Commence Firing!
Cease Firing!
Unload!
Return!

For exercise the men form in single rank facing outboard

facing the target.
The holster will be worn on the left hip.

If a sword or cutlass is worn, the holster will be worn on

right hip.
Draw!

At this command, half-face to the left, carry the right h

to the holster, loosen the flap, and grasp the pistol grip; ste
the holster with the left hand; draw the pistol from the
and carry it opposite the right shoulder, barrel vertical, ha

mer at height of shoulder, fingers clear of trigger; carry

hand behind the back.

Load! (or Pack Load!)

At this command carry the left hand in front of the body

drop the pistol into it, latch up, cylinder in the palm, ba
between thumb and first finger, muzzle 45 degrees to the l
and depressed 45 degrees to prevent throwing out any unfi
cartridges. With thumb of right hand unlatch cylinder,

with second and third fingers of left hand turn out the cylind
pressing crane firmly back, first finger resting on barrel
joint of frame, and fourth finger on hammer. Press
ejector-rod gently with the thumb of left hand, and with
238

MANUAL FOR THE DOUBLE-ACTION NAVY REVOLVER.

mb and forefinger of right hand pick out the empty shells;

11 the cartridges have been fired, throw up the muzzle of

ol, press the ejector smartly and let the empty shells drop
; then depress the muzzle, and let the left thumb slip from
stor-rod and rest on cylinder; carry the right hand to cart
ge box and loosen the catch.
ake cartridges from the box and fill empty chambers; fasten
ridge box flap; grasp the grip of pistol with right hand,
er clear of trigger. With thumb of left hand press cylinder
me smartly; remove thumb, and attempt with second and
'd fingers to revolve and to force out the cylinder, when
movement will indicate incomplete latching.
-

: Pack Load empty all chambers and return any loaded

:ridges to the cartridge box; take a pack from the cartridge
: with the thumb and second finger of right hand, first finger

plug-head; place plug-point in the latch-seat in ejector, re

ve first finger from plug-head; and press on pack ring with
mb and second finger.
!esume the position of Draw.
(Designating object) Aim!

his command is used for volley firing. Full cock the pistol
h the thumb of right hand and carry the first finger to the
ger; extend the right arm with elbow slightly bent, and
at the designated object, with the fore sight filling the
ch to the top of the frame.
.xcept when at very close quarters, the single action should
-

used; that is, the pistol should be full cocked before firing.
Dr firing will be the result if the double action is used at

g pistol-range, because the strong pull on the trigger neces

y to operate the double action will make the hand unsteady,
cause inaccurate aim.

f, the firing is to be at long pistol-range, the order With

st Aim! may be used. At this order, carry the left toe
ight to the front, the right heel six inches to the rear and
>e inches to the right of the left heel. Raise the left arm
il the elbow is at height of and in front of left shoulder;
end right arm until the right wrist is resting on the left

'arm near elbow; grasp right elbow firmly with left hand.
t the command Kneel, kneel as prescribed for infantry,
ping pistol at position of Draw! To aim when kneeling.
239

MANUAL FOR THE DOUBLE-ACTION NAVY REVOLVER. H.

place the left elbow on left knee, extend right arm, and gr:
right wrist with left hand.
Fire!

At this command, pull the trigger directly to the rear w

the second joint of the first finger and resume the position
Draw!

(Designating object and number of shots)

Commence Firing!
At this command the men aim and fire deliberately, us

single action unless at close quarters, in which case they

use double action and fire rapidly.

They will reload when n:

essary. If it is desired to fire a definite number of shots, co

mand Shots! Commence Firing! whereupon each man
fire the number of shots ordered and then resume the posit
Of Draw!

If it is desired to use the double action, designate the obj

and command Double! Aim! Fire! or Double! (shot
Commence Firing!
The pistol will be fired with the double action, but

method of firing should be limited to very close pistol rang

Cease Firing!

Resume the position of Draw, and if the pistol is f

cock, ease down the hammer with right thumb. This comm
is used to stop the firing of whatever kind and it may be
at any time after the first preparatory command for firit
whether the firing has been actually commenced or not.

Unload!

At this command, bring the revolver to the position

Load, press the ejector-rod gently, return unfired cartridg:

to the cartridge box, and throw out the empty shell; close t
cylinder and resume the position of Draw!
Return!

At this order, return pistol to the holster, fasten the fla

face to the front and stand at attention.
240

14

MANUAL FOR THE DOUBLE-ACTION NAVY REVOLVER.

NOTES ON THE NAVY REVOLVER.

The caliber of this revolver is .38 inch.

Gun crews are not armed with cutlasses unless specially or
ered by the Captain. If men are armed with both cutlass and
Evolver, and orders are given to board or repel boarders, or
hen on shore to charge, the revolver will be used in the right
and while advancing and until within a few yards of the
nemy, when it will be shifted to the left hand and the cutlass
rawn with the right hand for a hand to hand engagement.
Left hand work with the revolver is very wild for distances
eyond ten yards, and therefore the revolver should be used in
he right hand until the cutlass becomes effective.
Owing to its simple sights, its handiness, and the fact that
can be used for actual target practice at trifling expense and
t places where there are no regular target ranges, the pistol
s a most valuable weapon for instructing in the elementary
rinciples of sighting and firing, and it is recommended that
: be used for target practice as often as circumstances permit.
There is little scope to pistol drill as compared with infantry
r gun drills and, if held too frequently, it is apt to weary the
men and render it difficult to hold their attention. Whenever
racticable, therefore, periods assigned divisions for pistol drill
hould be extended in time and devoted to target practice. It
s frequently possible to get very satisfactory pistol practice
unrecorded) by shooting at articles towed astern while the ship
s underway.

No artificial rest for the pistol or for the arm will be per
mitted. The position for shooting is that of Draw!
Except for very long pistol ranges, when they may be used
'ither standing or kneeling, the arm rest and body rest should be
liscouraged, as it is believed that men should shoot for record
is they would shoot in combat. Careful instruction will enable
most men to score as well from the free arm position of

*Draw" as they can with the arm rest. Furthermore, owing

to the close approach of the pistol to the face in using the
irm rest, the sights do not appear to the eye as seen at arm's
ength.

In shooting from shipboard, men should be cautioned against

standing where ill-aimed or accidental shots may be deflected

from boat davits, etc.
24I

MANUAL FOR THE DOUBLE-ACTION NAVY REvolveR.

Loaded revolvers should only be carried or placed in hols

with an empty chamber under the hammer, except in cases

great emergency of which officers in immediate command

details of men shall judge.

The hammer rebounds and is

signed not to fall until the trigger is pulled, unless the mech
ism be broken; but several casualties have occurred in the
vice through dropping the revolver or otherwise striking
hammer a smart blow.

After men are proficient at the regular drill, they should

taught to shoot left handed, in which case the half-face
be to the right.
Occasionally, men are found who cannot with certainty c
or uncock a pistol with one hand; where the defect cannot
overcome by drill, such men should be permitted to grasp
frame with the left hand at the position of Draw, with

barrel pointing to the front with an elevation of 45 degr

while cocking or uncocking the pistol.

In pointing or aiming, the grip should be firmly grasped

the last three fingers and the thumb. The shape of the grip d
not lend itself to extending the thumb, nor to dropping
fourth finger under the butt; nor are such positions used by
best pistol marksmen. The pull upon the trigger should
made with the second joint of the first finger, and the direc

of the pull should be directly to the rear. Very few hands

be found to be so small that this cannot readily be done.
elbow should be slightly bent, so that the recoil will co

upon the muscles, and not upon the braced bones of the a
At the instant of pulling the trigger, the grip of the hand and
muscles of the arm should be slightly tautened, to steady

piece against the pull and the flip.

When ejecting under any circumstances, the cylinder
be held fully openthe crane must be pressed firmly back
allow the head of the case nearest the latch to pass by.

In withdrawing packs from cartridge box, seize ring

thumb and second finger, first finger on plug head, and t
pack slightly to free it in pack hole.
In charging cylinder, do not turn pack or in any way atter
to guide cartridges. Enter plug point in latch seat and pr

straight down on ring, relieving pressure of first finger on p.

head at same time.

To Charge Packs.Place six cartridges in holes in p.

242

"-

16

=:-

" -Tw----------

MANUAL FOR THE DOUBLE-ACTION NAVY REVOLVER.

harging block. Enclose cartridge heads with pack ring. En

ir plug between cartridges through hole in ring. Press plug
ently to push cartridge heads to seats, and then push plug
Dme with ball of palm of hand.
The revolver is sighted full, for 20 yards, but the flip
Dunterbalances the curve of trajectory up to 120 yards. Inside
f 25 yards the shooting will be slightly high.
The double pull, being heavy and creepy, is not well

dapted to aimed fire.

The single pull of from 6 to 8 pounds may be lightened by
lacking the strain screw, when nice target work is wanted.
With the strain screw slackened off, the mainspring will still
ave sufficient resilience for firing on the single, but it will not
e sure on the double pull.

243

154

NOTES ON THE KRAG-JoRGENSEN RIFLE.

NOTES ON THE KRAG-JORGENSEN RIFLE.

The caliber of this rifle is .30 inch.

The bolt and magazine mechanism can be dismounted wi

out removing the stock.

The latter should never be done

cept for making repairs, and then only by some selected

instructed men.
To Dismount Bolt Mechanism:

I. Draw the bolt fully to the rear, then place the piece act
hollow of left arm.

2. Lift the front end of hook of extractor off bolt with

thumb, and at the same time turn bolt handle to left with ri
hand.

The bolt can then be drawn from the receiver.

3. Take bolt handle in left hand, back of hand down, 1

upside down. Grasp the cocking piece with right hand.
4. Slightly draw back cocking piece and turn it towards
operator until the firing pin can be removed from the bolt.
5. Take firing pin in left hand and bear down on point
striker with right thumb until it leaves the firing pin; rem
mainspring from firing pin and the latter from sleeve.
To Assemble Bolt Mechanism:

I. Observe that the safety lock is turned to the left. Reve

the order of the steps of fifth operation in dismounting.
2. Grasp the bolt handle in left hand, as in third operation

dismounting, and the firing pin in right hand, extractor upp

most.

Insert firing pin in bolt.

3. Grasp handle of bolt with fingers of both hands, bolt

rected downward, and with both thumbs in the rear of saf
lock, push strongly forward and turn to right with thur
until the arm of the sleeve engages the collar of the bolt.
4. Grasp bolt and cocking piece as in third operation

dismounting.

Draw back and turn cocking piece from

or until its nose

enters the notch on the rear end of

Olt.

Take bolt in right hand and introduce it into the receiv

keeping the extractor lifted with the right thumb. Turn t
5.

244

NoTES ON THE KRAG-JoRGENSEN RIFLE.

155

right and at the same time press strongly with the first
nger against right side of extractor.

To Dismount Magazine Mechanism:

I. The gate being closed, engage the flanged head of a cart
dge case under the lug on the front end of the hinge bar head,
nd turn the latter toward the gate, out of its seat; then bear
Pavily on the gate with the palm of the right hand, to over
Dme the pressure of the magazine spring, and, with the left,
ress forward against the lug, drawing the hinge bar pin from
he receiver.

2. Remove the gate, magazine spring, and carrier, and fol

) Wer.

To Assemble Magazine Mechanism:

I. Hold the piece with right side uppermost. Insert arbor
f carrier into its hole in receiver and place end of left thumb

3ross magazine to prevent carrier swinging into the latter.

2. Place magazine spring in its channel, convex side up,
Dunded end to the rear, particularly observing that the lip
: its front end rests in the notch on heel of carrier.

3. Place gate in its seat, lug entering between carrier and

lagazine spring. Remove left thumb and at the same time
ress gate against magazine spring with right hand.
4. Insert hinge bar pin in front hinge hole in receiver with
ft hand, and press gate down strongly until the pin can be
ushed through gate into rear hinge hole.

5. After the hinge bar pin is fully home, turn the head into
s seat by opening the gate.

To Complete Dismounting (To be done by an experienced

lan):

The bolt and magazine mechanisms having been dismounted,

roceed as follows:

# Remove upper

band screw and slip band forward off bar

2. Loosen lower band screw, remove band.

3. To remove the hand guard, raise the leaf of the rear sight

) its vertical position and move the slide to top of leaf, force
and guard springs off barrel by screw-driver blades inserted
etween guard and stock, then turn guard across barrel and
'move it over top of sight leaf.
4. Remove guard screws and guard.
5. Remove receiver and barrel from stock.
245

156

NoTES ON THE KRAG-JoRGENSEN RIFLE.

6. Remove side-plate screw, then side plate by pushing 0.

the rear end, until free from the receiver, and drawing it to:
rear.

7. Remove ejector pin by means of its knob, then ejector

8. Press trigger forward until nose of sear is withdral

from its slot in receiver; then bearing against right sided

sear, push it out of its seat.

9. Turn cut-off until point of spring spindle rests on ridg:

spring spindle seat of receiver. A light tap on front edg:
thumb-piece will remove the cut-off.

The point of the sp

spindle will rest on the ridge when the spring will not
the cut-off up or down.
Io. To remove safety lock, turn it vertical and strike :
front face of its thumb-piece a light blow.

The rear sight leaf should never be removed from the #

nor the base from the barrel, except for repairs.
The barrel should never be unscrewed from the receiver

To Assemble after Dismounting:

I. Safety lock. Introduce the point of the tang of a s
file, or any tool of similar size and shape, between the thu

piece and the spring spindle, thus compressing the spring

forcing the spring spindle into the thumb-piece; insert

safety lock spindle in its hole in the sleeve, the thumb-p

being held vertical, push the safety lock forward, gradu
withdrawing the tool.

2. Cut-off. Insert its spindle, the thumb-piece turned do

into the cut-off hole in the receiver, until the spring spin
strikes the receiver; then with the blade of a screw-driv

force the spring spindle into its hole in the thumb-piece :

push the cut-off into place.

Care must be taken that the f

tened and not the straight sides of the spring spindle bear
the curved surface of the recesses in the receiver.

3. Sear and trigger.

Insert the spring in its hole in the st

start the hinge of the sear into its seat in the receiver, 3

with a blade of the screw-driver, compress the spring in

hole until the sear can be pushed into place.
Reverse and follow in inverse order the other operations
dismounting.
Cleaning and Care of the Arm:

As the residuum of smokeless powder, if not completely

246

NOTES ON THE KRAG-JORGENSEN RIFLE.

157

oved, corrodes the bore in a short time, care is required in

Baning the arm after firing.
To clean the barrel, insert in the chamber a cartridge shell,

e front end of which has been filled with a wooden plug, and
Dse the bolt; clean the bore with rags saturated with soda
ater, or, if that is not obtainable, with water; wipe thoroughly

'y with clean rags; remove the bolt and cartridge shell; clean
nd dry the chamber, from the rear, in the same manner;
nally oil both chamber and bore with cosmoline oil, leaving
light coating. When the jointed rod is used, remove the
>1t, clean half the bore from the muzzle, and the remainder
trough the receiver, as above prescribed.
If gas escapes at the base of the cartridge, it will probably
nter the well of the bolt through the striker hole. In this
use the bolt mechanism must be dismounted, and the parts
nd well of the bolt thoroughly cleaned. Before assembling
le bolt mechanism, the firing pin, barrel and undercuts of

eeve body of striker, well of bolt and undercut of bolt collar

hould be lightly oiled.

Many parts can generally be cleaned with dry rags; all parts
fter cleaning should be wiped with an oiled rag.

The best

lethod of applying oil is to rub with a piece of cotton, upon

hich a few drops of oil have been placed, thereby avoiding
le use of an unnecessary amount of oil; this method will,
ven in the absence of the oiler, serve for the cams of the cock
1g piece, bolt, gate lug, and carrier, and the bearings of the
nagazine spring on the gate hinge, all of which should be kept
1bricated.

Any part that may appear to move hard can generally be

eed by the use of a little oil.

The stock and hand guard may be coated with raw linseed oil
nd polished by rubbing with the hand.

247

TORPEDOES
From Gun and Torpedo Drills, U. S. Navy.
REVISED BY

LIEUT. GEORGE W. WILLIAMS, U. S. NAVY

CONTENTS
(Pages numbered at the bottom.)

Organization of Torpedo Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torpedo Crew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drill for Whitehead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Preparing Whitehead Torpedoes for Firing . . . . . . . . . . . 255

General Instructions about Torpedoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Torpedo Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26I
The Whitehead TorpedoGeneral Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Assembling Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Miscellaneous Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268.

Obry Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Adjust the Obry Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274.
Repairs to Torpedoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277.
Care of Launching Tubes and Tube Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . .

Care of Air Compressors and Accumulators . . . . . . . . . . .

* *
*

248

-:-->

- -

ORGANIZATION OF THE ToRPEDO DIVISION.

ORGANIZATION OF THE TORPEDO DIVISION.

The torpedo division will, when practicable, be composed of

following officers and men:
The Torpedo Officer, in charge; he is an assistant to the

nior Watch Officer, who is in command of Powder and Tor

lo Divisions.

Dne Junior, Warrant, or Petty Officer (first-class) in each

pedo compartment, in immediate charge of the compartment.
Dne Junior, Warrant, or Petty Officer (first-class) at each
pedo director. Where directors are installed in torpedo
mpartments the Officer-in-Charge of compartment takes sta
n at director when the torpedoes are ready to be fired.
Dne Gunner's Mate or seaman gunner at each torpedo air
mpressor who will go to station as directed when accumula
's and torpedoes are charged.
Dne Gunner's Mate or seaman gunner in each torpedo store
D111.

Dne torpedo crew (4 men) for each single tube, or for each

ir of tubes on opposite sides of deck in the same compart

:nt, or in close proximity.

Where a pair of tubes is worked by a single torpedo crew,

e crew will not divide until everything is ready to Point.

and 3 will then tend at starboard tube of a pair, and 2 and 4

port tube.
Torpedo Crew.
A torpedo crew consists of four men, two of whom should
Gunner's Mates or seamen gunners. The crews must com
ne, when torpedoes are to be transported for long distances,
d whenever torpedoes are to be hoisted on board after ex
sise. The crew of a torpedo are not boarders or riflemen.

The duties of 1 and 2, who are designated torpedo men,

e confined as far as practicable to the more skillful opera

2ns connected with the preparation and adjustment of the

rpedo itself; while the duties of 3 and 4, designated tube
en, are chiefly connected with transporting and handling the

rpedo and its appliances, and preparing the tube and its
249

DRILL OF THE TORPEDO DIVISION.

appurtenances for use. They will, however, always assi:

and 2, when not engaged at their special duties.
Arms for Torpedo Division: A revolver with belt and
cartridge box for each officer and member of the crew.
same rules apply in regard to the wearing of arms as in
case of gun's crews.

Torpedoes will be designated according to the same rul

is used for guns in the Ship's battery.
Drill for Whitehead Torpedo.

(4 men.)
No.
1
2
3
4

Title.

1st torpedo man

2d torpedo man
1st tubeman
2d tubeman

Arms.
Revolver
Revolver
Revolver
Revolver

(The torpedo is in the tube with appropriate head affil

air flasks charged to full or prescribed pressure, and mech
ism in good order.)
Commands.

Torpedo (No......) Prepare for Action (or Exercise)!

Torpedo (No. . . . . .) Prime!
Torpedo (No......) Point! (...... degrees forward (or ab
starboard (or port) beam!

Torpedo (No......) Ready!

Torpedo (No. . . . . .) Fire!
Torpedo (No. . . . . . ) Commence Firing!

Torpedoes Cease Firing!

Torpedo (No. . . . . . ) Prepare for Action (or Exercise)!
(Designating range, depth, and pressure.)
At this command the junior officer (or petty officer) statio

at the torpedo director provides and places director.

Seaman gunner in charge of air compressor starts compr:

or and charges accumulator to limit of working pressure.

1 provides pressure gauge and charging pipe; opens t
door, and assisted by 2, seizes horizontal tail blade and ha
back tube to charging position, (if the torpedo sticks, places
tail line around the tail forward of the blades and mans tha

screws pressure gauge on charging valve seat and ascerta

250

DRILL of THE ToRPEDo Division.

ssure in flasks; if not sufficient, removes gauge and connects
charging pipe the flask with accumulator; when accumu
|r gauge indicates the desired pressure, disconnects the

e; reads the pressure in air flask again, by again shipping

ge.

then examines and corrects, as needed the following adjust

its according to adjustment sheet, or specific order; first

ing distance gear and locking device, if desirable:
i) Fills oil cups, valve group, engine, gear box and tail;
oils all rudder connections and water tripper.

2) Tests throw of horizontal rudder, noting throwthat it

ves freely.
:) Sets regulator spring.

1) Sets distance gear, being careful to have pin or pointer

inst stud.

:) Sets depth index and locks it.

) Locks rudder for both position and duration.

g) Sees drain plugs in. (Leave after one out for a war shot.)
1) Sets vertical vanes.
vertical rudder free. (Locked, if gyroscopic gear is
)

11SeC1.

) Winds the spring of the gyroscopic gear or sets the valve

g if the adjustable gyroscope is used.
<) Opens the main stop valve.
the gyroscope stop valve if adjustable gyroscope
)

ens

SeC1.

m) Raises the water tripper.

ees all ready and then orders Shove Home!

provides tool box; washer box and tapers; raises tripping

sh and pins it; assists 1 to haul back torpedo; opens stop
ve; takes out charging plug; assists 1 with charging pipe;
ds accumulator valves; replaces charging valve plug, when
k is fully charged. Fills all oil cups (stop valve being
sed); sees that firing lever is cocked.

removes railing and stanchions in wake of train of tube;

les off

tube cover; clears away tube; eases clamps of tube

unt; trains tube to charging position; clamps tube mount;

ars away port shutter; sees that it works smoothly, and

ses it; provides nose line, tail line with exercise head (depth
rolling register, if to be used), or war nose and exploder,

gun cotton; assists to haul back torpedo, if needed.

assists 3 in above mentioned duties of tube; provides load
staff, can of sperm oil, cleaning staff and waste; four re
vers and filled belts, belt of 1 to be provided with a box of
25I

DRILL OF THE ToRPEDO DIVISION.

primers; provides impulse charge, and places it in chami

assists to haul back torpedo, if needed.
Shove Home!

1 places loading staff against propeller shaft, and assisted

3 and 4, shoves torpedo in tube until guide stud brings
gently against the stop pin; (n) takes off lock (and rudder

dex, if used) and turns propeller till notch on main shaft sh

that the engine is not on center (mark at 5 o'clock in Mar
3.55 m.; at 6 o'clock in Mark II, 3.55 m.

Marks on

and shaft opposite in Mark III, 3.55 m.; and in Mark I

m.); closes the door of tube, and brings torpedo to the p
of train most convenient for inserting war nose, and rep
Ready for Priming.

2 (o) works cocking lever to relieve stop pin from jammi

and insure that lever has full throw; (p) releases tripping la
and tries its spring; (q) attaches exploder to war nose,
sees the latter ready for use.

The torpedo, after being trained to position convenient

placing war nose, is reported: Torpedo (No. . . . . .) Re
for Priming!

&

Torpedo (No. . . . . . ) Prime!

2 (r) removes practice nose and puts in dry gun cotton prin
(s) screws in war nose with its exploder and sees fan run
ward (motions r and s may have to be performed bef
Shove home"); 1 (t) inserts primer and connects fir

mechanism, placing safety pin in position.

3 and 4 trice up port shutters if any, and stand by for co
mand Torpedo (No. . . . . . ) Point! unless tube is fixed.
Fixed torpedo tubes and tubes pivoting in ship's side sho
have (sliding trap) door fitted in outboard end of tube to all
this adjustment. If not so fitted, torpedo is hauled to rear
tube, and 2 inserts war nose; I sees propeller lock on dur
this operation.

If torpedo is well protected, the war nose may be inser

at command Prepare for Action!
In action, if the command Torpedo (No. . . . . . ) Prime!

not given when the Torpedo Officer reports it Ready

Priming, this officer will act as aid to the Commanding O

cer, keeping him informed of the distance and bearing of t

enemy especially with reference to the employment of td
pedoes.
252

DRILL of THE TORPEDO DIVISION.

Jpon receipt of order Torpedo (No. . . . . .) Commence Fir

!! the Torpedo Officer will fire at his discretion.
Torpedo (No. . . . . . ) Point!
... ... degrees forward (or abaft) starboard (or port) beam
... depression).
, and 4 see port shutters clear, assisted by 1 and 2 if needed;
n train and elevate tube as directed.

directs train and elevation and reports Torpedo (No. ...)

ady! when on designated train and elevation, (u) removes
ety pin from trigger.
Torpedo (No. .....) Fire!

fires at command or signal to fire by the Torpedo Officer,

the officer at the director as the case may be; or the torpedo
y be fired directly by the officer using an electric firing ap
'atuS.

Out Torpedo Primers!

: breaks the connection of the firing mechanism or places

: safety pin.

and 4 train the torpedo tube to the position for removing

I

nose.

removes the war nose (and inserts practice nose).

Torpedo (No......) Commence Firing!

This order may be given when within torpedo range, after

ich the torpedo is fired when sights of torpedo director
ir, the signal or command being given by officer stationed
re, and executed by the number at the firing key.
Point and Fire!

Dfficer in charge sets torpedo director for speeds and

irses, and indicates degrees of train for the tube. When
is ready, and the target comes On, commands Fire!
\t the order Point! the port or tube shutter will be
'ned by Nos. 3 and 4, if not already opened; after which the
mer will be entered and connected.

The crew will then train

le, as directed by Officer in Charge, and No. 1 (or No. 2)

1 stand by to fire at the command of officer or signal from

conning tower.
253

=*-*-

- -

DRILL OF THE TORPEDO DIVISION.

In working a pair of tubes, Nos. 3 and 4 will train, a

Nos. 1 and 2 fire at order.
The behavior of the tube and its attachments will be

at discharge, and as soon as the torpedo is launched,

will be closed by Nos. 3 and 4, and the crew will procee
get another torpedo into the tube, ready for launching, C.
receive the launched torpedo from the boat sent to recov
* Secure!

Each member of the crew secures what he cast loose,

returns what he provided, and then falls in at station.

Crew and supernumeraries will hoist in, strike below,

restow torpedoes after practice, and return handling and tr
porting gear.

254

PREPARING TORPEDOES FOR FIRING.

PREPARING TORPEDOES FOR FIRING.

e following steps in preparing a torpedo for firing, pre

oses that all parts of the torpedo mechanism are in good
r and that each part properly performs its functions.
Whitehead Torpedoes.
te.Always keep stop valves closed and starting lever for
l, except when using air. The lock is to be habitually
on the propeller.
Try tripping latch and stop pin, and be careful that stop
is down with safety pin in place before entering the tor
Enter torpedo into tube until the forward guide stud
enters the guide slot.
Remove charging valve of torpedo, open stop valve,
w in wing nut of charging pipe, and charge flask to about
Dounds for testing.
With starting lever back, test all air connections, engine
valve plugs, etc., for leaks, using a lighted taper.
Put a little oil in the cups; oil after bearings; take off
eller lock; raise water tripper; and then test distance and
ng gear by running the engines, placing a tarpaulin to
1 the oil blown through. Put on the propeller lock. In
ng this test, set distance gear sector for one tooth and
the regulator plug about two turns down from flush posi
for all marks of torpedoes. To lock the rudder: in

m., Marks I. and II., push down the ratchet bar two teeth
eans of tool No. 9 through a hole in the top of the shell
2 torpedo; in 3.55 m., Mark III., and 5 m., Marks I. and II.,

tool No. 46, turn the locking adjustment index two

1ations to the left and clamp it; then turn the outer bevel

sector to the left until the tool brings up against the

See that propeller lock is on. Test horizontal rudder for
hrow by hand and by steering engine. See that it works
.

This test is the same for all marks of torpedoes except

with 3.55 m., Marks I., II., and III., use tool No. 40 with
anent scale on after vertical blade; and with 5 m., Marks I.
~.

255

PREPARING TORPEDOES FOR FIRING.

and II., use tools No. 44 and No. 45. With air on the eng
and with tool No. 9 (for Marks I. and II.), and tool No. 1.
adjusting nut (for Mark III., and 5 m., Marks I. and II)
serted through hole in the side of the shell of torpedo, in
the valve stem of the steering engine back and forth to
limit.

The throw of the rudder should be at least four

divisions down and three and one-half (3%) up.

(f) Test horizontal rudder for effect of hydrostatic pistor

get correct difference of throw.

The down throw due to ps

out should exceed by about one-fourth of a division th:

throw due to piston in. To test piston: in Mark I., entert
No. 36 in hole on starboard side of torpedo, bring the bent?
against the after face of the piston, and with starting &
aft, and depth index registering 5 feet, press down to ot

up throw and release pressure to obtain down throw of rud

in Marks II. and III., and 5 m., Marks I. and II., using tool]

37, turn operating spindle of depth index to the left unil

binds, for piston in and up throw; turn it to the right until
index registers a depth of 5 feet, for piston out and down #
of the rudder. To get correct throw, use the valve st:
Marks I. and II., and the adjusting screw in Mark IIIa
5 m., Marks I. and II.
(g) Adjust Obry gear and put same in place in the torpt
-

and make sure that the vertical rudders work freely and #
proper throw. To adjust the Obry gear: screw the ge:
the adjusting stand, connecting the valve stem to the t
tiller rod. Put in the gyroscope wheel, entering the fo
pivot, which should not have been disturbed when dismo

screwing in the after pivot, finger taut, and setting up of

clamp screws of the counterbalance center. See that it d
freely; oil bearings of the wheel lightly. Swing the s
lever (on the stand) around in the direction of the hands
watch as far as it will go. Wind up the Obry, noting th:

impulse sector meshes properly with the teeth on the gyr

axle. Trip the impulse spring by swinging back the st
lever (on the stand) and note run of the wheel. If th
center, on which the counterbalance is screwed, has hori
motion in a direction contrary to the hands of a watc

counterbalance is too far from the center of the system

ducing too great an effect, and must be screwed towar

ring; if the motion is with the hands of a watch, the co
256

PREPARING TORPEDOES FOR FIRING.

rice is too near the center of the system, and must be

vved out from the ring. When the counterbalance is prop

adjusted, it must be secured in place by the jam nut. If
1ateral movement of the wheel cannot be corrected by mov
the counterbalance in or out, the wheel itself will have to
Thoved in or out, as the case may be, by means of the ad
able screw pivots through the inner rings into the cone
Ded bearings in the ends of its axis. The wheel is very
sitive to this adjustment and it must be very carefully made.
er making it, see that the wheel turns freely on its axis
set up the clamp screws.
o adjust the valve: Connect the testing pipe with the Obry
Licing valve in the torpedo; wind up and start Obry as be
> ; remove the centering pin in the adjusting arm and work
frame back and forth to get an indicator diagram. If the
gram shows that the torpedo would deflect, due to the
on of the Obry, counteract this tendency by turning the
ve plug by means of the adjusting screws. One screw must
slacked before the other can be screwed in. The torpedo
| run in the direction in which the screws are moved.

in)

rge the air flask to firing pressure and replace charg

ValVe.

i) Fill oil cups, valve group, engine, gear-box and tail; also
all rudder connections and water tripper.
throw of horizontal rudder, noting that it moves

# Test
ely.

k) Adjust torpedo mechanism for a run, using the adjust

:nt card furnished with the torpedo.

1) Set the regulator. The screw plug, upper face being

sh with the top of the regulator body, screw it down the
mber of threads indicated by the adjustment card for the
stance to be run.

(2) Set distance gear sector, being careful to have cam pin
ainst the stud on the sector.

With the zero on the sector oppo

e the pointer in the engine-room door, and the socket

"ench on the adjusting spindle, set the sector at the number
teeth indicated by the adjustment card for the distance to

run. One turn of the socket wrench gives one tooth on the
Stance Sector.

(3) Set depth index. With socket wrench turn the spindle
itil the index shows the required depth, generally from 5 to

feet. Set up clamp nut, otherwise immersion chamber will

1 and, if an exercise run, the torpedo will sink at end of run:

(4) Lock rudder for time and position. The rudder should
'main locked until the speed of the torpedo has become some
257

PREPARING TORPEDOES FOR FIRING.

what uniform and the pendulum is able to exercise its norm

function. It will require a distance of from 50 to 75 yards

accomplish this.

One tooth on the ratchet bar gives about

yards, and one division on the locking dial gives about 9 yard
Locking for position means maintaining the rudder, up (
down, or horizontal, while it is locked for time. This pos
tion of the rudder depends somewhat upon the circumstanc
of the dive; with a high dive or shallow water, up rudder ma:
be advisable; with a low dive or deep water, down rudder n:

be necessary. Ordinarily, however, and especially for the fl:

dive necessitated by the Obry gear, the rudder may be lodge

horizontal. Ten points on the locking star and twelved

visions on the adjustment cam change the rudder about 01:

division.

Both these adjustments are taken from the adjust

ment card.

i.

(5) If for action, hook up sinking gear or take out drain pig

in after body. Removing the drain plugs is preferable.

will be found that if one of the drain plugs is removed for
the after body, little if any water will enter while the torped
is at full speed, but at the end of the run sufficient water, esp

cially with the later marks of torpedoes, will enter to sinkh

torpedo. See after body and immersion chamber drained in
replace drain plugs for exercise run.
(6) Set vertical vanes. Divisions right or left shown on id
justment card.

If gyroscope is used set both vanes at O.

(1) Place gyroscope and see vertical rudder free. (If g(0.
scope is not used, lock vertical rudder.)

(m) Be careful that starting lever is down and wind the C#.
gear. The starting lever must not be raised after this is dat
Set valve plug of adjustable gyroscope if used.
l
(n) See that main stop valve is open.

If air impulse

scope is used, open auxiliary stop valve.

(o) Raise water tripper. (Not done for war shots.)
(p) Try stop pin and tripping latch and shove torpedo ho
with loading staff.

(q) Remove propeller lock and rudder index; turn engi"

off the center; and close breech door of the tube.
(r) Open torpedo port. (In time of war not to be done t"
within torpedo range, and then only at order of officer in co"
|

mand.)

(s) See safety pin in place.

Enter impulse charge and prime

(The primer is never to be entered and connected until the to

pedo port is open.)

(t) Depress the tube, degrees.
258

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ABOUT TORPEDOES.

t
*

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ABOUT TORPEDOEs.

In time of war, when action may possibly present itself,
n though not imminent, torpedoes should be kept loaded
all the launching tubes, ready for immediate use, with war
ds attached; air flasks charged to full working pressure.
e tubes should be kept cleared away ready for instant action,
all necessary precautions should be taken to prevent pre
ature discharge of the torpedoes. Torpedo ports should
it be opened until near torpedo range, and they should be
bsed as soon as the torpedo is discharged. The spare tor
does should be at hand (on rests, chocks, brackets, or
ucks) fully prepared for use, behind armor or below water
he if possible; but it is left discretionary with commanding
ficers as to whether, until the spare torpedoes are actually
quired for use, their air flasks shall be fully or partially
larged, and whether the dry primers, exploders, and war
Dses shall be placed in the war heads.

2. Where, as above, the air flasks are kept charged, the pres
1re must be verified daily.
ducing valve does not leak.

Care must be taken that the

3. All preparations requiring considerable time should be

ndertaken at the command, Clear Ship for Action!

Such

eneral preparations should include (a) starting air compress

rs and charging accumulators; (b) shipping trolley rails
where flying rails are used), or placing truck ways at bulk
ead doors (if deck trucks are used for transporting); (c) pro

ing the handling and transporting gear; (d) transporting

Drpedoes to the tubes from which they are to be fired; (e)
etting up war heads, or filling exercise heads, and attaching
hem; (f) charging torpedo air flasks; and (g) adjusting torpedo
mechanism and gyroscopic gears.
4. Torpedoes are stowed in tubes, brackets or cases, and
| general rule will be for the combined crews to break out the

orpedoes and transport them to vicinity of the particular tube

or which intended; landing the torpedo on chocks, rests, or a
ruck until war or exercise head is attached.
259

After a torpedo is

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ABOUT TORPEDOES.

entered in tube to charging position, each crew goes to

proper station.
5. Torpedoes are transported by overhead trolleys (on stan
ing or flying rails) or on deck trucks, and, in exceptional cas
by hand on bearers. Propeller locks must always be kept
torpedoes when stowed or being transported, and the tra:
porting screw should be in place under like circumstances.
6. Gyroscopic steering gears should be kept in adjustme:

and in the case of the adjustable gyroscope, the probal

angle to be used should be decided on beforehand and #
valve plug set at that angle.

==

ToRPEDO PRACTICE.

TORPEDO PRACTICE.

I. The range selected for torpedo practice, underway or at

chor, should, if practicable, be free from currents, and the
pth of water should not be less than five fathoms. The bot
m should, preferably, be smooth and soft, and the water free
sediment.

2. Boats sent out to recover torpedoes should be in charge

f an officer or competent man, who will keep a bright look
ut to note accidents or failure to run.

3. When the torpedo finishes its run the boat will go along

ide to leeward, care being taken not to damage the torpedo

n any way, and the man in charge will (for Whitehead Tor
edo), (I) throw starting lever forward, (2) put on propeller
ock, and (3) attach the nose and tail lines, and the boat will
hen tow torpedo back to the ship.
4. When alongside the ship, put on hoisting strap, hook
whip, previously overhauled down from deck, and pull torpedo
p clear of the water. When torpedo is out of water (White
lead) take off propeller lock, raise water tripper, and throw
lack starting lever slightly to blow water out of engines; then
urn down starting lever and water tripper, put on propeller
ock, and hoist the torpedo in on deck, tending nose and tail

ines carefully to keep torpedo clear of side (a spar worked

rom deck makes a good fender); take final (remaining) pres
ure in flask; blow flask down through charging valve or en

;ine air joint; lock pendulum; and strike the torpedo below
o be prepared for another run or for stowage.

5. If torpedo is not to be used immediately, wipe dry and

give a light coat of sperm oil or lucilline, drain immersion
hamber and after body, relieve pressure on all springs, oil all
arts liable to set or rust, particularly all steel screws and the
udder connections in tail.

6. When torpedoes are not stowed in tubes or cases, dust

Jags should be used to enclose tail and after body. .
7. If for practice, when the adjustments are nearing com
pletion a boat or boats should be sent out on the range to

secover the torpedo at the end of its run. They should be

261

ToRPEDO PRACTICE.

provided with buoy, buoy line, and sinker; propeller lock;

nose and tail lines and hoisting strap.

Careful observers should

be stationed on deck to note run and keep track of torpedo

and make prearranged signals to the boats if necessary.
8. When firing for practice from a torpedo-boat, two flag
buoys should be placed as a target 16 yards apart if gyroscope

is used, 48 yards apart if gyroscope gear is not used.

An observer should be stationed at this target, to estimate

deflection, but the torpedo-boat should follow the torpedo

and lower the picking up boat near the torpedo.

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

175

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

GENERAL REMARKS.

Constant supervision must be exercised over torpedoes to

see that they are at all times protected from grit and kept
clean, externally and internally; that the outer surfaces of
shells are protected from rust by oil or vaseline; that the inner
surfaces of shells are protected from corrosion by a coating of
red lead paint; that all interior parts are in thorough working
order and well oiled on all working surfaces; that valves and

air joints are kept free from grit and dirt and from deforma
tion in handling; that steel screws, drain plugs, vertical vanes,
rudder connections, guides for rudder connections and other

steel parts are protected by oil or vaseline from rusting; that

joint screws, stop valves, charging valves, drain plugs and ex
ternal steel screws are prevented from setting, by being turned
periodically; that the depth index and regulator springs be not

given a permanent set by being kept in a state of compression

for an undue length of time; that the releasing-lever spring be
released from tension when not in use; and that the shell and
tail be protected from injury by blows or by violent handling.
For lubrication, use best winter-strained sperm oil. For
cleaning the shell, lard oil with a small admixture of kerosene
will be found efficient. Use fine emery cloth very sparingly,
when needed, being careful not to work the shell thin, and

avoid getting emery grit inside.

parts.

Never use emery on working

-

In handling torpedoes, the strain in lifting must always be

applied to the thicker part, the shell of the air flask, and never
to the thinner shells of the head, or of the immersion chamber,
or of the after body; and in landing torpedoes in the brackets,
or on the trucks or chocks, the weight must be taken under

the air flask, preferably near the heads of the flask, care being
taken never to let the torpedo rest on the tail for even an
instant.

The tail is the sensitive part of the torpedo. Any undue

strain on the frame of the tail or on the rudder may spring
263

176

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

these parts out of line and be destructive of accuracy. Great

care must therefore be exercised, in turning the torpedo, not
to use excessive force and to apply such force as may be neces
sary preferably by the nose line hooked in the exercise nose
and the tail line hooked or hitched either to the propeller lock
or around the propeller nuts close to the hubs.
In shoving the torpedo home into the launching tube, use
must be made of the rammer, placed against the end of the
shaft; and in hauling back out of the tube the tail line, hooked
to the propeller lock, must be employed.

The propeller lock is habitually to be kept shipped on the

after propeller blade and brought in contact with the forward

propeller blade whenever the torpedo is out of the tube,

whether the air flask be charged or not, and at all times prior

to closing the door of the tube before launching. Instances

have occurred when the air in an uncharged flask has been so
expanded by rise in temperature as to give sufficient pressure

to turn the propellers. The precaution of shipping the propel

ler lock not only insures against injury to the person should
the propellers be accidentally revolved, but furnishes a ready
means for attaching and using the tail line at any time.
Torpedoes must not, except when absolutely unavoidable
be sent through the hatches with the air flask charged. The
shock of a fall might produce a serious explosion.
Care of Torpedoes after Firing Practice.
After finishing a firing practice, if the torpedo is stowed with
*he intention of resuming the practice on the following day,
or within a few immediate subsequent days, not exceeding one

week, the following care is necessary:to blow the water out

thoroughly from the engine, by allowing the engine to run
slowly in the air with the water tripper raised, until no water
comes out of the shaft, being sure that the engine oil cup con
tains sufficient oil to leave the engine well lubricated; to drain
the immersion chamber and after body; to wipe dry the outside

of the shell and to oil it, if stowed under cover, and protected
from moisture, or to coat it with vaseline, if exposed to the
weather or dampness, or if stowed in a launching tube; to dry
and oil the joint screws of the head, the engine-room door
screws, the drain plugs, the inner surfaces of the vertical vanes,

of the rudder connections and of the guides for the rudder

264

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

177

sonnections; to release the compression of the depth index

and regulator springs; and to release the tension of the re
leasing lever spring. In freezing weather the water ballast
must be emptied from the exercise head. A tag should be at
tached to the torpedo noting the fact that the flask contains
air and stating the pressure thereof.
Under all other conditions of laying the torpedo aside after
firing practice in addition to the precautions above prescribed,
empty the water ballast from the exercise head, dry the in
terior of the head thoroughly and touch up with red lead if
needed; close the stop valve, disconnect the after body, wipe
dry all accessible parts and oil working parts; touch up the
inside of the shell with red lead where necessary; open the
stop valve and let all air out of the air flask; reassemble the
torpedo, leaving air-joint screws slack to avoid making and
breaking the joints too often; and remove all drain plugs to
allow circulation of air in the immersion chamber and after

body.
Air may be let out of the air flask, on occasions when it is
not desired to disconnect the after body, by slacking up the
air-joint screws connecting the air pipe from the air flask to
the valve group.
-

Great care must be taken that any water which may, through
negligence, be carried over by the air charge is not allowed to
collect and stand in the air flask. To this end, while the after

body and head are disconnected, as above, if there be any

air pressure in the flask, remove the charging valve and check
valve, secure the pendulum by the transportation screw, sus
pend the flask in a suitable inverted position, open the stop
valve and blow any water that may be in the flask out through
the body of the charging valve. If there should be no air
pressure in the flask, remove the stop valve, suspend the flask
as before and allow any water present in the flask to drain
out through the body of the charging and stop valves.

Torpedoes stowed in launching tubes must be carefully ex

amined at least once each week, and especially for signs of

tendency to rust at the point where the packing band comes in

contact with the shell of the torpedo.

Torpedoes stowed in brackets must be inspected with suffi

cient frequency to detect any signs of tendency to rust and to
See that they are well protected with oil or vaseline.
265

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

The engines must be turned by hand at each inspection.

Whether torpedoes are stowed in launching tubes or
brackets, the reducing valve, controlling valve, and steeri

engine valve must be examined, wiped dry and given a li

coat of oil at least once in six months, if the torpedo is not
use, and at the same time the stop valve, charging valve, dep
index, and all exterior steel screws must be turned to ke

them from setting. Propeller locks must be kept on at

times when torpedoes are stowed, and if stowed in bracket
the pendulums must be secured by the transportation screws.
In transporting torpedoes about the ship, and especially i
sending them through hatches, the pendulums must be secure
in the same manner, and the propeller locks kept on.
In preparing for firing practice after a torpedo has re
mained for some time unused care must be taken to see th:

all drain plugs are replaced securely, and it is advisable to bal

ance the rudder to see that the steering engine works properly

After the torpedo is once in good adjustment it should no

be overhauled as a mere matter of routine.

Assembling Tests.
While the torpedo is being assembled preparatory to prac

tice firing, it may be given the following tests to insure th:

all parts of the mechanism are in proper working order an
adjustment.

1. Remove the stop, charging and reducing valves and tho'

oughly clean and oil them. Fill all oil cups and oil well ti
shaft bearings and rudder connections.

2. See if the setting of the depth index corresponds to th

required pressure on the hydrostatic piston.
3. Examine the locking mechanism to see if it is in workin
Order.

4. Sling the flask and ascertain by balancing whether it

free from water; also whether the exercise head is full.

5. Adjust the equalizing springs of the pendulum to perm

free movement at an inclination of 2%" to 3.
6. Charge the flask to at least 700 lbs. pressure, and conne

the air pipe to the valve group by the testing pipe.

7. See that the lock is on the propellers. Open the sto
valve half a turn and give a slight compression of about tw
turns to the regulator spring. Lift the starting lever slightl
and with a lighted taper make a thorough examination for a

leaks, (I) at the top of the valve group around the followe
266

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

B)

at the joint between the valve group and the engine, (3)

round the spindle of the controlling valve (a slight leak here

unavoidable), (4) at ends of valve chests and cylinder heads,

) around joints of air pipes to oil cup and steering engine,

$) around the crank-case cover and plugs in the engine body,

7) around the packing in the end of the steering engine and

hrough the steering-engine valve, (8) at the bulkhead joint
of the air pipe into the immersion chamber, (9) at joints and
long piping to gyroscope.

8. Remove the propeller lock, set the distance gear for two
teeth on the sector, raise the water tripper, throw back the

rting lever, and let the engine revolve slowly until stopped
v the action of the distance mechanism.

O. Put on the propeller lock. With a straight-edge on the

ce blade set the rudder level and the rudder pointer on the
ero division of the scale. Raise the starting lever and move
e valve stem of the steering engine to and fro to see that the
idder responds freely to every movement and has full throw.
10. Now connect the after body to the flask and make tight
he air joint at the valve group.
II. Lock the rudder level for two (2) teeth on the ratchet
war, and the distance gear for two (2) teeth on the sector, re
*

move the propeller lock and revolve the engine slowly to test
he locking gear.

Put on propeller lock.

12. Try the full throw due to the steering engine. Lay the
udder level and move the valve stem of the steering engine
ack and forth to its limit and see if the rudder throw is at

east four (4) divisions down and three and one-half (3%) up.
13. Level the torpedo and balance the throw due to the
lydrostatic piston alone. The down throw of the rudder due

( piston out should exceed by about #4 of a division the up

hrow due to piston in.
14. Test the combined effort of hydrostatic piston and pen
tulum. To do this, sling the torpedo and make use of a spirit
-l. When the torpedo is horizontal, or when its inclination
on the horizontal is less than 2%" to 3, the rudder throw
tained should be that due to the hydrostatic piston alone;

the inclination is increased the pendulum should cooperate

increase or lessen the throw, until finally the limit is reached.
:line the torpedo both upward and downward, and do this
oth with piston out and piston in. Suppose that the full

hrow caused by the steering engine is 4 divisions down and

267

180

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

3% up, and that the hydrostatic piston alone causes a do

throw of 134 divisions and an up throw of 1% divisions. Th
swinging the torpedo as above described should give the rudi
throw as follows: with piston out, an extreme up throw

3% 134 = 134 divisions, and an extreme down throw of

divisions; with piston in, an extreme up throw of 3% divisio
and an extreme down throw of 4 1% = 2% divisions.

15. If the opportunity offers the torpedo may be lowered in

the water, to see if it is free from leaks in the immersion chat
ber and after body. While slightly immersed (the propell
lock of course being on), raise the starting lever and see
there is any excessive leak from the engine compartment.
Miscellaneous.
Oiling.This is very important, oil being both lubricant an
packing. Fill all oil cups, oil water tripper, shaft bearing

and rudder connections.

Oiling must never be neglecte

whether for tests or actual run.

Air Flask.Water should be drained from the flask on

when the after body is off, to avoid having any dirt or std;
ment pass through the air pipe to the valve group.

To di

this, first remove the charging and check valve and open
stop valve to allow the air to escape. Then remove the sy
valve, turn the flask bottom up, and sling it so that the at

part shall incline downward at an angle of about 60 from #

horizontal. After draining, thoroughly clean the valve st:
and replace the valves, then charge the flask and blow throu!
before connecting to after body.

Stop and Charging Valves.These valves can easily be mai

tight by grinding in with oil, or oil and a little finely group
glass (never use emery). Never put more than a moderal

pressure on the stop valve, as it is apt to set. After clos:

the stop valve raise the starting lever to free the air pipe.

this air pipe again fills it shows that the stop valve is not
good condition. When opening the stop valve for a run scre
the spindle full distance up, as it is tighter in that position.
Hydrostatic Piston.With the depth index set at 5 feet

pressure of 28.8 lbs. should move the piston. Double t

pressure should correspond to a setting of Io feet. This te
is conveniently made with a push spring balance.
of Q

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

Reducing Valve.Must seat properly, and be well cleaned and

iled. Its plug must be tight and air passages clear.

Water Tripper.Should always be raised when the engine is
lined by air out of water, and before actual firing (over-water
ischarge). It should be well oiled and must move freely. If

gt thrown down when the torpedo enters the water it will

use the torpedo to run slowly, perhaps run away, and may
>nder its discovery very difficult.

Faults in Engine.These may be: bearings cut, pistons

roken, valve rod bent, safety check valve broken, crank
rasses broken, valve rod roll pin broken, cam key sheared,
ater in engine.

A fault may be detected by turning propellers by hand, first

bserving the precaution of closing the stop valve and blowing
ff. These faults are generally caused by lack of oil.
Faults in Steering Engine.Chiefly due to wearing out of
acking in gland. Air passages may become obstructed.
Drain Plugs.After every run to be taken out and then re
laced. After body drain plug to be left out when a war shot
5 to be made.

Propeller Lock.should be kept on at all times, except when

he torpedo has been put into the tube for firing, or when
lowing off after a run, or when testing the locking and distance
fear.

Rudder Locked, Position.Ordinarily the rudder should be

ocked level.

It may have to be locked slightly up or slightly

lown to correct diving tendency.

Each turn of the steering rod changes the position of the
udder 34 of a division.

Six points of the valve star changes the position of the rudder
Dne division.

Ten points of the locking star changes the position of the

rudder one division.

Twelve divisions of the adjustment cam (rudder index)

changes the rudder one division.
Rudder Locked, Duration.Shown by the record sheet.
Usually set to unlock after running from 50 to 75 yards.
Rudder Throw.The full throw should be about 3% divisions
up and 4 divisions down. This throw should be obtained by
hand, by the steering engine, and by the combined effort of
hydrostatic piston and pendulum.
When balancing the throw due to the hydrostatic piston
-

269

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

182

alone, the down throw should exceed the up throw by about #

of a divisionusually about 134 down and 1% up.
In making these tests the lost motion due to the wearing 10
the rudder pivots must be taken into consideration.

When disassembling the after body, note carefully the num

ber of turns taken in unscrewing the steering rod, and in reas
sembling screw it in a like number. A mistake is easily mail
in doing this, for the first turn or two counted may not cat!
the thread. To make sure, before connecting up the after body
that the rod permits sufficient throw, move the rudder up att
down by hand and see that the pointer shows at least foll
divisions down and three and a half up. Then turn on all
through the testing pipe and see that the rudder respond;

freely to the steering engine. It is apt to work stiffly at first

owing to the dryness of the valve. There should be no all
leak except
and this not
When the
not balance
whether the

a slight one through the steering engine valve

sufficient to blow out a lighted taper.
after body is connected up and the rudder doet
correctly, it becomes necessary to determint
fault lies with the steering rod or with the valvt
-

stem adjustment. The rudder throw due to the hydrostati

piston effect should be about 34 division more down than up
Suppose, however, that the mean rudder throw due to pistol
effect be one point down and at the same time the rudder w
not give its full throw of 3% points up; it is an indication t

the steering rod is too long and should be screwed in one t

more, thus altering the position of the rudder by 34 of
division.

Generally, large connections are made by screwing

out or in to lengthen or shorten the steering rod; refine!

adjustments, by lengthening or shortening the valve stem.
In making tests for balancing the rudder, considerable dis
cretion must be used in noting the rudder throw. Its action
is more or less uncertain, owing to wearing of pivots, air lea
in steering engine, or dryness of valve.
Initial Dive.This is determined by height of tube, depres

sion of tube, length of spoon, velocity of ejection, and th

position and duration of locked rudder. Assuming the heigh
of tube, length of spoon and impulse charge as constant, to
deep diving may be corrected by lessening the tube depression
or by locking the rudder up or for a longer time; too shallow

diving, by increasing the tube depression, or by locking th

270

f
THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

183

ider down or for a shorter time. (The tube mount must

securely clamped to prevent excessive jump.)
Initial Dive Effect on the Obry Steering Device.The short

ark III. and long Mark I. torpedoes are fitted with the Obry
ar, and they require a shallow or flat dive. Unless the dive
flat it is possible that the vessel's speed might throw the

1 of the torpedo far enough forward to cause the Obry posi

n-holder to strike the outer gimbal and make the gyroscope
nble.

When new torpedoes are received from the maker special

ecautions are taken not to disturb the Obry gear adjustments
ed on acceptance trials. It is deemed advisable, however,
ser receiving and assembling these torpedoes on board to
n them at least once before depending on them for a war
ot. If the Obry and all other adjustments are properly
ide, no deflection will be caused by the speed of the vessel.

ren if the torpedo breaches after initial dive the Obry will
rrect the course and give a straight run.
An extra guide stud has been placed on the short Mark III.
rpedoes because the spoon of the tube is short and will not
herwise permit a flat dive. As the Mark III. torpedo when
ly charged and ready for launching has a negative buoyancy
about 20 lbs., it is advisable, in making first trial shots, to
e about 1000 lbs. initial pressure for a 400 yds. run and to set
e regulator for a high initial speed, in order to insure ample

toyancy at end of run. An impulse charge of 4 oz. (or 5 oz.

the atmosphere is very damp) and a tube depression of 2
3% will give satisfactory results.

The long Mark I. torpedo has ample buoyancy, and its tube
is a spoon of such length as not to require the extra guide
ud for giving a flat dive. Its charge is 7 oz.
In making the adjustments preliminary to launching, do not

misled by the figures in column 6 of adjustment card,

rudder locked + up down.

These figures refer to the

justment cam (rudder index) of the locking dial and are

bject to change in handling. With the Obry installed, and
e flat dive, the rudder may be safely locked horizontal.
Breaching after Dive.The position or the duration of lock
g, or both, may have to be changed. The pendulum check
g springs may be unequal. There may be an air leak or an
obstruction in the steering engine. The rudder may have
271

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

too much up throw and not enough down. The reducing vak
may not work freely, owing to a burr, or dirt, or loose plug
A series of short breaches indicates that the rudder has no
been unlocked, or only partly unlocked. An undulating cous

may be due to unequal adjustment of pendulum springs or it

obstructions in air passages.

Surface Run.Generally due to leak in steering engine. T.

rudder throw may be too much up and not enough down. Tit
steering rod spring may be too stiff.

Running Away.Generally due to imperfect seating of #

reducing valve, caused by dirt or gumminess. It may be dit
to the fact that the water tripper was not thrown down of

entering the water, that the starting lever was not pulled all it
way to the rear, or to worn counter ratchet.

Air Leaks.To be remedied by tightening joints or renewi.

washers. May be sought for by lighted taper, or best by in
mersing the torpedo and throwing back the starting lever

When using lighted taper, be careful not to heat springs an

so injure their temper. After setting up moderately tigil
with the wrench, the secret of making a tight joint lies in
first loosening the screw on one side and then setting up on the
side from which the air comes.

Lead washers are not to be used in place of the leather

washers supplied.
Packing Band.Must be central, or will cause deflection ()

right or left. Must be tight around the torpedo, or the impus:

charge will not produce uniform result. Its tightness sho!
be such that the force of two men on the rammer, or loadi:
staff, is required to push the torpedo home.
Stop Pin.Before entering the torpedo into the tube th:

stop pin must be down. The cocking lever must be raised

and the safety pin put in place.
Tripping Latch.Before entering the torpedo into the tube
examine the tripping latch, and after entry see that it lies fair
against the starting lever.

Depression of Tube.This and the speed of ejection due to

the impulse charge affect the entry of the torpedo into the
water. When the axis of the tube is less than 5 feet above the
water an extreme depression of 6 degrees may be given; when

more than 8 feet above the water, little if any depression; when
between 5 and 8 feet, a mean proportional depression. (These
272

THE WHITEHEAD ToRPEDO.

are to be regarded merely as rough approximations, and

st be determined for each tube.)

impulse Charges.For the small Whitehead the charge

eighs 4 oz.; for the large Whitehead, 7 oz. When making up
it small charge, first put 7 powder grains of sphero-hexagonal
owder in the cartridge case and then 21 powder grains of
abical grain black powder of the kind used in Hotchkiss
apid-fire guns. For the large torpedo, first 12 sphero-hexa
onal powder grains and then 35 cubical black.

Jam wad in end of cartridge case and, if not to be used im

mediately, protect from moisture by using wax and shellac
round edge of wad, and put plug in end of primer pocket.
Ceep cartridges in dry place.

Cartridge Block.If the bottom of the cartridge block be

omes coated with residue it will prevent the block being turned
o the full locked position.

Firing Mechanism.Should be tested after torpedo has been

hoved home.

Care should be taken to see that the friction

'rimer is a neat fit, with no lost motion in loop of primer, and

hat a straight pull is obtained; otherwise with friction primers
missfires are very apt to occur. In using electric primers, be

areful to note that primer seat is clean, insuring a good

Ontact.

, Obry Gear.The action of the Obry gear upon the torpedo

s to cause it to make a series of short curves, but to keep a

nean straight course, varying little from the line of sight.

f the curves are long, or if the general direction taken by the
orpedo is to the right or left of the line of sight, the Obry
should be examined to see if it is properly adjusted.

In testing or adjusting the Obry on board ship, the ship's

head should remain on the same compass course, for if the
ship is swinging, the change in azimuth will have the same

affect upon the result as though the torpedo had deviated from
its course by the same amount that the ship has swung.
| To Test the Obry while in the Torpedo.See the starting lever
down, raise the water tripper, and put the yoke on the pro
pellers. Put the transporting strap on, and sling the torpedo

so that it may be swung in azimuth. Wind the Obry. Raise

the starting lever, which starts the gyroscope wheel spinning

by releasing the impulse spring. Swing the tail of the torpedo

273

186

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

gently from side to side, and note the angle, or arc, through
which the tail moves when the vertical rudders move from Cit

side of the torpedo to the other. If the Obry is working prop.

erly the rudders should move from one side to the other when
the tail is swung through an arc of one degree (% degree eath
side of the central position); the extreme limit within which it
is necessary to move the tail to work the rudders might vey
properly be considered as not more than 3 degrees of arc (1%
degrees each side of the central position). It should, howeve,
be less than this.

Continue to swing the torpedo to the right and left for for
or five minutes, and notice if the limiting points of the at
through which the tail is swung remain constant, or if it is
necessary to swing the torpedo a little farther to the right Gr
left each time. If such is the case, and the ship is steady, them
the gyroscope wheel is probably not keeping in the same plane
as it should. It will therefore be necessary to adjust the Obry:

To Adjust the Obry Gear.Take out the screws of the Obry

door and remove the door.

Unscrew the holding-down screws

of the Obry, with a socket wrench, and lift the Obry out of the
torpedo. Put it in the frame of the adjusting stand and screw.
in the holding-down screws.

Swing the starting lever (on the adjusting stand) around in

the direction of the hands of a watch as far as it will go.
Wind the Obry, noting that the impulse sector meshes prop.
erly with the teeth on the gyroscope axle.

Have a watch ready to note the duration of the time t.

Obry will run. (They run from ten to eleven minutes, whit
adjusted in the shops where made.)

Trip the impulse spring by moving the starting lever back

in the opposite direction to the motion of the hands of a watch
seeing that it remains in the position to which moved and does
not fly back.
Set a pointer on the stand, close to the end of the center *
|

which the counterbalance is screwed, so that its motion (if any

may be carefully noted. (This is the after center on which the
gyroscope wheel turns when the Obry is in the torpedo.)

If this center moves to the left (against the hands of a watch)

the counterbalance is too heavy, and must be screwed towards
the ring.

If the after center moves to the right the counterbalance i.

274

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

187

: exerting weight enough on the wheel, and must be screwed

out.

If the horizontal motion, to right or left, of the after center

cannot be overcome by moving the counterbalance in to the
ring, or out to the end of the screw upon which it is screwed,

hen the gyroscope wheel itself will have to be moved in the

same direction. To do this, slacken the clamp screws of both
senters, unscrew one center about one-quarter of a turn, then
screw the other one in carefully the same amount. The wheel
will be found very sensitive to this adjustment. See that the
wheel turns freely on its centers, then set up the clamp screws.

Wind up the Obry and try the running of the wheel again.
Sontinue the operation until there is no horizontal motion of

he centers of the wheel, and, of course, of the wheel itself.

If the centers of the gyroscope wheel have a vertical motion,
after the horizontal motion has been overcome, it probably

ndicates that the gyroscope wheel is too near the ring-bearing

5f one of its centers, and too far away from the other one.

Moving it back to the proper position would introduce a hori

!ontal motion of its centers. The vertical motion would prob
ibly not interfere with the proper action of the Obry, however

unless the torpedo rolled), except in cases when it was so

marked that the wheel had turned up to a position where the
gyroscopic action was interfered with before the torpedo had
inished its run.

The vertical motion might be overcome by moving the wheel

n the direction of its centers until in the proper position, and
hen filing from the heavier side of the ring.
The wheel is nearer the ring-bearing of that center which
las a vertical motion upwards when the wheel is running.

Having adjusted the gyroscope so that the centers of the

wheel do not move in azimuth while the wheel is running, make
he air connections and turn a pressure of about 150 lbs. on
he steering engine.
Wind up and start the Obry, and then work the frame of the
djusting stand back and forth to get an indicator diagram.
This will show the action of the rolling valve of the steering
ngine.

Excellent cards have been taken by moving the frame

hrough an arc of one degree (one-half degree each side of the

enter).

If the card shows that the torpedo would have a tendency

275 .

188

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

to run either to port or starboard of the line of sight (throug

the action of the Obry), counteract this tendency by setting to
valve plug by the adjusting screws.
One screw must be slacked up before the other can be screw
ed in.

The torpedo will run in the direction in which the screws a

moved.

To Remove the Gyroscope Wheel.The centers of the whe

may be more readily examined and kept free from rust if t.
wheel is kept dismounted and in the compartment provid.'
for it in the Obry gear box. The wheel should always be di

mounted for transportation. To dismount it, come up th

clamp screws of the counterbalance centers, but do not distul
the other center of the wheel, in order that the wheel may t
put back in the same position in the ring.
Jam the two nuts of the counterbalance tightly togethe
holding the hexagonal-headed nut with a wrench, and screwir
the jam nut tightly against it with the fingers. Then gras
both nuts with the thumb and forefinger, and by turning ther
to the left (and with them the center on which they are screwel
the center will screw out until clear of the axle of the gym
scope wheel, when it may be removed.
Impulse Spring.Should the impulse spring become weal
tauten it up as follows: Take out the screws in the impuls
sector stop, and take off the stop. Give the impulse sprin
one complete turn with the winding key, and, holding it

this position by the key, put on the stop again. Be careful t

keep the fingers out of the holes through the impulse sector,
they might be cut off by the sector in case the key should sli:
Be very careful not to bend the toes of the position hold:
in handling the Obry gear. This precaution is necessary E.
order to insure the proper seating of the position holder a
winding up the gear.

If the position holder does not hold the gyroscope up F

proper position for centering stud, the gear may be wound
so that when tripped the impulse sector will not engage t
teeth of the gyroscope; and this will cause an abnormal blo

upon the stop, stop arm and air cushion sufficient to bend ti
cam shaft and impulse sector, thus rendering the gear useles

276

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

189

Repairs.
The following repairs can generally be made on board ship:
eaks of small parts in the mechanism of the torpedo and
cessories; dents in the shell of the torpedo; water leaks; air
aks; leaks in valves; and breaks or cracks in air pipes.
A supply of spare parts to replace such parts of the mechan
m as are most likely to be lost, or broken in exercise, is fur
hed with each outfit.

Denting the shell of the torpedo is to be carefully guarded

ainst but, when it unavoidably occurs, the dents may be
ten out from outside the shell with a wooden mallet or

pper hammer against a hard-wood block shaped to conform

the inner surface of the part under treatment. Should a

leel hammer be used care must be taken not to bruise the
nell.

Water leaks of any consequence are unusual and may occur

y" reason of the drain plugs not being screwed in tight; or,
iter considerable use, by the brazing coming loose between
nt rings and the shell of the torpedo; or, rarely, by imper

st closure of the diaphragm of the hydrostatic piston or of

he rubber washers of the immersion-chamber bulkhead, en
ine bed plate and tube flange; or, still more rarely, through
oles in the shell due to lack of care in preventing rust, inside
" out, or caused by rough handling, or by accidental injuries
cidental to service.

A small hole in the shell may be stopped by a steel rivet

'll soldered after it is clinched. A large hole, or a cluster of
mall holes, is best stopped by riveting over them, on the inside

if the shell, a thin piece of tough sheet steel, shaped to con

orm to the curve of the shell, sweating on the steel plate,
oldering the rivets after they have been clinched, and solder
ng the holes from the outside even with the surface. The

ivet holes should, in both methods, be beveled from the out

ide so that the rivets may have a firm hold sufficient to resist
he impulse pressure when the torpedo is launched.
Use as small weight of material as possible in making re
airs and be careful not to shift the ballast from its original
osition.

Air leaks may be detected, when the torpedo is in the water,

Mr bubbles rising to the surface and, when in the open air, by

learing or by touch. If they are in parts difficult of access,
277

190

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

they may generally be found by the employment of a lighte

taper. When they are very small and difficult of location,
thin layer of oil over the part under examination will entang
the escaping bubbles and determine the exact position of the
leak. This last method is particularly applicable to such pa
as the exterior angles between the shell of the air flask and

its heads; the junction of the body of the charging and sto
valves with the head of the air flask; stop valves of air con
pressors and accumulators whose stems stand vertical; an
porous castings.

An air leak in the immersion chamber will be indicated by

the distention of the diaphragm of the hydrostatic piston. A
distention of the diaphragm may be caused by expansion d
air in the immersion chamber due to rise in temperature, but
this can be distinguished from the same effect produced by a
air leak by the fact that the distention will be much less, and
that, the pressure being relieved by removing a drain plug, th:
distention will not occur again when the drain plug is replaced
Air leaks in the charging valve and stop valve and from th:

valve group oil cup may be neglected, provided they are very
small, and a small leak around the stem of the controlling
valve, when air is admitted to the reducing valve, is unavoi:
able, but all other air leaks must be carefully attended to.

Small air leaks in porous castings can usually be remedia

by compressing the metal by hammering, or by a drop of solder.
Air leaks in the exterior angle between the shell of the at

flask and its heads, at the junction of the body of the charging
and stop valves with the head, and at the permanent joint of

the air pipe where it passes through the joint ring of the im.
mersion chamber may sometimes, if very small, be stopped by
solder, the surface having first been carefully cleaned. Exper.
ence has shown, however, that there is rarely any remedy for
a leak around the head of the air flask, however slight, short
of a new head.

Air leaks in connections of air pipes indicate that the nuts

of the connections are not screwed down sufficiently tight; or,
in connections made by air-joint screws, that the screws are
either not screwed in hard enough; or that they are not set up
equally on each side and are, consequently, canting the connec.
tions; or that the knife-edge of the joint, or the seat of the
knife-edge, is deformed.
278

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

191

Air leaks around valves under which washers are used may
le due to injury to the washer or to deformation of the valve.
n the latter case the valve must be reground. Valves which
epend for their tightness on a close fit in their seats, without
he interposition of washers, must be ground in afresh when
eaks are developed.
: Before grinding valves make sure that the leaks are not
aused by the want of perfect cleanliness and, where grinding
s necessary, use either oil alone, or oil and soft oil stone,
owdered and free from grit, or oil and finely-ground glass.

Never use emery dust for this purpose as it is likely to become

mbedded in the face of the valve and there is danger of re

maining loose particles being carried by the air into the re

lucing and other valves.

Breaks and cracks in copper air pipes are not likely to occur,
mut when repairs become necessary, due to this cause, cut out
he damaged portion and replace it by a length of larger pipe
:lipped over the cut ends, letting it lap the ends at least two
nches and brazing the laps carefully with soft spelter, filing
lown the ends of the larger piece for a smooth finish. An air

ipe may be lengthened in a similar manner by butting against

its end the lengthening piece, and making the junction air

ight by slipping over it a sleeve of larger pipe well brazed

with soft spelter.
In operations involving the bending of copper air pipes into
S or other curves the pipe must be well annealed, by being
heated to a cherry red and plunged into cold water, and then
gently bent around pattern blocks scored out around the edges
to fit the diameter of the pipe and fastened in place on the
work bench. It is customary to fill pipes with resin before
bending but, by exercising due care, thoroughly annealed pipes
may be bent in this manner without flattening, even when resin
is not employed.
Care of Launching Tubes and Tube Mounts.

Launching tubes and mounts and their fittings must be kept

scrupulously clean. The interior of tubes, unpainted steel sur
faces and working parts must be well oiled or, where necessary
on account of wet or dampness, coated with vaseline. Water

and sand must be kept clear of tubes and their mounts when
279

192

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

washing decks and the training and elevating gear must b

turned daily to insure against setting.
Launching tubes and tube mounts on uncovered decks mus
be protected by canvas covers, oiled or painted.
After exercise with gunpowder impulse the tube must be
washed out with fresh water, wiped dry, and then oiled or
coated with vaseline, and all gunpowder residue must he
cleaned out of the cartridge chamber that the shell of the car
|

ridge may enter fully and permit the cartridge block to be

turned to its full locked position.
Especial attention must be paid to the tripping latch that

it may always be in condition for throwing back the starting

lever on launching the torpedo.

Keep the tripping-latch spring released from unnecessary

compression.
Care of Air Compressors and Accumulators..
The care of engines of air compressors is governed by the
rules observed in the care of steam engines in general. Com
pressors should not be disassembled more often than is neces.
sary, but with sufficient frequency to keep interior parts in a
good state of preservation and in condition for working. Cup
leathers should be kept moist whenever there is a probability

of the services of the air compressor being required. An extra

set of cup leathers should always be kept on hand, ready for
emergencies.
Do not exceed the working limits of pressure assigned to
compressors and accumulators and be careful not to let water

accumulate in the separator while compressing air, for, should

the separator fill with water, not only would water be carried
over into the accumulator and air flask, but the separator

would be in danger of bursting. Keep the blow-off cock of

the separator sufficiently open, at all times while running, to
just admit escape of drip water, opening it wide only often
enough to be sure that all the water is escaping.
After exercise, when compressors and accumulators are not
to be used for some time, drain off all water from cylinders
and piping and from the accumulator, protect unpainted steel

surfaces and working parts with oil, and ease all stop valves
and drain valves of the compressor and in the piping to pre
vent them from setting in their seats.
28o

THE WHITEHEAD TORPEDO.

193

Turn over the engines of compressors daily, by hand, to in

ure against setting.
See that there are no pockets for the accumulation of water
1 air and other pipes, and take due precautions that water does
ot freeze in the cylinders during cold weather.
Cup leather, fiber, and metallic air packings should be re
ewed when necessary, and particular attention should be given
onstantly to the condition of these packings to insure their
uccessful operation.

281

PART IV

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS NOS. I AND 2

AND

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL

ARMS, 1902
Prepared by
LIEUT. CoMDR. ALBERT P. NIBLACK, U. S. NAVY

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE

junnery Instructions, No. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

junnery Instructions, No. 2.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
I. Sighting Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3IZ
1st Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3I9
2d Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

3d Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4th Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32I
322

II. Position and Aiming Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325

III.
IV.

Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Kneeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Sitting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Lying Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Rear Sight, Model 1901 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34I
Gallery Practice ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Revolver Firing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35I

W. Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WI.

353
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Long-range Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Suggestions to Riflemen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Instructions for Handling Arms Heated by

Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

373

WII. Practice at Disappearing and Moving Targts. . . . . . 375

283

NAVY DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, D. C., August 28, 1902.

Gunnery Instructions No. 1, Preliminary Class, dated M.

20, 1902, having been issued tentatively, is hereby withdraw
and the revised form, herewith issued, will be substitute

These instructions shall apply also to the officers and enlist:

men of the Marine Corps serving in cruising, training, an
receiving ships.
The qualifications A, B, C, and D, in small-arms firing, a
simplified, and qualifications in great guns are added, tr.
separating the course in small arms from that in great guns.
Any officer or enlisted man who has, previous to the recti;

of this revised order, qualified under Gunnery Instructions N.

I of May 20, will be considered as having qualified in A, B, [.
and D of both small arms and great guns, under these instru:
tions.

It is necessary for cruising ships to carry out this

instruction from the beginning in order to put it into eff

throughout the service, but it is anticipated that the instructi

in the preliminary class will eventually be partly or entir

completed by recruits before joining cruising ships.
These instructions embody the ideas of many officers, a

are deemed worthy of careful trial. Suggestions are invit

but the Department expects them to be accompanied
report showing how far the scheme has been tried.
All great-gun and secondary battery practice, with other

by
th

subcaliber ammunition, except as provided for in Gunnery I

structions and special instructions herewith or hereafter to
issued, will be suspended.

It is intended to make the allow

ance of ammunition so much per officer and man actually und.

progressive instruction.
CHAS. H. DARLING,
Acting Secretary.

284

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

ADDENDA

Gun and Torpedo Drills for United States

Navy, 1900
>

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1 (Revised).

PRELIMINARY CLASS, SMALL ARMS, AND PRELIMINARY
;:
CLASS, GREAT GUNS.

NAVY DEPARTMENT, August 28, 1902.

1. The progressive instruction in gunnery, in the Preliminary
Slass, is divided into two courses, one for small arms and the
Dther for great guns. Each course is divided into various
itages which are designated A, B, C, and D. This is done in
Drder that entries may be made in the enlistment records of
each man, in case of transfer during such instructions, and at

the end of each quarter, under which circumstances an entry

will be made in the enlistment record under columns Marks

manship, Small Arms, or Marksmanship, Great Guns, giv

ng the letter in each column corresponding to that portion of
..he instruction which the man has completed. For instance:

[f an enlisted man has been through section A of Small Arms,

which is Sighting and Position and Aiming Drill, and is

iring in the gallery, but has not completed the gallery qualifica
ion, called B, the entry of the letter A will be made on his
enlistment record to indicate that the next step is B.

The

entry of any letter, say D, implies that the man has qualified
also in A, B, and C.

A dash shall be entered in each column

for any quarter in which no instruction was had or in which

no qualification into a higher class was completed.

2. Gunnery Instructions No. 2 will give the qualifications

of the Marksman Class, and Gunnery Instructions No. 3"
of the Gun-pointer Class.

3. Small-arm firing at ranges on shore will take place as

opportunity offers. It shall in no way interfere with the

instruction in great guns of the men specially adapted for it.

285

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS NO. I.

and shall be regarded as supplemental to instruction in fiti

great guns with telescope sights, the training for whic
separate and distinct.

4. Every effort should be made to get and keep the inter

of the men.

Good scores should be posted on the

boards. Gallery competitions between teams of different dii

sions should be encouraged.

It is not intended to limit ti

allowance of caliber o.30 gallery-practice ammunition, and firi

outside of that prescribed in these instructions may be give

as a drill, both in the gallery and as subcaliber instruction, an

also in practice in great-gun firing in such guns as may
fitted to carry a Krag rifle.
Remarks on Preliminary Class, Small Arms.

5. All officers and men on board ship shall be required

qualify in small-arm firing as occasion offers, and as far
they are capable, but the following persons shall be exem
from all forms of gunnery instruction, unless they elect
take it:

(a) Flag officers, commanding officers, and chaplains.

(b) All commissioned and warrant officers over 50 years
age.

(c) Bandsmen and all enlisted men of continental or insul

Asiatic nationality or origin (but they may be given sol
portion of the scheme).
|
6. Entries for officers in small-arm firing shall be in the se
annual Report of Fitness, Form B." (afloat), under I.

fessional Ability, by giving the letter corresponding to

qualification which the officer has last completed.
7. In the Firing Regulations for Small Arms, 1898, t
following classification is made in the United States Army i
rifle firing, and opposite is given the qualification in the CC
responding class in small arms in the Navy:
|

Army.

Navy.

First-class men.............
Marksmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Qualifications A, B, C and D.
Qualification E.
Qualification F.
Qualification G.

Sharpshooters ..............

Qualification H.

Third-class men...... . . . . . .
Second-class men..........

286

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

8. As far as practicable each enlisted man shall have and

eep his own rifle, being responsible for its good condition,
ut officers and men not having rifles should be allowed to
elect theirs from the best in any section with which they fire.

9. Quarterly reports of progress in small-arm firing should

e made on Form C, which shows the number of officers and
hen on board and number qualified under each section.
PRELIMINARY CLASS, SMALL ARMS.
(Qualifications A, B, C, and D, corresponding to third-class
len in the United States Army classification.)
A. First Qualification, Small Arms.
Sighting and position and aiming drill.The recruit shall be

horoughly and systematically instructed in Articles I to 107,

1clusive, of Firing Regulations for Small Arms, U. S. Navy,
502. When satisfactory progress has been made, the recruit
hall have the right to have the letter A placed in the column
Marksmanship, Small Arms in case he is transferred, or at
1e end of any quarter, and he shall then be eligible for B.
B. Second Qualification, Small Arms.
Gallery practice.Gallery practice at 50 feet, as described in

; Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902, Articles 121 to 146,

nclusive, shall be held. Attention is invited to Articles 130,
(34, 135, 136, 137, and 138 with regard to the use of artificial

'ull's-eyes, the distance of which from the iron bull's-eye being

tetermined, for various settings of the sight, by the practice
f the best marksmen on board.

Scores of five shots will be marked, and each recruit will be

equired to qualify by making 20 out of a possible 25, standing

ind firing offhand, as in Article 133; then by making 20 out of

possible 25 with sight adjusted for 300 yards, and with posi
ions as explained in Article 134; and finally, by making 20 out

f a possible 25, lying prone, as explained in Article 136, with

ights at from 500 to 600 yards. When so qualified, the recruit
hall have the right to have the letter B placed in the column
Marksmanship, Small Arms, in case he is transferred, or at
he end of the quarter, and he shall then be eligible for qualifica
ion in C.

287
t

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

C. Third Qualification, Small Arms.

Care and handling of rifle and revolver, and preliminary small-g

firing.(a) The recruit shall receive instruction in the mecha

ism and care and handling of the service rifle and revolvi
and in aiming and pointing the revolver (Firing Regulatio
U. S. Navy, 1902, Articles I47 to 149 inclusive.)
(b) Practical firing, rifle and revolver.The recruit shall
four strings of five shots each with the rifle, and three stri
of five shots each with the revolver at a regulation subcali
target (the actual target being a cylindrical canvas drum
inches in diameter and 4 feet high, with three bands each
inches wide, the upper and lower bands being painted bla
and the middle band white, or natural canvas color); targ
anchored at about 100 yards for rifle, and IO to 30 yards
revolver. In rifle firing the sight will be at point-blank, b
the recruit will fire five shots standing, five shots sitting, i.
shots kneeling, and five shots lying down. Hits on the d
only to count. From the best score of the four strings
five shots each, there must be at least two hits to qualify. W:
the pistol there must be at least two hits in the best scored

the three strings of five shots each to qualify. Previous"

and during the rifle firing the recruits will be given instructi:

in such portions of the Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy, 19.

Suggestions to Riflemen, Articles 205 to 242, as may
applicable. Errors will be corrected as they occur. The obj
of this firing is to accustom the recruit to the recoil or sh
of the rifle and revolver, and to eliminate wild shooting. Thos

failing to qualify will be put back through a course of A and #

and then fire again in this section.

When qualified as above in (a) and (b), the recruit shall hat
the right to have the letter C placed in the column Marksma:
ship, Small Arms, in case he is transferred, or at the end of:

quarter, and he shall then be eligible for qualification in D.

D. Fourth Qualification, Small Arms.
(a) Field practice on shore with revolver at target A-d (Firing
Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902, Plate XI, and Article 150).
Preliminary.One string of five shots at each of the di:
tances Io, 20, and 30 yards, preliminary in each case to the
Io, 20, and 30 yards record firing, errors to be carefully co
rected.
288

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

Record.Two strings of five shots each at Io, 20, and 30

'ards, the better of the two scores at each range to be at least
[5 out of a possible 25 in order to be permitted to shoot at
he next greater distance.

(b) Field Practice on shore with service rifle at 100, 200 and 300
yards at target A (Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902, Plate
XII, Article 155).Attention is invited to Articles 174 to 194,
inclusive, and Articles 201 to 204, inclusive, and Articles 205 to
242, inclusive.

One hundred yards.Preliminary: (1) Five shots kneeling or

sitting; (2) five shots standing. No score will be kept of this
firing, as it is merely preliminary to the 200 yards firing.
Two hundred yards.Preliminary: (1) Five shots kneeling or
sitting; (2) five shots standing. Record: Two separate strings
of ten shots each. (1) Five shots kneeling or sitting; (2) five
shots standing. Fifty-eight per cent of the total possible of
two record strings (29 out of 50) in order to be permitted to
fire at 300 yards.

Three hundred yards.Preliminary: (1) Five shots prone; (2)

five shots kneeling or sitting. Record: Two separate strings of
ten shots each. (1) Five shots prone; (2) five shots kneeling
or sitting.

Fifty-eight per cent of the total possible of two

record strings (29 out of 50) in order to qualify.

Any person

who qualifies in (a) and (b) in this section is entitled to have

the letter D entered in the column Marksmanship, Small
Arms.

Any person who has qualified in A, B, C, and D of the fore

going qualifications for small arms shall be classified as a
Third-class Man, and shall be eligible to qualify in E,
Marksman Class.
l

Remarks on Preliminary Class, Great Guns.

10. Officers of gun divisions and junior officers of gun divis

ions (including all midshipmen on board) and certain enlisted
men enumerated below, shall be required to qualify in great

gun firing up to the point where four successive entries of the

same letter (or a lower letter) shall disqualify for further firing.

11. As the complements of most ships are large, it is impera

tive that certain men be selected for great-gun training, since

the expenditure of ammunition must necessarily be limited.
The order of preference shall be:
289

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

(a) All enlisted men and marines serving as gun captains or

gun pointers at the main and secondary batteries.
(b) Officers and junior officers of gun divisions and all mid
shipmen.

(c) All enlisted men and marines serving in gun divisions.

(d) All enlisted men in the seaman branch and all marine
not included in the foregoing.
(e) In all cases, men who are known to be the best shot
shall be given the course in great guns herein prescribed in the
order of preference as stated, and without regard to instruction
in small-arm firing.

12. Those officers and men who from their positions, reputa:
tions, and records, are qualified, as heretofore explained, to
take the course in great-gun firing shall go through the
following:
PRELIMINARY CLASS, GREAT GUNS.
A. First Qualification, Great Guns.
Sighting and position and aiming drill with service rifle (This
1s the same as A. First Qualification, Small Arms).Th:
recruit shall be thoroughly and systematically instructed it
Articles I to 107, inclusive, of Firing Regulations for Smal

Arms, U. S. Navy, 1902. When satisfactory progress has

been made, the recruit shall have the right to have the lette!

A placed in the column Marksmanship, Great Guns" in cast

he is transferred, or at the end of any quarter, and he shall
then be eligible for B.
B. Second Qualification, Great Guns.

Gallery practice with service rifle (Same as B. Second Qualifi.

cation, Small Arms).Gallery practice at 50 feet, as described
in Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902, Articles 121 to 146
inclusive, shall be held. Attention is invited to Articles 130
and 134 to 138, inclusive, with regard to the use of artificial

bull's-eyes, the distance of which from the iron bull's-eye being

determined, for various settings of the sight, by the practice
of the best marksman on board.

Scores of five shots will be marked, and each recruit will be

required to qualify by making 20 out of a possible 25, standing

290

GUNNER: INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

and firing offhand, as in Article 133; then by making 20 out of

* possible 25 with sight adjusted for 300 yards, and with posi
ions as explained in Article 134; and finally by making 20 out
f a possible 25, lying prone, as explained in Article 136, with
ights at from 500 to 600 yards. When so qualified, the recruit
hall have the right to have the letter B placed in the column
* Marksmanship, Great Guns, in case he is transferred, or
it the end of the quarter, and he shall then be eligible for
Iualification in C.
i
C. Third Qualification, Great Guns.
(a) Instruction shall be given in the use of the sliding leaf
bf sights or the correction for lateral errors without the

lid of a sliding leaf; in the use of the telescope sight, elevat

ing gear, training gear, and firing mechanism of the 4-inch,
5-inch, 6-inch, 7-inch guns or turret guns; in the sight bar and
ime of flight of projectiles as marked thereon; fuses in the
lifferent classes of projectiles and their uses; and in smokeless
Dowder and variation in ranges.

(b) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship and target anchored.

Subcaliber practice with caliber o.45 ammunition, with 1
pounder, 3-pounder, or 6-pounder, at regulation subcaliber
target, anchored; range 100 yards; ship anchored; strings of
ten shots; the scoring to be made by the approximate method

described in paragraph 14 which follows; by this method, a

score of 30 out of a possible 50 to qualify; but only three
Strings of ten shots allowed, otherwise the person to be put
'back for instruction in A and B.

(c) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship anchored, target moving.

Subcaliber practice with caliber o.45 ammunition, with 1
pounder, 3-pounder, or 6-pounder, with fixed sight bar, at
regulation subcaliber target towed at a range of from Ioo to

200 yards at a speed of about 2 or 3 knots; ship anchored;

strings of ten shots; the scoring to be by the approximate
method hereafter described; by this method a score of 30 out
of a possible 50 to qualify, but only three strings of ten
shots each allowed, otherwise the person firing to be put back
for instruction in A and B.

Four failures to qualify through C shall disqualify any person

for further firing in great-gun qualifications, but any person
who has qualified in (a), (b), and (c) of this section is entitled
29I

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

to have the letter C entered in the column Marksmanshi

Great Guns, in case he is transferred, or at the end of th

quarter in which qualified, and he shall then be eligible fo
qualification in D.

D. Fourth Qualification, Great Guns.

This is the final qualification in the preliminary class f

great guns. Accuracy and not rapidity of fire is the essent
(a) Subcaliber, main battery, ship and target anchored.Su
caliber practice with main battery or turret guns of any calib
with caliber O.45 attachment, using telescope sight, at regul:
tion subcaliber target, anchored; range 150 yards; sh:
anchored; strings of ten shots; the scoring to be by the approx:
mate method hereafter described; by this method a score
25 out of a possible 50 to qualify; but only three strings of ti
shots each allowed, otherwise the person firing to be put bad
through (a), (b), and (c) of section C.

(b) Subcaliber, main battery, ship anchored, target moving.Suk

caliber practice, with caliber o.45 ammunition, using telesco:
sight, with main battery or turret guns of any caliber; at 10
to 200 yards range, with fixed sight bar, at regulation su'.

caliber target, towed at a speed of about 2 to 3 knots; sh;

anchored; strings of ten shots; the scoring to be by the approx.
mate method hereafter described; by this method a score of :
out of a possible 50 to qualify, but only three strings of te:
shots allowed, otherwise the person firing to be put back ti
requalify in (a) above.
Four failures to qualify in (b) shall be final, and no furth
instructions in great-gun firing should be had. Entry to th
effect should be made in the enlistment record, or in the R
port of Fitness of officers.

Any person qualifying in (a) and (b) will be entitled to ha

the letter D entered on his record as officer or enlisted man, a

explained previously for C, and shall be regarded as being it

the Preliminary Class, and eligible for qualifying in E. Fourt
Qualification, Great Guns, Marksman Class.

13. The approximate method of scoring with subcaliber prac.

tice at the regulation subcaliber target, herewith prescribed
is that used so successively on the U. S. S. Puritan and Amph"
trite in the training of gun captains. It is only used in the
preli"ry stages of instruction. Later c.; only actual hits
392

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 1.

ount, but it consumes so much time to mark out hits when

method is used.
ith practice, an observer can score quite accurately.

W many men are firing that this approximate

14. The regulation subcaliber drum is a cylindrical canvas

drum, 24 inches in diameter and 4 feet high, with three bands,
each 16 inches wide, the upper and lower bands being painted
black, and the middle band white or natural canvas color. It
is mounted on a sled which can be either towed or anchored.

The observer takes a position above the gun firing, say on

top of the turret, or on the rail, or above the broadside gun,
and watches the splash of the bullets. Imaginary lines are
drawn as follows, and the observer must estimate:
|
l

12 feet

*}<

12 feet

f---------------------------|-

- -

--

#!

$#

|l
I

||

(3)

Water Line

->

#
no

- - - - - - - -* - - - - - - - - - - - - -

15. A hit on the drum counts five.

- -

-i

This can nearly always

be seen at the short ranges, but as the method is only approxi

mate, it is largely a question of the expertness of the observer.

16. Quarterly reports of progress in great gun instruction, as

above described, should be made on Form D.

293

NAVY DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, D. C., September 3, 1902.
Gunnery Instructions No. 2 are here with issued to the
service, and will go into effect at once. Until further orders
no target practice will be held other than that involved in the
instruction of individual officers and men under this scheme.

except by express permission of the Department, or in order to

carry out any necessary tests of the battery.

Suggestions are invited as to these gunnery instructions, but
in all cases the Department expects such suggestions to be
based upon experience in carrying them out.
CHARLES H. DARLING,
Acting Secretary.

294

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

ADDENDA

Gun and Torpedo Drills for United States

Navy, 1900
-

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

MARKSMAN AND SHARPSH00TER CLASS, SMALL ARMS,

AND MARKSMAN CLASS, GREAT GUNS.

NAVY DEPARTMENT, August 30, 1902.

1. In the following instructions the courses of training in
small arms and great guns are continued from the Preliminary
Class, through the stages E, F, G, and H. It is devoted mostly

to practical firing, as the instruction in ammunition, guns,

mounts, and turrets is considered part of the course in ordnance
for which quarterly marks are assigned in the enlistment
records in the column marked Ordnance.

2. The object of the small-arm instructions is to prescribe the

firings and percentages necessary to qualify in the Navy and
Marine Corps, in the various classes, corresponding to those
in the Army. It is understood that the firings will take place

on shore as opportunity offers, and as ranges may from time

to time be provided.

3. The great-gun instructions and firings will, however, be

kept constantly under way, and will in no way depend upon
the progress made in small-arm firing.
Remarks on Small-arm Firing.

4. The impracticability, at present, of having target ranges

of 800 or Iooo yards, and the small amount of time possible to
devote to small-arm firing, make it necessary to modify the

Army qualification for sharpshooters and marksmen of different

classes, to correspond with firings at reduced ranges. Per

centages are, however, also given for firings at 800 and Iooo
yards where opportunity offers.
295

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

5. In the Army a third-class man is one who is not classified,

but in the Navy a third-class man is one who has qualified in
the Preliminary Class (A, B, C, and D), and those who have
not qualified in the Preliminary Class are unclassified.
6. To qualify in the Second, First, Marksman, and Sharp

shooter classes in the Navy and Marine Corps in small arms

the percentages are fixed respectively at 58, 70, 83, and 90 pe:
cent of the total possible scores at 200, 300, 500, and 600 yards
Where firings are held at 800 and 1000 yards, the percentages
must be 81 per cent and 88 per cent respectively to qualify as
marksman and sharpshooter.

7. No provisions are as yet made for skirmish, and company

and volley firing, it being considered desirable to devote any
time now available to individual instruction and qualification.

8. Owing to the great difficulty of locating ranges near navy

yards on account of the density of the population, the Navy may
have to adopt, in certain cases, the reduced ammunition, targets,
and ranges which the Army now uses. The muzzle velocity is
900 foot-seconds, and the sizes and distances of the targets are
reduced accordingly.

9. If, in small-arm firing, in attempting to qualify in, say E.

a person gets a percentage entitling him to, say G, then the
higher letter shall be entered, and the intermediate instruction
and firing will be omitted.

10. If, in attempting to qualify in any class in small-arm

firing, a percentage is made corresponding to a lower class, the
letter corresponding to such lower class shall be entered to
show deterioration, but if the person firing simply requalifies
in the same class, the same letter as before will be entered.

11. When a third-class man fails to qualify in E, and a second

class man fails to qualify in F four successive times, such
person shall be ineligible for further progressive instruction,
and an entry to this effect shall be made on his enlistment
record. Such person shall thereafter receive only one practice
a year and that in the class in which he last qualified. The
same rule shall apply to officers, but the entry shall be in their
Report on Fitness.

12. Any one failing to qualify in either rifle or revolver prac

tice in any one day may immediately afterwards, or on a sub
sequent day, be allowed to try again if the attained percentage
296

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

is within 5 per cent of qualifying with the rifle, or within two

points of qualifying with the revolver, otherwise the firing will
go over to the next occasion.

13. In all firing with the rifle and revolver, the allowance of
time shall be not more than an average of one minute per shot
for any string.
MARKSMAN CLASS, SMALL ARMS.
2

E. Fifth Qualification (in the Army, Second Class).

(a) Each person shall receive preliminary instruction in the
nomenclature of the rifle and revolver; the precautions neces

'sary for their care and preservation; and in the motion of pro
jectiles and variations in range. The requirements of the field
practice under this qualification E should be carefully re
hearsed in the gallery with strings of five shots in preparation
for field firing, and such portions of Articles 205 to 242, inclu
sive, of the Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902, as are
applicable should be imparted individually to each man in detail.

Field practice with rifle, at 200 and 300 yards, with Army tar
get A, and 500 and 600 yards, with Army target B (see plate
XII, Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902 ). It consists in
| firing ten (IO) shots preliminary at each range, and for record
: two (2) strings of ten (Io) shots each, the details are as follows:

(b) Two hundred yards (Target A).Preliminary: (1) Five

shots kneeling or sitting; (2) five shots standing.

Record: (1)

Ten shots kneeling or sitting; (2) ten shots standing.

(c) Three hundred yards.Preliminary: (1) Five shots prone;
; (2) five shots kneeling or sitting. Record: (1) Ten shots prone;
(2) ten shots kneeling or sitting.
(d) Five hundred yards (Target B).Preliminary: (1) Five
shots prone; (2) five shots kneeling or sitting.

Record: (1)

Ten shots prone; (2) ten shots kneeling or sitting.

; (e) Six hundred yards (Target B).Preliminary: (1) Five shots
prone; (2) five shots kneeling or sitting. Record: (1) Ten shots
, prone; (2) ten shots kneeling or sitting.
One who in record practice fires two full scores at each dis
tance200, 300, 500 and 600 yardsand from the better of
such scores makes an average of 58 per centum of the possible

aggregate score, shall qualify in rifle firing, and be eligible to

fire with the revolver; not qualifying, not to fire revolver.
297

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIO.S NO. 2.

(f) Revolver (Target A-d, Firing Regulations, U. S. Navy

1902, Plate XI) distance 20, 30, and 40 yards.Preliminary

One string of 5 shots, preliminary to each record string at 20

30 and 40 yards, but no score to be kept. Record: Two score
of 5 shots at each range.
One who fires two full record scores at each distance, 20, 3.
and 40 yards, and from the better of such scores makes at
average of 13 out of a possible 25, shall qualify.

Any enlisted man who completes the above qualifications

with both rifle and revolver shall have the right to have the

letter E placed in the column Marksmanship, Small Arms."

at the end of a quarter, or in case he is transferred, and he
shall then be eligible for qualification in F. An officer qualify.
ing shall have the right to have the letter E entered in his

Report on Fitness (Form B) under Professional Ability."

if no higher qualification is attained when report occurs.

This

will also constitute being eligible to qualify in F. The class.

fication will be Second Class.

F. Sixth Qualification (in the Army, First Class).

(a) Each person shall be required to know how to take car.
of the service rifle and revolver; be instructed in estimating
distances on shore, and suggestions to riflemen, Articles 205 to
242 inclusive. A limited amount of gallery practice should be
had preliminary to field firing.
Field practice with rifle.Same as for (b), (c), (d), and (e) of
E, except that one who in record practice fires two full scores
at each 200, 300, 500, and 600 yards, and from the better of such

scores makes an average of 70 per cent of the possible aggre

gate score, shall qualify in rifle firing and be eligible to fire
with the revolver, otherwise not.

(f) Revolver.Same as for E, except that one who fires two

full record scores at each distance, 20, 30, and 40 yards, and
from the better of such scores makes an average of 16 out of
a possible 25, shall qualify.

Any enlisted man or officer qualifying with both rifle and

revolver, as above, shall have the same right to the letter F as
explained for E and be eligible to qualify in G. His qualifica.
tion will be First Class, and in case there are ranges at
800 and 1000 yards, he will be eligible to qualify at those
ranges.
l

298

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONs No. 2.

G. Seventh Qualification (in the Army, Marksman).

(a) Each person shall be instructed in the field in estimating

distances. A limited amount of gallery practice should be had
Dreliminary to field firing.
Field practice with rifle.Same as for (b), (c), (d), and (e) of

E and F, except that one who, in record practice, fires two full
strings at each 200, 300, 500, and 600 yards, and from the better
of such scores makes an average of 83 per centum of the pos
sible aggregate score, shall qualify in rifle firing, and be
eligible to fire with the revolver, otherwise not.
In case there are ranges at 800 and 1000 yards, the qualifica

tions and firings will be the same for 200, 300, 500, and 600
yards, but for

(f) Eight hundred yards, at Target C-d (Plate XIII, Firing

Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902 ); Preliminary, ten (Io) shots,
prone. Record, two strings of ten shots each, prone.
(g) One thousand yards, at Target C-k (Plate XIV, Firing
Regulations, U. S. Navy, 1902 ): Preliminary, ten (IO) shots,
prone. Record, two strings of ten shots each, prone.
One who in record practice fires two full strings at each 200,
300, 500, 600, 800, and 1000 yards, and from the better of such
scores makes an average of 81 per cent of the possible aggre
gate score, shall qualify in rifle firing and be eligible to fire
with the revolver, otherwise not.

* (f) or (h) Revolver.Same as for E and F, except that one

who fires two full record scores at each distance, 20, 30, and 40
yards, and from the better of such scores makes an average of
18 out of a possible 25, shall qualify.

Any enlisted man or officer qualifying in both rifle and

revolver as above shall have the same right as to the letter G

as explained for E and F, and be eligible to qualify in H.

He shall be classified as a Marksman.

In case a man qualifies as a Marksman, and in attempting

to qualify in H, or Sharpshooter, drops back to G or lower,
he shall, in subsequent firings, be allowed only ten shots pre

liminary and ten shots in record practice at each range at

which he fires.
*In case the longest range is 6oo yards, this will be (/); if 1,000 yards, it will be (h)
299

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

SHARPSHOOTER CLASS, SMALL ARMS.

H. Eighth Qualification (in the Army, Sharpshooter).
Field practice with rifle.Same as (b), (c), (d), and (e) of E
F, and G, and same as (f) and (g) for G, except that one wh
in record practice, fires two full scores at each 200, 300, 5
and 600 yards, and from the better of such scores makes
average of 90 per cent of the possible aggregate score, s

qualify in rifle firing and be eligible to fire with the revolver,

otherwise not.

In case there are ranges at 800 and 1000 yards, and the firing
is as in (f) and (g) of G, in addition to the others, then on:
who, in record practice, fires two full scores at each 200, 3%
500, 600, 800, and 1000 yards, and from the better of such scort
makes an average of 88 per cent of the possible aggregat:
score, shall qualify in rifle firing and be eligible to fire will
the revolver, otherwise not.

(f) or (h) Revolver.Same as for E, F, and G, except that t

ranges are 20, 30, 40, and 50 yards, and that any one who fires
two full scores at each distance, 20, 30, 40, and 50 yards, an
from the better of such scores makes 20 out of a possible 2:
shall qualify. Any enlisted man or officer who qualifies in th:
rifle and revolver firing as above shall have the same righ
as to the letter H, as explained for E. He will be classified
as a Sharpshooter, but in subsequent firings to requalify ht

shall be allowed only ten shots preliminary and ten shots in

record practice at each range.*
Remarks on Marksman Class, Great Guns.

14. The guns of the main and secondary batteries, not pro
vided with regular rated gun captains, must, for the present
have temporary or acting gun captains and gun pointers
assigned to them until their places can be filled by those who
have regularly qualified under Departmental Regulations, which
will prescribe the ratings and extra compensation for thos:
so qualifying. The regulations for this will be prescribed in

Gunnery Instructions No. 3, Gun-pointer Class.

*It is the intention, as soon as funds become available, to issue a silver badge to those
qualifying as Sharpshooters, and a marksman's pin to those qualifying as Marks
men," under the Army rules, as explained in Articles 453 and 454 of the Firing Regu,
lations, U.S. Army.
300

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

15. The object of the following instructions is to select men

O

r acting gun captains and acting gun pointers to fill vacan

cies on board cruising ships, these men to receive supplemental

instruction and to fulfill certain qualifications to get a gun

captain's certificate, or to get extra pay as gun pointer, when
money becomes available to make such payments.

16. Attention is invited to Article 864, Navy Regulations,

1900, which, in paragraph 3, says:
Gun captains, having been trained as leading men, may be
assigned, class for class, to fill any vacancy in the complement
of the ship in the seaman branch excepting vacancies for
gunner's mates; but their rating shall not be changed by reason of
such assignment.
The clause italicized has been often misunderstood to the

discouragement of those holding gun-captain's certificates. It

means that once a gun captain, always a gun captain, but to
have a man holding a gun-captain's certificate for chief boat
swain's mate, his real rate should be chief gun captain. For
instance, a gun captain, second class, may be doing the duties
of a boatswain's mate, second class. To have him fill perma
nently the duties of chief boatswains mate he should be rated
chief gun captain through the various ratings of gun captain,
and under the methods prescribed by the regulations. It is

hoped that eventually most gun captains will also go through

the petty officers school, thus making all leading men capable
of captaining a gun's crew, either broadside or turret.
17. It is proposed to establish a gun-pointer group in
each guns crew of the main battery (broadside or turret) to
consist of four men, as follows: (1) The gun captain, who is in

charge (under the divisional officer) and who will direct opera
tions and usually open and close the breech; (2) the gun pointer,
who works the elevating gear, uses the telescope sight, and

controls the firing mechanism; (3) the sight setter, who sets
and maintains or changes the sight as directed; and (4) the gun
trainer, who uses an open sight, and trains the gun laterally.

These men should all receive practically the same training, be

cause gun pointing is normally carried on with telescope sights
and gun training with open sights, but the necessity for chang

ing from one form of sight to the other, in case of accidents,

3OI

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

makes it essential that instruction in both forms of sights

should ultimately be given.

18. In case sufficient material for the gun-pointer group fails

to be developed from the petty officers and enlisted men of th
gun divisions, or from the marines serving in gun division

men should be tried from the other divisions in the ship, an

in case the man is in the special or artificer branch, speci
report made to the Bureau of Navigation for its action.
19. It is recognized that, as those under instruction become
subdivided into classes according to their degree of progress

it will not be practicable to keep the gun divisions together in

their instruction in gunnery. It is therefore suggested that
the ordnance and watch officers, assisted by junior and petty
officers, be assigned to carry on the instruction of the different
groups, changing duties often enough to cover the whole range
of the instruction in turn.

20. It is assumed that firing great guns with telescopic sight

is a talent in itself, bearing but slight relation to the special

skill necessary for rifle firing and open-sight firing with great
guns and the secondary battery. As, however, telescopes may
get out of adjustment or be injured in action, gun pointers

should be trained in both telescope and open-sight firing.

21. Until such time as ships may be regularly provided with

aiming devices, moving gallery targets, and loading devices

attempt should be made to improvise these on board ship.
22. It is desirable to train men for the guns at which they
are actually stationed, either in covered broadside, or on open
decks, or in turrets, or at guns of the secondary battery.
Alternate qualifications are therefore given to cover as far as

practicable, all cases. In cases presenting difficulties not cov

ered by these instructions, report should be made to the Bureau
of Navigation, in order that special steps may be taken.
23. Report of Record of Progress in Qualifying, Great
Guns, form D, should be made quarterly to the Bureau of
Navigation.
MARKSMAN CLASS, GREAT GUNS.
E. Fifth Qualification, Great Guns.

(a) Aiming devices.Each person shall receive preliminary ex

ercise with the dotter or aiming machine, or, with the ship
302

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

Plling, in keeping the cross wire on the horizon during such

Drtion of the roll as possible, striving to keep on throughout
he roll. The main object of the exercise is to develop rapidity
nd expertness with elevating gear. In turret guns, this exer
ise will take the form of firing on the roll. In case the caliber
22 rifle, or Krag rifle (with gallery ammunition) is fitted for
ring at a moving target in front of the muzzle of the gun, this
orm of firing will take the place of, or supplement, the other.

(b) Subcaliber, main battery, ship and target anchored.Sub

aliber practice with caliber o.45 attachment, in any type of gun
"f the main battery (single or turret mount); at point-blank
ange (IOO to 150 yards), with telescope sight; at regulation sub
aliber target anchored; ship anchored; strings of ten shots; the
coring to be by the approximate method previously described

n Gunnery Instructions No. 1 ; by this method a score of

#5 out of possible 50 to qualify, but only three strings of ten

hots each allowed, otherwise the person firing to be put back

o (a) of this section.

(c) Subcaliber, main battery, ship anchored, target moving.

Subcaliber practice with caliber o.45 attachment, in any type of
gun of the main battery (single or turret mount); with telescope
sight fixed at point-blank (at 100 to 200 yards range) at regula
tion subcaliber target, towed at a speed of about 2 to 3 knots;
ship anchored; strings of ten shots; the scoring to be by the
approximate method; by this method a score of 30 out of a pos
sible 50 to qualify, but only three strings of ten shots each al
lowed, otherwise the person firing to be put back through (a)
and (b) of this section.

(d) Subcaliber, main battery, ship anchored, target anchored.

Subcaliber, with 1-pounder attachment, in any type of gun of
the main battery (single or turret mount), using telescope sight,
at present type of record-practice triangular target anchored;

ship anchored; range 700 yards; strings of five shots; two hits
out of a string of five shots to qualify.

With 4, 5 or 6 inch guns

not fitted with 1-pounder subcaliber attachments, this part shall

consist in firing a string of three full or reduced charges at a
record-practice triangular target anchored; ship anchored;
range, 1200 yards; one hit in string of three to qualify, but only
two strings of three shots allowed (or with 1-pounder attach

ment only two strings of five shots allowed), otherwise the per
son firing to be put back to (c) preceding.
303

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

Any person qualifying in (a), (b), (c), and (d) above will b
entitled to have the letter E entered on his record as officer o

enlisted man, under Great Guns, as explained previously, an

shall be eligible to qualify in F. In case the above qualifica
tion was made with a turret gun, the entry in the record shal
be Et, or with broadside or guns of the main battery, not is
turrets, Em.
For gun pointers stationed at the secondary battery, instead
of the qualifications required for the main battery, the following
will be substituted:

E. Fifth Qualification, Secondary

Battery.

Accuracy and not rapidity of fire is essential.

(a) Each person shall receive preliminary practice in aiming
at moving objects, keeping on the horizon line on the roll, and,
if practicable, with some form of aiming device, or some form
of fitting of Krag or caliber o.22 rifle, with low-powered ammu.
nition.

(b) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship and target anchored.Sub

caliber practice, with caliber O.45 attachment, in 1-pounder,
3-pounder, 6-pounder, or 14-pounder, at point-blank range (less
than 100 yards); at regulation subcaliber target anchored; ship
anchored; strings of ten shots; the scoring to be by the ap

proximate method previously described in Gunnery Instruc.

tions No. 1; by this method a score of 40 out of a possible 50
to qualify, but only three strings of ten shots each allowed
otherwise the person firing to be put back to (a) as above.
(c) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship anchored, target mov.

ing.Subcaliber, with caliber O.45 attachment in I-pounder,

3-pounder, 6-pounder, or 14-pounder, with fixed sight bar, at 90
to 150 yards range; at regulation subcaliber target towed at a
speed of about 2 to 3 knots; ship anchored; strings of ten shots,
the scoring to be by the approximate method; by this method
a score of 35 out of a possible 50 to qualify, but only three

strings of ten shots each allowed, otherwise the person firing to

be put back through (a) and (b) of this section.
(d) Full-caliber, secondary battery, ship anchored, target anchored
Target practice with full-caliber ammunition, with 1-pounder
at 700 yards; or with 3-pounder at IOOO yards; or with 6-pounder

*t 1200 yards; or with 14-pounder at 1400 yards range; ship

3O4
--

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

chored; the present type of record practice triangular target;

ring of five shots; hits only to count; two hits out of five shots

b qualify, but only two strings of five shots each allowed, other
wise the person firing to be put back to (b) and (c) of this sec
ion. (It is assumed that with high-power glasses the projec
iles can be followed in their flight, otherwise a boat will have
o visit target and note score.)
Any person qualifying in (a), (b), (c), and (d) above for the
secondary battery, will be entitled to have the letters Es
entered upon his record as officer or enlisted man, under

Great Guns, as previously explained, and shall be eligible to

1ualify in F (secondary battery). It will be noted that the
s over the E, thus, Es, denotes qualification in secondary
Dattery. .

F. Sixth Qualification, Great Guns.

Accuracy and not rapidity of fire is the essential in this quali

fication.

(a) Aiming devices.Men should be selected to work in pairs.

Each one of a pair should be exercised with aiming devices, or
with ship rolling, in keeping the horizontal wire on the target,
or horizon line, then in training on a moving object, or with an
aiming device, using only lateral motion; then as a pair, one
working elevating gear and the other training gear, learning to

coordinate by using a moving object, ship rolling, or with an

aiming device, giving both lateral and vertical motion, the men
shifting positions to become expert at each exercise.
(b) Subcaliber, main battery, ship anchored, target moving.Sub
caliber practice, with caliber O.45 attachment, in any type of

gun of the main battery (single or turret mount); with telescope

sight fixed at point-blank (100 to 200 yards range), at regulation
subcaliber target, towed at a speed of about 3 to 5 knots; ship

anchored; strings of as many shots as may be fired while target

is moving at point-blank range (but not more than ten shots in
a string); the scoring to be by the approximate method; by this

method a score of 75 per cent of possible maximum to qualify:

but only three strings of not more than ten shots to qualify,
otherwise the person firing to be put back through (a).

(c) Subcaliber, main battery, ship moving, target anchored-Sub

taliber practice, with caliber o.45 attachment, in any type of gun
305

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

*

of the main battery (single or turret mount); with telesco

sight fixed at point-blank range (Ioo to 200 yards); at two
400 yards apart; ships steaming about 6 to 8 knots on stea

course parallel to line of targets, and about 100 yards from s.

line; strings of as many shots as may be fired between Ioo ya!
and 200 yards range (but not more than ten shots in a string

the scoring to be by the approximate method; by this method

score of 75 per cent of the possible maximum to qualify; b

only three strings of not more than ten shots to qualify, Othe
wise the person firing to be put back through (a) and (b). Mol
than one gun may fire at a time, but they should be far enoug
apart not to confuse the fall of shots for the observers over th

guns, as explained in scoring by the approximate methodi

Gunnery Instructions No. I.

(d) Subcaliber, main battery, ship moving, target anchored.St.

caliber, with 1-pounder attachment in any type of gun of th
main battery (single or in turret mount); with telescope sight
at one, or two, or more present type of record practice trian

gular targets, anchored (if more than one, about 1400 yari
apart); ship steaming about 8 knots on steady course parallel:

line of targets, and about 550 yards from said line; strings 0.
five shots; hits only to count; two hits out of the string of fit

shots to qualify but only two strings of five shots each allow:
to qualify; otherwise the person firing to be put back throug
(a), (b), and (c). More than one gun may fire at a time if:
does not confuse the scoring.

(It is assumed that, with high

power glasses, the projectiles may be followed in their fligh

otherwise a boat will have to visit the target and note hits afte
each run; also noting the fall of shots in sequence as they g.
over or short.)

With guns not fitted with 1-pounder subcaliber attachments

this section will consist, instead of the above, in firing a strin;

of three full or reduced charges at present type of regulatio:

triangular target anchored; the speed to be the same as above

and distance, when nearest target, about 1000 yards; one hiti
string of three shots to qualify, but only two strings of thre

shots each allowed, otherwise the person firing to be put bad

through (a), (b), and (c).

Any person qualifying in (a), (b), (c), and (d) of this sec
306

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

ill be entitled to have the letters Ft. for turret guns, or

* Fm for other guns of the main battery for Great Guns, as
previously explained for E, for both officers and enlisted
1nen.

For gun pointers stationed at the secondary battery, instead

of the qualifications required for the main battery, the following
will be substituted:

F. Sixth Qualification, Secondary Battery.

Accuracy and not rapidity of fire is essential in this qualifica
tion.

(a) Each person shall receive preliminary practice in aiming

at moving objects, or keeping on the horizon line on the roll;

and, if practicable, using some form of aiming device, or some

fitting of the Krag or caliber o.22 rifle, with low-powered ammu
nition.

(b) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship anchored, target moving.

Subcaliber practice with caliber o.45 attachment in 1-pounder,
3-pounder, 6-pounder, or 14-pounder, fixed sight bar at 90 to
I50 yards range; at regulation subcaliber target towed at a speed
of 3 to 5 knots; ship anchored; strings of as many shots as

may be fired while target is moving at point-blank range (but

not more than ten shots in a string); the scoring to be by the
approximate method; by this method a score of 80 per cent of
possible maximum to qualify, but only three strings of not more

than ten shots allowed to qualify, otherwise the person firing to

be put back through (a).
(c) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship anchored, target moving.
Subcaliber practice with caliber o.45 attachments in 1-pounder,
3-pounder, 6-pounder, or 14-pounder, with fixed sight bar;

90 to 150 yards range; at regulation subcaliber target towed at

a speed of at least 5 knots, but not exceeding 6 knots; ship
anchored; strings of as many shots as may be fired while target

is moving at point-blank range (but not more than ten shots in

a string); the scoring to be by the approximate method; by this
method a score of 80 per cent of possible maximum to qualify,
but only three strings of not more than ten shots to qualify,
otherwise the person firing to be put back through (a) and (b).

(d) Full caliber, secondary battery, ship moving, target anchored:

Target practice, with full caliber ammunition, with I-pounder
307

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

at 500-700 yards; or with 3-pounder at 800-1000 yards; or with

6-pounder at IOOO-1200 yards; or with 14-pounder at 1200-1400
yards; at one or more of present type of record practice tri.
angular targets anchored (if more than one about 700, Iooo,
I2OO or 1400 yards apart, according to caliber of gun); ship

steaming about 8 knots on steady course parallel to line of

targets, and about 500, 800, Iooo, or 1200 yards from said line

according to caliber of gun; strings of five shots; hits only to

count; two hits out of string of five shots to qualify, but only

two strings of five shots each allowed to qualify; otherwise the

person firing to be put back through (a), (b), and (c). (It is
assumed that with high-power glasses the projectiles can be fol.
lowed in their flight, otherwise a boat will have to visit the
target and note distance and score.) More than one gun may
fire at a time, but they must be some distance apart.
Any person qualifying in (a), (b), (c), and (d) above, for the
secondary battery, will be entitled to have the letters Fs"
entered upon his record as officer or enlisted man under Great

Guns, as previously explained, and shall be eligible to qualify

in Gs (secondary battery).
Remarks on G. Seventh Qualification, Great Guns.

24. This qualification has for its object the selecting of men
for the gun-pointer's group, and therefore both rapidity and

accuracy of fire are essential in this qualification.

25. As explained in paragraph 17, the gun-pointer group "
in each guns crew of the main battery (broadside or turret) is
normally supposed to consist of four men, (I) the gun captain,
(2) the gun pointer, (3) the sight setter, and (4) the gun trainer,

but the exceptions to this will be on account of peculiarities in

mOt1ntS.

26. In guns fitted with elevating and training wheels on the

left side and very near together, there will be only three met
in the gun-pointer group, viz.: The gun captain, the gun pointer

and the sight setter. The gun pointer will both train an
elevate. (It is proposed, however, to eventually alter all such
mounts.)

27. In guns with training wheel at some point such that a

man other than the gun pointer can work it, but at the same
time not sight at the target, then the gun trainer will train
20R

-"-----

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

told by the gun pointer. Where such training wheel is

In the left side, and near the sight, the gun trainer will also

e sight setter.

28. In turrets fitted with one hood for training, and two for
elevating, and in which there is room on the elevating-hood
platform for a sight setter (in addition to the gun pointer),
the gun-pointer group, in each turret, will consist of two
gun captains, one for each gun; two gun pointers, one for
each elevating hood; two sight setters, one for each elevating
hood; and one gun pointer (turret pointer) for the training
hood; or seven in all.

29. Certain turrets do not admit of carrying a sight setter

on the gun-pointer platform; and, with guns with large angle
loading positions, the sight is thrown off during loading, so a
sight setter is not needed.

30. Men holding gun-captain certificates should be utilized

as gun captains and as assistant instructors in gunnery, but

they should compete with the other members of the gun-pointer

group for standing as gun pointers. If, hereafter, by Executive
order, or Departmental regulation, men qualifying in the gun

pointer group are to receive a certain sum of money per

month, as pay or prizes, during the quarter or succeeding
quarter in which the qualification is made, then men holding
gun-captain's certificates should also have the privilege of
competing for the additional money to be given gun pointers,
at the same time receiving regularly the $2 per month as
possessors of gun-captain's certificates.

31. The following qualification G is intended to select the

acting gun-pointer group from those under training for any
particular type of gun. It constitutes both a qualification and
a competition. In case there are not enough people qualified
in F to make a group to try for G, those entitled to try for
G should be permitted to do so, using the best men available
as acting trainers, sight setters, and gun captains.
G. Seventh Qualification, Great Guns.

(a) Those to compete will be divided tentatively into gun

pointer groups, and take in rotation such exercise at the differ
ent stations as may be furnished by some form of aiming
device, the loaders being exercised also in quick loading, both
309

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

with subcaliber and with full charges. The one acting as gui
pointer will be permitted to give directions to the gun trainer

and to the sight setter where the bearing and range is changing
because in competitive firing it is the judgment and skill o
the individual which is on trial. The function of the gun
captain in fire control is reserved for battle-efficiency tests
when all the guns are firing.

In this qualification the acting

gun captain superintends the loading operations, opens and

closes the breech, if necessary, and declares the gun ready
The changing of station in the gun-pointer group should be
practiced thoroughly so as to make the competitive test as
fair as possible.

(b) Each person should be required to pass a satisfactory

examination in the details of the mechanism of the particular
gun at which stationed; in the character and kinds of ammuni.
tion and fuses used; in the correction for lateral errors, how to
apply and how to estimate in feet on the target to the right or
left; in the motion of projectiles and variations in range; and as
to his ability to score satisfactorily in using the dotter of

similar device for exercise in aiming and pointing.

(c) Each person, in this competition, in order to qualify in
G, shall be required to fire a string of shots, full or reduced

charges, from the type of gun at which stationed; for 13-inch,

12-inch, and IO-inch, three full or reduced charges; for 8-inch,
four full or reduced charges; for 7-inch, 6-inch, 5-inch, or 4-inch,
six full or reduced charges; for 14-pounder, 6-pounder, 3.
pounder, or I-pounder, fifteen projectiles; the target to be a
canvas or wire screen, 20 by 16 feet, as hereafter described:
anchored at the apex of an equilateral triangle, the sides of
which are 1760 yards for guns of 4 inches and over, 1000 yards
for 14-pounders and 6-pounders, and 700 yards for 3-pounders
and 1-pounders; the base of the triangle to be marked by a

buoy at each end of the ship's course; ship to steam along the
course at 8 knots; gun to be loaded, trained on the target, and
ready for the signal; time to be taken from signal, Commence
Firing; not more than six minutes allowed for string of three
13-inch, 12-inch, or Io-inch; not more than six minutes for
four 8-inch; not more than 90 seconds for each string of six

7-inch, 6-inch, 5-inch, or 4-inch; and not more than two

minutes for each string of fifteen 14-pounder, 6-pounder, 3
3IO

----

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

pounder, and 1-pounder; one gun to fire at a time; hits on the

2O by 16 foot target only to count; target to be visited by a
boat after each string, to note score, repair and mark target.
One hit out of three, and two out of four for turret guns, in
order to qualify in G; three out of six and eight out of fifteen

for other types to qualify in G. Any person making the

above number of hits to be entitled to have the letters Gt

for turret guns, or Gm for other guns of the main battery,

or Gs for guns for the secondary battery entered on their
record as officer or enlisted man, under Great Guns, and to

be eligible to qualify in H in great guns or the secondary

battery, as previously qualified up to this point.
The gun-pointer's group for the main battery should be
selected as follows:

A list should be made of the relative standing of those com

peting in the foregoing (c), for each caliber or class of gun
firing, viz., turret, main battery, or secondary battery. The one
making the most hits should stand highest, and so on down.
In case of a tie, the one making the score in the shorter
interval of time should take precedence. If still a tie, the one
making the better target should be given preference. From
those firing with the secondary battery, the gun pointers
should be selected according to standing on the list. With
the guns of the main battery the gun-pointer's group for each
gun's crew should be organized. In case there are not enough
in the competition to furnish gun-pointer groups for all

gun's crews, then men qualifying in this competition should be

made acting gun captains, or acting gun pointers at the type
of gun for which qualified up to this point, and the other
members of the gun-pointer group should be selected from the
men in the gun's crew who have made the most progress
relatively.
H. Eighth Qualification, Great Guns.

Rapidity and accuracy are both essential. H is both a quali

fication and a competition; as a qualification being intended to
select men for higher training; and, as a competition, to select
the best man in the gun-pointer group to be the regular
gun-pointer and remain such as long as he continue 3 to main
tain his supremacy.
3II

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

(a) Each person should be required to exercise daily (except

Sundays and holidays), or as frequently as possible, with the
mechanism of the gun, with some form of aiming device, this
exercise to be pushed vigorously just prior to the competitive
firings as in this qualification. All members of the gun
pointer group should be exercised in their particular stations
and in shifting stations within the gun-pointer group. The men
who are to fire in this qualification should be given every
preference in the exercise. Every effort should be made to

secure rapid loading by exercise in using both subcaliber attach

ment and full charges with the loading device.

(b) Subcaliber, main battery, ship anchored, target moving.Sub

caliber practice, with caliber o.45 attachment, in any type of
gun of the main battery (single or in turret mount); with tele

scope sight fixed at point blank (Ioo to 200 yards), at regulation

subcaliber target towed at a speed of 5 knots; ship anchored;

strings of as many shots as may be fired in two minutes; only

hits on the regulation drum to count; but only three strings of

two minutes each allowed, otherwise the person trying to be

put back through (a) to await further opportunity to try again.

It should be determined by experiment how many unaimed

shots may be fired with the caliber o.45 attachment in a period
of two minutes. The string of aimed shots fired by the person
as above should equal 75 per cent of those possible, and 50
per cent of the total fired should hit the drum in order to
entitle the person firing to qualify.
(c) Subcaliber, main battery, ship moving, target anchored.Sub
caliber, with 1-pounder attachment, in any type of gun of the
main battery (single or turret mount); with telescope sight;
at canvas or wire screen target, 20 by 16 feet, anchored at the

apex of an equilateral triangle, the sides of which are 700 yards;

the base of the triangle to be marked by a buoy at each end of
the ship's course; ship to steam along the course at 8 knots;
gun to be loaded (1-pounder), trained on the target, and ready
to fire at the signal; time to be taken from signal, Commence
Firing; as many I-pounder subcaliber projectiles to be fired
as may be in an elapsed time of sixty seconds; only hits on the
canvas screen to count. It should be determined by experi
ment how many unaimed shots may be fired from a 1-pounder

subcaliber in sixty seconds. The string of aimed shots fired

3I2

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONs No. 2.

by the person as above should equal 75 per cent of this esti
mated possible, and 60 per cent of the projectiles fired should
hit the screen (20 by 16 feet) in order to qualify. The target
should be visited after each run, the score copied off on paper
sketch, and the hits marked out or patched up for the next
run.

(d) Target practice, main battery, ship moving, target anchored.

This practice is to be similar to the annual prize-firing compe

tition (to be hereafter instituted and to go into effect on July 1,

1903, or sooner if money becomes available for gunnery
exercises"), but in this case only those men may fire who have
gone through all the qualifications of Gunnery Instructions No.
I and No. 2 up to this firing. The target for turret guns to
consist of a canvas or wire screen 20 by 16 feet as hereafter
described, but with two jibs added, one at each end, each 16
feet on the perpendicular and 15 feet on the foot; speed of
ship to be 8 knots, and sides of triangle 1760 yards. For

13-inch, 12-inch, Io-inch, and 8-inch guns in turrets, as many

full or reduced charges may be fired as may be in an interval
of six minutes. With guns of 7-inch, 6-inch, 5-inch, or 4-inch
caliber, the target shall be the 20 by 16-foot screen without

the jibs, and the sides of the triangle shall be the same (1760
yards), but the speed of the ship shall be 12 knots. With
turret guns at least three shots must be fired in six minutes,
and one hit made to qualify; with 7-inch and 6-inch, at least
four shots, and two hits to qualify; with 5-inch and 4-inch, at
least five shots, and three hits to qualify. The number of hits
above stated must be made in order to qualify, whether or not
more shots are fired than required.
Any person qualifying as above in (a), (b), (c), and (d) should
have the right to have the letters Ht or Hm entered on
his record as an officer or enlisted man under Great Guns,
and in the case of the enlisted man a special report should be
made to the Bureau of Navigation recommending him as a
gun pointer.
For men stationed at the second battery, who have qualified
hrough Gs, the course of firing shall be
3I3

="----

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

H. Eighth Qualification, Secondary Battery.

(a) Each person shall be required to exercise frequently at

aiming and pointing with some device giving lateral and vertical
motion.

(b) Subcaliber, secondary battery, ship anchored, target moving.

Subcaliber, with caliber o.45 attachment, in 1-pounder, 3

pounder, 6-pounder, or 14-pounder, with fixed sight bar (range
90 to 150 yards), at regulation subcaliber target towed at a

speed of 5 knots; ship anchored; as many shots as may be

fired in an interval of two minutes; only hits on the regular

drum to count; but only three strings of two

allowed, otherwise the person trying to be put
(a) to await further opportunity to try again.
determined by experiment how many unaimed

minutes each
back through
It should be
shots may be

fired with the caliber o.45 attachment, in a period of two

minutes. The string of aimed shots fired by the person as

above should equal 75 per cent of this estimated possible, and

50 per cent of the total shots fired should hit on the drum in
order to entitle the person to qualify.
(c) Target practice, secondary battery, ship moving, target anchored.

Regular target practice with I-pounder, 3-pounder, 6-pounder,

or 14-pounder guns; at canvas or wire screen target 20 by 16
feet, anchored at the apex of an equilateral triangle Iooo feet
on the side for 6-pounder, and 14-pounder, and 700 yards on
the side for 3-pounder and I-pounder; the base of the triangle

to be marked by a buoy at each end of the ship's course; ship

to steam along the course at 12 knots speed; gun to be loaded,
trained on the target, and ready for the signal; time to be

taken from signal, Commence Firing; as many projectiles will

be fired as may be in an elapsed interval of sixty seconds; only
hits on the canvas screen to count; at least ten shots must be

fired in one minute, and five hits made in order to qualify,

whether ten shots or more than ten are fired.

Any person qualifying as above in (a), (b), and (c) will be

entitled to have the letters Hs entered on his record as
officer or enlisted man, and in the case of an enlisted man a

report should be made to the Bureau of Navigation, recom

mending him as a gun pointer for secondary battery.
3I4

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

Remarks on Qualifications E, F, G, and H, Great Guns.

32. In order to carry out these qualifications, it will be neces

ary as the men progress, to divide them into four sections,

E, F, G, and H, and further subdivide them into main and
econdary battery sections. While the details of the scheme
eem tedious and laborious, it is only by systematic practice
hat men can learn to shoot.

There is no short cut, and mere

Hrget practice, when not systematic, gives no idea of efficiency.

33. It will be noted that the allowance of ammunition is so
nuch per man under instruction and training, and is not to be

Expended in sea practices or by the quarter. To have target

ractice, it is necessary to expend ammunition for the training
if particular individuals whose names and rate should be given
n the quarterly report, Form D, to the Bureau of Navigation,
Record of Progress in Qualifying, Great Guns, herewith
ssued. This report calls for a statement of the ammunition

*xpended each quarter in the instruction and training of each

Person by name.

34. Where officers or men are already proficient in great-gun

Dr secondary-battery practice, through previous training, each
sommanding officer is authorized to start them in at any por
tion of this scheme that he decides they are entitled to start
with, but this should not operate to the discouragement of
5thers who have to go through every detail from the beginning.

35. The regulation great-gun and secondary-battery target,

herewith adopted, is a screen 20 feet long and 16 feet high,
divided into four equal rectangles by a horizontal and a vertical
stripe 4 inches wide, with a bull's-eye at the center 3 feet in
diameter. If this screen is made of wire, a 4-inch mesh should
be used; and the bull's-eye and horizontal and vertical stripe

of 4 inches should be made of felt or canvas and wired on

securely. Fish net may be used if practicable. The Bureau of
Ordnance will, however, issue regulation canvas screens in
which the bull's-eye and horizontal and vertical 4-inch stripes
are painted or sewed on, and in which, for convenience in
plotting, each of the four large rectangles is further subdivided

by two-inch lines into six small rectangles of equal size. This

screen must, in all cases, be 2 feet above the body of the target
raft. When guns of 13-inch, 12-inch, Io-inch, or 8-inch caliber
in turrets are used, two jibs will be added as wings, one on each
315

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS No. 2.

end, with their vertical edges laced to the sides of the re

tangular screen. These triangular pieces shall be 16 feet on t
vertical, and 15 feet long on the foot. Only hits on the scre.
(20 by 16 feet) or on the wings (jibs) to count.

36. For Colt's automatic and special type of machine guns,

field pieces, the instructions for the secondary battery practi
will be followed as nearly as practicable, but with such speci
regulations as commanders-in-chief of squadrons may prescrib
Suggestions are invited.

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS

U. S. NAVY, 1902

INTRODUCTORY.

| 1. In order that petty officers may assist divisional officers in

instructing

enlisted men, and in conducting the qualification

tests required, such portions of the Firing Regulations for

Small Arms, 1898, U. S. Army, as are applicable are herewith
reproduced, and will be rigidly followed.
2. After the man has been instructed in the nomenclature of

the rifle, the precautions necessary for its care and preserva
tion, and, at least to some slight extent, in the general prin
ciples governing the motion of projectiles, he will be thoroughly
exercised in the preliminary drills. This branch of the course

of instruction comprises sighting drills, position and aiming

drills, and gallery practice.
CHAPTER I.
SIGHTING DRILLS.

3. For instruction in sighting, some form of rest, in which the

rifle is securely held, but yet admits of adjustment in position,
and in both a vertical and horizontal direction, will be found
very convenient. When such a rest cannot be readily obtained,
a tripod and a bag of sand, sawdust, grain, or bran afford a
good substitute.

4. The legs of the tripod should be about 6 feet long, the sand
bag resting in the fork made by joining the legs about 8 or Io

inches from the top. The lower ends of the tripod legs should
be pointed with iron to prevent the possibility of slipping.
The sand bag should be only loosely filled, for if the sand is
packed tightly a good bed for the rifle cannot be obtained.
5. It is essential that the interest of the man be obtained and

held. This can be best accomplished by limiting the duration

of each drill to not more than thirty minutes and by dividing
317

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

the division into squads of six or eight, and as the men becom

more proficient, by conducting in the different squads differe

steps of the gradual instruction, requiring the men to pass
succession from squad to squad as their individual exercises a
completed. The squads should be taught by the petty officer

the divisional officers passing from squad to squad and examin

ing and verifying the details of the instruction as it is imparte
by their assistants.

If, in the opinion of the divisional officer the petty office1

are not themselves sufficiently instructed to properly teach th
men, the divisional officer, assisted by the junior officer of th
division, will act as instructor.

6. The instructor will show the men the two pointsth

middle of the notch of the rear sight and the top of the from
sightwhich determine the line of sight. They will be informed
that these two points must be brought into line with the objec
aimed at, the rifle inclining neither to the right nor left.
7. The attention of the man will be drawn to the fact that

either the entire front sight or any part of it, can be seen in
looking through the notch or aperture in the rear sight. He
will be informed that the proper amount of front sight to be
taken varies somewhat with differences in light and is also
considerably affected by peculiarities of individual eyesight. He
should also be cautioned that regular results in firing can only
be obtained when the sight is so taken as to give to the from
sight, as seen through the notch of the rear sight, a uniform
appearance.

8. To obtain this necessary regularity, either one of three

forms of sight should be adopted: full sight (Plate I, fig. 1).
where all the front sight down to the top of the bayonet stud is
seen; fine sight (Plate I, fig. 2), where only the top of the front
sight is seen over the bottom of the notch of the rear sight
and half sight (Plate I, fig. 3), where the top of the front sight
is brought on the line of the top of the rear sight notch. (The
diagrams of these sights should be shown to the man or should
be drawn for him on a blackboard.) The fine sight can only

be taken with accuracy when the light is strong; with the

full sight there is more chance of lack of uniformity; the half
sight, not requiring as much light as the fine sight and the

horizontal line of the top of the notch of the rear sight afford.
318

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

ig a good guide for regularity, should by most men be

idopted.

9. The effect of the full sight is to cause a higher point of the

object aimed at to be struck than if either of the other kinds
if sight had been taken. The fine sight will cause a lower
oint to be struck.
AB

| -->

|\\

"-->

--- C

\\

Fig.

4;

t|a'

Fig.
sy 6
w

Fig.
5 g >~~
-**

|| ----~~
-->-

Al

-------------T-----

E.

~----

---~~

4.--~~~

JD

Fig. 1
I-L-l

Fig. 2
rwl

Fig. 3
rul
Plate I.

Arts. 8-29.

First Exercise.

10. The rifle being placed on the sand-bag rest, and inclined
neither to the right nor left, the man will be instructed how to
bring an object aimed at and the line of sight in the same
'traight line.
3I9

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

11. For this purpose the sand-bag rest being about 20

#.

feet from a large sheet of white paper about 5 feet from the flo
the instructor will direct a marker to so move a small blad

disk as to bring its lower edge in the line of sight. The dis
by a pin or tack, will then be attached to the paper.

12. The disk should be so large that it can be easily seen, as

is undesirable that the eye should be in any degree strained
One of the black pasters used in marking out shot hol
answers very well, in which case one edge of it can be
pasted to the paper.

I'

#:

13. The instructor will then inform the men that he has aime

at the lower edge of the disk, and whether with a full,

half sight, and calling them up in succession, will direct ther

to close the left eye and with the right, looking through the
rear sight at the object, to notice the relative appearance 0.
the black disk and the points determining the line of sight
This instruction will be given with each variety of sight and
with the rear sight adjusted for different distances up to at
least 600 yards.
Second Exercise.

14. The rifle being placed as in the first exercise, and the black
disk having been brought as there explained into the line of
sight, the instructor will call up the men in succession, dire:
them to examine the sighting of the rifle and to inform him.
in a low voice, whether a full, fine, or half sight has been taken
Those men who erroneously judge the kind of sight will be

directed to examine it again and their attention brought to

the details of the position.
15. The instructor will then slightly alter the position of the
rifle and have the disk brought nearly, but not exactly into the

line of sight. The men will then successively examine the

sighting, and inform the instructor whether the line of sight

taking a full, fine, or half sightpasses to the right or left,

above or below the lower edge of the disk. This exercise will
be repeated for those who incorrectly estimate the direction
of the line of sight, and for all with the rear sight adjusted for
all different ranges.
16. Men will sometimes be found who do not know how to

place their eye in the line of sight; they often look over or along

one side of the notch of the rear sight and believe that they are
32O

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

aiming through the notch because they see it at the same time
that they do the front sight.

This error will probably be made

vident by the preceding exercise. Some men also in sighting

ill look at the front sight and not at the object. As this
ften occasions a blur, which prevents the object from being
istinctly seen and increases both the difficulties and inaccura
ies of sighting, it should be corrected.
Third Exercise.

17. In order to show to the man such irregularities in sighting

he may commit, the rifle and sheet of paper (or a blackboard)
feing placed as in the preceding exercises, the marker is

}rovided with a small rod bearing a disk of white cardboard

about 3 inches in diameter, with a black bull's-eye about half
an inch in diameter, pierced in the center with a hole just
large enough to admit the point of a lead pencil or of a chalk
crayon.

18. A man is then called to the rifle and by the proper move
ment of his hands directs the marker to move the disk to the

right, left, higher or lower, until the lower edge of the black
center is brought into the line of sight, when he says, Mark.
The marker then records through the hole in its center the
position of the disk; the marker lowers the disk, the man
straightens himself a moment, and then, without moving the rifle,
repeats the operation.

19. This exercise is performed 3 times, the points thus deter

mined joined by straight lines, and the mans attention called
to the triangle thus formed. The shape of this triangle and
the position of its sides will indicate the nature of the varia
tions made in aiming. If the triangle is obtuse angled, with
its sides approaching the vertical (Plate I, fig. 4), the man has
not taken a uniform amount of front sight; if the sides of the
triangle (Plate I, fig. 5) are more nearly horizontal, the errors
were probably caused by not looking through the middle of the
notch of the rear sight, or not over the top of the front sight.

20. If any one of the sides of the triangle is longer than I inch,
the instructor directs the operation to be repeated, verifying

each sight and calling the mans attention to the errors which
he commits. He will explain to him that the sighting gains
in regularity as the triangle becomes smaller.
321

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

21. If the sides of the triangle are so small as to indicat

regularity in sighting, the instructor will place a small blac
circle so that its lower edge falls in the center of the triangle
the circle should be as small as is compatible with distinc

vision when looking through the rifle sights. The instructo

will then examine the position of the circle with reference to
the line of sight. If its lower edge is in the line of sight, the
man aims correctly and with uniformity; if not in the line O
sight, he aims in a regular manner, but with a constant error

22. The cause of this error will, if possible, be determined and

explained to the man. If the black circle is directly above its
proper position, the man has taken, in aiming, too little front

sight; or, if directly below, too much front sight.

If directly

to the right or left, the man has not sighted through the
center of the rear sight notch and over the top of the front sight.
If to the right, he has probably either sighted along the left
of the rear sight notch, or the right side of the front sight, or
has committed both of these errors.

If the black circle is too

far to the left, he has probably sighted along the right of the
rear sight notch, or the left of the front sight, or has com
mitted both errors.

If the circle is placed, with reference to its proper position,

diagonally above and to the right, the man has probably com
bined the errors which placed it too high and too far to the

right.

Any other diagonal position would be produced by a

similar combination of vertical and horizontal errors.

As the errors thus shown are committed when the rifle is

fixed in position while that of the circle or target is altered,

their effects will be directly opposite to the changes in the
location of a hit in actual fire, occasioned by the same errors,

when the target would be fixed and the rifle moved in aiming,
23. After this instruction has been given to one man, the posi

tion of the rifle will be slightly changed and the operations

repeated with the others in the squad. This instruction will also
be given with the rear sight adjusted for different ranges.
Fourth Exercise.

24. In the preceding exercises the man has been informed that
the rifle should not be inclined either to the right or left; this

precaution being taken in order that the rear sight may be

kept vertical.
322

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

5. The necessity for this precaution, and also the general use
[f the rear sight, may be explained to the man by the instruc
br, or, if deemed advisable, may be directly illustrated; if the
atter method is chosen, the instructor will remove the bolt
one of the rifles. To mark the line of fire, he will place

the muzzle of the rifle a short, hollow cylinder of cardboard,

ightly fitting the barrel, and provided with two threads at
ight angles to each other and intersecting in the axis of the
tylinder. He will also place in the breech a half circle with
a small notch at the center of its diameter.

126. The instructor will inform the man of the relation existing
between the line of sight and line of fire. Then the rifle being
placed as in the preceding exercises, the point where the line
bf sight (when the sight is adjusted for 300 yards) meets the

paper is marked, and also the point where the line of fire
meets the paper. If the rifle has not been inclined, the latter
point will be in the vertical line through the former and above
it. The rear sight will then, in succession, be adjusted for
several longer ranges; the line of sight directed upon the

mark designating its first position, and the points marked

where the line of fire, in its different positions, meets the paper.
The attention of the man will be called to the fact that each

of these points is, in succession, further above the object aimed

at, and he will be reminded that their distances above this

point are proportional to those that a bullet would fall below

the line of fire in traversing the actual range represented by the
particular adjustment of the sight.
27. Adjusting the line of sight for one of the longer ranges,
say 1000 yards, and keeping the sights vertical, the instructor will
mark the point where the line of sight and line of fire meet
the paper; suppose that A (Plate I, fig. 6) is the former point,
then some point, as B, on the vertical line through A, and
above it, will represent the latter point; the distance AB will

represent (it of course will not be equal to) the distance fallen
by the bullet in traversing 1000 yards, and A, the point aimed
at, will be the point struck by the bullet.
28. Then incline the rifle to the right, and with the sight thus
inclined direct the line of sight upon A. Mark the position of
the line of fire; it will be found to meet the paper at some

point, as C, to the right and below the point B.

323

Lay off from

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

C, on the vertical line through it, the distance CD equal to AB

which represented the distance a bullet would fall below the

line of fire for a range of 1000 yards, and draw from A to CD

the horizontal line AE. Then will D, a point to the right and
below A (the point aimed at), be struck; and AE will show the
degree of error in direction, and DE that in elevation due to
the inclination of the sights to the right. Supposing the rifle
to have been at ten yards from the paper, then the range for
which the sight is adjusted being Ioo times as great, the bullet
will strike Ioo times AE to the right and 100 times DE too low

29. If the rifle be inclined to the left, the point struck by the
bullet can in the same manner be shown to be below and to

the left of the point aimed at; inclining the sights therefore
diminishes the range and causes deviation of the bullet to the
side toward which the inclination is made.

30. During the course of sighting drill, the instructor should

show the men how to adjust their sights for different distances
and explain to them the value of the different divisions on the
leaf.

324

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

CHAPTER II.

POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS.

| 31.

These drills are intended to exercise the muscles, princi

pally of the arms; to teach the proper methods of holding the
piece and to give the man, whether standing, kneeling, or lying
flown, a perfect command of his rifle and an unconstrained posi
tion of the body. Also to teach steadiness both of person and
: rifle, and to establish between the hand and the eye such a
prompt and intimate connection as will insure the finger acting
upon the trigger at the proper moment, and without causing any
derangement in the direction of the piece.

32. These drills should be divided into three exercises; the

first teaching the correct position and exercising the man in as
suming it readily; the second, adding to the first exercise the
accurate direction (or aiming) of the piece, and the retention
of breathing; and the third, combining with the preceding the
requisite steadiness of the rifle while pulling the trigger.

33. Until the men are able to execute with ease and accuracy
all the details of the different exercises, they will be drilled in
them by the numbers, or if without the numbers at the command
of the instructor. After the requisite degree of proficiency is
attained and the adoption of faulty positions on the part of the
man therefore rendered improbable, the detailed commands will
be omitted, the men repeating and continuing the practice of
the exercise specified by the instructor, without any effort
to preserve the regular cadence of a military movement.

34. To prevent accidents, the chamber will be opened and the

magazine examined whenever the squad is first formed, and
again just before being dismissed.
35. The squad being formed in single rank with an interval of

one pace between files, arms at an order, the instructor directs

the men to take position of the first motion of load as pre
scribed in the Drill Regulations.
-

36. To enable the instructor to notice and more readily cor

rect any tendency of the man to incline the piece to either side,

he will direct the men, holding the piece firmly with the left
hand, to raise with the right hand the leaf of the rear sight.
37. The instructor next commands:
325

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

I. First, 2. ExERCISE.

At the latter command without moving the body, head, on

eyes, raise the rifle smartly to the front of the right shoulder
to the full extent of the left arm; elbows inclined downward;

the barrel nearly horizontal; muzzle slightly depressed, heel of

the butt on a line with the top of the shoulder.

38. (Two.) Bring the piece smartly against the hollow of the
shoulder, without permitting the shoulder to give way, press

Plate II.

Fig. 1.-Firing Standing-Body Rest.

Art. 37.

-- Fig. 2.Firing Standing-Body Rest.

the rifle against it, mainly with the right hand, only slightly
with the left; the forefinger of the right hand resting lightly

against the trigger; the rifle inclined neither to the right nor
left. At the same time bring the left elbow well under the rifle,
the right elbow slightly advanced and raised to the height of
the shoulder; the head erect; eyes to the front and not looking
through the sights.

39. (Three.)

Resume the position of the first motion of load.

Remarks.

40. The instructor should especially notice the positions of

each man in this exercise, correcting every detail, if required,
~~4

F-

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

and endeavoring to give each man an easy and natural position.

He should be careful to see that the men avoid the common

error of drawing in the stomach, raising the breast, or bending

the small of the back.

Also that the knees and toes are turned

slightly inward, and the knees pressed backward by a slight

tension of the calves so as to secure a firm hold for the feet.
41. The man should be informed that the steadiness of the

rifle and immunity from recoil can only be secured by firmly

pressing the piece into the hollow of the shoulder, not against
the muscles of the upper arm; that in grasping the piece with the
right hand the forefinger must be left free; that but slight effort

should be made by the left arm to press the piece against the
shoulder, but the arm left at liberty to give to the rifle its

proper direction; and the grasp of the rifle, while firm, must
not be so tight as to communicate to it the pulsations of the
body. As the nature of the recoil and the positions of the
point hit are affected by the manner in which the butt of the
piece is held against the shoulder, the instructor should be
careful to see that neither the heel nor the toe of the butt alone,
but that its whole surface is pressed against the shoulder, and
that it is brought uniformly to the same position.
42. As soon as the men have acquired with accuracy their
positions, they will be exercised without the numbers. The exer
cise will also be frequently repeated and made continuous; the
instructor prefacing the command, First Exercise, by the com
mand, Continue the motion, and giving the command Three,
for its conclusion, when the man will return to the position of
the first motion of load.

From the exercise in this form the

greatest advantage will be obtained.

43. The instructor will suspend the drill by the command:

I. Order, 2. ARMs,
which will be executed as prescribed by the Drill Regulations.
Second Exercise.

44. For this exercise the instructor will place the men as for
the first exercise. Opposite each man, 20 feet distant, and about

4% feet from the floor, will be placed a small black disk (a black
target paster answers excellently) on a white background.
45. The instructor will first direct the sights to be adjusted for
327

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

the lowest elevation, and subsequently for the different longter

ranges.

46. The instructor commands:

I. Second, 2. EXERCISE.
At the latter command execute the first motion of the first
c.vercise.

47. (Two.) Execute the second motion of the first exercise,

except that the head should be bent slightly forward and a very

little to the right; the cheek resting against the stock; the left

Plate III. (Art. 49.)

Fig. 1.-Firing StandingHalf Arm
Fig 2.Firing StandingHalf Arm
Extension.

Extension.

eye closed; the right eye looking through the notch of the rear
sight at a point about a foot below the mark, and the top of the

front sight aligned upon that point.

48. (Three.) Draw a moderately long breath, permit a portion
of the air to escape from the lungs, and retaining the remainder,
slowly raise the rifle with the left hand, being careful not to

incline the sights to either side, until the line of sight meets
the lower edge of the mark; hold the rifle steadily directed
on that point for a moment, then, without command and just

before the power to hold the rifle steadily is lost, drop the rifle
328

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

to the position of the first motion of load and resume the

breathing.
49. Some riflemen prefer to extend the left arm (Plates III
and IV). These positions probably give greater control over the
rifle when firing in a strong wind or at moving objects. They

also possess advantages when a rapid as well as accurate deliv

ery of fire is desired, but in firing in double rank the normal
position, body rest (Plate II), should be used, as it gives greater
security to the left arm of the front-rank men.

Plate IV. (Art. 49.)

Fig. 1.Firing StandingFull Arm
Fig. 2.Firing StandingFull Arm
Extension.

Extension.

50. The eye may be brought to the line of sight either by low

ering the head or by raising the shoulder; it is best to combine

somewhat these methods; the shoulder to be well raised by

raising the right elbow and holding it well to the front and at

right angles to the body, the head when inclined forward being
only very slightly bent to the right. When the shoulder is well
raised, the blow upon the mouth or nose which otherwise may
be given by the recoil is avoided. The length of the man's

neck determining greatly the exact method of taking the proper

position, the instructor will be careful to see that the position
is taken without constraint.
329

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

51. As changes in the elevation of the rear sight will necess.

tate a corresponding change in the position of the mans head
when aiming, the exercise should not be held with the sight

adjusted for the longer ranges until the men have been practiced
with the sights as they would generally be employed for off-hand
firing.

52. The man must be cautioned that while raising the line of
sight to the mark he must fix his eye on the mark and not on
the front sight; the latter can then be readily brought into the

line joining the rear sight notch and mark.

If this plan be

not followed, when firing is held on the range at long distances

the mark will generally appear blurred and indistinct. The
front sight will always be plainly seen, though the eye is not

directed particularly upon it. The man will also be cautioned

to exercise the utmost care to always take in aiming the same
amount of front sight.

53. The rifle must be raised slowly, without jerk, and its
motion stopped gradually.

In retaining it directed at the mark,

care must be taken not to continue the aim after steadiness is

lost; this period will probably be found to be short at first, but

will quickly lengthen with practice. No effort should be mad:

to prolong it beyond the time that breathing can easily be re.

strained. Each man will determine for himself the prope:
time for discontinuing the aim.
54. The men must be cautioned not to draw and retain too

long a breath, as a trembling of the body would, in many cases

result.

55. Some riflemen prefer, in aiming, to keep both eyes open,

but unless the habit is fixed the man should be instructed to close

the left eye.

56. As soon as the men have acquired the details of this exer.
cise, they should be practiced in it without the numbers and after
-

ward at will, the instructor prefacing his command by the com

mand: Continue the motion, the order being resumed as pre
scribed in the first exercise.
Third Exercise.

57. The men being placed as for the second exercise, the in
Structor commands:
330

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

---

I. Third, 2. ExERCISE.

At the preparatory command the man will cock the piece,

by drawing back the firing pin, and at the latter command and
at the command Two will execute the first and second motions
of the second exercise.

58. (Three.) Draw a moderately long breath, as in the second

exercise, and raise the rifle as there prescribed; then as soon as
the rifle is held steadily on the mark, but not before that time,
contract the first finger gradually, and without any assistance
from the hand or arm slowly and steadily increase the pressure
upon the trigger; continue the gradual increase of pressure, so
. . that when the rifle seems to be held most steadily upon the
.#mark and the man thinks he can continue the aim for a moment

Alonger, the additional pressure required to release the point of

the sear can be given almost insensibly and without causing any

deflection

of the rifle.

Continue the aim a moment after the

discharge, observe if any change has been made in the direction

of the line of sight, and then resume the position of the first
motion of load.
Remarks.

59. The intimate connection between the mind and the action

of the forefinger on the trigger, and the prompt and uniform re

sponse of the finger to the will, so requisite for the successful
performance of this exercise, can only be acquired by careful

practice. Every man should have a thorough acquaintance with

the trigger-pull of his rifle in order that he may at any moment
know how much additional pressure will be required for its
discharge.

60. Too much attention cannot be paid to the effort to exert

this pressure gradually and without jerk, the trigger at all
times being rather squeezed or pressed than pulled, and the re

quisite final additional pressure being so light as to require

hardly any exertion for its accomplishment.
61. If the trigger has been pulled with a jerk instead of a
gradual pressure, the muzzle of the rifle will probably be diverted

to the right, or possibly downward at the moment of firing; it is

with the object of discovering this error, if made, that the aim is
continued after the discharge and the exact point noticed where
the rifle is then directed. If at some point other than the mark,
33I

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

every effort should be made by the man, during assiduous prac.

tice at this exercise, to avoid pulling the trigger with a jerk. I
the habit cannot be overcome, or if a constant deflection of the

line of sight appears at the moment of discharge, the nature ol

the allowance which must be made for this error by means o

the rifle-sight, when firing with ball cartridges, should be ex

plained to the man.
62. Many men have a tendency to close the right eye as the
piece is discharged; this habit, if not overcome, will result in
entirely losing the aim and pulling the trigger with a jerk.
63. Some riflemen advocate the employment of the second
finger upon the trigger; this has the tendency to apparently
|

lessen the amount of force required to discharge the piece, and

for men with very long arms or fingers may be the easiest
position.
The loss of the greater mobility and sensitiveness of the fore
finger is, however, a positive disadvantage.
64. As in the previous exercises, as soon as the man has

acquired the details of the movement, he should be practiced in

aiming and pulling trigger, according to this exercise, without
the numbers, and also at will.
65. As the third exercise embraces all that is taught in the sec
ond exercise, after the man has become proficient in the latter,

his drill may be confined to the first and third exercise.

He

should be encouraged to go through these exercises frequently

at other than drill hours, care being taken that for the third
exercise he always has some definite object for a mark.

66. To practice the man in the preceding exercise in the kneel

ing position, the squad being formed in single rank, with an
interval of one pace between files, arms at an order, the in
structor commands:
KNEEL.

67. At the command Kneel execute a half face to the right.

carrying the right foot so that the toe shall be about 1o inches to
the rear and Io inches to the left of the left heel; at the same

time bend both knees, kneeling on the right, the left lower leg
nearly perpendicular, left toe inclining slightly to the right.
right leg pointing directly to the right, right foot nearly vertical
and weight of the body resting firmly on the right heel: body
332

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

rect and carried naturally upon the hips, though some riflemen
refer to incline the body somewhat to the front; the left fore
rm across the left thigh, hand hanging naturally; the piece re

maining in the position of order arms; the right hand grasping

t above the balance.
68. The instructor will then command:

I. Squad, 2. READY,
which will be executed as prescribed by the Drill Regulations.
69. The instructor then directs the men to raise the leaf of

he rear sight, and then commands:

<4

Plate V. (Art. 69.)

Fig. 1.-Firing Kneeling.

Fig. 2.Firing Kneeling.

I. First, 2. ExERCISE,

which will be executed as prescribed in paragraphs 37, 38 and 39,

except that at the command Two the man will rest the left elbow

on the left knee, the point of the elbow in front of the kneecap.
The exercise will be further conducted as prescribed in para
graph 42.

70. For the second and third exercises, the squad will be placed
as directed in paragraph 44, the bull's-eye being 2% feet from the
floor or ground. The exercises will be conducted as prescribed
for the corresponding exercises, standing, with the modification
indicated for the first exercise, kneeling.

71. On the completion of the exercises the instructor will

command:

I. Squad, 2. RISE,

when the men rise, face to front, and resume the position of
order arms.
333

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

72. Frequent rests will be given during practice in these exer.

cises kneeling, as the position, if long continued, becomes con
strained and unnecessarily fatigues the man.
Remarks on the Kneeling Positions.
73. In raising the rifle to the mark in the second and third
exercises, the pesition of the left hand should not be changed,
but the left forearm should be bent toward the body and at the
same time the body bent slightly to the rear.

74. When aiming kneeling there is, from the nature of the
position, a tendency to press the butt of the rifle against the

upper arm instead of against the hollow of the shoulder; this will
necessitate inclining the head considerably to the right, to get
the line of sight, and by bringing the rifle so far to the rear will,

if the thumb is placed across the stock, cause it to give by

th.

recoil a blow upon the nose or mouth.

These difficulties can be avoided by advancing the right elbow
well to the front, at the same time raising it so that the arm is

about parallel to the ground. The hollow of the shoulder will

then be the natural place for the rifle butt, and the right thumb
will be brought too far from the face to strike it in the recoil

75. The kneeling position previously described (Plate V, figs.

I and 2) is not an easy one if a thin-soled shoe is worn by the
man; but with the thick, stiff sole of the uniform shoe the
necessity for bending the muscles of the foot will be avoided and
the weight of the body being supported mainly by the shoe, the
muscles of the foot and ankle are not strained, and with but
little practice the position becomes easy and natural. It pos
sesses for most men greater advantages than any other.

76. Some riflemen prefer, by bending the ankle, to rest the

instep flat on the ground, the weight of the body coming more
on the under part of the heel; this obviates any tendency of
the right knee to slip; or by resting the right side of the foot
on the ground, toe pointing to the front, to bring the weight of
the body on the left side of the foot. In both of these modifi.
cations of the positions the left elbow is brought lower, and a
consequent extension to the front of the left foot and leg ren
dered necessary; this prevents the knee affording as steady a

rest for the left elbow and rifle as in the first prescribed posi
tion, but if it can be taken without constraint, gives a very
steady position for the body.
334

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

77. In the off-hand or standing position, the man will be able,

after some practice, to overcome to a great extent the lateral
motion of his piece, and except for the vertical vibrations to
hold it steadily upon the mark; but as soon as these exercises
are begun in the kneeling position, it will be noticed that the
lateral movements of the rifle are now the greater, the rest
afforded by the knee diminishing the vertical errors. This will
require renewed efforts on the part of the man to hold the
rifle steadily.
78. In firing kneeling the principal difficulty encountered is

one of position, the proficiency attained depending greatly upon

the variety of position adopted and the degree of steadiness of
the body and freedom from constraint which results. The peculi
arities of formation of the individual man exert, when firing
kneeling, a greater influence than when firing either standing or
lying down; the instructor should therefore carefully endeavor,

noticing the build of each man, to place him in the position for
which he is best adapted and which will exert the least undue
tension or strain upon the muscles.

79. While steadiness in kneeling is not easily acquired, yet by

constant practice it can be attained, and to a degree not gen

erally equaled for off-hand firing. It thus becomes possible, if

the preliminary exercises have been assiduously followed, to
reach, when firing kneeling, a proficiency nearly or fully equal
to that attained when firing from the standing position at the
same sized object at a shorter range.
POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS-SITTING DOWN.

80. In some instances the conformation of the man may be

such that no form of kneeling position can be taken without con
straint; in other cases the men, while able to kneel and hold
the piece moderately steady, can yet in a sitting position
obtain much better results.

All should therefore be instructed

in aiming sitting down as well as from a kneeling position.

81. To practice the man in the preceding exercises in a sitting
position, the squad being formed in single rank, with an interval
of one pace between files, the rifle should first be brought to
an order arms: the instructor then commands:
22

335

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

SIT DOWN.

82. At the command Sit Down, make a half face to the right
and, assisted by the left hand on the ground, sit down, facing
slightly to the right, the left leg directed to the front, right
leg inclined toward the right, both heels, but not necessarily
the bottom of the feet, on the ground, the right knee slightly
higher than the left; body erect, and carried naturally upon the
hips; at the same time drop the muzzle of the piece to the

front, and to the position of the first motion of load, right

hand upon the thigh, just in front of the body, the left hand
slightly above, but not resting upon the left leg.
83. The instructor then directs the men to raise the leaf of
the rear sight, and then commands:
-

Plate VI. (Art. 83.)

Fig. 1.Firing Sitting Down.
Fig. 2.-Firing Sitting Down.

I. First, 2. ExERCISE,

which will be executed as prescribed in paragraphs 37, 38 and

39, except that at the command Two the man will rest the leff
elbow on the left knee, the point of the elbow in front of the

kneecap, and the right elbow against the left or inside of the
right knee, at the same time inclining the body from the hips
slightly forward. The exercise will be further conducted as
prescribed in paragraph 42.

84. For the second and third exercises the squad will be placed
as directed in paragraph 44, the bull's-eye being 2 feet from

the floor or ground. The exercises will be conducted as pre

scribed for the corresponding exercises standing, with the
modifications indicated for the first exercise, sitting down.
336

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

85. On the completion of the exercises, the instructor will

command:

RISE,
| when the men rise, face to the front, and resume the order arms.
*

Remarks on the Sitting Positions.

86. If the preceding position (Plate VI) is carefully practiced,

steadiness is quickly attained. It will be found advantageous
to make a slight hole in the ground for the heels, which will
prevent any tendency of the foot to slip to the front. The
right leg should not be carried so far to the right as not to

afford a good support or brace for the right elbow.

87. This position can be modified, but in the general case, not
without impairing the steadiness of the man by crossing the
legs at the ankle, the outside of each foot resting upon the

| ground, body more erect, and the knees slightly more raised
than in the previous position.

88. In raising the rifle to the mark, the directions of para

graph 73 should be followed.
POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS-LYING DOWN.

89. From the nature of the position, it is not practicable to

execute the preceding exercises according to the method fol
lowed when standing or kneeling; instruction will, however,
always be given with reference to the position, and to the
manner of assuming it, and to aiming and pulling trigger.

90. For this purpose, the squad being formed as specified in

paragraph 44 (and the black disks there mentioned being
about 12 inches from the floor), the squad will be brought to
an order arms.

91. Then being at an order either standing or kneeling, the

instructor commands:

LIE DOWN,

which will be executed as prescribed in the Drill Regulations;

the legs may be spread apart and the toes turned out if found
to give a steadier position.

92. Having taken the position as prescribed in the preceding

337

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

paragraph, the legs should be inclined well to the left, and

either crossed or separated as the man prefers or his particular

conformation appears to render most desirable, and the body
at the same time inclined very slightly to the right.

93. If care is exercised, a position of steadiness and ease can

thus, with practice, be quickly assumed.
94. The instructor then directs the men to raise the leaf of

the rear sight, and then commands:

I. Third, 2. EXERCISE.

At the preparatory command the man will cock the piece,

by drawing back the firing pin.
-

95. At the latter command carry the left elbow to the front

and slightly to the right; the left hand under the barrel at the

Fig. 2.Firing Lying Down.

Plate VII. (Art. 96.)

balance; weight of the body mainly supported by the left

elbow, the right resting lightly on the floor or ground.
96. (Two.) Slide the rifle with the right hand through the left
hand to the front, until the left hand is a little in front of the
trigger guard; at the same time raise the rifle with both hands
and, press it against the hollow of the shoulder.

97. (Three.) Direct the rifle upon the lower edge of the black
disk, and carry out the further details of aiming and pulling the
trigger as prescribed in paragraph 58.
338

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

Then resume the position, lying down.

As soon as the men have acquired with accuracy the
details of the position (Plate VII), they will be practiced, without

98.

the numbers, aiming and pulling trigger at will; but care will be
taken not to unduly prolong the exercise.
99. To afford the men rest, or on completion of the exercise,
the instructor will command:

RISE,

which is executed as prescribed in the Drill Regulations.

Remarks on Positions for Aiming Lying Down.
100. The preceding position for firing lying down possesses,

in a greater degree than other positions, the merit of adaptability

to changes in the configuration of the ground; it enables the
man to deliver fire over low breastworks or improvised shelters
and rests, and affords him a better view over the ground which
separates him from his mark, and a very much greater arc of

fire without altering the position of the body, than can be

obtained from any back positions. Back positions are not
authorized.

101. In the lying position, when aiming, the left elbow should
be under or slightly to the right of the barrel, the other elbow
somewhat to the right, but not so far as to induce any tendency

to slip on the floor or ground; the head elevated; the right

shoulder well raised and the rifle pressed firmly against it
with both hands.

102. The greater changes in elevation required in first direct

ing the rifle on the object, should be given by altering the posi
tion of the left hand under the barrel; the slighter changes only

by advancing or withdrawing the shoulder.

103. The body not yielding to the recoil as when firing stand
ing or kneeling, its force, if the rifle is not properly held, may
severely bruise the man. It is one of the objects of this exer
cise to so teach him that this will be prevented. Care must be

exercised that the butt is not brought against the collar bone.
By moving the shoulder slightly to the front or rear, and by
moving the right elbow from the body or toward it, each
339

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

man can determine the position in which the shoulder gives to

the butt of the rifle the easiest rest. This will probably be the
one in which the force of the recoil will be least experienced.
General Remarks on the Preceding Drills.
104. The importance of sighting and position and aiming
drills cannot be too persistently impressed upon the man. If
these exercises are carefully practiced, the man before firing a
shot at a target will have learned to correctly aim his piece, to
hold his rifle steadily, to pull the trigger properly, and to assume
that variety of position best adapted to the particular con
formation of the body. This knowledge cannot be successfully
acquired upon the target ground; at that place the time that
can be given to instruction is limited, and should be devoted
to the higher branches of the subject; and even if the desired
amount of attention could be given to each man, yet, from
the circumstances of the firing, the determination of his errors

cannot be readily made, and it is more than likely that the

man will never discover the reasons for his failures, and will,
therefore, be unable to properly correct them.

105. Under such conditions, the knowledge that he may have

of the many other requisites for good marksmanship cannot be
utilized to full advantage, and in fact can but in a limited degree
compensate for the neglect of these first principles, and for the
failure to lay, by assiduously practicing them, the only firm
foundation for future proficiency.

106. If in any of the preceding drills, the instructor observes a

defect on the part of any man, he commands, As you were, at

which the man resumes his former position and is then required
to repeat the movement until the error is corrected.

107. Great advantage will be derived by practicing these exer

cises at other than drill hours, the man at odd times giving a few
moments to the position and aiming drills, but being always
careful $o first select some definite object upon which to sight.
340

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

THE REAR SIGHT, MODEL 1901.*

108. . he Rear Sight, Model 1901, consists of the following

parts:
Fixed Base.
Movable Base.

|B

Base Screw, front.

Base Screw, rear.

Base Screw Washer.

Base Spring.
Base Spring Screw.
Leaf.
Leaf Slide Body.
Leaf Slide Cap.
Leaf Slide Cap Screw.
Leaf Slide Binding Screw.

Leaf Slide Binding Screw Pin.

\D
-

h"

Drift Slide.
Drift Slide Pin.

Joint Pin.
Binder.
Binder Screw.
E.

Plate VIII. (Art. 109.)

The principal parts are shown in Plates VIII, IX and X.

109. The FIXED BASE, A, is shown in side view of Plate VIII.

It has screw holes for front and rear base screws by which
the sight is secured to the barrel, with which its under surface
accurately coincides, a threaded hole at front for the movable
base binder screw, and at its upper rear surface an undercut
recess for the tenon, P, at rear of the movable base. The front

base screw hole is countersunk on its upper surface for a

* Description and Rules for the management of the U. S. Magazine Rifle. Model
1898. Calibre 30.
34I

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

washer about which the movable base rotates, thus bringing

no strain or wear on the front base screw.

110. The MovABLE BASE, E, is shown in Plates VIII and IX.

It is graduated on its left side for ranges of 100 to 400 yards.
K is the front base screw hole, countersunk on its lower surface
for the base screw washer; L, the binder screw slot; I, base
spring screw hole; M, base spring slot; N, the ears; and O,

the joint pin hole. This base is held in contact with the fixed
base, not by the base screws which secure the latter to the
barrel, but by the tenon, P, at its rear entering the undercut
recess of the rear of the fixed base and by the binder, H, at

its front. It turns freely about the front base screw washer,
F.

N.

f
|

\-

|:
|

|
|

Plate IX. (Art. 110.)

its lateral movement being limited by the binder screw in

the slot, L, which prevents the tenon, P, from leaving its
undercut slot. The upper rear surface of this base is grad.
uated in spaces, or technically windage points, of o.o.4 inch
each, the outer divisions being marked zero. Two similar
zero lines are marked on the rear overhang of the fixed base.

By the rotation of the upper base a correction may be made

for any observed deviation of the projectile.
111. If a denote the observed deviation, d the distance between
front and rear sights, r the range, and a the windage necessary
to correct for the observed deviation, all being expressed in
inches, we shall have:
ad
7 .

342

FIRING. REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

112. If it be desired to find the amount of deviation that may
be corrected for by one point of windage, say at 1000 yards,
36,000 inches, d being 24.54 inches, we have:
O.04 inch X 36,000
= 58.8 inches.
24.54

113. The binder screw is screwed into

22

||a
-

|
|

#
#

|
''

the lower base, the screw hole in the

latter being countersunk to receive the
binder screw head, which is curved to
fit the barrel, with which it comes into
close contact. When assembled, the
lever being to the left, a quarter turn

of the binder to the right will firmly

clamp the two bases together.
114. The LEAF, with its slide assem
bled to it, is shown in Plate X. It is
graduated from 100 to 2000 yards. With
the open sight notches, leaf up, ranges
from 500 to 2000 yards can be obtained,

the 2000 yards range being obtained

with open notch at top of leaf similar
to those on the slide, while the ranges
from Ioo to 400 yards must be obtained
with the leaf down, the corresponding

graduations being on the left side of

the upper base. With the leaf up, using
|

".

the peep sight, ranges from IOO to

slightly less than 1800 yards can be ob

tained. The base spring, by its bearing
on the squares at lower end of leaf,

Plate X. (Art. 114.)

maintains the leaf in its vertical or hori

zontal position.

115. The LEAF SLIDE is composed of the body, G; its cap, cap
screw, F; slide binding screw, D; binding screw pin and drift
slide, C. Two grooves cut in the body of the slide receive the
branches of the leaf along which the slide may be moved.
The cap which secures the slide to the leaf is attached to the
body of the slide by entering a dovetailed groove at the right

and by the cap screw at the left. A curved offset, for drift

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

correction, is cut on the inner rear face of the two branches

of the leaf to receive the drift slide, C. A small pin riveted to
the drift slide enters a longitudinal groove on the inner face
of the slide cap. As the slide is moved up or down the leaf,
the drift slide, which carries the sighting notches, moves with
it and at the same time has a lateral movement in the drift

curve, due to the free lateral movement of the pin in the lon
gitudinal groove on the inner surface of cap, thus automatically
correcting for drift.* The slide binding screw is used to secure
the slide to the leaf in any desired position. A small pin at
right angles to the slide binding screw enters for about half
its thickness a groove cut on the binding screw and thus pre
vents the removal or loss of the latter.

116. To assemble the two bases, they must be placed to

gether with the binder in position, the lever to the left, the
binder screw having been previously screwed into the lower base
until its point is even with or slightly below the upper surface
of the movable base. This screw should then be screwed firmly
home.

117. Experimental firing and laboratory experiments show

that, all other conditions being identical, the muzzle velocity of
ammunition loaded with smokeless powder will be increased
by exposure to a higher atmospheric temperature, and de
creased by a lower. Consequently the elevation for any range
will vary slightly with the atmospheric temperature. More.
over, the velocity at 53 feet stamped upon the paper packages

may vary, in different issues of ammunition, 15 feet on either

side of the standard. The muzzle velocity obtained in different
rifles also varies with the same ammunition.

118. In adjusting the sight for elevation at any range it must

be borne in mind that, in addition to the allowance made for
variations in the muzzle velocity of the ammunition, allowance
must also be made for the effect of differences in light, the
amount of front sight seen, the effect of mirage on the target.
the effect of heat developed in firing, the personal equation

of the firer, the peculiarities of individual guns, et cetera.

* Extract from Report of Chief of Ordnance for 1884, page 110, relating to rear sight
for the Springfield Rifle, model 1884: Lieut. W. C. Brown, First United States

Cavalry, proposed that drift lines or curves be marked on the leaf of the rear sight,
model '79, so that adjustment could be made for drift; on this basis, for which credit
is due to him, the automatic arrangement was devised."
344

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

119. The graduations of the rear sight are correct only for the
particular conditions existing when they were experimentally
determined, consequently, in adjusting the sight for elevation
at any range, allowance must be made for whatever change
in the elevation the difference between the former and the

present conditions produces.

120. All component parts of rear sights will be issued for

repairs in the hands of troops.

345

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

CHAPTER III.
GALLERY PRACTICE.

121. After the man has been thoroughly instructed in sighting

2nd in position and aiming drills, he will be exercised in firing
at a short range with reduced charges.

122. As the object of the practice is simply to continue in a

different manner the instruction of the preceding exercises,
the firing will be held standing, kneeling, sitting, and lying

down; and in order that the man may have experience in the
appearance of the sight in its different positions, and practice
in the consequent changes in the position of his head, when
aiming, use will be made of the rear sight adjusted for the
different ranges, up to 600 yards.

123. The service rifle is used for the firing, as the advantage
of accustoming the man to its weight, balance, and trigger pull
much more than counterbalances any possible superiority
resulting from the use of a special or gallery rifle.

124. A building 55 or 60 feet long should be selected for the

gallery and should be so arranged that there will be a strong
light upon the target. The light at the firing point, which

need not be quite so bright as at the target, should, if possible,

be from overhead, from the rear, or from both sides, as a
window at either the right or left hand only will brighten
one side of the front sight, leaving the other in shadow, and
inaccuracies in aiming will result. Windows between the firing

point and the target are objectionable as giving cross light

and possibly shadows. It should not be held in an unsheltered
place on board ship, as the main advantage of gallery practice
its excellence as an aiming drillwill be sacrificed if the

firer,

or any portion of the range, is exposed to influences which

can cause a deviation of the bullet.

125. A target with other divisions than the bull's-eye is not, as

in range practice, absolutely essential for this exercise; but the
better to retain the interest of the men and to enable them to

form some comparative estimate of the degree of proficiency

that they at different times may attain in this form of aiming
drill, the target employed should have several divisions.
346

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

126. As this practice is merely a form of aiming drill, and as

the conditions which mainly determine the form and dimensions
of the targets for range firing do not obtain in the gallery,

no effort should be made to employ a target whose dimensions

bear any particular proportion to those of the range targets,
but the size of the bull's-eye and of the different divisions
should be determined by the length of the gallery range.

127. For ranges of about 50 feet, the target will be

inches high and 6 inches wide, with a circular bull's-eye I inch
diameter and two circular divisions 3 inches and 5 inches
diameter respectively. (A range of 50 feet has been adopted

7
in
in
in

the Navy.)

128. A shot in the bull's-eye will be scored 5. In the next

ring, called the center, 4. In the other ring, called the inner, 3;.
and a shot in the remainder of the target, called the outer, 2.
129. The distance at which practice is held will, of course, be
determined by the dimensions of the gallery; it should, how

ever, not be less than 40 feet; 50 feet should, if possible, be

selected, because at this range the man can readily see, even
before removing the rifle from his shoulder, where the bullets
strike, and his errors in aiming are therefore at once made
evident; and the small charge of powder which is best adapted
for this distance imparts to the ball so low a velocity that a

sensible interval of time is required for its passage through

the barrel, during which the rifle must be held steadily, or
inaccuracy of fire will result; the necessity of steadiness even
after pulling the trigger is thus firmly impressed upon the firer.

130. As the powder issued sometimes varies in strength, the

proper charge for any particular length of gallery range should
be determined by a commissioned officer, or one of the best
marksmen firing several shots from the shoulder, with the

muzzle of the rifle on the sand-bag rest. The charge should

be so regulated that, with the leaf of the rear sight at lowest
adjustment, and aim taken with a half sight, at the lower
edge of the bull's-eye, the center of the bull's-eye will be struck.

131. Before commencing practice the man should be in

structed that as the temperature and light of the gallery are not
subject to the changes found on the target range, but remain

nearly constant, no change in the elevation due to that cause will

be required during the firing; some slight changes will, however,
347

FIRING REGULATIONS FoR SMALL ARMs.

be required in consequence of the fouling of the barrel. With

black powder it is necessary to sponge out the barrel after every
string of five shots.

132. As both the firer and the range are completely sheltered,
no unsteadiness on the part of the man or deviation of the bullet
can be caused by wind. All the external influences which on
the target range may cause inaccurate firing are therefore

absent, and gallery practice becoming but a form of position

and aiming drill, the errors committed will be only those
incident to the men themselves.

The man should also be

reminded of the directions given in the sighting and position

and aiming drills, and he should particularly be cautioned
always to take in aiming the same amount of front sight, and
not to pull the trigger with a jerk, but with a gradual pressure,
endeavoring at the same time to hold the gun steadily on the
target and to continue the aim (which the absence of recoil
renders easy) until the shot has struck; the effect of his errors,
if any, in aiming or holding, or a possible jerking of the trigger,
will then be made evident.

133. For instruction in off-hand firing, practice will be held

standing, with the lowest adjustment of the sight, and aim taken
at the lower edge of the bull's-eye.

134. For instruction in firing kneeling and sitting down, prac

tice will be held with the sight adjusted for 300 yards, the aim

(with a gallery range of 50 feet) being taken at the lower edge

of an artificial bull's-eye, whose center is several inches below
the center of the bull's-eye of the target.

135. The artificial bulls-eye should be a black paper plaster

about I inch in diameter. If the light is indistinct, the paster
should be made larger.

136. For instruction in firing lying down, practice will be

with the rear sight adjusted for 500 and 600 yards, or a littl
below these positions, depending upon individual peculiarities
in sighting. The proper relative position of the aiming bull's
eye to the bull's-eye of the target should be determined by prac
tice. If found necessary the size of the aiming bull's-eye
be increased as explained in the preceding paragraph.

show

187. The aiming bull's-eye should not be painted on the target

plate; it will be found better to use one of the black target
pasters, which are employed to erase shot marks in range
348

- -

--"--

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

ring; its position can then be readily altered to adapt the

arget to any class of the preceding practice.

138. To prevent the possibility of the man aiming at the

mong bull's-eye when firing kneeling, sitting, and lying down,
he bull's-eye of the target should not be painted black, but its

utline only indicated as in the case of the center and

inner divisions of the target.
139. Gallery practice partaking principally of the nature of an
iming drill, it is desirable that all men be instructed in firing
neeling, sitting, and lying, as well as in the off-hand position,
ithout regard to the relative proficiency they attain, and
tactice should be about equally divided between these methods;

le men in all cases adopting, whether firing standing, kneeling,

tting or lying down, the particular variety of that position
hich seems to be best adapted to their individual peculiarities.
140. Gallery practice will be conducted in scores of five shots,

he number of such scores to be fired by any man at a single

ractice being determined by the divisional officer.
No reports of the results of the firing will be required, but
record of it should be kept on board for the instruction
nd guidance of the man.
-

141. In order that the man's comparisons of his firing at

|fferent periods may possess any value, no change should be

lade in the dimensions of the target employed, but they should

lways conform to those prescribed in paragraph 127.

142. The attention of the men to pointing and aiming drills

2011 flags, while gallery practice arouses and retains their inter
st; it also awakens the spirit of emulation in the man, without
lich any considerable degree of progress cannot be made.
'o the instructor it affords the best opportunity for correcting
le positions and errors of the men; and if carefully conducted
he man who afterwards practices on the range with full
larges will, as soon as he becomes accustomed to the recoil,
nd it a simple matter to make scores which before seemed for
im impossible.
.
.

143. Matches in gallery firing between the men, particularly

he recruits, and between teams of the same or different divis

ins, should be promoted and encouraged. While increasing the

terest of the men in their practice, they at the same time
ford experience in the conditions of competitive firing.

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

144. If men at any time fail at any particular range when firit
with full charges, and in the opinion of the instructor the
failure can be ascribed to other causes than erroneous jud
ment or the light or wind, they should be brought back to t
gallery, and by practice in the positions and with the sights
they had just been used on the range, their errors should
determined and corrected.

145. After thorough instruction in the preliminary drills, tl

recruit, before practicing with ball cartridges on the rang
should fire a few rounds with blank cartridges to accustom hi

to the noise of the discharge and to the force of the recoil.

146. The instructor should give to all the details of the man

position and to his manner of holding the piece the san

careful supervision exacted in the preliminary drills. He shot

be especially particular that the rifle is held firmly against t

shoulder, and the man brought to understand that where th
is done the recoil will be felt only as a pressure tending

turn the body instead of as a blow so quickly given

that th

shoulder does not readily yield to its influence and is in co"

sequence often slightly bruised.

350

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

CHAPTER IV.
REVOLVER FIRING.
147. The instruction will be commenced with the revolver not
loaded.

: For this purpose, the men will be formed in single rank with
in interval of one pace between files The mark should be a
*

|------------- +------------- >

!
Target Al-d
Plate XI. (Art. 150.)

5lack disk about the size of a target paster, at the height of

he man's head and about ten feet distant.

148. The instructor will pay particular attention to the man

ler in which the man holds the pistol; the clasp of the thumb and
econd and third fingers should be firm, the first finger being
in the trigger; the little finger may be underneath the end of

he handle.

If the clasp is too high up on the handle, the

351

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

muzzle will be elevated; if too low, the muzzle will be depressed

The clasp should not be so tight as to communicate tremo
to the pistol, yet sufficiently firm to sustain, when firing wit
ball cartridges, the force of the recoil.

149. After the man has been thoroughly instructed in th

manual of the pistol and in the firings without cartridges, in
struction will be given with blank cartridges.

150. For instruction in firing ball cartridges, the practice wi

be continued with but one man at a time. The A-d target (Plat
XI) will be used in all dismounted firing with the revolver
This target has the same frame as the target A. The cloth i
covered with paper on which is printed the silhouette of a mal
in the position firing standing. A horizontal line is drawi
across the target at the middle point of the figure. All hits
direct or ricochet, on the figure above this line are scored five

all hits on the figure below the line are scored four. All hit
on the target and not on the figure are scored three if above thi
line, two if below.
151. For officers, and for all enlisted men, the course will be

one score of five shots in preliminary practice at each of the

distances Io, 20, 30, 40, and 50 yards, and in record practice two
scores of five shots each at the same distances.

352

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

CHAPTER V.
TARGETS.

152. RECTANGULAR TARGETs.The objective, or that portion

of the target upon which hits have the highest value, is in the
case of each target, the figure of a man in a lying, kneeling, or
standing position, or of a man mounted, depending upon the
range.

153. Experience shows that the invariable tendency of troops

in battle is to aim too high, and that this tendency is greatly
*
|-e------4------>t

###:="3:1:52:
Tf

TT

s!

| S.

*!

"

1 y

1 T

#$

*{

*$
!

2|

1 \

|->

|s| |
*:

! st

| |

; "|-16:
Yx.

y_*

ATarget A.
Plate XII.

Target B.
(Arts. 155 and 156.)

increased as proximity to the enemy is attained. To obtain

the most useful effect from the mans fire in action the habit

Df aiming low should be formed. This should therefore be one

if the objects sought to be attained by target practice. Hence
he lower edge of the figure or objective is in each case
Placed tangent to the lower line of the target; this position of
he objective also corresponds to the position of the actual
bjective in battle.

154. The objective in every case is designated The Figure.

155. SHORT-RANGE TARGET (Target A, Plate XII) used for 200
nd 300 yards, and in addition for such firing as may be held at
00 yards. The Figure is the silhouette of a man in the lying
losition. For its exact position on the target, consult plate.
353

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

The Center is a rectangle 22 inches high (the height of :

man lying) and 4 feet wide (the width of the target), the figur
while included in the rectangle not being, of course, a portion
of the Center. The Inner is a rectangle whose height is th

distance between the upper boundary of the Center and a lin

drawn parallel to it at a distance of 42 inches from the bottom
of the target (the height of a man kneeling), and its width

the width of the target. The Outer is the rectangle which

forms the remainder of the target. The entire target as shown
in the plate, is a rectangle 6 feet high and 4 feet wide.

156. MID-RANGE TARGET (Target B, Plate XII) used for 500

and 600 yards, and such practice as may be held at 400 yards.
*

I-----------:----------12-

|-----27 --->|<-1'3'----------4'44 ->|<13 ** 2 7 --->

*
17->

|
s'
s
l

|
l
!

l
|
|

|
i

_Y

Target C-d.
Plate XIII. (Art. 157.)

This target is a square, 6 feet on a side. The Figure is the

silhouette of a man in the kneeling position, its dimensions be:
ing as shown in Plate XII. For its exact position on the target
consult plate.
The Center and the Right and Left Inners are rectangles whose
heights are the same (42 inches, the height of a man kneeling):
the width of the Center being 3 feet, and of each of the Inners

I foot 6 inches. The Outer is the remainder of the target, and

is a rectangle 6 feet wide and 30 inches high (see Plate XII).

157. EIGHT-HUNDRED-YARDs TARGET (Target C-d, Plate
XIII) used for 800 yards, and such practice as may be held at
700 yards.
354

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

This target is a rectangle 6 feet high and 12 feet wide. The

Figure of this target is the silhouette of a man standing. For
its exact position on the target, consult the plate.
The Center, Right Inner, Left Inner, Right Outer, and Left Outer
are rectangles, the height of each being 6 feet (the height of
the target). The width of the Center is 4 feet 4 inches; of
each Inner, I foot 3 inches, and of each Outer, 2 feet 7 inches.
158. ONE-THOUSAND-YARDS RANGE (Target C-k, Plate XIV).

This target is of the same shape and size as the C-d target. The
different divisions are of the same shape and dimensions as
He -------------------------- 12--------------------- *
------27----- *-13---------4-4--------- >|<-1 3-------27---->
-

**

* -

Target C-k.
Plate XIV. (Art. 158.)

corresponding divisions of the Target C-d, excepting the

igure.

The Figure is the silhouette of a mounted man, the legs of

the horse being cut off at a height of 2 feet from the ground.
For the exact position on the target, see plate.
159. For all these targets, the figure and the lines separating
the different divisions are black, the remainder of the target a
very light buff.
The lines separating the center and inner, and the inner and
outer, should not exceed #4 inch in width.

160. SKIRMISH TARGETs (Targets D, E, F, Plate XV, figs. 1, 2,

and 3).These are steel skeleton frames, representing the
355

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

outline of a man in the firing positionsstanding, kneeling

and lyingand are retained in a vertical position by the point
at the bottom of the frame, and by a sustaining rod whicl
engages in a ring at the center of the standing and at the top
of the kneeling and lying figures. When used as targets the
are covered with cloth and with black paper, cut as silhouette
to the shape of the frames. The Target D, with its sustainin
rod or brace, weighs 31% pounds; Target E and brace, 2
pounds; and Target F, 8% pounds.
---- - -

Fig. 2

i
|

S.

IE

I'

SKIRMISH TARGETS.
(Plate XV. Art. 160.)

161. For the skirmish firing by squads, the three figure tat
gets are placed in line, forming a group (Target G, Plate XVI)
the standing figure in the center and the kneeling and lyin:
figures on its right and left, respectively, the distance betweet
the centers of adjacent figures being 1 yard.
162. The target for the company firing (Target H, Plate XVI

will be a line of sixty skirmishers represented by the thr

kinds of figure targets composing the group target for skirmis
firing by squads. Twenty of each of the figures D, E, and

will be employed and arranged by placing a kneeling figure o

the right flank of the line of figures, followed by a standin
356

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

ind then a lying figure, and repeating this arrangement

throughout the line. The figures will be at equal intervals;

at between the centers of any two consecutive standing

gures being 3 yards; adjacent figures I yard between centers.
A hit in any figure, whether from direct or ricochet fire, will
scored one, the limiting line of the figures being on, or
ithin, any portion of the steel frame.

Hits on the paper out

ide the frame do not count.

L 2-yds,

--

l
|
|

|
|

Target G.

H---a-va-----

!----3
was:----|
l

SKIRMISH TARGETS.

Plate XVI. (Arts. 161 and 162.)

Marking and Scoring.

163. For the individual firing, the detail for marking for each
target should consist of two men, belonging to the division

firing at that target, and one petty officer, always selected from
ome other division.

The petty officer will be held responsible

that order is kept in the target pit, and should be familiar with
the regulations governing the markers, and with the method of

marking. Commissioned officers should also be present in

the target pit as much as possible.
164. Upon arriving at the proper target, the petty officer will
see that the signal flag, marking staves and disks, and pasters
are provided and in good order; and, if necessary, will notify

he range officer of any deficiencies.

357

He will then display the

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

danger signal, and, examining the target carefully, will place

pasters over any old shot holes, or put on a new paper target
if necessary. When ready for firing, he will wave, and then

take in the danger signal and place the target in the firing
position.
165. As each shot is fired, the petty officer indicates to one of

the markers the value and position of the hit, if any is made,
and supervises this marker while he signals (being careful to
place the center of the disk over the shot hole) the result of
the shot to the firing point as follows:
If a figure, with a white disk.
If a center, with a red disk.
If an inner, with a black and white disk.
If an outer, with a black disk.
If a ricochet, by displaying the ricochet flag, and if the target
is hit, by placing over the shot hole the appropriate disk.
Ricochet flags are white flags with red centers similar to those
used in signaling, the size depending on the distance.
If a miss, by waving the danger flag several times across the
front of the target.
If the markers are certain on which side of the target the
miss is made, the flag will also be waved to that side.
After the result of the shot has been signaled, the other
marker, if a direct or a ricochet hit has been made, will reverse
the target and place the proper paster over the shot hole.

166. Any shot cutting the edge of the figure will be signaled
and recorded as a hit in the figure, and as the limiting line of
each division of the target is the outer edge of the line separat
ing it from the next exterior division, whenever this line is
touched by the shot, it will be signaled and recorded as a hit in
the higher division.

167. If it should become necessary before the completion of

the firing for a marker to leave, or for other persons to enter, a
target pit not provided with a continuous shelter and a cov
ered approach, the target should first be turned or withdrawn
from the firing position and the danger signal displayed. After

the signal Cease Firing has been sounded, or, if there is

no musician present at the firing point, after a few moments
delay, the target pit may be entered or left, the target turned

back to the firing position, the danger signal removed and firing
rest1med.

358

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

168. No persons beside the regularly detailed markers will be

permitted in the target pit without permission from the range

officer, nor will the markers be changed without his knowledge

and consent.

169. Upon the completion of the firing the petty officer will
cause the target to be withdrawn from the firing position, and
then make such a disposition of the danger signal and marking
disks as may have been directed by the range officer.

He will also report to the range officer such repairs as that

target, or its implements, may require for a succeeding practice.
170. The permanent record of the scores, from which only the
classification will be made, will be kept at each firing point by
a petty officer. These scorers will report for that purpose to

the range officer, and be assigned, if practicable, to a firing

point where their own company is not practicing.

171. The scorer, as each shot is signaled, will announce the

name of the firer and the value of the shot; and will record it on
the page of the division target record assigned to that man.
A figure will be scored 5; a center, 4; an inner, 3; an outer,
2; a miss, o, a ricochet will be scored the same as a direct hit.
Upon the completion of each score he will announce the total
made, repeating the name of the firer.

172. The officer directing the practice, and the man who is
firing, will pay attention to the scores as announced and re

corded, so that any error may be promptly investigated. The

recorded value of any shot should not be changed after the
succeeding shot has been fired.

173. All entries in the division target record will be made in

ink, or with an indelible pencil; and no corrections nor altera

tions made except by the officer directing the practice, who will
then append thereto his initials.

359

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

CHAPTER VI.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.

174. The object of all the instruction of which range firing

merely forms one of the final steps, is to increase the man's
accuracy of fire with the small arm as he will take it into action.

It is therefore requisite that his practice should be conducted

with the rifle, or revolver exactly as it is supplied by the depart
ment having charge of the fabrication of arms, except that the
sights may be blackened if desired. The use in regular practice

of additional appliances, such as temporary shades for the sights,

detachable spirit levels, orthoptic eyepieces, etc., which practic
ally would in the field never be applied to the rifle or used in
aiming, would only make the man dependent upon conditions
unlike those which would obtain in battle, and will not be used

in regular practice. In the regular practice the firing must

be held in the open" and not from any sheds or shelters.
175. The regular practice will always be held in the presence
and under the supervision of a commissioned officer.

176. The record practice will be held in scores of five shots

each.

No sighting shots will be permitted.

177. After a score has been once begun in practice at any

range, it must not, in consequence of poor shots, be discontinued
and a new score commenced, but must always be first completed.
If a score is interrupted by an accident to the target, a sudden
storm, or other causes beyond the control of the divisional

officer, it will be completed at the man's next practice, if not

practicable to finish it the same
178. Shots fired by an officer
his men will not be included in
season's course, or the results

day.
for the purpose of instructing
the number prescribed for his
of such firing in the officer's

classification, but the officer must be careful to avoid using such

shots as sighting shots for his command.

179. The officer in command of the firing party, besides afford

ing his men such instruction as they may require, will be respon
sible that those waiting their turn to fire preserve order, and
that all observe the general regulations of the range, and take
such precautions as may be necessary to guard against accident.
-

360

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

180. The men will be called to the firing point in pairs, and

that they may acquire the habit of carefully estimating for them
selves the varying amount of elevation and wind allowance

required, they will, before firing, inform the instructor how

they consider the sights should be adjusted and where the
point of aim should be.
181. Whenever these allowances differ materially from those
generally adopted, they will state to the instructor the reasons
which determined their selection. In all cases, if the instructor
deem their estimates erroneous, he will direct that they be
corrected, explaining to each man the nature of his errors.

The men of the pair will then assume the proper position
for firing, depending upon the distance at which practice is
being held, and will, without further command, load and fire
alternately.
182. It is advised that as each shot is fired the man should

carefully notice the exact point at which the rifle was aimed, and
announce, before the shot is signaled, where he believes it to
have struck. If he correctly calls the shot, it is probable that
he has made the proper allowances, and no changes, except
those in the elevation which may be necessitated by the heating
and fouling of the barrel, will be required. If, however, the
man calls the shot incorrectly, he should determine what
changes are required, and, with the approval of the instructor,
make the proper corrections.
183. If the men find it difficult to call the estimated location of

their hit, a diagram of the target, drawn to a convenient scale,

may be provided, on which the man can designate the point
where he thinks his shot struck.
184. Each man should endeavor to aim and fire with delibera

tion; if, when aiming, he feels unsteady and not confident of his
shot, he should without firing, lower his rifle, and only resume
the aim after a moment's rest.

185. The instructor will watch attentively the position of each

man. He will, however, be careful not to check a man for

any error when he is aiming, as it would probably have the

effect of rendering him nervous and unsteady; but after the
man has fired will inform him of his errors and caution him

how to avoid them when firing the next shot.

186. While each pair is firing, the following pair will be desig
*

361

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

nated, and will hold themselves in readiness to take promptly,

when directed, their places at the firing point.
187. No use of the gun sling will be made at any med
whether firing standing, kneeling, sitting, or lying prone. It ''
be strapped tightly to the barrel or sufficiently loosened to
permit the free passage of the hand between it and the stock.

188. The graduations on the rear sights of the rifle are deter
mined from actual firing at the Springfield Armory under
average conditions of weather. The elevations thus marked for
different distances will not be found to answer, without allow

ances, when firing is held at other places, but will vary with

the height of the range above the sea level; and on the same
range, with variations in atmospheric conditions, the peculiari.
ties of shooting of different guns and the different ways of
sighting, holding, and pulling trigger on the part of the man.

189. The elevation required for different distances at any par

ticular military post, and for any fixed conditions of the weather,
must be determined by experience.
190. The sights upon military firearms do not permit very
delicate adjustment, and it is impossible to anticipate the par

ticular errors in each shot which may occur in consequence of

the variations in the rifle and ammunition.

191. ONE HUNDRED YARDs.Target A will be used at this

range. No rest for the rifle or carbine will be allowed, or for
any part of the body, except as prescribed in the kneeling and
standing positions, or as authorized for the sitting position.
With these limitations, the positions which the man can take
with the greatest ease and steadiness should be adopted.
At this range the wind causes only a slight deviation of the
bullet.

192. Two HUNDRED YARDs.Target A will be used for prac

tice at this range, and the positions, with their variations and
restrictions, prescribed for practice at 100 yards will be em
ployed.

The horizontal position of a hit is changed at this, as at

all other ranges, by altering to the amount desired the point of
al11n.

193. The trajectories of the rifle and carbine are so flat that
the sights have not been arranged for any elevation less than 300
yards; the gun will therefore shoot high, and should conse
quently be aimed near the bottom of the figure.
362

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

194. THREE HUNDRED YARDs.Target A will be used for this

ractice, which will be held lying prone and kneeling or sitting.

in determining the particular form of these latter two positions,
all possible freedom will be permitted the man; for while it is
desirable that practice in some form of either the kneeling or
sitting positions, or both, be made imperative, yet the man
should be encouraged to adopt that variety of either of these
positions which gives him the greatest steadiness.
To make a change in the horizontal position of a hit, the
point of aim should be altered to the extent desired, as before
explained.

195. Four HUNDRED YARDs.Whenever practice is held at

this range, the firing will be at target B, and in the positions pre
scribed for 300 yards. It wili, however, generally be better
to omit firing at this distance and to pass from the 300 directly
to the 500-yard range. This is advisable, as the increase of
the range from 300 to 400 yards does not alter very materially
the effect of the atmospheric conditions upon the man's ability
to do accurate firing; and as, moreover, to make the practice
of any considerable value, it would require the introduction
of a target with dimensions between those of the A and B
targets, thereby complicating the practice to a degree for
which the consequent advantages do not offer a sufficient
compensation.
196. FIVE AND SIx HUNDRED YARDS.Practice will be held at
target B, in the positions prescribed for 300 yards.

197. The effect of a side wind on the long and comparatively

light caliber .30 bullet is, in equal times, greater than upon the
heavier caliber .45 bullet; to some extent the higher initial
velocity and lessened time of flight reduce the total difference,
but it will be found that at the mid, and especially at the long
ranges, the wind causes more side deviation than with the
Springfield. It must be allowed for by altering the point of
aim.

Long-Range Practice.
198. EIGHT HUNDRED YARDS.Practice at this distance will

be held at the target C-d in the prone position.

199. ONE THOUSAND YARDS.--Practice at this distance will be

held at the target C-k in the prone position.

200. In the practice at these long ranges, the principal difficul

363

*=*- - - - - - -

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

ties lie in the necessity for correctly estimating the force a

direction of the wind and in allowing for these and the increas
drift in selecting the point of aim; also in the necessity f
greater refinements in the estimate of the elevations require

It will therefore be necessary to study attentively these facto

and to aim with even greater care than at the shorter ranges.
Preliminary Practice.

201. Preliminary practice is the prescribed firing which

cedes the record practice at the different ranges.

202. Preliminary practice will be held in scores of five sho

up to the prescribed limit, except that where only five shots
preliminary practice at any range are to be fired, and differe!

positions are prescribed, only the number of preliminary shot

prescribed for each position will be fired in that position.

203. The record firing of the man in each position will follo,
his preliminary firing in that position, before he has any othe
firing.

204. Preliminary firing will always be held under the sam

supervision and with the same precautions taken to insure fai

and accurate marking and scoring as obtained in record practice

Suggestions to Riflemen.

205. Great care should always be taken by the man, both it

loading and in handling a loaded rifle, that all possibility of acci

dent may be avoided. If the division has been marched to the
target ground, before breaking ranks the chamber will be
opened and the magazine examined; if the division is not if
ranks each man should do this independently. The same pre:
cautions should be observed after passing from one firing point
to another.

206. Cases of misfire of cartridge may frequently be attri

buted to the fact that the bolt of the rifle was not entirely close
and the handle turned down to its extreme position when th
trigger was pulled. Attention is called to the necessity f
pressing the bolt handle well to its place before the trigger
pulled, in order to avoid the chance of misfire. Failure t
properly close the bolt may be due to two causes: (1) The

handle may not be fully pressed down when the piece is loaded

(2) The man, in pulling the trigger, may press slightly undel
364

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

" of the bolt and

throw it up sufficiently to cause a

Silne.

The rifle should never be loaded except at the firing

int, and then only when it is the man's turn to fire; in loading,
e muzzle should be directed toward the ground or targets. The
ece should not be cocked, especially when firing lying, until
e position for firing has been assumed.

If the firing is de

either by the display at the targets of the danger signal,

from other causes, the piece should be locked, and if the

'lay is at all prolonged the cartridge should be withdrawn.

nder no circumstances should the man leave the firing point
ith his rifle loaded, or permit it when loaded to pass out of
s hands.

208. The degree of success attained in rifle firing depends

reatly upon the extent and thoroughness of the preliminary
ills. This is especially true for firing from the standing and
heeling positions, from which, if the preliminary drills have
een assiduously followed and carefully studied, excellent results
in be expected at even the earlier practices with full charges on
he target ground. These drills, besides teaching the best
lethod of holding the rifle, of aiming and of pulling trigger,
hich are the elements constituting the very alphabet of rifle
ring, also afford the man the opportunity for selecting the
ariety of position for the different ranges which, while sound
1 theory, is best adapted to his individual peculiarities.
209. After this selection has once been made it should not be

bandoned simply because the man sees better scores made by

thers from different positions, but should be adhered to long
nough to give it a thorough trial.

Nothing injures firing,

specially at the longer ranges, more than perpetual changes

f position; each change affects at least the appearance of the

ights or the touch upon the trigger; it may also alter the
tlative tension or relaxation of the muscles, and until the man
is had the time and practice required for a knowledge of these
tered conditions and their effects, his average shooting will
sually be poor.

If frequent changes of position are detrimental, those made

hile firing a single score are still more so, and under such
rcumstances the man should not be surprised by the poorness
f his record.

210. The remarks with reference to the various positions and

365

*-

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

che details of position and aiming drills, given in the chapt

on that subject, are commended to the careful consideratic
of the man.

Some men find it difficult to obtain a comfortab

kneeling position; in such cases it will be advisable after firit

each shot either to rise or to sit on the ground for a momen

rest before again firing.

211. Before going to the target ground the rifle should

carefully cleaned.

212. When the practice is concluded the piece should be

once cleaned, as the residuum of smokeless powder, if not co

pletely removed, corrodes the bore in a short time. Care

required in cleaning the arm after firing.
To clean the barrel, insert in the chamber a cartridge she
the front end of which has been filled with a wooden plug, a
close the bolt. Clean the bore with rags saturated with so

water, or, if that is not obtainable, with water; wipe thorough

dry with clean rags; remove the bolt and cartridge shell; cle:
and dry the chamber from the rear in the same manner; finall
oil both chamber and bore with cosmoline oil, leaving a lig
coating. When the jointed rod is used, remove the bolt, cle
half of the bore from the muzzle and the remainder throu

the receiver, as above described.

If gas escapes at the base of the cartridge, it will probab

enter the well of the bolt through the striker hole. In th:
case the bolt must be dismounted, and the parts and well of t

bolt thoroughly cleaned.

Before assembling the bolt the firin

pin, barrel, and undercut of sleeve, body of striker, well

bolt, and undercut of bolt collar should be lightly oiled.
Many parts can generally be cleaned with dry rags; all part

after cleaning should be wiped with an oiled rag. The be:

method of applying oil is to rub with a piece of cotton, upo

which a few drops of oil have been placed, thereby avoidin

the use of an unnecessary amount of oil. This method wi
serve even for cams of the cocking piece and bolt, the gate lu
and its bearing on carrier, all of which should be kept lubr
cated.

Any part that may appear to work hard can

freed by the use of a little oil.

generall,

The rag or cloth used in cleaning should not be left in ti

barrel, for if present when the piece is fired it may produce
swollen barrel; the sand or dust which might collect aroundi
366

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

ind perhaps remain after it was withdrawn, might also tend to

Iroduce the same result.

213. Even if the piece has been put away clean after previous
Practice, a slightly oiled and then a dry rag should be passed
through the bore just before firing; this insures the barrel
being always in the same condition for the first shot, and
iminates the variations caused by differently cleaned or oiled

Mores when the effect of the weather upon the amount of heat
ng and fouling is considered in making the allowances in
levation for the following shot.
214. When practice is concluded, the piece should be at once
leaned, before the fouling has had time to harden.

| 215. These remarks upon cleaning the rifle are by no means

oncurred in by all good shots; many will never clean during the

hole day's firing, and prefer to commence a score with a

uled barrel, thus eliminating one element which otherwise

equires changes in the elevation for succeeding shots. If it

as only the fouling which required these changes, possibly
re would be little gained by cleaning; but the heating of the

arrel and perhaps (the cause is not fully determined) the

|xpanding of the bands, which therefore permit an increased

lownward spring of the muzzle at the moment of discharge,

lause the bullet to drop on the second or third shots, and still
make some changes necessary in the elevation. The advocates

pf noncleaning also claim that the residuum of the powder,

|Oating the surface of the bore, prevents or greatly reduces the

eading of the barrel; while this may be so, it is still true that
1 gun which has been some time in service and has been fre
luently fired will not lead, independent of the particular method
i cleaning or non-cleaning which may have been followed.

| 216. Whenever practice is renewed on the same day after an

Interval of a few minutes, or not more than one or two hours,
t will be found most advantageous to commence at the first
ange with a clean gun, and then not to clean again during the

ay's practice; this will greatly reduce the amount of the

rrections in elevation required before firing the second or
ird shots.

|217. After the man has adjusted the sight, and while he is
laiting to be called to the firing point, he should take the posi
|on he proposes to assume in firing, and aim and pull trigger

367

*--- -

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

several times.

This will serve to steady him and also to acc

tom his eye to the light and its effect upon the sights.
218. The estimated adjustment of the sight having been mi
and the man called to the firing point, he will take the posit

he generally adopts, load, examine again the adjustment of

sights, and then (noticing that he is looking at the prol
target) aim carefully and steadily at the lower edge of
trunk of the figure. If the conditions are such that the fi
aim cannot be taken at this point, the preparatory aim shot
be there directed, and then the particular allowances made
the face of the target, care being taken in applying them, be

in amount and direction.

Great care must be taken that the rifle is not inclined

either side (which can be best avoided, when firing at t

longer ranges, by observing whether the leaf is perpendicula
and that the amount of front sight taken is the same as th
usually seen by the man. But slight changes in this latt
particular produce considerable effect upon the target.
Care must also be taken that the front sight is centered
the rear sight notch, or that when looking through the not

the same amount of light is seen on either side of the iro

sight.

219. In aiming, the advice and directions given in the sightin

and in the position and aiming drills should be followed. It
especially advantageous to aim at the lower edge of the trum

of the figure, endeavoring to cover no portion of it; if this ph

is not followed it is difficult to determine just how much

it is covered, and at the moment of discharge it is even possib'

for the rifle to be directed above the figure, without the ma
being aware of his error. This method of aiming also po
sesses the advantage of tending to impress upon the manth
necessity for directing his fire just below the object he desir.
to hit, and thus, in action, adding to the chances for a dire
hit those offered by the ricochet.

220. If the man finds that he is unsteady, when about to fit

the piece should be lowered from the aim, more than once
necessary, and at each time a moment's rest taken; for if

first effort
fires while
nothing is
succeeding

to get a good sight is unduly prolonged, and

unsteady, not only may that shot be poor, b
learned from it upon which corrections fort
shots may be founded.
368

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

When firing lying, the stability of the position permitting

great deliberation, the man, after the general direction of the
piece has been given, should glance at the wind vane, or flags,
or if the range is not provided with those accessories, at any
surrounding trees or high grass, and observe whether any
sudden change has occurred in the direction and force of the
wind; if any changes are noticed the aim should be discontinued,
ind corrections made accordingly.

If no changes are deemed necessary, the aim is completed

ind the piece fired, particular care being taken to observe the
joint aimed at at the moment of discharge, the man always
laming to himself the value and position of the expected hit.
221. Immediately after firing, the man should withdraw the
Molt, and especially if firing at the longer ranges, observe at the
ame time whether the atmospheric conditions are still those for
which the sight was adjusted. By this time the shot will have
)een signaled; if the correct allowances were made practice

# be

continued without modification.

222. If the hit is not placed as anticipated, the point of aim

hould be altered in the direction and amount necessary to
torrect the error.

223. To make this method of correcting for the succeeding

hot of any value, the atmospheric conditions should remain un
Shanged, and, what is of great importance, the man's judgment
5f his aim at the moment of discharge should have been cor

'ect. The greater steadiness of the lying position will then

give to this method its principal value at the mid and long
ranges. If the man is habitually uncertain where he holds
it the instant of firing, accuracy becomes mainly a matter of
thance, and the sights first adopted will perhaps answer the
purpose during the remainder of the score as well as any
5thers that he might happen to select.
224. If a shot misses the target and the dust shows the direc

ion of the error, the correction for the next shot should be made
is indicated in paragraph 222, but if no dust or other indica
ion of the nature of the error is noticed the direction of the

iss must be inferred from the conditions of the weather.

If

strong side wind was blowing the miss was more than
|kely to either the right or left; if there is but little wind, if
day dark,
is either
dry mirage,
or veryordamp,
verywind
bright
revery
or ifexceedingly
there is much
a strong
in
369

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

the direction of the plane of fire, the elevation assumed wi

probably incorrect.

225. In the first case if the man from long firing has disco
ered the usual nature of his errors in estimating the deviatin

effect of the wind, he will be able to judge on which side of th

target the miss was probably made.

If this knowledge has no

been obtained, it will generally be safest to assume that a suff

cient allowance was not made, and that the shot passed the targe
on the side opposite to the wind. The point of aim should b
changed toward the wind a distance corresponding to thre
fourths of the width of the target. If the direction of the erro

has been correctly judged this will change on the next sho
if firing at short or mid ranges, a very close miss into a 4, we
out, on the opposite side of the target, or a miss of one C

two feet into a 5 or a 4 on the same side of the target. A

long ranges a very close miss would be changed to
opposite side of the target, misses of one or two
or 5's. If firing at 600 yards, a miss of four feet,
yards one of eight feet, would be brought on the

a 3 on t
feet to 4
if at 1,00
target.

226. After correcting in this manner, if the target is not foun

on the second shot and the man is still convinced that hi

errors are horizontal rather than vertical, he was probabi

mistaken as to the side on which the misses were made. I

for instance, he has been moving the point of aim to th

right, it should now be moved to the left and to a distanc

beyond the position originally selected for the first shot equa
to the correction for the second shot.

227. If the target is again missed, make the correction in th:

direction first chosen, but with double the amount first selected

If still a miss, then apply this double correction in the opposit

direction. If after these different trials no hit is obtained
abandon the theory of lateral errors and alter the elevations

228. Whenever making changes in the elevation, after missin

on the first shot, and there is nothing to indicate whether th|
shot was too high or too low, it is generally safest to assume th
former to be the case, as a low shot will often raise a dus

visible from the firing point, while a shot over the target migh
11Ot.
If firing at 500 or 600 yards, when very great errors in th

"levation are improbable, it should be decreased sufficiently t

370

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

lower the second shot about half the height of the target; but
if firing at 800 or 1,000 yards, the greater chances for error
make it more advisable to change the elevation enough to
produce a fall in the bullet equal to about 3% of the height
of the target.

229. If on the second shot the target is not hit, increase the
elevation above its first allowance as much as it was previously

lowered.

If a miss still results, lower again, but to double the

amount first selected, and if a hit is not yet made increase the
Original elevation by this latter amount.
230. It will often be advisable to combine the horizontal and
vertical methods of feeling for the target, alternating in suc
cessive shots the direction in which the allowances are made.

The man must not temporize or make these corrections in a

feeble manner; if unhesitatingly applied, and with their full
value, the target will generally be quickly found; whereas if

only slight changes are made a number of shots, especially at

the long ranges, may be fired without the nature of the error
being discovered, or a hit obtained.
231. If the target is hit on the first shot and the allowances
then made result in a 5 or close 4 for the second shot, the sights
should not be changed during the remainder of the score;

but the variations which may occur in the conditions affecting

the elevations or wind allowances, unless they are very consider
able, should be allowed for by altering the place on the target
upon which the rifle is held.

232. This method, while generally advantageous, is especially

So when firing in a puffy wind or in an alternately bright and

dark light, as the fixed sight, a certain point of aim, and the
conditions existing at the second shot, all form a valuable

basis for comparison with the subsequent conditions.

233. Whenever firing in a puffy wind or in one subject to fre

quent changes in direction, the man should, as fr as possible, en

deavor to fire his shots under similar conditions, waiting a

short period whenever necessary until they become the same

as those in which previous shots were fired. If this can be
done he will be able, without corrections in the sight, to hold
on the figure throughout the score.

234. If thefouling
first shot
been fired
from
a clean,
gun, the
subsequent
andhas
heating
of the
barrel
and cool
the different
37I

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

vibrations of the latter, which are caused by the heating, will

generally make necessary a slight increase in elevation for the

second shot, and often an additional increase for the third
shot.

This should be followed, in some cases where a number

of shots are fired without cleaning or without any considerable

interval, by a slight lowering of the elevation after additional
shots.

235. When the day is overcast, the light being of a dull gra',
and evenly diffused, it is more likely that the air over the
whole range will be of a uniform temperature and free from
local eddies.

Such weather is the most favorable for accurate

practice.

236. When the light is alternately bright and then shaded by

clouds, the difficulties confronting the man are much increased
These changes of light, besides affecting the conditions which
cause a deflection of the bullet, also have a considerable influ
ence upon the manner of aiming.
237. Changes in the brightness of the light seem to affect the
aiming of different men in various ways; suggestions which
might prove of value in many cases might therefore prove
erroneous in others. It is, however, generally found, if shoot
ing on a cloudy day and the sun appears and lights up the
target, that the elevation should be diminished, while if shoot
ing on a bright day and the sun becomes obscured, the eleva
tion should be increased.

238. In cases where the light is frequently changing it is

essential that the man should prolong his aim until his eyes be:
come accustomed to the altered conditions and until he becomes
assured that his observation is correct.

239. When all the influences affecting the elevations and the
accuracy of fire are considered, it follows that the best results

will generally be obtained on warm, damp days, with the sky

uniformly overcast, and that on these days less elevations
and smaller changes will be required.

The reverse of these

effects obtains on a hot, bright day.

240. It has already been stated that the man should be par
ticularly careful to notice, on the first few shots, the exact point
of aim as his piece is discharged.

The same precautions should be observed throughout the

SCOre.

372

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

241. With very many men, even the most expert shots, some
slight motion of the piece takes place between the time when
they intended to pull the trigger and the instant when the
object is accomplished. If the man does not notice this motion,
he ascribes to extraneous influences his error, and corrects

accordingly, whereas it was, in reality, the holding that was

in fault, and perhaps the adjustment of the sights and selection
of the point of aim correctly made.

For this reason it is often

unadvisable to change the sights if a single shot goes wild,

especially if the preceding shots were good.

242. It may be recognized as an established fact that any body

of men, where all have received careful instruction and have
reached a fair state of proficiency in the use of their weapons,
will be of more value upon the battlefield than if a few of their
number had become even more expert but the instruction of
the remainder neglected in order to reach this result.
It is therefore incumbent upon the divisional officer to en
deavor to make good average shots of all his men, devoting
even more time to the poor than to the expert shot.
In instructing the man, the divisional officer should appeal

to his common sense, explaining in detail and showing him

in all cases the reasons for the methods he prescribes. The
individual intelligence of the man will thus be brought into

play and his value in the dispersed order of fighting which is

made necessary to such a great extent by the power of the
present small arm will be greatly increased.
Instructions for Handling U. S. Magazine Arms, Caliber .30, when
Heated by Firing.
243. Owing to the great amount of heat developed during the

firing, care must be exercised in handling the U. S. magazine

rifle and carbine, caliber .30.
(1) After Rapid Fire.

After fifteen rounds fired rapidly (ten or more a minute),

the piece should be handled only by the stock, hand guard, or
metal parts in rear of the chamber, as the barrel becomes

uncomfortably hot about this time, though the rear sights and
bands will not be found so until from thirty to thirty-five
rounds have been fired.
373

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

(2) After Slow Fire.

In slow firing (at the rate of three or less a minute), the
barrel of the piece should not be handled after some seventeen
to twenty rounds.
After forty rounds fired at this rate, handle the arm only by
the wooden parts and those metal parts in rear of the chamber.
If the leaf of the rear sight is raised during this firing (as

it probably would be), the sight can be adjusted, if done quickly,

even after a hundred rounds, without fear of burning the hand.
(3) Number of Rounds that can be Fired Rapidly Without Injury
to the Piece.

Two hundred rounds, probably the maximum amount to be

carried by any man, or even as many as he can possibly carry,
can be fired rapidly without injury to the arm, other than the
charring of the wooden parts in contact with the barrel.
(4) Artificial Cooling of Barrel.

If it be necessary or desirable to cool the barrel more rapidly

than it would when exposed merely to the air, remove the
bolt, depress the muzzle until nearly vertical, and pour in water,

very slowly at first, until steam is no longer formed, when it

can be poured rapidly.

In service the canteen or cup should be used for this purpose.

Owing to the large amount of water necessary to cool a

heated rifle, from four to six quarts being required, artificial

cooling would not ordinarily be practicable in the field.
There is little to be gained, even if employed, as after two
hundred rounds one can handle the piece by the stock without
burning the hand.
The man will soon learn to handle the piece carefully after
any firing, no matter how little, and artificial cooling by water

should not be ordinarily practiced, as it may prove injurious

to the barrel.

374

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

CHAPTER VII.

PRACTICE AT DISAPPEARING AND Moving TARGETs.

244. Practice at some form of moving target should be fre
guently conducted, as firing at fixed targets has a tendency to
make men too deliberate for field firing.

While the limited allowance of ammunition does not permit

its prosecution as a part of the record course, it should yet be

held as special firing after the completion of the record firing

of the division, not more than one-third of the ammunition
remaining being used for the purpose. Sharpshooters par
ticularly should be given an opportunity to practice this kind

of firing.

A special report will be made of all practice of this

description.
Either a disappearing target or a running target may be
employed.

245. When no special disappearing target can be procured, a

temporary one should be devised fulfilling the conditions that

it can be turned down or withdrawn until a bugle signal is

made at the firing point, when it is exposed and kept in the
firing position until the signal is repeated.

The unavoidable variations in the period during which these

targets are visible make them, however, much inferior to those
purposely constructed for this special class of fire.

246. For this practice, the man being at the firing point and at
a ready, with the piece loaded, the signal is given on the bugle;
the marker brings the target into view, until the target is at

right angles to the line of fire, and at the end of the prescribed
number of seconds withdraws the target.

The end of the firing period may be determined by the

marker, according to directions previously given or indicated
by a second bugle call from the firing point.
247. If the target has been struck while exposed, the marker
pulls it into view, indicates by the proper marking disk the
value and position of the hit, then closes the target and pastes

over the shot hole.

If no hit has been made, the marker will

wave the red flag.

248. When first firing at such target an interval of 4 second

375

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS.

should be allowed; this may subsequently be reduced to 3

seconds as the men become more expert, and afterward in

creased to Io seconds, to permit of reloading and firing a sec

ond shot. The practice will first be at 100 yards and after
wards increased to 200 yards.

249. For running targets the rolling target should be em

ployed. The track should be raised at either end, forming two
inclined planes, and two markers shelters so placed as to permit
of a run of about 40 or 50 yards. When it is not practicable to
construct an inclined plane, the target, by means of a rope,
may be drawn across the open space between shelters.

250. The ordinary B target, the skirmish figure target (Target

D), or the K target (figure of a man mounted), or the figure of
a deer, may be used. For either of the latter, the frame sup
porting the target should be so constructed that it can be
revolved around a center pin, so that the figure may not appear
to be moving backward.

251. At the signal from the firing point one of the markers
pushes the target into view with sufficient force to carry it down
one inclined plane and up the other to the opposite shelter, the
man firing as often as accurate aim can be taken.
252. A dummy target should be painted on the butt adjacent
to each shelter on which the shots can be marked, or if this can

not be done the running target, after each firing, sufficiently

exposed to permit the marker to indicate the value and position
of each hit. If no hits have been made the marker will wave
the red flag.

253. Firing at running targets should commence at 50 yards,

to be afterward increased to IOO yards.

254. In firing at a moving object, whether it be a target or a

man walking or a horse at a gallop, the man must remember
that the object will pass over a certain distance between the
moment when the aim is completed and the rifle is discharged
and the time the bullet reaches it, and that this distance must
be calculated and allowed for. To accomplish this, if the

object be moving across his front, the man must carry his aim
a little in advance of it, depending on the speed at which it is
moving, on the distance which it is from him, and the result

ing time required for the flight of the bullet. If the object is
moving from him, he must fire high, and if approaching him,
376

FIRING REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMs.

low, while these different allowances can be readily calculated,

their application will only produce good results when they
have been actually determined by the experience of the indi
vidual man. The time of flight for the caliber .30 bullet being
very short, these allowances should be very small.

255. In firing at an object moving across the line of fire, the

man should first aim directly at it; and that the aim may be
caught quickly and clearly, he should use a full sight and aim

1ow.

He then, without dwelling on the aim, moves the rifle

laterally and to the extent required, by simply turning on the

hips, the arms and eye being kept steady and the shot fired the
instant the aim is judged to be correct.

256. If the object is either approaching or receding from the

man, aim should first be taken directly at it and then changed
to in front of it or above it as much as may be required, accord

ing to its rate and direction of motion.

377

PART V.

ARM AND AWAY BOATS

HANDLING

BOATS UNDER

OARS

AND

SAIL

AND IN A SURF

CONTENTS
(Pages numbered at bottom)
PAGE

Arm and away. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Handling a Boat under Oars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Caught in a Gale in a Boat. . . . . . . .
387
.

. .

. . .

. . * * * * * * * * * *

* * * *

Handling Boats under Sail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Reefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Running before the Wind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Tacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 I
Wearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Gybing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Carrying Quarter-Boat Rigged Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

303

To Lower a Boat at Sea in Bad Weather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Lowering a Stern Boat........................ . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Running a Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Handling Boats in a Surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Rowing to Seaward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Running before a Sea to the Shore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Beaching, or Landing through Surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

379

40I

ARM AND AwaY BOATs.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR ARM AND AWAY

-

BOATS
GENERAL RULES.

1. Boats will be provided according to the nature of ser

vice, as follows:

I. For distant service; the crew only will be carried.

2. For cutting out; as many men to be carried, in addition t
the crew, as practicable, without undue crowding or interfer
ing with the oars.
3. For landing force; to convey the same to the shore.
4. To designate the kind of service, the bugle call for arm
and away boats will be sounded, to which will be added one blas

for distant service; two blasts for cutting out; three blasts for land.
ing force.

5. When boats are armed, the officer in command of each will

see his boat supplied in accordance with the requirements of
the service designated, and will report when ready.

6. The boats having been armed and reported ready, unless

otherwise directed, they will shove off and form in column upon
the starboard beam, the leading boat abreast of, and one-hal
ship's length from, the cut-water.
7. Upon the return of the boats, the officer in command of
each, will inspect all arms to see that they are unloaded, will
assure himself that all articles of outfit are accounted for, and
returned to the regular place for storage, and will report when
secured.

8. If the boats are directed to assemble alongside of any par

ticular ship, the officer in command of each shall report imme
diately upon arrival.

9. The service designated being the landing force, the met

shall be so placed in the boats as to preserve their organization
as far as practicable, for shore service.

Io. It is most desirable that a section (24 men) shall be thi

unit to be kept intact in boats; infantry sections in cutters; artil
lery sections in launches and large boats carrying field guns.
38o

ARM AND Away BoATs.

II. Marines shall not be sent in boats for distant service, ex

cept as members of the crew; they may be sent as extra men for

cutting out, for landing force, they shall be so placed as to pre

serve a squad formation, when practicable.
I2. The crews of boats carrying field or boat guns, shall be
armed and equipped as artillery; of all other boats, as infantry,

in light or heavy marching order as prescribed.

EQUIPMENT OF BOATS FOR DISTANT SERVICE.
Boat Gear.

2. The following outfit will be carried in all boats:

I. Anchor with cable; 2. Boat painter; 3. Masts, spars, rig
ging and sails; 4. Tarpaulin; 5. Set of oars, fitted with trailing
lines; 6. One set of mats for muffling oars; 7. Spare oars for
one thwart, fitted with trailing lines; 8. Three boat hooks; 9.
Awning and stanchions, if the climatic conditions demand them;
IO. Baler; II. Bucket; I2. Set of stretchers; 13. Boat breaker;
14. Set of weather cloths with fittings complete; 15. A two-foot
red signal flag with staff; 16. Ensign and staff; 17. Answering

pennant and staff; 18. Boat distinguishing flag; 19. Boat com
pass; 20. One pair of binocular glasses; 21. Oil lantern, fitted

with shutter for signaling; 22. Can of illuminating oil; 23. Rope
for stern fast; 24. Two hand grapnels, fitted with chain and
rope; 25. Old canvas.
Boat Box.

3. Each boat shall carry a water-tight boat box, as small

and light as practicable, arranged to go under the thwarts, pro
vided with a lock and key, and fitted to contain the following
articles:

I. Axe; 2. Hatchet; 3. Hand saw; 4. Hammer; 5. Screw driver;

6. Cold chisel; 7. Boat caulking iron; 8. Giant tool handle; 9.
One pair of cutting plyers, large size; IO. One brace with 4-inch,
%-inch, 34-inch, and I-inch bits; II. Marlinspike; 12. Palm;
13. Sail needles; I4. Assorted wire nails; 15. Assorted screws;
:6. Tacks; 17. Sheet lead; 18. Five pounds #4-inch wire seizing;

9. Lamp wick; 20. Spun yarn; 21. Six fathoms of eighteen

hread manila; 22. Sail twine; 23. Fishing lines, hooks and sink
ers; 24. Lead and line; 25. One pound of tallow; 26. One bottle
of cleaning oil for small arms; 27. Cleaning rags in kit; 28.
381

ARM AND AWAY BOATs.

Six candles; 29. Safety matches; 30. Smoker's flint and stee
complete, and one pound of match rope for tinder; 31. On
small medical outfit, consisting of tourniquets, bandages, etc.
Cooking Utensils.

4. I. Boat stove and fuel as necessary; 2. Iron kettle and

mess outfit complete; 3. Canopy cover for sheltering cooking
Stove.

Provisions.

5. (I.) The amount of provisions to be carried will depent

upon the probable length of service; I. Bread in waterprod
packages; 2. Fresh water in elliptical breakers, not to contain
over twenty gallons each; 3. One small breaker of vinegar,
4. Canned meats; 5. Coffee, tea, sugar and salt, in waterproof
packages; 6. Other portions of the ration may be carried, if
practicable.
(2.) For exercise, one box of bread, one box of canned meat,
-

and two breakers of water are sufficient.

Medical Supplies.

6. The boat with the ambulance party will carry one med.
cine chest containing stimulants, medicines, etc.; each article
will be labeled with its use, and each medicine distinctly marke
with directions for administration and quantity of dose.
Artillery Boats.

7. I. Boat artillery mount complete; 2. Field carriage wit

implements of service complete, if the gun is to be landed; 3

Boat gun with implements of service complete; 4. Shifting spa,

grommet and lashing, if the gun is to be landed; 5. Spare ar.
ticle box; 6. Accessory chest; 7. Haversack for landing ar.
morer's tools, accessories and spare parts.
Ammunition.

8. (I.) Ammunition will be carried in boxes; the kind and

amount to be in accordance with the nature of service.

(2.) No pouches will be carried when fixed ammunition i

used.

(3) The following shall be the minimum amount: 3-in. boa

or field gun, twenty rounds; 1-pdr. Hotchkiss, sixty rounds

382

ARM AND AWAY BOATs.

one thousand rounds;

ach revolver, fifty rounds.

each rifle, one hundred rounds;

(4.) For exercise, ammunition shall not be removed from the

riginal packing boxes.
Senior Officers Boat.

9. The boat conveying the commander of the expedition

hall carry the following additional articles: 1. One set of sig.
hals complete, with a distinguishing number or pennant for

Each boat; 2. One binocular glass; 3. One set of Very's night

signals, and at least six rockets.
-

EQUIPMENT OF BOATS FOR CUTTING OUT.

10. The requirements of arts. 2 to 9, inclusive, with the fol

lowing exceptions: 1. Masts, spars, rigging and sails;
Awnings and stanchions; 3. Weather cloths; 4. Tarpaulin.

2.

EQUIPMENT OF BOATS FOR LANDING.

11. The requirements are the same as art. Io. For detailed
- 1structions, see regulations for Landing Force, Part I.

BOATS UNDER OARS.

BOATS*
HANDLING A BOAT UNDER OARS.

12. There is perhaps quite as much art in handling a boat

under oars as in handling it under sail, but comparatively little
of this art can be taught by precept. The greater part of what
follows relates to man-of-war boats and deals with principles
of drill and discipline rather than of seamanship. There is of
late years a tendency in all navies to rely very much upon
steam-launches, and as a consequence of this it has become
rare to see man-of-war boats handled with the smartness which

characterized the best of them not many years ago. Yet the
need of just such training as produced this smartness is greater
now than ever before, because of the changes which are making
of the modern man-of-war's man a mechanic and a soldier
rather than a sailor.

13. Suppose a cutter manned and lying at the gangway,

ready to shove off. The boat officer sees that the boat is in
perfect condition and the crew in uniform. The bowmen stand
up in the bow, holding on with boat-hooks to the side or the
grab-rope, the rest of the crew have their oars in hand.
14. The order is given:
Get your oars ready!

Each man sees his oar clear and stands by for the next order.
UP OARS!

The oars are lifted together and held vertically, blades fore
and aft and in line.
SHOVE OFF!

15. The bowmen point their boat-hooks against the side and
silove well clear and a little ahead, the coxswain sheering her
off with the helm.

Fenders are taken in.

16. When the boat is clear,

\

* The remainder of Part V, is taken from Knight's Seamanship by permission of

D. Van Nostrand Co., Publishers, New York City.

384

BOATS UNDER OARS.

LET FALL!

The oars are dropped into the rowlocks, the blades not being
allowed to splash, and are instantly brought level with the rail,
blades horizontal and trimmed with the after oars.
GIVE WAY TOGETHER!

17. The bow oarsmen take their places as soon as they have
shoved off, get their oars ready, raise them together, touch the
blades, let fall, and take up the stroke.
18. To come alongside, the order is given while still several
boat's lengths from the gangway or landing:
IN Bows!

The bow oarsmen finish the stroke, then toss and lay in their
oars together, after which they take their places in the bow,
standing erect, facing forward, and each holding his boat-hook
vertically in front of him until it is needed.

19. When having way enough to make the gangway properly,

WAY ENOUGH!

This order should always be given while the oars are in the
water. The stroke is completed and one or more strokes taken,
then the starboard stroke oarsman commands,
Toss!

20. The oars are tossed and held vertically for an instant,
then laid in together.

The fenders are thrown out.

21. With awnings spread, see that the stops are cast off be
fore the order, WAY ENOUGH!

If the boat is to remain alongside only for a moment, it is

better merely to toss, and to keep the oars up until ready to
shove off.
22. With a cutter or other boat whose rowlocks are cut into

the rail, many officers prefer not to get up the oars for shoving
off, but to point the blades clear just over the rail. then to
throw them smartly around into the rowlocks at the order,
OUT OARS'

With awnings spread, the oars cannot be tossed. After the

boat is clear of the ships side, order,
385

BoATs UNDER OARs.

OUT OARS!

The oars are thrown around into the rowlocks, blades hori
zontal and level with the gunwale; awning stops made fast.
23. To lay on the oars, the order is,
OARS!

This order is given while the oars are in the water. The
stroke is completed, and the oars at once raised to the level of

the gun whale and trimmed together, with blades horizontal.

24. To check the headway of the boat,
HOLD WATER!

The blades are dropped into the water and held vertically,
there.

25. If this is not sufficient,

STERN ALL!

At this the oars are backed, keeping stroke as regularly as

when pulling almead, and feathering the oars the opposite way.
26. To toss oars, the order is,
I. Stand by to toss! 2. Toss!
The preparatory order is given while the oars are in the
water, the order of execution just as the stroke is completed.
27. To turn the boat short around, say to starboard,
BACK STARBOARD ! and if necessary, GIVE WAY PoRT!
Single banked boats trail their oars instead of tossing. When
such a boat is ready to shove off, the oars are resting in the
rowlocks with blades in the water and pointing aft; or if for

any reason they cannot be left in the rowlocks, they lie in the
water alongside, held by their trailing ines.

28. In shoving off, as soon as the boat is clear of the side,

the orders are,
I. OUT OARS! 2. GIVE WAY TOGETHER!

29. In coming alongside, the order to the bow oarsman is,

TRAIL Bow! or simply Bow!

After way enough, the stroke oar gives the order,

TRAIL!

30. In going into a crowded or difficult landing, pull easily

386

BOATS UNDER SAIL.

and keep the boat under control with the oars as long as pos.
sible. Lay on the oars if necessary.
In going through a narrow entrance, get good way on the
boat, then trail or toss the oars.

Remember that a loaded boat holds her way much longer

than a light one.
31. In pulling across a current, try to get a range on two

objects in line and steer by these to avoid being set down by

the current.

Having a long pull against the tide, run inshore where the
tide is slacker than in midstream.

32. If the weather is thick or may become so, make sure you
have a compass in the boat, and note the course you must make
coming and going.

At sea never leave the ship without a compass, water and

provisions in any weather.
There should always be a lantern in the boat filled and
trimmed.

33. If taken in tow by a vessel, make her give you a line

instead of taking your painter, and keep this clear for letting
go in an instant. If towing astern, hold on with a short line
close up under the counter; if towing alongside, have a long
line and watch your steering.
Never go alongside a vessel when she has sternway. In a
seaway always board a vessel to leeward, unless there is wreck
age floating alongside.
In coming alongside in a seaway or a strong tide, warn the
bow oarsman to look out for the line which will be thrown from

the ship.
Caught in a Gale in a Boat.

34. Rig a sea-anchor by lashing the spars and sails together,

the sails loosed. Fit a span to this and ride by the painter.
there is oil in the boat, use a bag of it on the sea-anchor.

If

HANDLING B0ATS UNDER SAIL.

35. Trim.To do her best under sail, a boat must be trimmed

in accordance with her build and rig.
If she carries considerable head sail, she will need to be

deeper forward than would otherwise be desirable. If she has

little or no head sail, she should trim by the stern. The build
387

BOATS UNDER SAIL.

and rig are fixed upon with reference to each other, due con
sideration being given to the purpose for which the boat is
designed. Once fixed, the characteristics are practically per
manent. The trim of both boat and sails, on the other hand,
can be varied within rather wide limits; but they, too, must be
considered with reference to each other.

Most boats when on

the wind sail best when carrying a little weather helm; that is
to say, when they have a slight tendency to come into the wind.
Too much weather helm may be corrected by shifting weights
aft; too much lee helm, by shifting forward.

36. The weights should be kept out of the ends of the boat,
without being unduly crowded together amidships. It is espe
cially important to keep heavy weights out of the bow. The
only ballast, as such, that should be carried, is water in break
ers. Under no circumstances should sinking ballast be
allowed; ballast, in other words, which is heavier than water.
The lower the weights can be stowed, the better; but care should
be taken to keep the well clear for baling. Ballast and cargo
must be secured against the possibility of shifting. The crew
should be kept well down and nobody be allowed to stand on
the thwarts or to sit on the gun whale. If the men are sitting to
windward in a fresh breeze, they should move amidships for
passing under the lee of a vessel or other object, where the wind
may fail or even shift in an eddy. The mast should be properly

stayed, up and down or with a slight rake aft, and the halyards
taut up.

37. In a lug rig, the halyards act as a weather shroud, the tie
being led down to windward and abaft, and set up by a two.
fold purchase. In most other rigs, shrouds are fitted.

38. On the wind, as has been said, a boat should

carry a

little weather helm. The sails should be kept well full, sheets
not too flat, but everything drawing and the boat alive. It is

a common mistake to get the sheets so flat that the boat, while
pointing high, actually makes a course to leeward of that which
she would make if kept away a little with sheets eased accord

ingly; and it is of course clear that if kept away, her speed wil

be greater than when jammed up into the wind in the hope of

stealing a fraction of a point. A boat of good draft with a
deep keel or center-board, and yachts designed for racing, with
fin keels hanging ten feet below their normal draft, will lie
388

BOATs UNDER SAIL.

amazingly close to the wind with little or no leeway. Ships

boats, however, are not constructed on yachting lines and can
not be held up in the same way.

39. Sheets may be hauled flatter in smooth water than in

rough, and the sheets of standing lugs, gaff- and boom-sails,
sliding gunters and the like, may be hauled flatter than those
of dipping-lugs. The sails being properly set, the weather cloths

of the sails are kept just trembling, with weather helm enough
to let the helmsman feel that she wants to come into the

wind.

As the wind will vary more or less (in apparent, if not

real, direction), it is necessary to be watchful and to bring her

up or keep her away from time to time in order that she may

be always at her best. The sails should be kept fuller in rough

than smooth water, and it is more important that the boat
should be kept going so as to be always under command of the
helm. If a heavy breaking sea is seen bearing down upon her,
she should be luffed up to meet it and kept away again as soon
as it has passed. If she loses way she becomes helpless at
once. It is dangerous to be caught by a heavy sea on the beam;

and if the course to be made in rough water would bring

the boat into the trough of it, the best plan is to run off for a
time with the sea on the quarter, then bring her up with it on
the bow, and so to make good the course desired without actu
ally steering it at any time.
40. It is a universal rule in boat sailing that the sheets should
never be belayed in any weather.
41. For a moderate squall, the boat should be luffed suffi

ciently to shake, without spilling, the sail, thus keeping head

way enough to retain control, but with the sheet (as always)
in hand.

If it comes stronger, she must be luffed more de

cidedly and the sheet slacked more or less. The sheet may, of
course, be let go, and in a sudden emergency this must be
done at once in addition to putting down the helm, and, if
necessary, reducing sail; but the longer she can be kept under

control the better, and to let go the sheet is to give up control.

42. The situation is quite different in running free. Here
the sail cannot be spilled by a touch of the helm, and the only

prudent thing is to slack the sheet while luffing. The force of

the wind would be much reduced by running off, but the trouble
with this is that if it comes too strong there is no resource but
389

BoATS UNDER SAIL.

to lower the sail, and the chances are that it will bind against
the shrouds and refuse to come down.

Moreover, there is

always danger that the wind will shift in the squall, and the
mainsail may gybe with dangerous force.
Reefing.
43. When a boat begins to take water, it is time to reef. And
she should never, even in smooth water, be allowed to heel too
much. A boat that is decked over may run with her lee rail

awash; but when an open boat is approaching this point it

must be remembered that a fresher puff may bear the gunwale
lower without warning, and that the moment it dips the boat
will almost certainly fill and capsize. The details of reefing

will depend upon the rig, but a few general rules may be laid
down.

The men should be stationed before beginning and

should all be required to remain seated. One hand lowers the

halyards as much as may be necessary, another hauls down on
the leech and shifts the tack.

The sheet is hauled in a little

to let the men detailed for the reef points get hold of and

gather in the foot. The sheet is then slacked and shifted, the
points passed, the halyards manned, the sail hoisted and the
sheet trimmed.

It is important to keep the boat under com

mand while reefing, and for this she must have way enough to
obey her helm. If she can be luffed a little and still be kept
going through the water sufficiently to obey her helm, then it

is unquestionably wise to luff, but not sufficiently to risk losing

control by the helm.

44. If the boat has more than one sail, it is a good plan to
reef them one at a time.

Running Before the Wind.

45. This is the most dangerous point of sailing in a fresh
breeze because of the chance of gybing. The danger increases
if the boat yaws, as she will have a tendency to do so if trimmed

at all by the head; from which follows the rule, in running, to

keep the weights fairly well aft, though never at the extreme
after end. Very careful steering is required; and if the sea is
really heavy, the chances are that the boom will gybe in spite
of all the care that can be taken, unless lashed to the rail or
a shroud by a lazy guy.
390

BoATS UNDFR SAIL.

46. Squalls are not so dangerous before the wind as when

close hauled, unless thev are accompanied by a shift of wind,
If they call for any reduction of sail, it may be made by drop

ping the peak of the mainsail (if a gaff sail), or, more satisfac
torily, by reefing.
47. The foresail is sometimes set on the side opposite the
mainsail, in running before the wind, a temporary boom being

rigged by using a boat-hook or an oar. A boat sailing in this

way is going wing and wing.

48. If the sea is rough, it is well to avoid running with the

wind dead aft. To make a course directly to leeward, the wind
may be brought first on one quarter and then on the other, the
mainsail being clewed up or the peak dropped each time the
course is changed, if the breeze is strong enough to make gyb
ing dangerous.
-

49. A serious danger in running before a heavy sea is that

of broaching to. The boat will yaw considerably, the rudder
will be often out of water when it is most needed to meet her,
and the sails will be becalmed in the trough of the sea. The
situation here is much like that of a boat running in a surf;

and, as in that case, the yawing will be reduced by keeping the

weights aft and by steering with an oar.

The jib should always

be set, with the sheet aft. It helps to meet and pay her off if
she flies to against the helm. A drag towed over the stern is
also helpful.
50. Another danger in running is that the boom may dip as
she rolls and thus capsize the boat.
Tacking.

51. In tacking, the same principles apply to a boat as to a

ship. After-sail tends to bring her head to wind, head-sail to
keep her off; but all sails, so long as they draw, give her head
way and so add to the steering power of the helm.
52. It is clear that a short, full boat will turn to windward
better than a long narrow one and will require a much shorter
distance for coming around. Thus a short boat is preferable
to a long one for working up a narrow channel

53. Under ideal conditions, a boat close-hauled but with

good way on, shoots up into the wind as the helm is eased
down, making a good reach to windward, and filling away on
39I

BoATs UNDER SAIL.

the new tack without for a moment losing headway. The main
boom is hauled amidships, and, as the jib and foresail lift, their
sheets are let go. The boat comes head to wind and as she
pays off on the new tack the sheets are hauled aft and she is

steadied on her course. Under less favorable conditions, tack.

ing is not so simple. If there is a sea on the bow advantage
must be taken of a smooth time to ease the helm down; the
1main boom must be hauled amidships gradually, and the foresail
kept full as long as it will draw. If the boat loses headway,
the jib sheet is held out on the old lee bow (not too far) to

pay her head around, and care must be taken not to make a
back sail of the mainsail.

As she gathers sternway, the

helm is shifted, and, if necessary, an oar is gotten out to help

her around. Carrying the weights forward is favorable for
tacking, but when a boat has sternboard she may be helped
around by putting a few of the crew on the (new) lee quarter,
where, by increasing the immersion of the full lines of the

counter, they add to the resistance and cause the bow to fall off.
54. If she gets in irons, either an oar must be used or the
jib and foresail sheets must be hauled over on the old tack,
flat aback, to give her sternboard. This last is a dangerous
maneuver in a strong breeze and rough sea.
Wearing.
55. In wearing, the helm is put up and the main sheet slacked

away roundly. The boat goes off before the wind, the main
sail is either gybed, or clewed up and shifted over (preferably
the latter) and the boat is hauled up on the new tack, losing
more or less ground to leeward according to circumstances.

The details of the maneuver may vary considerably according

to the conditions of wind and sea and the peculiarities of the
boat as to rig and trim. In a light breeze, the main sheet is
slacked away roundly until the wind is aft, then hauled in
smartly for gybing and eased away steadily on the new let

quarter. In a fresh breeze, as gybing would be dangerous, the

mainsail is clewed up just before the wind comes aft, and st
again in time to bring her to the wind on the new tack.
56. The fore and jib sheets are shifted when nearly befor
the wind. As she comes to on the new tack, they are lef
flowing until hauled aft to meet her by the wind.
392

Low ERING BoATs.

Remarks on Gybing.
57. A sail is gybed when it is allowed to swing from one
side to the other, the wind being aft or nearly so, and the sail
full first on one side and then on the other. This may be
done intentionally, as in wearing or in changing course, or it

may come unexpectedly from a shift of wind or from the yawing

of the boat. As it necessarily involves a violent swing of the
sail, it puts a heavy strain upon the spars and fittings and
causes the boat to lurch more or less deeply to leeward. More
over, the violent sweep of the boom across the stern endangers
everybody in its path.

58. In a light breeze, these dangers are perhaps not serious

enough to justify the rule that a mainsail should never be
gy bed, but in a fresh breeze it should not be thought of; and
the fact that it is often done by experienced boatmen does not
make it any more seamanlike.
59. When a necessary, change of course in a fresh breeze will

bring a shift of wind from one quarter to the other, the sail
should be lowered or clewed up for a moment before putting
up the helm, and then set again on the other quarter. If this
cannot be done and it is still necessary to gybe, the peak
should be dropped, the boom hauled in slowly and eased away
on the new tack.

CARRYING A QUARTER-BOAT RIGGED OUT.

60. Nearly all ships carry a quarter-boat ready for lowering

in the event of a man overboard. The boat is griped in to
prevent swinging, the gripes being secured by a toggle which
can be slipped in an instant. The sea-painter is secured, life
lines hung from the span, the falls clear for lowering, the plug
at hand, life belts inside, the steering-oar in its crutch, water,
provisions, lantern, etc., in place.
TO LOWER A BOAT AT SEA IN BAD WEATHER.

61. Having to lower a boat at sea, a lee boat is always

selected, a lee being made, if necessary, by changing the course
of the ship.

62. It is customary to bring the sea a little on the bow, but

in this position the lee for the boat is very far from perfect.

The ship will roll and pitch considerably, and waves will wash
393

LOWERING BoATs.

along the leeward, making things very ugly at times. Some

seamen prefer to bring the sea on the quarter rather than on
the bow. Others advise lying in the trough of the sea not
withstanding the heavy rolling.
|

63. The best position will doubtless depend upon the build
and trim of the ship and the nature of the sea.

In any case,

oil should be used both ahead and astern of the boat.

The

ship should be kept moving slowly ahead. A painter should

be used from well forward in the waist of the ship, brought
into the boat through the inboard bow rowlock and tended by
the second bow oarsman with a turn around the thwart. It
must not be made fast.

64. To keep the boat from swinging, frapping lines may be

passed around the falls, the ends leading inboard and holding
the boat close in to the side as it is lowered. In some ships.

jackstays are fitted from the davit-heads to the side of the

ship, with lanyards travelling up and down. A turn is taken
with the lanyard under a thwart or around the standing part
of the fall and the boat is held in, near the side, as by the
frapping line above described. Under no circumstances should

the lanyard be secured to the boat otherwise than as described

(by passing it under the thwart and holding on by hand). Lile.
lines hanging from the davit-head and from the span assist in
steadying the boat and give the crew something to hold on to
in case of accident. A hatchet in the boat is handy if anything
jambs at a critical moment.

65. The great danger, both in lowering and immediately

afterwards, is that the boat will be dashed against the side

The boat rope brought in on the inner bow as already de.

scribed helps to sheer her off as she strikes the water, and
the helm may be lashed hard-over toward the ship for the sam"
purpose.

66. A steering-oar is better than a rudder, and where it is

used the coxswain sheers the bow out by throwing the stern
in as the boat strikes the water.

The after fall is always unhooked first.

67. Under no circumstances short of the most imperative
necessity should a boat be lowered while the ship has sternway,

and it is always desirable to have a little headway. There is

much difference of opinion as to the speed at which it is saic
394

LOWERING BOATs.

to 1ower a boat, an important question in picking up a man

verboard. Many officers, having seen boats lowered without

|ccident at speeds as high as eight and ten knots, maintain

that it is perfectly safe to lower at this speed.

A more con

servative view fixes the maximum at something like half this

peed.

It is safe to say that there is far less danger at five

knots than ten, and most practical men would prefer to wait

1 little longer rather than to take the chance of having to deal

with a whole boat's crew in the water.
LOWERING A STERN BOAT.

68. Here as soon as the boat touches the water, the after
fall is let go altogether and the boat allowed to swing at once
parallel to the course of the ship, towing by the forward fall,
which is then unhooked or, in an emergency, allowed to
unreeve.

Hoisting.

69. To hook on and hoist a boat in a seaway is quite as

difficult as to lower and detach it.

The boat should be hauled

up under the falls by a sea-painter from well forward, the helm

or steering oar being carefully attended. The important point

is to keep her off from the side to prevent being dashed to
pieces. The falls should be manned on deck and the blocks
overhauled down, with on officer on the rail to give the word
for hauling taut. Frapping lines around the falls may be used
as already described for lowering. Oil should be used freely
to calm the sea. If the ship is underway, she should steam

slowly ahead and in this case a long painter should be used

from the stern of the boat, leading aft, as otherwise she will
launch violently forward as soon as she leaves the water. Both
falls should be ready for hooking; then, all being ready on
deck, watch for a smooth time, hook on forward, then aft,
Haul taut! Hoist away!
Running a Line.
70. Coil the greater part of the line in the stern sheets, but
take end enough in the bow to make fast when you reach the

landing. Pull away and let the ship pay out more line until
you are sure of having enough in the boat to reach, then pay
out from the boat. Always have plenty of good seizing stuff
395

BOATS IN A SURF.

for making all secure, and if you are to stand by the line, ha
an axe for cutting if ordered.
71. If laying out with the tide, take less line in the boat th:
otherwise; if against the tide it will save work to take all th
-

line in the boat, pull up and make fast, then bring the era
back to the ship. With a long line to be laid out in a stror,
current, it will usually be necessary to have several boats, oil
to run away with the end, the others to underrun at intervals
floating the line and pulling up stream with the bight.
72. If the line is to be secured to a post, put a bowline #
the end before starting, and throw this over the post. Ben:
on a heaving line and let the bow oarsman throw this if hand
are standing by to take it, or jump ashore with it himself
necessary.

HANDLING BOATS IN A SURF.

73. I. Preliminary.
The handling of boats in a surf is an art in itself, calling fa
special knowledge and skill such as can be acquired only by
practical experience. When undertaken by those who have no.
had this experience, the danger involved can hardly be ove:
estimated.

74. Of the various methods of landing on a flat beach which

are described in the Rules of the National Life-boat Associatic

quoted below, the safest is probably that of backing in, keepin:

the bow towards the surf, pulling out to meet each breake,
then backing in as fast and as far as possible on its back.
75. A surf never looks as dangerous when seen from set

ward as it really is; and a boat having to land through it

should, if there is a possibility of help from the shore, awa!
such help before attempting to go in. As, however, it is often
necessary to attempt a landing where no expert assistance

available, the following rules have been drawn up and publishei

by the Royal National Life-boat Institution of Great Britai:

76. II. Rules Published by the Royal National Life-boat It.

stitution, on the Management of Open Rowing Boats in
Surf, Beaching them, etc.
In Rowing to Seaward.

77. As a general rule, speed must be given to a boat rowin,

against a heavy surf.

BOATS IN A SURF.

Indeed, under some circumstances, her safety will depend on

the utmost possible speed being attained on meeting a sea.

78. For, if the sea be really heavy, and the wind blowing a
ard on-shore gale, it can only be by the utmost exertions of

he crew that any headway can be made. The great danger

|hen is, that an approaching heavy sea may carry the boat away
bn its front, and turn it broadside on, or up-end it, either

effect being immediately fatal. A boat's only chance in such

1 case is to obtain such way as shall enable her to pass end-on
through the crest of the sea, and leave it as soon as possible
Behind her. Of course if there be a rather heavy surf, but no
wind, or the wind off shore, and opposed to the surf, as is

5ften the case, a boat might be propelled so rapidly through

t that her bow would fall more suddenly and heavily after
pping the sea than if her way had been checked; and it may
erefore only be when the sea is of such magnitude, and the
oat of such a character, that there may be a chance of the

rmer carrying her back before it, that full speed should be
iven to her.

79. It may also happen that, by careful management under

iuch circumstances, a boat may be made to avoid the sea, so
hat each wave may break ahead of her, which may be the only
:hance of safety in a small boat; but if the shore be flat, and

he broken water extend to a great distance from it, this will

5ften be impossible.

80. The following general rules for rowing to seaward may

herefore be relied on:

I. If sufficient command can be kept over a boat by the skill

f those on board her, avoid or dodge" the sea if possible,
so as not to meet it at the moment of its breaking or curling
over.

2. Against a head gale and heavy surf, get all possible speed
511 a boat on the approach of every sea which cannot be
Ivoided.

If more speed can be given to a boat than is sufficient to

her being carried back by a surf, her way may be

reve'

hecked on its approach, which will give her an easier passage

lver it.
-

397

BOATS IN A SURF.

On Running before a Broken Sea, or Surf, to the Shore.

81. The one great danger when running before a brok
sea, is that of broaching to. To that peculiar effect of the s
so frequently destructive of human life, the utmost attenti
must be directed.

82. The cause of a boat's broaching-to, when running befo

a broken sea or surf, is that her own motion being in the sar
direction as that of the sea, whether it be given by the for
of oars or sails, or by the force of the sea itself, she oppos
no resistance to it, but is carried before it. Thus if a bo
be running with her bow to the shore, and her stern to the se
the effect of a surf or roller, on its overtaking her, is to thro
up the stern, and as a consequence depress the bow; if she the
has sufficient inertia (which will be proportional to weight) t
allow the sea to pass her, she will in succession pass throug

the descending, the horizontal, and the ascending positions, a

the crest of the wave passes successively her stern, her midship.
and her bow in the reverse order in which the same position

occur to a boat propelled to seaward against a surf.

This ma.

be defined as the safe mode of running before a broken sea.

83. But if a boat, on being overtaken by a heavy surf, ha
not sufficient inertia to allow it to pass her, the first of th
three positions above enumerated alone occursher stern i;
raised high in the air and the wave carries the boat before i
on its front or unsafe side, sometimes with frightful velocity

the bow all the time being deeply immersed in the hollow 0
the sea, where the water being stationary or comparatively so

offers a resistance, whilst the crest of the sea, having th:

actual motion which causes it to break, forces onward thi
stern, or rear end of the boat.
|

84. A boat will, in this position, sometimes aided by

care:

oar-steerage, run a considerable distance until the wave h

broken and expended itself.

But it will often happen, that

the bow be low, it will be driven under water, when the bud
ancy being lost forward, whilst the sea presses on the ste

the boat will be thrown (as it is termed) end-over-end; or

the bow be high, or if it be protected, as in most life-boa
by a bow air chamber, so that it does not become submerg

the resistance forward, acting on one bow, will slightly t

the boat's head, and the force of the surf"being transferred

398

BOATS IN A SURF.

the opposite quarter, she will in a moment be turned round

broadside to the sea and be thrown by it on her beam-ends,

or altogether capsized. It is in this manner that most boats
are upset in a surf, especially on flat coasts, and in this way

many lives are annually lost amongst merchant seamen when

attempting to land, after being compelled to desert their
vessels.

85. Hence it follows that the management of a boat, when

landing through a heavy surf, must, as far as possible, be
assimilated to that when proceeding to seaward against one,
at least so far as to stop her progress shoreward at the

moment of being overtaken by a heavy sea, and thus enabling

it to pass her. There are different ways of effecting this object:
I. By turning a boat's head to the sea before entering the
broken water, and then backing in stern foremost, pulling a
few strokes ahead to meet each heavy sea, and then again

backing astern. If a sea be really heavy, and a boat small, this

plan will generally be the safest, as a boat can be kept more
under command when the full force of the oars can be used

against a heavy surf than by backing them only.

2. If rowing to shore with the stern to seaward, by backing
all the oars on the approach of a heavy sea, and rowing ahead
again as soon as it has passed to the bow of the boat, thus
rowing in on the back of the wave; or, as is practiced in some
life-boats, placing the after-oarsmen with their faces forward,
and making them row back at each sea, or when broaching to.
3. If rowed in bow foremost, by towing astern a pig of ballast
or large stone, or a large basket, or canvas bag termed a

drogue or drag, made for the purpose, the object of each

being to hold the boat's stern back, and to prevent her being
turned broadside to the sea or broaching to.
86. Drogues are in common use by the boatmen on the
Norfolk coast; they are conical-shaped bags of about the same
form and proportionate length and breadth as a candle ex
tinguisher, about two feet wide at the mouth and four and a
half feet long. They are towed with the mouth foremost by
a stout rope, a small line, termed a tripping line, being fast
to the apex or pointed end. When towed with the mouth
foremost, they fill with water, and offer a considerable resist

ance, thereby holding back the stern; by letting go the stouter

399

BOATS IN A SURF.

rope and retaining the smaller line, their position is reversed,

when they collapse and can be readily hauled into the boat.
87. Drogues are chiefly used in sailing boats, when they both
serve to check a boat's way and to keep her end-on to the sea.

They are, however, a great source of safety in rowing-boats,

and the rowing life-boats of the National Life-boat Institution
are now all provided with them.
88. A boat's sail bent to a yard, and towed astern loosed, the

yard being attached to a line capable of being veered, hauled

or let go, will act in some measure as a drogue, and will tend
much to break the force of the sea immediately astern of the
boat.

89. Heavy weights should be kept out of the extreme ends of

a boat; but wheta rowing before a heavy sea the best trim is
deepest by the stern, which prevents the stern being readily
thrown to one side by the sea.

90. A boat should be steered by an oar over the stern, or on

one quarter when running before a sea, as the rudder will then
at times be of no use. If the rudder be shipped, it should be
kept amidships on a sea breaking over the stern.

91. The following general rules may therefore be depended

on when running before, or attempting to land, through a
heavy surf or broken water.
I. As far as possible avoid each sea by placing the boat
where the sea will break ahead or astern of her.

2. If the sea be very heavy, or if the boat be very small,

and especially if she have a square stern, bring her bow round
to seaward and back her in, rowing ahead against each heavy
surf that cannot be avoided sufficiently to allow it to pass the
boat.

3. If it be considered safe to proceed to the shore bow

foremost, back the oars against each sea on its approach, so

as to stop the boat's way through the water as far as possible,

and if there is a drogue, or any other instrument in the boat
that may be used as one, tow it astern to aid in keeping the
boat end-on to the sea, which is the chief object in view.
4. Bring the principal weights in the boat towards the end
that is to seaward, but not to the extreme end.

5. If a boat, worked by both sails and oars, be running under

sail for the land through a heavy sea, her crew should, under
400

BoATS IN A SURF.

all circumstances, unless the beach be quite steep, take down

her masts and sails before entering the broken water, and take
her to land under oars alone, as above described.

92. If she has sails only, her sails should be much reduced,
a half-lowered foresail or other small head sail being sufficient.
BEACHING OR LANDING THROUGH SURF.

93. The running before a surf or broken sea, and the beach
ing or landing of a boat, are two distinct operations; the
management of boats, as above recommended, has exclusive
reference to running before a surf where the shore is so flat
that the broken water extends to some distance from the beach.

Thus on a very steep beach, the first heavy fall or broken

water will be on the beach itself, whilst on some very flat shores
there will be broken water as far as the eye can reach, some
times extending to even four or five miles from the land. The
outermost line of broken water, on a flat shore, where the
waves break in three or four fathoms water, is the heaviest,
and therefore the most dangerous, and when it has been passed

through in safety, the danger lessens as the water shoals, until,

on nearing the land, its force is spent and its power harmless.
As the character of the sea is quite different on steep and flat
shores, so is the customary management of boats on landing
different in the two situations. On the flat shore, whether the
boat be run or backed in, she is kept straight before or end-on

to the sea until she is fairly aground, when each surf takes her
further in as it overtakes her, aided by the crew, who will then
generally jump out to lighten her, and drag her in by her sides.
As above stated, sail will, in this case, have been previously
taken in if set, and the boat will have been rowed or backed
in by oars alone.

94. On the other hand, on the steep beach, it is the general

practice, in a boat of any size, to retain speed right on to the
beach, and in the act of landing, whether under oars or sail, to
turn the boat's bow half round towards the direction from

which the surf is running, so that she may be thrown on her

broadside up the beach, where abundance of help is usually at

hand to haul her as quickly as possible out of the reach of the
sea. In such situations, we believe, it is nowhere the practice
to back a boat stern foremost under oars, but to row in under
full speed as above described.
4OI

PART VI

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND

WITHOUT ARMS

CONTENTS
(Pages numbered at bottom.)
PAGE

I. Bayonet Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4O4

2. Sword Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4I2

3. Physical Drill with Arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

423

4. Physical Drill without Arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430

NOTE.In the Bayonet Exercise and Sword Exercise the

pages at the top, all paragraphs, and plates are numbered as in

the Hand Book of Infantry

and Artillery.

403

BAYONET EXERCISE.*
To Take Intervals.

189. Being in line, at a halt: 1. To the right (or left) take in.
tervals, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
(1.) At the first command, the rear rank steps back four paces,
at the second command, both ranks face to the right, and the
men on the right step off, followed by the others in succession
at the proper interval; at the fourth command, given when the
last men have their intervals, the men halt and face to the front.

(2.) The normal interval and distance are four paces.

(3.) To assemble: I. To the right (or left) assemble, 2. MARCH
The front-rank man on the right stands fast; the other men
close to their proper places and face to the front.
T0 Take Distance.

190. Being in line at a halt, and having counted fours: 1.

To the front, take distance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
(I.) At the second command, number one of each four of the
front rank moves straight to the front; number two moves off as
soon as number one has advanced four paces; numbers three and
four move off in succession in like manner.

The rear rank exe

cutes the same movement, number one moving off as soon as

number four, front rank, has his distance. The fourth com

mand is given when the last man has his distance.

(2.) To assemble: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.
Number one of the front rank stands fast; the other men move
forward and close to their proper places.
(3.) To assemble to the rear: I. To the rear assemble, 2.

MARCH.
At the first command, number four, rear rank, stands fast; the
other numbers face about, and, at the second command, close
to their proper places and face to the front.
The Guard.

191. Intervals or distances having been taken, and the squad

being at the order, bayonets fixed, the instructor commands:
Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.

I.

*NQTE-Prepared by Professor A. J. Corbesier, Sword Master at U. S.

Naval Academy.
4O4

BAYoNET ExERCISE.

53

At the first command, pieces are brought

to the port; at the second command, half
face to the right, carry back and place the
right foot about twice its
length to the rear, the hol
low of the right foot in
rear of the left heel, the
feet at a little less than a

right angle, the right toe

pointing to the right, both knees slightly

bent, body erect on the hips, the weight
thrown a little more on the right leg than
on the left; at the same time throw the point
of the bayonet to the front, at the height of
=>

Plate 3:. Art. 101,

the chin, barrel to the left, the small of the

Stock directly in front of the center of the

body below the belt, the left hand below the

sight with the thumb along the barrel, both

arms free from the body, without constraint.
192. Being at guard: 1. Order, 2. ARMs.
Resume the order as from charge bayonet.
The guard.

The Steps.
193. ADVANCE: Move the left foot quickly forward eight
inches; follow with the right foot the same distance.

194. RETIRE:

Move the right foot quickly to the rear eight

inches; follow with the left foot the same distance.

195. I. Step right, 2. STEP:

Move the right foot quickly to

the right eight inches; follow with the left foot to its relative
position in front.

196. I. Step left, 2. STEP:

Move the left foot quickly to the

left eight inches; follow with the right foot to its relative posi
tion in rear.

197. I. Front, 2. DouBLE: Advance the right foot quickly

eight inches in front of the left, keeping the right toe to the
right; then advance the left foot to its relative position in front.

198. I. Rear, 2. DouBLE:

Carry the left foot uuickly eight

inches to the rear of the right; then place the right foot in its
relative position in rear.
The Facings.

199. I. Face right (or left), 2. FACE: At the first command,

bring the piece quickly to the port; at the second command, face

405

BAYONET ExERCISE.

54

to the right, turning on the ball of the left foot, at the same time

carry the right foot quickly to its relative position in rear and
resume the guard.
200. I. Right (or Left) about, 2. FACE:
facing about on the ball of the left foot.

Similarly executed,

201. The foregoing movements are first

executed without arms, hands on the hips,
fingers to the front, thumbs to the rear,
elbows pressed back.

Plate 38. Arts, 199-201.

Facings. First position.

Plate 39.

Art. 204.

Right low parry.

Plate 40.

Art. 205.

Left low parry.

The Parries.

202. In the preliminary drills, after the parries and thrusts,

the position of guard is resumed, by the command: GUARD,

after each movement.

203. I. Right (or Left), 2. PARRY: Move the point on the bay
onet quickly about six inches to the right.
204. I. Right low, 2. PARRY: Raise the butt outside the right
forearm, the right hand at the height of the breast; at the same
time describe a semi-circle from left to right with the point of

the bayonet until it is at the height of, and a little to the right
of, the right knee; barrel to the left.
406

BAYONET ExERCISE.

55

205. I. Left low, 2.

PARRY:

Lower

the

point of the bayonet,

describing a semi
circle, and carry it to the left at the
height of, and a little to the left of, the

left knee; barrel to the left, the right

hand opposite the left breast.

206. I. High, 2. PARRY:

Raise the

piece quickly with both hands, the right

hand three inches in front of, and four
inches above, the head; the barrel down
and supported between the thumb and
forefinger of the left hand above the
sight, the piece directed to the front
with the point of the bayonet opposite
the left shoulder; at the same time bend
both knees slightly more than in the
High parry. position of guard.
-

Plate 41. Art. 206.

2O7. I. High right (or left), 2. PARRY:

Executed in the same

manner as the high parry, except that the left shoulder is ad

vanced, and the point of
=a_=~
the bayonet directed to the
right.
-

208. (I.) In the different parries, the piece

should be so held as to cover the point at
tacked.

(2.) When the men have become proficient,

they will be instructed to resume the guard
without command.
The Thrusts.

209. (I.) 1. Straight, 2. THRUST: Carry the

=\
Plate. 12 Art.207.
High left parry

upper part of the body forward, advance the .

right shoulder, straighten the right leg, and
bend the left knee; at the same time thrust the
piece directly to the front to the full length
of the right arm, slipping it through the left

hand, barrel up, the bayonet and the butt at

height of the chin.

(2.) The straight thrust should be executed frequently in order

4O7

BAYONET ExERCISE.

56

to strengthen the wrist. It may be executed directly from the

guard, or from the right and left parries, and the guard should

be resumed promptly to keep control of

the piece. In thrusting, the piece must
be held so as to cover the point most
exposed to the enemy's attack.
210. (I.) The thrusts from the different
parries are made with the right leg al
ways straightened, and the body carried
forward as in the straight thrust.
(2). I. Right (or Left), 2. PARRY, 3.
THRUST, 4. GUARD. Execute the straight
thrust.
Plate 43. Art. 209 (1.)
Straight thrust.

(3.) I. Right low, 2. PARRY, 3. THRUST,

4. GUARD. Thrust to the full extent of

the left arm, barrel to the left, bayonet at the height of the waist,
right hand at the height of the breast, keeping the left hand fast,
stock outside the right forearm.

(4.) I. Left low, 2 PARRY, 3. THRUST,

4. GUARD. Thrust to the full extent of
the left arm, barrel to the left, bayonet
at the height of the waist, right hand at
the height of the breast, keeping the
left hand fast, stock outside the right
forearm.

Piate 44. Art. 210 (3.)

Right low thrust.

(5.) I. High (or High right, or High

left), 2. PARRY, 3. THRUST, 4. GUARD.
Thrust in the designated direction to

the full extent of the left arm, barrel

408

BAYONET EXERCISE.

57

down, right hand above, and in front of, the head, keeping the
left hand fast.

| (6.) The command for the thrust quickly follows the parry.

211.

Plate 45. Art.211.

In

the

same

manner

thrust may be executed directly

from the position of guard, in the
direction of any parry, by one com
mand: I. High, 2. THRUST, 3.
GUARD; or, I. Right low, 2. THRUST,
3. GUARD, etc.
212. I. Low right, 2. SHORT:
Throw the body backward, straight
en the left leg and bend the right
knee; at the same time draw the
piece back quickly to the full length
of the right arm, lowering the butt
~ about six inches below the right
High thrust.
hip, slipping the left hand up to the

upper band, barrel up, left hand at the height of the hip, right
hand at small of the stock.

213. (I.) 1. Low right,

2. SHORT, 3. THRUST (or
S T R A I G HT THRUST):
Throw the body forward
on the hips, straighten
the right leg, and bend
the left knee; at the
same

time

thrust

the

piece forward quickly to

the full length of the left
arm without moving the
hands, barrel up, both
hands at the height of
the waist.

(2.) Should the adver

sary retreat, the straight
thrust must be used.

Plate 46. Art.212.

Low right short.

-*

BAYONET ExERCISE.

58

(3.) Being at low right short: to parry, move the point of the
bayonet as in right or left parry, without moving the hands.
To Use the Butt.
214. BUTT TO FRONT: Raise the

back,
the

barrel
hollow

in
of

right shoulder,
strike quickly the butt to the front,
straighten the right leg, barrel rest
ing on the shoulder.
215. BUTT TO RIGHT (or LEFT):
Face right (or left) and proceed as
in butt to front. In resuming the
guard, face left (or right).
216. (I.) BUTT TO REAR: Turn
to the right on both heels, keeping
the feet nearly at a right angle,

--

..., Plate 47, Art. 213.

The low right short, thrust.

toe to the rear, at the same time raise the piece over the left shoul
der, barrel down and horizontal, back of right hand against left
side of neck,

left

hand

near

lower band, left leg straight;

strike quickly the butt to the
rear.

(2.) In resuming the guard,

turn to the left on both heels,
and bring the left toe to the
front.

To Change Guard.
217. (I.) 1. Change guard, 2.
REAR: Turn to the right on
both heels, raising the toes, and
face quickly to the rear; at the
same time raise the point of the
bayonet in a semi-circle, and

throw the piece to the rear, re

leasing it for an instant with
both hands and then grasp it
again with the hands interchanged, the right hand below the
sight and the left at the small of the stock, the barrel to the
right in the position of guard.
Plate 4S.

Art.214.

Butt to front.

Plate 49.

Art. 216.

Plate 50. Art. 217. Change guard rear.

Butt to rear.

(2.) The parries and thrusts, facings, steps, and other move

ments may then be executed according to the foregoing principles.

(3.) To resume the original front, the commands are the same,
and the movement is executed in a similar manner.
Combinations.

218. (I.) When the recruits are thoroughly familiar with the dif
ferent steps, parries, and thrusts, the instructor combines several of
them by giving the commands in quick succession, increasing the
rapidity and number of movements in combination as the men
acquire skill: ADVANCE, HIGH PARRY. THRUST; or FRONT DOUBLE,
RIGHT PARRY, THRUST; FACE LEFT, HIGH PARRY, THRUST, etc.

(2.) The guard is resumed without command.

219. (L.) Every movement to the front should be followed by

a thrust; every movement to the rear by a parry.
(2.) The cautionary command, attack, may be used preceding
a combination of movements.

(3.) To repeat a combination, the numerals one, two, three, etc.,

may be used instead of repeating the commands.

(4.) It is intended merely to prescribe the manner of exe

cuting the movements laid down, but not to restrict the number
of movements, leaving to the discretion of C. C. and the inge
nuity of instructors the selection of such other exercises as
accord with the object of the drill.
(5.) As soon as the movements are executed accurately, the

commands are given rapidly, expertness in the bayonet exercise

depending mostly on quickness of motion
i

4II

SWORD EXERCISE."
General Remarks.

1092. I. In this exercise all attacks are made by thrusting

with the point of the sword, instead of attempting to cut with
the edge. The attack with the point is more deadly, and there
is less exposure to counter attack than there is in making the
slashing blows that alone render the edge effective.
2. For instruction, the men form in one or two ranks facing
to the front, swords at the order; intervals and distances are

taken as in the bayonet exercise; swords are brought to the

carry at the preparatory command for marching, and are brough:
to the order on halting.
3. In the exercise, the sword is held in the right hand, thumb
along the back of the gripe and almost touching the guard, thi
fingers united underneath, holding the hilt rather loosely.
4. Movements that may be executed in the same general mar:
ner toward either flank, are explained as toward but one flan',
it being necessary to substitute the word left for right, or the
reverse, to have the commands and explanation for the corri
sponding movement toward the other flank.
THE MOULINETS.

I. Sword exercise, 2. MoULINET.

1093. At the first command, raise the sword to the height of

the right shoulder, edge to the right, back of the hand up, art
extended to the front; at the same time make a half face to the
left, the right toe square to the front, feet at right angles, hees
together, and carry the left hand to the small of the back, bod
erect, eyes to the front. At the second command, drop th
point to the left and describe a full circle without bending th
arm, the sword grazing the left shoulder, opening the fingers t

give play to the hilt, and resume the original position; the
reverse the hand, finger nails up, edge to the left, and exe .
*NOTE.-This Sword Exercise was originally prepared by Prof. A. .

''', #d Master at the Naval

Academy, assisted by Lieut. W. 1

412

306

SworD ExERCISE.

cute a moulinet to the right of the body in a similar manner,

continuing the moulinets alternately. At the command: 1.
Order, 2. SWORDS, resume the order.

Plate 149. Art. 1093. The moulinet; first position.

THE GUARDS.

I. Sword exercise, 2. GUARD.

1094. The first command is executed as in the moulinets.

he

At

second command, bend the forearm and bring the hand to

Plate 150. Art. 1094.

Right guard.

le height of the right nipple and in front of the right shoulder,

e elbow free from the body and slightly outside the hip, the

bint of the sword at the height of the chin, edge to the right;
the same time advance the right foot twice its length, bend
|

4I3

SworD ExERCISE.

307

both knees slightly, body erect, the weight thrown a little more

on the left leg than on the right, head erect, eyes to the front.
This is the position of right guard.

In the left guard, the sword

is held edge to the left, finger nails up, the hand opposite the
center of the body. (See plates 150 and 151.)
1095. To change guard: I. CHANGE GUARD.
Reverse the position of the hand, raising the point and draw

Plate 151. Arts. 1094-1095. Left guard.

ing the hand back slightly, to pass over, and close to, the point
of the opponent's sword.

1096. The attacks and parries, to the left, are made from the
position of right guard only, and vice versa.

1097. The head and thrust attacks and parries are made from
the right guard only.
THE STEPS.

1. ADVANCE (or RETIRE); or, I. Step right (or left), 2. STEP.

1098. Executed as in the bayonet exercise.

In the engage

ment and assault, one opponent advances when the other retires,
and one steps to the right when the other steps to the left.
THE PARRIES.

I. Head, 2. PARRY.

1099. Carry the point of the sword a little to the right, then
drop it to the left and raise the sword quickly a few inches above

the head, edge up, hand in front of the right ear, the point to

the left, the sword inclined slightly downward. (See plate 152)
-

SWORD EXERCISE.

308

I. Right (or Left) cheek (or neck), 2. PARRY.

1100. (I.) Carry the hand about ten inches in front and three
inches to the right of the right cheek, edge to the right, point
up, sword inclined slightly to the front.

Plate 152. Arts. 1099 and 1107. Head attack and parry.
*

(2.) For the neck parry, lower the hand a few inches. (See
lates 155 and 156, art. IIo8.)
I. Right flank, 2. PARRY.

1101. Describe a semi-circle from left to right with the point

if the sword until it is a little to the right of the right knee,
!dge to the right, the hand to the right of the right hip and
ive inches below the right nipple, arm slightly bent. (See
late 158, art. III.O.)
I. Left flank, 2. PARRY; or, I. Thrust, 2. PARRY.
1102. Carry the point of the sword slightly to the right, then
irop the point to the left, the blade in line with the left knee
ind slightly to the front, sword edge to the left, the elbow and

land about the height of the breast. (See plates 157 and 159,
rts. IIo9 and IIIo.)

1103. Attacks at the leg are not parried with the sword, but
by moving the right toe to the rear of the left heel, legs ex
ended; at the same time carry the upper part of the body for
ward and attack the opponent's head or cheek. This move
ment will be executed at the command:

I. Right foot to the rear,

2, Head (or Right, or Left cheek), 3. ATTACK. (See plates I53

and 154.)
4I5

SworD ExERCISE.

309

SINGLE ATTACKS.
1104 (1.) All single attacks are made in two motions, the
first motion being to disengage and extend the arm quickly in

Plate 153. Art. 1103.

Leg attack, left cheek return.

the direction of the attack; the second motion is a lunge ahd:

quickly follows the first.

(2.) The command, attack (or return), is the signal for the
first motion, and the command, lunge, for the second motion.

Plate 154. Art. 1103. Leg attack; head return.

(3.) A feint is made by omitting the second motion, or lunge.

(4) In all attacks, except the thrust, disengage by drawing

416

$10

SworD ExERCISE.

ack slightly and reversing the hand, the point passing over and
lose to the opponent's sword, and then extend the arm quickly.
(5.) In the thrust attack, disengage by dropping the point be
low and to the opposite side of the opponent's sword, and re
verse the hand, if the guard is to the left; if the guard is to the
fight, the hand is not reversed.
1105. (I.) Having executed the first motion of an attack:
LUNGE.

Carry the right foot forward about eighteen inches, grazing

he ground; extend the left leg, body thrown slightly forward,
lead thrown slightly back, left hand remaining at the small of
he back.

(2.) The lunge will be executed in all attacks. In making an at

ack, the right hand is held as best to oppose a counter attack.
1106. To resume the guard: GUARD.
Bend the left knee, carry the right foot quickly to its original
losition, throwing the weight of the body on the left leg, and
esume the guard.

1107. Being at the right guard: 1. Head, 2. ATTACK.

At the second command, throw the sword point slightly to
he rear to clear the point of the adversary's sword and extend
he arm quickly, sword edge down, and attack the forehead of

he adversary, hand at the height of the shoulder. (See plate 152,

irt. 1099.)

Plate 155. Arts. 1100 and 1108. Right cheek attack and parry.
}

1108. Being at the left or right guard: I. Right (or Left)

theek (or neck), 2. ATTACK.
417

SworD ExERCISE.

311

At the second command, disengage and extend the arm

quickly, sword at the height of the cheek, or neck, edge to the

Plate 156. Arts. 1100 and 1108. Left cheek attack and parry.

right, and point directly for the middle of the face, or neck
(See plates 155 and 156.)

Plate 157.

*>

Arts. 1102 and 1109. Thrust attack and parry.

1109. Being at right guard: 1. Thrust, 2. ATTACK.

At the second command, disengage and extend the arm
quickly, point of the sword at the height of the breast, edge to

the right, hand opposite the left breast. (See plate 157.)
418

~~~~~

_-

SWORD ExERCISE.

312

1110. Being at the left or right guard:

I. Right (or Left)

flank, 2. ATTACK.

Plate 158. Arts. 1101 and 1110. Right flank attack and parry.

At the second command, disengage and extend the arm

quickly, lower the point to the height of the belt, edge to the

right, and point at the flank. (See plates 158 and 159.)

G-#2-#,

"S.--....

"

-**

Plate 159. Arts. 1102 and 1110. Left flank attack and parry.

1111. After all attacks for the face, neck, or body, press with
the thumb on the hilt and then withdraw the sword in an oblique
direction to obtain a clear cut.
419

31:

SWORD ExERCISE.

1112. The parries and attacks are first taught separately and
afterwards in combination, thus:
I. Head, 2. PARRY (or ATTACK), 3. GUARD, etc.
I. Head, 2. ATTACK, 3. LUNGE, 4. GUARD, etc.
I. Left cheek, 2. ATTACK, 3. LUNGE, 4. Right flank, 5. PARRY.
6. GUARD, etc.
RETURNS.

1113. The attacks from the positions of the parries are called
returns, and are made as follows: After the head parry: I.
Head (or, Left cheek, neck, or flank), 2. RETURN.
At the second command, describe a quarter-circle with the

point above the head from left to right by way of the rear with
out disturbing the position of the hand; when the sword points

directly to the rear reverse the hand, bringing the edge to the
left, extend the arm quickly and finish the movement as for the
head, cheek, neck, or left flank attack.

1114. After the cheek or neck parry:

I. Right (or Left) cheek,

(neck or flank), 2. RETURN.

Throw the point slightly to the rear to clear the point of the

opponent's sword, then quickly turn the back of the hand up

(or down) and attack in the designated direction.

1115. After the right flank parry: 1. Thrust, 2. RETURN.

(I.) Raise the hand, nails down, extend the arm quickly and
thrust for the face or the upper part of the body.
(2.) To parry this return, raise the sword, point to the left,
and take the head parry.

1116. After the left flank parry or thrust parry:

1. Head, 2.

RETURN.

At the second command, execute a left moulinet and attack

the forehead of the adversary, sword edge down, hand at the
height of the shoulder.
1117. The parries, attacks, and returns will next be taught in
combination, thus:
I. Left flank, 2. PARRY, 3. Head, 4. RETURN, 5. LUNGE, 6, GUARD.
I. Thrust, 2. ATTACK, 3. LUNGE, 4. Head, 5. PARRY, 6. GUARD
1. Head, 2. ATTACK, 3. LUNGE, 4. Left cheek, 5. PARRY, 6
Right flank, 7. RETURN, 8. LUNGE, 9, GUARD, etc
COMPOUND ATTACKS AND RETURNS.

1118. (1.) A compound attack, or return, consists of a feint

followed by an attack or return, and will be taught after profi
ciency is attained in single attacks. For example:
42O

314

Sword ExERCISE.

(2.) Being at right guard: I. Left and right cheek, 2. ATTACK,

3. LUNGE, 4. GUARD.
At the second command, feint for the left cheek, at which the
opponent begins to parry left cheek; then reverse the hand
quickly and attack the right cheek.
(3.) Being at head parry: I. Left and right cheek, 2. RETURN,

3. LUNGE, 4. GUARD.
At the second command, feint for the left cheek, at which the

opponent begins to parry left cheek; then reverse the hand

quickly and attack the right cheek.
THE ENGAGEMENT.

1119. (I.) After careful instruction in the foregoing princi

ples and movements, the engagement will be taught. The men

will form in two ranks, take intervals, and the front rank will
then be faced about.

(2.) At the command, sword exercise, the front-rank men, in

executing the movement, will place themselves in front of their
rear-rank men, and at such a distance that the swords will over
lap about six inches when on guard.

(3.) In the engagement, the opponents' swords will be held

edge to edge when on guard.

(4.) The rank to attack will be designated in the command;

the rank attacked will execute the parry and return.
(5.) The parry will always be taken at a feint, or at the first
motion of an attack.

Examples in Single Attacks.

1120. (I.) 1. Front (or Rear) rank, 2. Step right, 3. STEP.
At the third command, the designated rank executes Step
right, and the other rank Step left.
(2.) I. Front (or Rear) rank, 2. Head, 3. ATTACK, 4. LUNGE,
5. GUARD.

At the third command, the designated rank will attack, and

the other rank will parry.

Examples in Single Attacks and Single Returns.

1121. I. Front (or Rear) rank, 2. Head, 3. ATTACK, 4. LUNGE,
5. Left cheek (or neck), 6. RETURN, 7. LUNGE, 8. GUARD.
At the third command, the designated rank will attack, and
the other rank will parry. At the sixth command, the rank at
tacked will return, and the opposing rank will parry.
42I

SWORD ExERCISE.

315

Examples in Compound Attacks and Single Returns.

1122. 1. Front (or Rear) rank, 2. Left and right cheek, 3. AT
TACK, 4. LUNGE, 5. Left cheek, 6. RETURN, 7. LUNGE, 8. GUARD.
At the third command, the designated rank will feint and at
tack, and the other rank will parry left and right cheek. At the
sixth command, the rank attacked will return, and the opposing
rank will parry.

Examples in Single Attacks and Compound Returns.

1123. I. Front (or Rear) rank, 2. Head, 3. ATTACK, 4. LUNGE,
5. Left and right cheek, 6. RETURN, 7. LUNGE, 8. GUARD.

Examples in Compound Attacks and Compound Returns.

1124. I. Front (or Rear) rank, 2. Right and left cheek, 3. AT
TACK, 4. LUNGE, 5. Right and left cheek, 6. RETURN, 7. LUNGE,
8. GUARD.

1125. To repeat a movement, the commands of execution

alone need be repeated; for example, to repeat the last move
ment: I, ATTACK, 2. LUNGE, 3. RETURN, 4. LUNGE, 5. GUARD.
THE ASSAULT.

1126. After careful instruction in all the principles and move

ments of the engagement, the instructor may permit the men
to engage at will at the command, assault, provided that an out
fit of masks is supplied for this purpose. The men must be cau
tioned to move the hand and sword as little as possible from the
position of guard, in order to keep themselves covered; to watch

the hand of the opponent instead of his eyes, and to attack close
to his sword.

1127. (I.) To discontinue the engagement or assault, the in

structor will command:

I. Order, 2. SworDS, at which the men

will resume the order.

(2.) The men are assembled as in the bayonet exercise.

To Dismiss.

1128. Having assembled: 1. Carry, 2. Swords, 3. DISMIssED.

422

--~~~~~~~~~...~" -

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

PHYSICAL DRILL*
UNDER ARMS

1. All movements in this section are 4-counts, and, except

Coming to ready, are performed two (or four) times.

Fig.1.
Coming to Ready,

Coming to Ready,

First Position.
Art, 1.

Second Position.
Art. 1.
Plate 1.

The exercises may be executed by command, or to music, or

silently following the motions of a leader, and may be dis

continued by the command HALT, when the Order will be
resumed.

1. Coming to Ready.

Take intervals or distance as for bayonet exercise. Standing

at order

* "rom the Manual of Physical Drill by Chaplain W. O. Holway, U.S. N.

423

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

I. Raise the piece with the right hand, grasp it with the left
at the height of the right shoulder, knuckles towards the body.
The right hand will grasp the small of the stock, forefinger
under the guard.

2. Let the piece drop in front of the body to a horizontal,

slings down, keeping body erect.

3. Raise the piece horizontally to the height of the shoulders,

slings up, at the same time moving the right foot to the right
about twelve inches. Keep the chest out, and the shoulders
well back. This position is Ready, and is the starting point
of all the movements under arms.

Command: Come to Ready-I, 2, 3.

Fig. 1.
Plate 9.
Fig. 2.
Down and Forward, End of First
Down and Forward, End of Third
Count.

Art. 2.

Count.

Art. 2.

2. Down and Forward.

2. 1. From Ready, lower the piece horizontally to the insteps,

keeping arms and knees (if possible) straight.
2. Back to Ready, chest out, elbows back.
3. Push piece horizontally forward.
4. Back to Ready.
Command: Down and Forward1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.

SPECIAL AcTION.The muscles of the hips, back and arms.

424

-- =m'

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

3. Forward and Up.

3. I. From Ready, push out horizontally forward, as in the

last exercise.

2. Back to Ready, chest out, elbows back.

3. Push the piece to high vertical, keeping it horizontal, and
expanding chest.
4. Back to Ready.
Command: Forward and UpI, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the arms, and of side walls
of the chest.

D
Plate 3.

Plate 4.

Forward and Up," Third Count.

Up and Shoulders, Second Count.

Art. 3.

Art. 4.

4. Up and Shoulders.

4. I. From Ready, push the piece to vertical, as in last

exercise.

2. Lower piece to back of shoulders, head up, elbows well

back.

3. Up again to vertical.
4. Down to Ready.
Command: Up and ShouldersI, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
-425

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the arms, and of the side

and front walls of the chest.

5. Side Pushes.

5. 1. From Ready, push the piece horizontally to right side,

twisting the body, keeping the eyes on the piece, but keeping
the heels firmly on deck.
2. Back to Ready, chest out, elbows back.
3. Push the piece to the left side.
4. Back to Ready.
Command: Side PushesI, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.

SPECIAL ACTION.The rotary muscles of the body and thighs;

the loin muscles.

Plate 5.

Plate 6.

Side Pushes, Third Count. Art. 5.

Diagonal Lunges, First Count.

Art. 6.

6. Diagonal Lunges.

6. 1. From Ready, lunge diagonally to the right, about thirty

six inches, with the right leg, at the same time bringing the
piece up horizontally to 45 degrees. The left foot should be
flat, and the eyes directed to the piece.
2. Back to Ready, chest out, elbows back.
3. Lunge to the left with left leg, as above.
426

- -

PHYSICAL LORILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

4. Back to Ready.
Command: Diagonal LungesI, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the arms, back and legs.
7. Forward Lunges.

7. I. From Ready, lunge directly to the front, about thirty

six inches, with right leg, at the same time raising piece hori
zontally to vertical, and direct
ing the eyes to the piece. Keep
left foot flat.

2. Back to Ready.
3. Lunge to the front with
left leg, as above.
4. Back to Ready.
Command: Forward Lunges
I, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
SPECIAL ACTION.The mus

cles of the arms and legs and

the side walls of the chest.

Plate 7.

Plate 8.

Forward Lunges, Third Count. Art. 7.

Front Sweeps. Art. 8.

8. Front Sweeps.

8. I. From Ready, raise the piece horizontally to high vertical,

keeping chest well out, and emphasizing the up-stretch.
2. Lower the piece slowly in front semicircle to insteps, keep
ing the arms straight and emphasizing the out-reach.
3. Raise the piece slowly in front semicircle to vertical.
4. Down to Ready.
Command: Front Sweeps, SlowI, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.

SPECIAL ACTION.All the principal posterior muscles of the

body.
427

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

9. Overhead Twists.
9. 1. From Ready, raise the piece overhead, at the same time
twisting it till the butt points directly forward. Keep the pice
horizontal.

2. Twist the piece to the right until the muzzle points directly
forward. Hold the hips firmly forward, confining the move
ment to the upper part of the body.

Plate 9.
-

Fig.1.
Overhead Twists,*

":"

Fig. 2.
Overhead Twists, Muzzle Forwar
(Side view.) Art. 9.

3. Twist back till the butt points directly forward.

4. Lower the piece to Ready.

1. From Ready raise the piece overhead, at the same time

twisting it till the muzzle points directly forward.
2. Twist the piece to the left until the butt points directly
forward.

3. Twist back until the muzzle points directly forward.

4. Lower the piece to Ready.

428

=-

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

Command: Overhead Twists, Butt Forward1, 2, 3, 4, Muzzle

Forward1, 2, 3, 4.

SPECIAL ACTION.The rotary muscles of the upper part of

the body; also stimulates the venous circulation.
Io. Side Twists.

10. I. From Ready, drop the piece horizontally in front to

position No. 2 in Coming to Ready.
2. Lifting the butt up, carry the piece strongly to the left
side and out, muzzle pointing directly down. Keep the hips
firm.

Fig. 1.
Plate 10.
Fig. 2.
Side Twists, Second Count.
Side Twists, Fourth Count.
Art. 10.

Art. 10.

3. Return the piece to position No. 2 in Coming to Ready.

4. Lifting the muzzle, carry the piece strongly to the right
ide and out, muzzle pointing directly up.
Repeat the exercise.
Command: Side Twists1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the sides, loins and small
f the back.

At the end of Exercise Io, come to Order Arms.

429

Physical DRILLs WITH AND WITHouT ARMs.

PHYSICAL DRILL*
WITHOUT ARMS.
11. The exercises may be executed by command, or to music,

or silently following the motions of a leader, and may be dis

continued by the command HALT, when Position will be resumed.

*4.

ate

11.
Position. Art. 11.

Plate 12.

Plate 13.

Side Sweeps, at

Front Sweeps," at

Wertical. Art. 12.

Vertical. Art.13,

the squad,
or crew, and t take intervals or distance as
in Form
the bayonet
exercise.
-

Position.
-

Heels together, toes turned out.

in. Abdomen in, chest out.

up, chin in.

Hands by the sides, palms

Shoulders back and down.

Head

Command: Position 1

* From Manual of Physical Drill, by Chaplain W. O. Holway, U.S. Navy.

430

-'--

--

- -

-" -

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

Fig.1.
Fingers, First Position. Art. 14

Fig. 4.
Plate 14.
Fig. 3.
Fingers, Fourth Position. Art 14.
*Fingers, Third Position. (Side View.) Art. 14.
431

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

1. Arms, Side Sweeps.

12. I. Slowly inflate the lungs through the nose (keeping th:
mouth shut), at the same time raising the arms in side semi
circles to vertical, and emphasizing the out and up stretch,
At vertical the knuckles should touch, the elbows should be
straight, the lower arms should lightly press the ears. The
lungs should be full.

2. Return arms through side semicircles to sides, slowly ex

haling.
Take seven or eight seconds for each upward and downward
sweep.

Command: Arms, Side Sweeps, SlowI, 2; 1, 2.

SPECIAL ACTION.The hundred and more muscles concerned

in deep respiration, and especially the muscles of the side walls

of the chest.

2. Arms, Front Sweeps.

13. I. Hands at side, back of hands front.

Inflate the lungs

slowly through the nose (keeping the mouth shut), at the same
time raising the arms slowly, through front semicircles, to
vertical. Emphasize the out and up stretch. When at vertica
the thumbs should be interlaced, palms front, elbows straight
and lower arms brushing the ears. The lungs should be full.
2. Return the arms through front semicircles to sides and
past as far as possible, exhaling slowly, but keeping chest out
and chin in.

Take seven or eight seconds for each upward and downward

sweep.

Command: Arms, Front Sweeps, SlowI, 2; 1, 2.

SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles concerned in deep respiration,
and especially the front walls of the chest.
3. Fingers.

14.

I. Hands at sides. Throw the fingers wide apart an

backward energetically. Close them tightly.

ment twice. Emphasize odd counts.

Perform move

2. Raise the arms to side horizontals, elbows straight. Pe.

form movement twice.
432

--------

- -

- *~~~"
-

PHYSICAL DRILLs WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

Fig.1.
Wrists, First Position. Art. 15.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 3,

Wrists, Second Position.

Plate 15.

cists, Third Position. Art. 15.

Art. 15.

Fig. 4.

Wrists, Fourth Position. Art. 15.

433

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

3. Bring the arms to front horizontals, elbows straight.

Per

form movement twice.

4. Raise the arms to vertical, elbows straight.

movement twice.

Perform

Command: Fingers, Open and Shut1, 2; 1, 2.

SidesI, 2;

I, 2. FrontI, 2; 1, 2. Up-I, 2; I, 2.
SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the fingers and forearms.

Fig.1.
Plate 16.
Fig. 2.
Arms, Thrust, End of First Count.
Arms, Thrust, End of Second Count
Art. 16.

Art. 16.

4. Wrists.
15. I. Hands at vertical (where the last exercise left them).
Keep fingers and elbows straight. Bend hands backward as
far as possible. Then forward. Perform movement twice.

2. Let arms fall to front horizontals, elbows straight.

Per

form movement twice.

3. Swing arms to side horizontals, elbows straight.

Perform

mOWement tW1ce.

4. Drop arms to sides, elbows straight.

Perform movement

twice.

Command: Hands, Back and Forward1, 2; 1, 2.

I, 2.

SideI, 2; 1, 2.

Front1, 2;

Down1, 2; 1, 2.

SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the wrists and forearms.

434

---~~~-"
PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.
-

5. Arms, Thrust.
16. I. Hands at the sides. Close hands tightly.

Bring fore

arms strongly up in front to face of shoulders, keeping elbows

stationary at sides.
2. Thrust the fists strongly down past the sides as far as pos

sible, twisting the arms. Throw the chest out, and keep the
head back and chin in.

Command: Arms, Curl and ThrustI, 2; I, 2, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.The principal muscles of the arms; also

those of the chest and back of the neck.

Plate 17.
*Arm Circle, End of
First Count.

Art. 17.

Fig. 1."
Plate 18.
Fig. 2.
Shoulders, End of
Shoulders, End of
First Count.

Art. 18.

Second Count.

Art. 18.

6. Arm Circle.

17. I. Hands at sides, palms back. Sweep the arms up diagon

ally and circle backward to as far past side horizontals as pos
sible, twisting the palms upward and bending the thumbs down.
Throw chest well out, and keep head back and chin in.

Empha

size this count.

2. Drop arms to sides.

Command: Arms, Circle Backward-I, 2; 1, 2, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.The rotary muscles of the arms and shoul

ders.
435

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

7. Shoulders.

18.

I. Raise shoulders a little.

Roll them strongly as far

back and down as possible, keeping elbows straight and acting

as if carrying a heavy weight in each hand.
2. Let shoulders drop forward easily.
Command: Shoulders, Roll Back and DownI, 2; 1, 2, etc.
SPECIAL ACTION.Back muscles of the shoulder, and those
of the back.

Fig. 1.
Neck, End of First
Count.

Plate 19.

Art. 19.

Fig.2.
Neck, End of Second
Count.

8.

Art. 19.

Neck.

19. 1. Drop Head forward. Interlace fingers at the back of

the head, elbows parallel in front. Push the head back, resist
ing the movement by pulling hard with the hands. Emphasize
the count.
2. Pull the head forward.

Command: Hands at Back of Head, SlowI, 2; 1, 2, etc.

-

20.

9. Toes.

I. Rise slowly and as high as possible on toes, body

erect.

2. Back to Position.

436

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

Command: Toes, Rise Slowly1, 2; 1, 2, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the toes, of the bottom of
the feet, of the ankles and calves.
Io. Heels.

21.

I. Rise sharply on heels, keeping the body erect.

Keep

thighs and chest well forward.

2. Back to Position.

Command: Rise on HeelsI, 2; 1, 2, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the front of the lower leg.

Plate 21.
Knee Stoop, First Count.

Plate 20

Rising on Toes. Art.2n.

Art. 23.

11. Feet.

22.

I. With feet together, and keeping knees straight, raise

the toes up, and spread feet apart toward side horizontals,

pivoting on the heels.

Emphasize this count.

2. Back easily to Position.

Command: Feet, Spread Apart1, 2; 1, 2, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.The muscles of the upper foot and back of
hip.
12. Knee Stoop.

23. I. Hands on hips, thumbs back, fingers forward, elbows

bent. Bend knees obliquely, and let the body go down slowly
437

. PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

(rising on toes) till the thighs touch the heels.

Keep shoulders

and head back and chin in.

2. Return slowly to Position.

Command: Knee Stoop, SlowI, 2; 1, 2, etc.
SPECIAL ACTION.The thigh muscles and the joints of the
legs.
13. Knee Lift.

24.

I. Lift right knee, striking chest, if possible.

Plate 23.
Plate 22.
64

Knee
Lift.
At count
theFirst
knee Count.
should
**

touch the chest.

Art. 24.

Thighs,
Jumping at End of
*::::...a
#d
Count. Art. 25.

s:-knces should be slightly

ent.

2. Back to Position.

3. Lift left knee, striking chest, if possible.

4. Back to Position.

Command: Knee Lift1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.Front muscles of the thighs.
14. Thighs; Jumping.
25. 1. Rise on toes.
2. Back to Position.
438

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

3. Jump, separating the feet sideways as far as can be done

without straining the inside of the thighs, at the same time
throwing up arms sideways to nearly vertical.
4. Jump back to Position.
Command: Jump, Feet ApartI, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.
SPECIAL ACTION.The inside muscles of the thighs and the
calves.

NotE.In executing 3 and 4, do not keep knees stiff; avoid

shock by jumping, and by landing, with knees slightly bent to give
spring to the legs.

Plate 24.

Side Stoop, End of

Third Count.

Art. 26.

15. Side Stoop.

26. I. Hands on tops of shoulders, elbows back. Push the
right arm to a vertical, at the same time bending the body to
the left and touching the deck at the side of the left heel with

the left hand.

Keep the right knee stiff, the head up, and the

eyes directed upward to the right hand.

2. Back to Position, tops of shoulders.

439

PHYSICAL DRILLs WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

3. Push the left arm up to vertical, bend to the right, and

touch the deck beside the right heel with the right hand, turn
ing the eyes upward.
4. Back to position, hands on tops of shoulders.

Command: Side Stoop, Slow1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.

SPECIAL ACTION.The side muscles of the body.
16. Stationary Walk (or Run).

27.

Keep the thighs perpendicular and the knees well back

Try to strike the back of the thigh with the heel each time the
foot is raised. The exercise may be done either as a run or
as a walk.

Command: Stationary Walk.

Quick TimeI, 2; 1, 2, etc. (or,

Stationary Run. Double TimeI, 2; 1, 2, etc.).

Halt 1

SPECIAL ACTION.The back muscles of the thighs and the

respiratory muscles.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.

The following exercises, to supplement the foregoing, are

taken from those originally prepared by Prof. A. J. Corbesi, ',
Sword Master, U. S. Naval Academy.
17. Arms Alternately to the Front.

28.

Close the fists.

1. Raise the right fist and thrust briskly forward to the fill
extent of the arm, knuckles to the front; at the same time
raise the left fist to the left breast, elbow close to and well to
the rear of the body.

2. Thrust the left fist briskly forward, and bring the right fist
to the right breast.
Command: Arms Alternately to FrontI, 2; I, 2, etc.
18. Swinging the Arms to the Front and Rear.

29.

I. Raise the arms laterally until horizontal, palms of the

hands up.

2. Swing the arms, extended, horizontally to the front, palms

touching.

3. Swing the arms, extended, well to the rear, inclining them

slightly downward, raising the body on the toes.

Command: Swinging Arms Front and Rear1, 2, 3, 2,

44O

3, etc.

--"

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMs.

19. Chest, Breathing.

30. I. Place the hands on the hips, fingers to the front,
thumbs to the rear, elbows pressed back.

2. Raise the upper part of the body from the hips, inflate the
chest and throw it well forward, the small of the back in, shoul

ders square, head erect without straining the cords of the neck.

3. Gradually lower the upper part of the body on

the hips,

and exhale from the lungs.

Command: Chest-I, 2, 3, 2, 3, 2, 3, 2, 3, etc.
20. Body Forward and Back.
31. I. Place the hands on the hips, fingers to the front,
thumbs to the rear, elbows pressed back.

2. Bend the body forward, raise and press the elbows back,
chest out, head erect, eyes to the front.
3. Place the body erect on the hips.
4. Bend the body back, chest out.
I. Place the body erect on the hips.
Command: Bend Body Forward and BackI, 2, 3, 4; 1, 2, 3, 4,
etc.

21. Arms and Hips; Full Sweep.

32.

I. Raise the arms vertically over the shoulders, nails to

the front, knuckles up, fists closed.

2. Bend the body forward until the knuckles touch the floor,
legs straight, feet square on the floor.
3. Raise quickly the body, the arms being kept vertically over
the shoulders, body erect on the hips.
HALT. Force the arms obliquely back, and gradually let
them fall to the sides.

Command: Arms and Hips; Full Sweep1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 2, 3, etc.

22. Lunging.

33.

I. Half face to the left, feet at right angles, right toe

square to the front.

2. Raise and extend the right arm its full length, hand about
six inches above the shoulder, fist closed, nails up, and at the

same time extend quickly the left leg; carry the right foot for
44I

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.

ward about thirty-six inches, toe to the front, foot grazing the
floor, knee outward and vertically over the right foot, body
erect, head thrown back, left arm extended to the rear and

about three inches from the thigh, fingers extended and joined.
3. Raise the body, bring the right foot back against the left,
heels together, drop both hands by the sides.

This exercise may be practiced with the left foot to the front
by making the half face to the right, and reversing the motions
as described.

Command: Lunging, Half-face Left (or Right)2, 3, 2, 3, etc.

CONTENTS

PART I

ILANDING FORCE AND DRILL REGULATIONS FOR

INFANTRY

From Hand Book Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE

Landing Force, Organization, Equipment and Landing.

School of the Squad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual of Arms and Firings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
School of the Company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Movements by Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
School of Battalion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Posts of Special Details and p. os. in Line and Column. .

Manual of the Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formations for Street Riots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-17
2O-29
30-52

53-69
6268
70-72
70-72
7I
73-75

7683
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-88
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89-103
Plate IIo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I04
Plates III and 112. . . . . . . . . I05-106
Advance and Rear Guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Io7-108
Camping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO9-III
Outposts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II2-II3
Wall Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Order, Squad. . . . .
Front Attack by a Company,
Front Attack by a Battalion,

Manual of Guard Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II4-I3I

Guard Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I32-137

NOTE.In Part I the pages at the top, all plates and para
graphs are numbered as in the Hand Book of Infantry and

Artillery, U. S. Navy. The pages are numbered consecutively

at the bottom and are so referred to in the Table of Contents.
443

CONTENTS
PART II

DRILL REGULATIONS FOR ARTILLERY

Prepared by LIEUT. W. R. SHOEMAKER, U.S.N.

From the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery, U. S. Navy
CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE

General Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I40-I4I

School of the Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I42-154

Sling and Unsling Arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I42
3-in. R. F. G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I46-147
Gatling ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I47
Dismount 3-in. R. F. G... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I52
Dismount Gatling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I53
Service of the Piece in Boats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155-158
To Disembark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157-158

NotE.In Part II the pages at the top and all paragraphs

are numbered as in the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery,
U. S. Navy. The pages are numbered consecutively at the

bottom and are so referred to in the Table of Contents. .

PART III

GUN

AND TORPEDO

DRILLS

From Gun and Torpedo Drills, U. S. Navy

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE

Drill of 3-in., 4-in., 5-in., and 6-in. R. F. Guns, 5 or 6

inen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I60-163

Drill of 5-in., 6-in., 7-in., and 8-in. Q. F. Guns, 7 or 8

Then

. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164-167

Turret Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168-169

Drill of Pair of 8-in. B. L. R. in Turret. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170-175

Ammunition Crews for 8-in. Turrets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

Secondary Battery ................................ . . .

177

444

---"

CoNTENTs
PAGE

Drill of I-pdr. R. F. Guns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drill of 3-pdr and 6-pdr. R. F. Guns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drill of I-pdr. Maxim Automatic Gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions of I-pdr. Maxim Automatic Gun. . . . . . . . . .

178-179
180-183
184-185
186-199

Drill of 6-pdr. Semi-Automatic Gun and Instructions. . 200-204

Drill of Gatling Gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2052O7
Drill of Colt Automatic Gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208-209
Notes on Colt Automatic Gun............. . . . . . . . . . . . 2IO-217
Detail Notes on Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218-229
Detail Notes on Secondary Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230-233
3 and 6-pdr. Driggs-Seabury Semi-Automatic Guns. . . . 234-237
Manual for Double-Action Navy Revolver. . . . . . . . . . . . . 238-240
Notes on Double-Action Navy Revolver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24I-243
Notes on Krag-Jorgensen Rifle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244-247
Torpedoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248-281
NOTE.In Part III the pages at the top, all plates and all
paragraphs are numbered as in Gun and Torpedo Drills, U. S.

Navy. The pages are numbered consecutively at the bottom

and are so referred to in the Table of Contents.

TORPEDOES

From Gun and Torpedo Drills, U. S. Navy

Revised by LIEUT. GEORGE W. WILLIAMS, U.S.N.
CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE,

Organization of Torpedo Division. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torpedo Crew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249
249

Drill for Whitehead. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25O-254

Preparing Whitehead Torpedoes for Firing. . . . . . . . . . . . 255258

General Instructions about Torpedoes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259-260
Torpedo Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261-262
The Whitehead TorpedoGeneral Remarks. . . . . . . . . . . 263-266
| Assembling Tests ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266-268
Miscellaneous Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268-273
Obry Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
To Adjust the Obry Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274276
Repairs to Torpedoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277-279
Care of Launching Tubes and Tube Mounts. . . . . . . . . . .
279

Care of Air Compressors and Accumulators. . . . . . . . . . . .

445

28O

||

CONTENTS
PART IV

GUNNERY INSTRUCTIONS Nos. 1 AND 2 AND FIRING

REGULATIONS FOR SMALL ARMS, 1902

Prepared by LIEUT.-CoMDR. ALBERT P. NIBLACK, U.S.N.

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE
Gunnery Instructions, No. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Gunnery Instructions, No. 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Firing Regulations for Small Arms, U. S. Navy, 1902. . . . . .

Sighting Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317
317

Ist Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

2d Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

3d Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32I
4th Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
II. Position and Aiming Drills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Standing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Kneeling ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Sitting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Lying Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Rear Sight, Model 1901 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34I
III. Gallery Practice ................................. 346
IV. Revolver Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35I
V. Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
VI. General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Long-range Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Suggestions to Riflemen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Instructions for Handling Arms Heated by
Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

VII.

Practice at Disappearing and Moving Targets. . . . .

375

PART V.

ARM AND AWAY BOATS

HANDLING BOATS UNDER OARS AND SAIL AND
IN A SURF

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

PAGE

Arm and awa Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38o

-

Handling a Boat under Oars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

446

384

"E" -

CoNTENTs
PAGE

Caught in a Gale in a Boat................................ 387

Handling Boats under Sail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Reefing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Running before the Wind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Tacking .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39I

Wearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

392

Gybing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Carrying Quarter-Boat Rigged Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
To Lower a Boat at Sea in Bad Weather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Lowering a Stern Boat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Running a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Handling Boats in a Surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rowing to Seaward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Running before a Sea to the Shore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Beaching, or Landing through Surf.......................

4OI

PART VI

PHYSICAL DRILLS WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS

CONTENTS

(Pages numbered at bottom.)

I. Bayonet Exercise .....................................

PAGE

4O4

2. Sword Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 4I2

3. Physical Drill with Arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Physical Drill without Arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

423
430

NoTE.-In the Bayonet Exercise and Sword Exercise the

pages at the top, all paragraphs and plates are numbered as
in the Hand Book of Infantry and Artillery.

447

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

Los Angeles
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.

RECILL), I'
*:::.
&

M10*

20m-7, 67 (H3149s4)